1761-6.2, MicroLogix 1000 with Hand

1761-6.2, MicroLogix 1000 with Hand
Allen-Bradley
MicroLogixt 1000
with Hand-Held
Programmer (HHP)
(Cat. No. 1761-HHP-B30)
User
Manual
Important User
Information
Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this
publication, those responsible for the application and use of this
control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps
have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all
performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws,
regulations, codes and standards.
The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples
shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example.
Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any
particular installation, Allen-Bradley does not assume responsibility
or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use
based upon the examples shown in this publication.
Allen-Bradley publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid-State Control
(available from your local Allen-Bradley office), describes some
important differences between solid-state equipment and
electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration
when applying products such as those described in this publication.
Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in
whole or in part, without written permission of Allen-Bradley
Company, Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations:
!
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices
or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or
death, property damage or economic loss.
Attention statements help you to:
• identify a hazard
• avoid the hazard
• recognize the consequences
Important:
Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.
SLC 500 and MicroLogix are trademarks of Rockwell Automation.
Preface
Preface
Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual. This
preface covers the following topics:
• who should use this manual
• the purpose of this manual
• how to use this manual
• conventions used in this manual
• Allen-Bradley support
Who Should Use this Manual
Use this manual if you are responsible for designing, installing,
programming, or troubleshooting control systems that use Allen-Bradley
micro controllers.
You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity
with relay logic. If you do not, obtain the proper training before using this
product.
Purpose of this Manual
This manual is a reference guide for the MicroLogix 1000 Programmable
Controller with a MicroLogix 1000 Hand-Held Programmer (HHP). It
describes the procedures you use to install, wire, and program your micro
controller. This manual:
• gives you an overview of the micro controller system
• provides a quick start chapter for beginners
• describes how to use the Hand-Held Programmer
• guides you through how to interpret the instruction set
• contains application examples to show the instruction set in use
If you are using programming software with your MicroLogix 1000
Programmable Controller, see page P–4 for related publications.
P–1
Preface
Contents of this Manual
Tab
Installing
Chapter
Contents
Preface
Describes the purpose, background, and scope of this
manual. Also specifies the audience for whom this
manual is intended.
1
Installing Your Controller
Provides controller installation procedures and system
safety considerations.
2
Wiring Your Controller
Provides wiring guidelines and diagrams.
3
Connecting the System
Gives information on wiring your controller system for the
DF1 protocol or DH-485 network.
4
Using Your Hand-Held
Programmer
Describes how to power-up and use your MicroLogix 1000
Hand-Held Programmer (HHP). Also explains how to
install the HHPs memory module.
5
Quick Start for New Users
Provides step-by-step instructions on how to enter a
program, edit it, and then monitor it.
6
Programming Overview
Provides an overview of principles of machine control, a
section on file organization and addressing, and a
program development model.
7
Using Analog
Provides information on I/O image file format, I/O
configuration, input filter and update times and conversion
of analog data.
8
Using Basic Instructions
Describes how to use the instructions for relay
replacement functions, counting, and timing.
9
Using Comparison
Instructions
Describes how to use the instructions to compare values
of data in your logic program.
10
Using Math Instructions
Describes how to use the instructions that perform basic
math functions.
11
Using Data Handling
Instructions
Describes how to perform data handling instructions,
including move and logical instructions and FIFO and
LIFO instructions.
12
Using Program Flow
Control Instructions
Describes the instructions that affect program flow and
execution.
13
Using Application Specific
Instructions
Describes the bit shift, sequencer and STI related
instructions.
14
Using High-Speed
Counter Instructions
Describes the four modes of the high-speed counter
instruction and its related instructions.
15
Using Communication
Protocols
Provides a general overview of the types of
communication, and explains how to establish network
communication using the message instruction.
Programming
P–2
Title
Preface
Tab
Chapter
Title
Contents
16
Instruction List
Programming
Provides examples to teach you Instruction List
programming and describes programming considerations.
17
Entering and Editing Your
Program
Describes the various editing functions you can use with
your program, including search, overwrite, and delete.
18
After You’ve Entered Your
Program
Describes how to configure, run, and monitor your
program.
19
Common Procedures
Describes how to perform additional procedures using the
HHP menu.
20
Troubleshooting Your
System
Explains how to interpret and correct problems with your
micro controller system.
Appendix A
Hardware Reference
Provides physical, electrical, environmental, and
functional specifications.
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Explains the system status file, lists the HHP function
codes, and provides instruction execution times.
Appendix C
Valid Addressing Modes
and File Types for
Instruction Parameters
Provides a listing of the instructions along with their
parameters and valid file types.
Appendix D
Understanding the
Communication Protocols
Contains descriptions of the DF1 protocol and DH-485
network.
Reference
Appendix E
Application Programs
Provides advanced application examples for the
high-speed counter, sequencer, and bit shift instructions.
Reference
Appendix F
Optional Analog Input
Software Calibration
Explains how to calibrate your controller using software
offsets.
Glossary
Contains definitions for terms and abbreviations that are
specific to this product.
Pr ra i
Programming
Troubleshooting
Reference
For More Information
As part of our effort to preserve, protect, and improve our environment,
Allen-Bradley is reducing the amount of paper we use. Less paper means
more options for you. In addition to traditional printed publications and
CD-ROM versions, we now offer on-line manuals with the most up-to-date
information you can get. We recommend that you read the related
publications listed on the next page before starting up your control system.
P–3
Preface
Related Publications
For
Read this Document
Document Number
A description on how to install and use your MicroLogix 1000
Programmable Controllers. This manual also contains status file
data and instruction set information
MicroLogix 1000 Programmable
Controllers User Manual
1761-6.3
A reference manual that contains the status file data and the
instruction set information for the SLC 500 processors and
MicroLogix 1000 controllers
SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000
Instruction Set Reference Manual
1747-6.15
MicroLogix 1000 Programmable
Controllers Installation Instructions
1761-5.1.2
MicroLogix 1000 (Analog) Programmable
Controllers Installation Instructions
1761-5.1.3
The procedures necessary to install and connect the AIC+ and
DNI
Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+) and
DeviceNet Interface (DNI) Installation
Instructions
1761-5.11
A description on how to install and connect an AIC+. This
manual also contains information on network wiring.
Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+) User
Manual
1761-6.4
Information on how to install, configure, and commission a DNI
DeviceNet Interface User Manual
1761-6.5
In-depth information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley
programmable controllers
Allen-Bradley Programmable Controller
Grounding and Wiring Guidelines
1770-4.1
Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1000
ccontrollers,
r ers iincluding
c i a mounting
i template
e a e fforr eas
easy iinstallation
sa ai
How to Get More Information
For
P–4
Obtain Information By
Fast access to
related
publications
•Visiting the MicroLogix internet site http://www.abmicrologix.com — Electronic versions of our
manuals are available for you to search and down load.
•Calling local Allen-Bradley distributor.
Publications in
printed or
CD-ROM format
Ordering a manual or CD-ROM using one of the following methods:
•Fill out and return the User Manual Request Card that was shipped with the unit.
•Visiting the Automation Bookstore at http://www.theautomationbookstore.com
Multiple copies of
a manual
•Visiting the Automation Bookstore at http://www.theautomationbookstore.com
Manuals in other
languages
Adding a 2-letter suffix to the end of the publication number when ordering.
•French – FR •German – DE •Italian – IT •Spanish – ES •Portuguese – PT (DNI only)
Preface
Related Documentation
The following documents contain additional information concerning
Allen-Bradley products. To obtain a copy, contact your local Allen-Bradley
office or distributor.
For
Read This Document
Document Number
A description of important differences
between solid-state programmable
controller products and hard-wired
electromechanical devices
Application Considerations for
Solid-State Controls
SGI-1.1
An article on wire sizes and types for
grounding electrical equipment
National Electrical Code
Published by the National Fire Protection
Association of Boston, MA.
A complete listing of current
documentation, including ordering
instructions. Also indicates whether the
documents are available on CD-ROM or
in multi-languages.
Allen-Bradley Publication Index
SD499
A glossary of industrial automation terms
and abbreviations
Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation
Glossary
AG-7.1
Common Techniques Used in
this Manual
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
• Bulleted lists such as this one provide information, not procedural steps.
• Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information.
• Italic type is used for emphasis.
• Text in this font indicates words that appear on the HHP display.
•
NEW
RUNG
T
Keypad icons, like the one at the left, match the key you
should press.
• For operations that require you to press a sequence of keys, the keypad
icons are displayed horizontally on the page, with the resulting screen
shown beneath. For example:
LD
7
MENU
I
P 0 0 0
I / 6
6
E NT
0
• If a character is flashing on the HHP display, it is shown unbolded (such
as the P in the screen above).
• For operations that require you to press two keys simultaneously, the
keypad icons are displayed side-by-side as shown here:
ES C
•
1
For operations that require you to press an arrow key, the
key you should press is shown bolded, such as the right
arrow key shown here.
P–5
Preface
Allen-Bradley Support
Allen-Bradley offers support services worldwide, with over 75 Sales/Support
Offices, 512 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized Systems Integrators
located throughout the United States alone, plus Allen-Bradley
representatives in every major country in the world.
Local Product Support
Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative for:
• sales and order support
• product technical training
• warranty support
• support service agreements
Technical Product Assistance
If you need to contact Allen-Bradley for technical assistance, please review
the information in the Troubleshooting chapter first. Then call your local
Allen-Bradley representative.
Your Questions or Comments on this Manual
If you find a problem with this manual, please notify us of it on the enclosed
Publication Problem Report.
If you have any suggestions for how this manual could be made more useful
to you, please contact us at the address below:
Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.
Control and Information Group
Technical Communication, Dept. 602V, T122
P.O. Box 2086
Milwaukee, WI 53201-2086
or visit our internet page at:
http://www.abmicrologix.com
P–6
Table of Contents
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand–Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
Preface
Who Should Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Techniques Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allen-Bradley Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P–1
P–1
P–5
P–6
Hardware
Installing Your Controller
Chapter 1
Compliance to European Union Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Control Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Surge Suppressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventing Excessive Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Your Controller
Chapter 2
Grounding Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sinking and Sourcing Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams, Discrete Input and Output Voltage Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Your Analog Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Your Analog Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Voltage and Current Input and Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Your Controller for High-Speed Counter Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the System
1–1
1–2
1–3
1–7
1–9
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
2–1
2–2
2–3
2–6
2–20
2–20
2–21
2–22
2–23
Chapter 3
Connecting the HHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
Connecting to a DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
Connecting the AIC+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Establishing Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
DeviceNet Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
toc–i
Table of Contents
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand–Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
Programming
Using Your Hand-Held
Programmer
Quick Start for New Users
Chapter 4
About Your HHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
Installing the Optional Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
The Keys You Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
Identifying the Power-Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Understanding the HHPs Functional Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
Changing the HHPs Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
Chapter 5
What to Do First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
Preparing to Enter a New Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
Entering and Running the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
Monitoring Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
What to Do Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
Programming Overview
Chapter 6
Principles of Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
Understanding File Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
Understanding How Programs are Stored and Accessed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
Addressing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
Applying Logic to Your Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
Developing Your Logic Program – A Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–17
Using Analog
Chapter 7
I/O Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Filter and Update Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting Analog Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Basic Instructions
Chapter 8
About Basic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load (LD), And (AND), and Or (OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Inverted (LDI), And Inverted (ANI), and Or Inverted (ORI) . . . . . . . . . . .
Load True (LDT) and Or True (ORT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-Shot Rising (OSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
toc–ii
7–1
7–2
7–2
7–4
8–2
8–3
8–3
8–4
8–6
8–7
Table of Contents
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand–Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
Output (OUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set (SET) and Reset (RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Branch Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Push (MPS), Memory Read (MRD), and Memory Pop (MPP) . . . . . .
And Block (ANB) and Or Block (ORB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer On-Delay (TON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer Off-Delay (TOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retentive Timer (RTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Count Up (CTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Count Down (CTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset (RES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example . . . . . . .
Using Comparison
Instructions
Using Math Instructions
8–8
8–8
8–9
8–10
8–12
8–14
8–16
8–18
8–20
8–21
8–24
8–25
8–27
8–28
Chapter 9
About the Comparison Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
Comparison Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
Equal (EQU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
Not Equal (NEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
Less Than (LES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
Less Than or Equal (LEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
Greater Than (GRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
Greater Than or Equal (GEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8
Masked Comparison for Equal (MEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–9
Limit Test (LIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–10
Comparison Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example . . 9–12
Chapter 10
About the Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Math Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add (ADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subtract (SUB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-Bit Addition and Subtraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiply (MUL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Divide (DIV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Double Divide (DDV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear (CLR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Square Root (SQR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scale Data (SCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Math Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example . . . . . . .
10–1
10–2
10–4
10–5
10–6
10–8
10–9
10–10
10–11
10–11
10–12
10–15
toc–iii
Table of Contents
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand–Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
Using Data Handling
Instructions
Using Program Flow Control
Instructions
Using Application Specific
Instructions
toc–iv
Chapter 11
About the Data Handling Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert to BCD (TOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert from BCD (FRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decode 4 to 1 of 16 (DCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encode 1 of 16 to 4 (ENC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy File (COP) and Fill File (FLL) Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move and Logical Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move (MOV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Masked Move (MVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
And (AND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Or (OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Or (XOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Not (NOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Negate (NEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIFO and LIFO Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIFO Load (FFL) and FIFO Unload (FFU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIFO Load (LFL) and LIFO Unload (LFU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Handling Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machin
Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11–2
11–2
11–3
11–7
11–8
11–10
11–13
11–15
11–16
11–18
11–19
11–20
11–21
11–22
11–23
11–25
11–28
11–31
Chapter 12
About the Program Flow Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump (JMP) and Label (LBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump to Subroutine (JSR), Subroutine (SBR), and Return (RET) . . . . . . . . . .
Master Control Reset (MCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporary End (TND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspend (SUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immediate Input with Mask (IIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immediate Output with Mask (IOM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Flow Control Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine
Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12–1
12–2
12–3
12–6
12–7
12–7
12–8
12–9
12–10
Chapter 13
About the Application Specific Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Shift Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Shift Left (BSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Shift Right (BSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequencer Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequencer Output (SQO) and Sequencer Compare (SQC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequencer Load (SQL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13–1
13–2
13–3
13–4
13–6
13–6
13–12
13–15
Table of Contents
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand–Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
Selectable Timed Disable (STD) and Enable (STE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selectable Timed Start (STS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt Subroutine (INT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Specific Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine
Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using High–Speed Counter
Instructions
Using Communication
Protocols
Instruction List Programming
Concepts
Entering and Editing Your
Program
13–17
13–18
13–19
13–20
Chapter 14
About the High-Speed Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Speed Counter Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Speed Counter (HSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Speed Counter Load (HSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Speed Counter Reset (RES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Speed Counter Reset Accumulator (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Speed Counter Interrupt Enable (HSE) and Disable (HSD) . . . . . . . . . .
Update High-Speed Counter Image Accumulator (OUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Happens to the HSC When Going to RRUN Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Speed Counter Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine
Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14–1
14–2
14–4
14–15
14–19
14–20
14–21
14–23
14–23
14–28
Chapter 15
Types of Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Instruction (MSG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Diagram for a Successful MSG Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSG Instruction Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Examples that Use the MSG Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15–1
15–2
15–9
15–11
15–12
Chapter 16
Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16–1
Programming Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16–8
Chapter 17
Entering the Program Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Instructions and Rungs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for Specific Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17–1
17–3
17–3
17–6
17–8
toc–v
Table of Contents
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand–Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
After You’ve Entered Your
Program
Common Procedures
Chapter 18
Changing the Program Configuration Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accepting Your Program Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Controller Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Your Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Data Table Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Multi-Point Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forcing Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18–1
18–20
18–20
18–24
18–27
18–30
18–34
Chapter 19
Using a Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing a Program from the Micro Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Micro Controller’s Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Micro Controller’s Communication Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19–1
19–6
19–6
19–7
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Your System
Chapter 20
Understanding the Controller LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying HHP Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Trace Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Error Recovery Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying Controller Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering Your Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling Allen-Bradley for Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20–1
20–3
20–8
20–10
20–11
20–16
20–16
Reference
Hardware Reference
Appendix A
Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
Controller Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–7
Hand-Held Programmer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–9
Controller and Hand-Held Programmer Accessories and Replacement Parts . A–11
toc–vi
Table of Contents
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand–Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
Programming Reference
Appendix B
Controller Status File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–1
Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–13
Instruction Execution Times and Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–16
Valid Addressing Modes and
File Types for Instruction
Parameters
Appendix C
Understanding the
Communication Protocols
Appendix D
Available File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available Addressing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DF1 Half-Duplex Slave Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DH-485 Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Example
Programs
Appendix E
Optional Analog Input
Software Calibration
Appendix F
C–1
C–2
D–1
D–2
D–4
D–9
Paper Drilling Machine Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–2
Time Driven Sequencer Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–25
Event Driven Sequencer Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–27
Bottle Line Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–29
Calibrating an Analog Input Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F–1
Glossary
toc–vii
Summary of Changes
Summary of Changes
The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since the last
printing as Publication 1761-6.2—October 1997.
To help you find new information and updated information in this release of
the manual, we have included change bars as shown to the right of this
paragraph.
New Information
Updated Information
The table below lists sections that document new features and additional
information about existing features, and shows where to find this new
information.
For This New Information
See
Power supply inrush
page 1–11
Class I, Division 2 certification
pages 1–12, A–2
analog controllers
pages 2–17, 7–1, 18–14, appendix A
automatic protocol switching
page 3–13
DeviceNet communications
page 3–13
software compatibility
page 4–1
SCL instruction application example
page 10–14
remote network support
page D–17
Changes from the previous release of this manual that require you to
reference information differently are as follows:
• The safety considerations for mounting your controller have been
updated; see chapter 1, Installing Your Controller.
• The section on establishing communication has been updated; see chapter
3, Connecting the System.
• For updated information on HHP support and compatibility of the series
functionality of your MicroLogix controller, see chapter 15, Using
Communication Protocols.
• The message timing diagram has been updated; see chapter 15, Using
Communication Protocols.
• The MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers’ VA ratings and power
supply inrush specifications have been updated; see appendix A,
Hardware Reference.
• The agency certification specifications have been updated; see appendix
A, Hardware Reference.
• The analog output overall accuracy specification has been updated; see
appendix A, Hardware Reference.
• The user interrupt latency information has been updated; see appendix B,
Programming Reference.
• The DF1 Full-Duplex and DH-485 configuration parameters have been
updated; see appendix D, Understanding Communication Protocols.
soc–i
Chapter
1
Installing Your Controller
This chapter shows you how to install your MicroLogix 1000 Programmable
Controller. The only tools you require are a Flat head or Phillips head
screwdriver and drill. Topics include:
• compliance to European Union Directives
• hardware overview
• master control relay
• surge suppressors
• safety considerations
• power considerations
• preventing excessive heat
• controller spacing
• mounting the controller
Compliance to European
Union Directives
If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the
European Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested to meet
the following directives.
EMC Directive
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89/336/EEC
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and the following standards, in whole
or in part, documented in a technical construction file:
• EN 50081-2
EMC – Generic Emission Standard, Part 2 – Industrial Environment
• EN 50082-2
EMC – Generic Immunity Standard, Part 2 – Industrial Environment
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.
Low Voltage Directive
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low Voltage, by
applying the safety requirements of EN 61131–2 Programmable Controllers,
Part 2 – Equipment Requirements and Tests.
For specific information required by EN 61131-2, see the appropriate
sections in this publication, as well as the following Allen-Bradley
publications:
• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines For Noise
Immunity, publication 1770-4.1
• Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries, publication AG-5.4
• Automation Systems Catalog, publication B111
1–1
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
Hardware Overview
The MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller is a packaged controller
containing a power supply, input circuits, output circuits, and a processor.
The controller is available in 10 I/O, 16 I/O and 32 I/O configurations, as
well as an analog version with 20 discrete I/O and 5 analog I/O.
The catalog number for the controller is composed of the following:
1761-L20AWA-5A
Analog I/O
Bulletin Number
Analog Circuits:
Inputs = 4
Outputs = 1
Base Unit
Unit I/O Count: 20
Power Supply:
A = 120/240V ac
B = 24V dc
Input Signal:
A = 120V ac
B = 24V dc
Output Type:
W = Relay
B = MOSFET
A = Triac
The hardware features of the controller are:
1
2
3
3
Input terminals
dc output terminals (or not used)
Mounting hole
4
4
Input LEDs
5
Status LEDs
6
RS-232 communication channel
7
Output LEDs
8
Power supply line power
9
Ground screw
10
Output terminals
5
6
1
2
IN
POWER
RUN
FAULT
FORCE
OUT
7
8
9
10
3
1–2
20142
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
Master Control Relay
A hard-wired master control relay (MCR) provides a reliable means for
emergency controller shutdown. Since the master control relay allows the
placement of several emergency-stop switches in different locations, its
installation is important from a safety standpoint. Overtravel limit switches
or mushroom head push buttons are wired in series so that when any of them
opens, the master control relay is de-energized. This removes power to input
and output device circuits. Refer to the figure on page 1–5.
!
ATTENTION: Never alter these circuits to defeat their function,
since serious injury and/or machine damage could result.
Important: If you are using an external dc output power supply, interrupt
the dc output side rather than the ac line side of the supply to
avoid the additional delay of power supply turn-off.
The external ac line of the dc output power supply should be
fused.
Connect a set of master control relays in series with the dc
power supplying the input and output circuits.
Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance
personnel have quick and easy access to it. If you mount a disconnect switch
inside the controller enclosure, place the switch operating handle on the
outside of the enclosure, so that you can disconnect power without opening
the enclosure.
Whenever any of the emergency-stop switches are opened, power to input
and output devices should be removed.
When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external
I/O circuits, power continues to be provided to the controller’s power supply
so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed.
The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller.
It is intended for any situation where the operator must quickly de-energize
I/O devices only. When inspecting or installing terminal connections,
replacing output fuses, or working on equipment within the enclosure, use
the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system.
Important: Do not control the master control relay with the controller.
Provide the operator with the safety of a direct connection
between an emergency-stop switch and the master control relay.
1–3
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
Using Emergency-Stop Switches
When using emergency-stop switches, adhere to the following points:
• Do not program emergency-stop switches in the controller program. Any
emergency-stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off
the master control relay.
• Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling
of emergency-stop switches.
• Install emergency-stop switches and the master control relay in your
system. Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your
application. Emergency-stop switches must be easy to reach.
• In the following illustration, input and output circuits are shown with
MCR protection. However, in most applications, only output circuits
require MCR protection.
The following illustrations show the Master Control Relay wired in a
grounded system.
Important: The illustrations only show output circuits with MCR
protection. In most applications input circuits do not require
MCR protection; however, if you need to remove power from
all field devices, you must include MCR contacts in series with
input power wiring.
1–4
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
Schematic (Using IEC Symbols)
L1
L2
230V ac
Disconnect
Fuse
MCR
230V ac
I/O Circuits
Operation of either of these contacts will
remove power from the adapter external I/O
circuits, stopping machine motion.
Isolation
Transformer
X1
230V ac
Fuse
Master Control Relay (MCR)
Cat. No. 700-PK400A1
Suppressor
Cat. No. 700-N24
X2
Emergency-Stop
Push Button
Start
Overtravel
Limit Switch
Stop
MCR
Suppr.
MCR
MCR
230V ac
I/O Circuits
dc Power Supply.
Use IEC 950/EN 60950
—
(Lo)
(Hi)
Line Terminals: Connect to 230V ac
terminals of controller Power Supply.
+
MCR
24V dc
I/O Circuits
Line terminals: Connect to 24V dc
terminals of controller Power Supply.
1–5
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols)
L1
L2
230V ac
Disconnect
Fuse
MCR
230V ac
Output
Circuits
Operation of either of these contacts will
remove power from the adapter external I/O
circuits, stopping machine motion.
Isolation
Transformer
X1
115V ac
Fuse
X2
Emergency-Stop
Push Button
Overtravel
Limit Switch
Stop
Start
Master Control Relay (MCR)
Cat. No. 700-PK400A1
Suppressor
Cat. No. 700-N24
MCR
Suppr.
MCR
MCR
115V ac
Output
Circuits
dc Power Supply.
Use N.E.C. Class 2
for UL Listing.
+
—
(Lo)
24V dc
Output
Circuits
(Hi)
Line Terminals: Connect to 115V ac
terminals of controller Power Supply.
1–6
MCR
Line terminals: Connect to 24V dc
terminals of controller Power Supply.
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
Using Surge Suppressors
Inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids require the use of
some type of surge suppression to protect the controller output contacts.
Switching inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce
the lifetime of relay contacts. By adding a suppression device directly across
the coil of an inductive device, you will prolong the life of the switch
contacts. You also reduce the effects of voltage transients caused by
interrupting the current to that inductive device, and prevent electrical noise
from radiating into system wiring.
The following diagram shows an output with a suppression device. We
recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as possible to the
load device.
+ dc or L1
VAC/VDC
Snubber
OUT 0
OUT 1
OUT 2
ac or dc
Outputs
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUT 5
OUT 6
OUT 7
dc COM or L2
COM
If you connect a micro controller FET output to an inductive load, we
recommend that you use a 1N4004 diode for surge suppression, as shown in
the following illustration.
+24V dc
VAC/VDC
OUT 0
OUT 1
OUT 2
Relay or Solid State
dc Outputs
OUT 3
OUT 4
1N4004 Diode
OUT 5
OUT 6
OUT 7
24V dc common
COM
1–7
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive ac load devices include a
varistor, an RC network, or an Allen-Bradley surge suppressor, all shown
below. These components must be appropriately rated to suppress the
switching transient characteristic of the particular inductive device. See the
table on page 1–9 for recommended suppressors.
Surge Suppression for Inductive ac Load Devices
Output Device
Output Device
Output Device
Surge
Suppressor
Varistor
RC Network
If you connect a micro controller triac output to control an inductive load, we
recommend that you use varistors to suppress noise. Choose a varistor that is
appropriate for the application. The suppressors we recommend for triac
outputs when switching 120V ac inductive loads are a Harris MOV, part
number V175 LA10A, or an Allen-Bradley MOV, catalog number 599-K04
or 599-KA04. Consult the varistor manufacturer’s data sheet when selecting
a varistor for your application.
For inductive dc load devices, a diode is suitable. A 1N4004 diode is
acceptable for most applications. A surge suppressor can also be used. See
the table on page 1–9 for recommended suppressors.
As shown in the illustration below, these surge suppression circuits connect
directly across the load device. This reduces arcing of the output contacts.
(High transient can cause arcing that occurs when switching off an inductive
device.)
Surge Suppression for Inductive dc Load Devices
+
—
Output Device
Diode
(A surge suppressor can also be used.)
1–8
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
Recommended Surge Suppressors
We recommend the Allen-Bradley surge suppressors shown in the following
table for use with Allen-Bradley relays, contactors, and starters.
Device
Safety Considerations
Coil Voltage
Suppressor Catalog
Number
Bulletin 509 Motor Starter
Bulletin 509 Motor Starter
120V ac
240V ac
599-K04
599-KA04
Bulletin 100 Contactor
Bulletin 100 Contactor
120V ac
240V ac
199-FSMA1
199-FSMA2
Bulletin 709 Motor Starter
120V ac
1401-N10
Bulletin 700 Type R, RM Relays
ac coil
None Required
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
12V dc
12V dc
700-N22
700-N28
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
24V dc
24V dc
700-N10
700-N13
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
48V dc
48V dc
700-N16
700-N17
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
115-125V dc
115-125V dc
700-N11
700-N14
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
230-250V dc
230-250V dc
700-N12
700-N15
Bulletin 700 Type N, P, or PK Relay
150V max, ac or DC
700-N24
Miscellaneous electromagnetic devices
limited to 35 sealed VA
150V max, ac or DC
700-N24
Safety considerations are an important element of proper system installation.
Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others, as well as the
condition of your equipment, is of primary importance. We recommend
reviewing the following safety considerations.
Disconnecting Main Power
!
ATTENTION: Explosion Hazard — Do not replace components
or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off and
the area is known to be non-hazardous.
The main power disconnect switch should be located where operators and
maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. In addition to
disconnecting electrical power, all other sources of power (pneumatic and
hydraulic) should be de-energized before working on a machine or process
controlled by a controller.
1–9
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
!
ATTENTION: Explosion Hazard — Do not connect or
disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be
non-hazardous.
Safety Circuits
Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons, like overtravel limit
switches, stop push buttons, and interlocks, should always be hard-wired
directly to the master control relay. These devices must be wired in series so
that when any one device opens, the master control relay is de-energized
thereby removing power to the machine. Never alter these circuits to defeat
their function. Serious injury or machine damage could result.
Power Distribution
There are some points about power distribution that you should know:
• The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by
removing power to the machine I/O devices when the relay is
de-energized.
• If you are using a dc power supply, interrupt the load side rather than the
ac line power. This avoids the additional delay of power supply turn-off.
The dc power supply should be powered directly from the fused
secondary of the transformer. Power to the dc input and output circuits is
connected through a set of master control relay contacts.
Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit
Any part can fail, including the switches in a master control relay circuit.
The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause an open circuit,
which would be a safe power-off failure. However, if one of these switches
shorts out, it no longer provides any safety protection. These switches
should be tested periodically to assure they will stop machine motion when
needed.
Power Considerations
The following explains power considerations for the micro controllers.
Isolation Transformers
You may want to use an isolation transformer in the ac line to the controller.
This type of transformer provides isolation from your power distribution
system and is often used as a step down transformer to reduce line voltage.
Any transformer used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating
for its load. The power rating is expressed in volt-amperes (VA).
1–10
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
Power Supply Inrush
The MicroLogix power supply does not require or need a high inrush current.
However, if the power source can supply a high inrush current, the
MicroLogix power supply will accept it. There is a high level of inrush
current when a large capacitor on the input of the MicroLogix is charged up
quickly.
If the power source cannot supply high inrush current, the only effect is that
the MicroLogix input capacitor charges up more slowly. The following
considerations determine whether the power source needs to supply a high
inrush current:
• power-up sequence of devices in system
• power source sag if it cannot source inrush current
• the effect of the voltage sag on other equipment
If the power source cannot provide high inrush current when the entire
system in an application is powered, the MicroLogix powers-up more slowly.
If part of an application’s system is already powered and operating when the
MicroLogix is powered, the source voltage may sag while the MicroLogix
input capacitor is charging. A power source voltage sag can affect other
equipment connected to the same power source. For example, a voltage sag
may reset a computer connected to the same power source.
Loss of Power Source
The power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without
affecting the operation of the system. The time the system is operational
during power loss is called “program scan hold-up time after loss of power.”
The duration of the power supply hold-up time depends on the type and state
of the I/O, but is typically between 20 milliseconds and 3 seconds. When the
duration of power loss reaches this limit, the power supply signals the
processor that it can no longer provide adequate dc power to the system.
This is referred to as a power supply shutdown.
Input States on Power Down
The power supply hold-up time as described above is generally longer than
the turn-on and turn-off times of the inputs. Because of this, the input state
change from “On” to “Off” that occurs when power is removed may be
recorded by the processor before the power supply shuts down the system.
The user program should be written to take this effect into account.
Other Types of Line Conditions
Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily interrupted.
It is also possible that the voltage level may drop substantially below the
normal line voltage range for a period of time. Both of these conditions are
considered to be a loss of power for the system.
1–11
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
Preventing Excessive Heat
For most applications, normal convective cooling keeps the controller within
the specified operating range. Ensure that the specified operating range is
maintained. Proper spacing of components within an enclosure is usually
sufficient for heat dissipation.
In some applications, a substantial amount of heat is produced by other
equipment inside or outside the enclosure. In this case, place blower fans
inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to reduce “hot spots” near
the controller.
Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient
temperatures are encountered.
Important: Do not bring in unfiltered outside air. Place the controller in an
enclosure to protect it from a corrosive atmosphere. Harmful
contaminants or dirt could cause improper operation or damage
to components. In extreme cases, you may need to use air
conditioning to protect against heat build-up within the
enclosure.
Controller Spacing
The following figure shows the recommended minimum spacing for the
controller. (Refer to appendix A for controller dimensions.)
Top
B
A. Greater than or equal to 50.8 mm (2 in.).
Side
Side
A
A
Bottom
B. Greater than or equal to 50.8 mm (2 in.).
B
20142
Mounting the Controller
This equipment is suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or
non-hazardous locations only, when product or packaging is marked.
!
ATTENTION – Explosion Hazard:
•Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I,
Division 2.
•This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables
connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be
protected by conduit or other means.
The controller should be mounted horizontally within an enclosure, using a
DIN rail or mounting screws. Copy the template from page A–8 to help you
space and mount the controller properly.
1–12
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
!
ATTENTION: Be careful of metal chips when drilling
mounting holes for your controller. Drilled fragments that fall
into the controller could cause damage. Do not drill holes above
a mounted controller if the protective wrap is removed.
Use only the following communication cables in Class I, Division 2
Hazardous Locations.
Environment Classification
Communication Cable
Class
ass II, Di
Division
isi 2 Hazardous
a ar s
Environment
ir
e
1761-CBL-PM02 Series C
1761-CBL-HM02 Series C
1761-CBL-AM00 Series C
1761-CBL-AP00 Series C
2707-NC8 Series B
2707-NC9 Series B
2707-NC10 Series B
2707-NC11 Series B
Using a DIN Rail
Use 35 mm (1.38 in.) DIN rails, such as item number 199-DR1 or 1492-DR5
from Bulletin 1492.
To install your controller on the DIN rail:
1. Mount your DIN rail. (Make sure that the
placement of the controller on the DIN rail
meets the recommended spacing
requirements. Refer to controller
dimensions in appendix A.)
2. Hook the top slot over the DIN rail.
3. While pressing the controller against the
rail, snap the controller into position.
4. Leave the protective wrap attached until you
are finished wiring the controller.
B
Protective Wrap
DIN
Rail
Mounting
Template
20146
Call-out
A
DIN
Rail
C
Side View
A
B
C
Dimension
84 mm (3.3 in.)
33 mm (1.3 in.)
16 mm (.63 in.)
1–13
Chapter 1
Installing Your Controller
To remove your controller from the DIN rail:
1. Place a screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at
the bottom of the controller.
2. Holding the controller, pry downward on
the latch until the controller is released
from the DIN rail.
Side View
DIN
Rail
20147
Using Mounting Screws
To install your controller using mounting screws:
Important: Leave the protective wrap
attached until you are
finished wiring the controller.
1. Use the mounting template from
page A–8.
2. Secure the template to the mounting
surface. (Make sure your controller
is spaced properly.)
3. Drill holes through the template.
4. Remove the mounting template.
5. Mount the controller.
Mounting
Template
Protective Wrap
(remove after wiring)
Mounting Your Controller Vertically
Your controller can also be mounted vertically within an enclosure using
mounting screws or a DIN rail. To insure the stability of your controller, we
recommend using mounting screws.
To insure the controller’s reliability, the following environmental
specifications must not be exceeded.
Top
A
Side
Side
A
A
Bottom
A
A. Greater than or equal
to 50.8 mm (2 in.).
Description:
Specification:
Operating
Temperature
0°C to +40°C (+32°F to +113°F)➀
Operating Shock
(Panel mounted)
9.0g peak acceleration (11±1 ms duration)
3 times each direction, each axis
Operating Shock
(DIN rail mounted)
7.0g peak acceleration (11±1 ms duration)
3 times each direction, each axis
➀
DC input voltage derated linearly from +30°C (30V to 26.4V).
Note: When mounting your controller vertically, the nameplate should be
facing downward.
1–14
Chapter
2
Wiring Your Controller
This chapter explains how to wire your MicroLogix 1000 Programmable
Controller. Topics include:
• grounding guidelines
• sinking and sourcing circuits
• wiring recommendations
• wiring diagrams, input voltage ranges, and output voltage ranges
Grounding Guidelines
In solid-state control systems, grounding helps limit the effects of noise due
to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Use the heaviest wire gauge listed for
wiring your controller with a maximum length of 152.4 mm (6 in.). Run the
ground connection from the ground screw of the controller (third screw from
left on output terminal rung) to the ground bus.
Important:
This symbol denotes a functional earth ground terminal
which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits
and earth for non-safety purposes, such as noise immunity
improvement.
Protective
Wrap (remove after wiring)
!
ATTENTION: All devices that connect to the user 24V power
supply or to the RS-232 channel must be referenced to chassis
ground or floating. Failure to follow this procedure may result in
property damage or personal injury.
!
ATTENTION: Chassis ground, user 24V ground, and RS-232
ground are internally connected. You must connect the chassis
ground terminal screw to chassis ground prior to connecting any
devices.
ATTENTION: On the 1761-L10BWB, 1761-L16BWB,
!
1761-L16BBB, 1761-L20BWB-5A, 1761-L32BBB, and 1761-L32BWB
controllers, the user supply 24V dc IN and chassis ground are
internally connected.
2–1
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
You must also provide an acceptable grounding path for each device in your
application. For more information on proper grounding guidelines, see the
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1.
ATTENTION: Remove the protective wrap before applying
power to the controller. Failure to remove the wrap may cause
the controller to overheat.
!
Sinking and Sourcing Circuits
Any MicroLogix 1000 DC inputs can be configured as sinking or sourcing
depending on how the DC COM terminal is wired.
Mode:
Definition:
Sinking
The input energizes when high-level voltage is applied to the input terminal
(active high). Connect the power supply VDC (–) to the MicroLogix DC COM
terminal.
Sourcing
The input energizes when low-level voltage is applied to the input terminal
(active low). Connect the power supply VDC (+) to the MicroLogix DC COM
terminal.
Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Examples
1761-L32BWA (Wiring diagrams also apply to 1761-L20BWA-5A,
-L16BWA, -L10BWA.)
Sinking Inputs
Sourcing Inputs
14–30 VDC
VDC (+) for Sourcing
VDC (–) for Sourcing
VDC (+) for Sinking
VDC (–)
for Sinking
+ 24V –
DC OUT
DC
COM
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
DC
COM
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
I/10
I/11
I/12
I/13
I/14
I/15
I/16
I/17
I/18
I/19
Sinking Inputs
Sourcing Inputs
14–30 VDC
VDC (+)
VDC (–) for Sinking
for Sinking
VDC (–) for Sourcing
VDC (+)
for Sourcing
+ 24V –
DC OUT
2–2
DC
COM
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
DC
COM
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
I/10
I/11
I/12
I/13
I/14
I/15
I/16
I/17
I/18
I/19
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L32BWB, -L32BBB (Wiring Diagrams also apply to 1761-L20BWB-5A
-L16BWB, -L10BWB, -L16BBB.)
Sinking Inputs
VDC (–) for Sinking
NOT
NOT DC
USED USED COM
14–30 VDC
VDC (+) for Sinking
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
Sourcing Inputs
14–30 VDC
VDC (–) for Sourcing
VDC (+) for Sourcing
DC
COM
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
14–30 VDC
NOT
NOT DC
USED USED COM
I/0
Wiring Recommendations
I/12
I/13
I/14
I/15
I/16
I/17
I/18
VDC (–) for Sinking
I/1
DC
COM
I/3
I/4
I/5
VDC (+) for Sinking
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
I/10
I/11
I/12
I/13
I/14
I/15
I/16
I/17
I/18
ATTENTION: Before you install and wire any device,
disconnect power to the controller system.
!
The following are general recommendations for wiring your controller
system.
• Each wire terminal accepts 2 wires of the size listed below:
Wire Type
I/19
14–30 VDC
VDC (–) for Sourcing
I/2
I/11
Sinking Inputs
Sourcing Inputs
VDC (+) for Sourcing
I/10
Wire Size (2 wire maximum per terminal screw)
Solid
#14 to #22 AWG
Stranded
#16 to #22 AWG
Refer to page 2–23 for wiring your high-speed counter.
Important: The diameter of the terminal screw heads is 5.5 mm
(0.220 in.). The input and output terminals of the micro
controller are designed for the following spade lugs:
2–3
I/19
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
Call-out
C
E
L
W
X
C+X
Dimension
6.35 mm (0.250 in.)
10.95 mm (0.431 in.) maximum
14.63 mm (0.576 in.) maximum
6.35 mm (0.250 in.)
3.56 mm (0.140 in.)
9.91 mm (0.390 in.) maximum
We recommend using either of the following AMP spade
lugs: part number 53120-1, if using 22–16 AWG, or part
number 53123-1, if using 16–14 AWG.
Important: If you use wires without lugs, make sure the wires are
securely captured by the pressure plate. This is
particularly important at the four end terminal positions
where the pressure plate does not touch the outside wall.
20148i
!
ATTENTION: Be careful when stripping wires. Wire
fragments that fall into the controller could cause damage. Do
not strip wires above a mounted controller if the protective wrap
is removed.
Protective
Wrap (remove after wiring)
!
2–4
ATTENTION: Remove the protective wrap before applying
power to the controller. Failure to remove the wrap may cause
the controller to overheat.
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
!
ATTENTION: Calculate the maximum possible current in each
power and common wire. Observe all electrical codes dictating
the maximum current allowable for each wire size. Current
above the maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat, which
can cause damage.
!
ATTENTION: United States Only: If the controller is installed
within a potentially hazardous environment, all wiring must
comply with the requirements stated in the National Electrical
Code 501-4 (b).
• Allow for at least 50 mm (2 in.) between I/O wiring ducts or terminal
strips and the controller.
• Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from the
device wiring. Where paths must cross, their intersection should be
perpendicular.
Important: Do not run signal or communications wiring and power
wiring in the same conduit. Wires with different signal
characteristics should be routed by separate paths.
• Separate wiring by signal type. Bundle wiring with similar electrical
characteristics together.
• Separate input wiring from output wiring.
• Label wiring to all devices in the system. Use tape, shrink-tubing, or
other dependable means for labeling purposes. In addition to labeling,
use colored insulation to identify wiring based on signal characteristics.
For example, you may use blue for dc wiring and red for ac wiring.
2–5
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
Wiring Diagrams, Discrete
Input and Output Voltage
Ranges
The following pages show the wiring diagrams, discrete input voltage ranges
and discrete output voltage ranges. Controllers with dc inputs can be wired
as either sinking or sourcing configurations. (Sinking and sourcing does not
apply to ac inputs.)
Important:
This symbol denotes a functional earth ground terminal
which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits
and earth for non-safety purposes, such as noise immunity
improvement.
ATTENTION: The 24V dc sensor power source should not be
used to power output circuits. It should only be used to power
input devices (e.g. sensors, switches). Refer to page 1–3 for
information on MCR wiring in output circuits.
!
1761-L16AWA Wiring Diagram
79–132V ac
79–132V ac
L2/N
NOT
NOT AC
USED USED COM
L1
I/0
I/1
I/2
VAC
VDC
O/0 VDC
L2/N
AC
COM
I/3
L1
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
O/4
O/5
CR
CR
85–264 VAC
L1
L2/N
VAC
O/1
VAC
VDC
VAC
VAC
O/2 VDC
O/3 VDC
CR
CR
VAC 2
VDC 1
VAC 2
COM
VAC 1
VDC 2
VDC 1
COM
VDC 3
VDC 2
COM
VDC 3
COM
VAC 1
COM
1761-L16AWA Input Voltage Range
0V ac
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
20V ac
Off
132V ac
79V ac
?
On
1761-L16AWA Output Voltage Range
0V ac 5V ac
0V dc 5V dc
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
?
2–6
264V ac
125V dc
Operating Range
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L32AWA Wiring Diagram
79–132V ac
L2/N
NOT
NOT AC
USED USED COM
79–132V ac
L1
I/0
I/1
I/2
VAC
VDC
O/0 VDC
L2/N
L1
I/3
AC
COM
I/4
I/5
O/1
VAC
VDC
O/2
O/3 VDC
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
I/10
O/4
O/5
O/6
CR
CR
CR
I/11
I/12
I/13
I/14
I/15
O/7 VDC
O/8
O/9
O/10 O/11
CR
CR
CR
I/16
I/17
I/18
I/19
85–264 VAC
L1
L2/N
VAC
CR
CR
VAC 2
VDC 1
VAC 2
COM
VAC 1
VAC
VAC
VDC 2
CR
CR
VDC 3
VDC 1
COM
VDC 2
COM
VDC 3
COM
VAC 1
COM
1761-L32AWA Input Voltage Range
0V ac
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
79V ac
20V ac
Off
?
132V ac
On
1761-L32AWA Output Voltage Range
0V ac
0V dc
5V ac
5V dc
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
?
264V ac
125V dc
Operating Range
2–7
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L10BWA Wiring Diagram (Sinking Input Configuration)
Hardware
Note: Refer to page 2–2 for additional input configuration options.
14–30V dc
VDC +
VDC VDC +
Com
VDC
Com
+ 24V –
DC OUT
DC
COM
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
DC
COM
I/4
I/5
NOT NOT NOT NOT
USED USED USED USED
85–264 VAC
L1
L2/N
VAC
VDC
VAC
O/0 VDC
O/1
VAC
VDC
VAC
O/2 VDC
CR
CR
VAC 2
VDC 1
VAC 2
COM
VAC 1
NOT
VDC 2
VDC 1
COM
NOT
NOT
O/3 USED USED USED
CR
CR
VDC 3
VDC 2
COM
VDC 3
COM
VAC 1
COM
1761-L10BWA Input Voltage Range
0V dc
0V dc
14V dc
14V dc
5V dc
5V dc
Off
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
?
26.4V dc @ 55° C (131° F)
30V dc @ 30° C (86° F)
On
1761-L10BWA Output Voltage Range
0V ac 5V ac
0V dc 5V dc
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
?
2–8
264V ac
125V dc
Operating Range
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L16BWA Wiring Diagram (Sinking Input Configuration)
Hardware
Note: Refer to page 2–2 for additional input configuration options.
14–30V dc
VDC +
VDC
Com
VDC +
VDC
Com
+ 24V –
DC OUT
DC
COM
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
DC
COM
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
85–264 VAC
L1
L2/N
VAC
VDC
VAC
O/0 VDC
O/1
VAC
VDC
VAC
VAC
O/2 VDC
O/3 VDC
O/4
O/5
CR
CR
CR
CR
VAC 2
VDC 1
VAC 2
COM
VAC 1
VDC 2
VDC 1
COM
VDC 3
VDC 2
COM
VDC 3
COM
VAC 1
COM
1761-L16BWA Input Voltage Range
0V dc
0V dc
14V dc
14V dc
5V dc
5V dc
Off
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
?
26.4V dc @ 55° C (131° F)
30V dc @ 30° C (86° F)
On
1761-L16BWA Output Voltage Range
0V ac 5V ac
0V dc 5V dc
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
?
264V ac
125V dc
Operating Range
2–9
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L32BWA Wiring Diagram (Sinking Input Configuration)
Note: Refer to page 2–2 for additional input configuration options.
14-30 V dc
VDC +
VDC
Com
VDC +
VDC
Com
+ 24V –
DC
COM
DC OUT
I/0
I/1
I/2
DC
COM
I/3
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
I/10
I/11
I/12
I/13
I/14
I/15
I/16
I/17
I/18
I/19
85–264 VAC
L1
VAC
VDC
L2/N
VAC
O/0 VDC
VAC
VDC
O/1
CR
VAC 2
VAC
O/3 VDC
O/4
O/5
O/6
O/7 VDC
O/8
O/9
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
VDC 1
VAC 2
COM
VAC 1
VAC
O/2
VDC 2
VDC 1
COM
O/10 O/11
CR
CR
VDC 3
VDC 2
COM
VDC 3
COM
VAC 1
COM
1761-L32BWA Input Voltage Range
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
0V dc
0V dc
14V dc
14V dc
5V dc
5V dc
Off
?
26.4V dc @ 55° C (131° F)
30V dc @ 30° C (86° F)
On
1761-L32BWA Output Voltage Range
0V ac 5V ac
0V dc 5V dc
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
?
2–10
264V ac
125V dc
Operating Range
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L10BWB Wiring Diagram (Sinking Input Configuration)
Hardware
Note: Refer to page 2–2 for additional input configuration options.
14–30 VDC
VDC
Com
NOT
NOT DC
USED USED COM
DC IN
+ 24V –
14–30 VDC
VDC +
I/0
I/1
I/2
VAC
VDC
O/0 VDC
VDC VDC +
Com
I/3
VAC
O/1
DC
COM
VAC
VDC
I/4
I/5 NOT
USED
NOT
VAC
O/2 VDC
CR
NOT NOT NOT
USED USED USED
NOT
NOT
O/3 USED USED USED
CR
VAC 1
VDC 2
VAC 1
COM
VDC 1
VDC 3
VDC 2
COM
VDC 3
COM
VDC 1
COM
1761-L10BWB Input Voltage Range
0V dc
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
5V dc
Off
14V dc
?
26.4V dc @ 55° C (131° F)
On
1761-L10BWB Output Voltage Range
0V ac
0V dc
5V ac
5V dc
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
?
264V ac
125V dc
Operating Range
2–11
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L16BWB Wiring Diagram (Sinking Input Configuration)
Note: Refer to page 2–2 for additional input configuration options.
14–30V dc
14–30V dc
VDC
Com
NOT
USED
NOT DC
USED COM
DC IN
+ 24V –
VDC
Com
VDC +
I/0
I/1
I/2
VAC
VDC
O/0 VDC
I/3
VAC
O/1
DC
COM
VDC +
I/4
VAC
VDC
I/5
VAC 1
I/8
I/9
VAC
VAC
O/3 VDC
O/4
O/5
CR
CR
CR
VDC 2
VAC 1
COM
I/7
O/2 VDC
CR
VDC 1
I/6
VDC 3
VDC 2
COM
VDC 4
VDC 3
COM
VDC 4
COM
VDC 1
COM
1761-L16BWB Input Voltage Range
0V dc
14V dc
5V dc
Off
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
?
26.4V dc @ 55° C (131° F)
On
1761-L16BWB Output Voltage Range
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
0V ac
0V dc
?
2–12
5V ac
5V dc
264V ac
125V dc
Operating Range
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L32BWB Wiring Diagram (Sinking Input Configuration)
Note: Refer to page 2–2 for additional input configuration options.
Sinking Configuration
Sourcing Configuration
14–30V dc
14–30V dc
VDC
Com
NOT
NOT DC
USED USED COM
DC IN
+ 24V –
VDC +
VDC +
I/0
I/1
I/2
VAC
VDC
O/0 VDC
VAC
I/3
DC
COM
VAC
O/1 VDC
CR
VAC 1
I/4
I/5
I/7
I/8
I/9
I/10
O/2
O/3 VDC
I/6
O/4
O/5
O/6
O/7 VDC
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
VAC
VDC 2
VAC 1
COM
VDC 1
VDC
Com
I/11
VAC
VDC 3
I/12
I/13
I/14
O/8
O/9
O/10 O/11
CR
CR
CR
I/15
I/16
I/17
I/18
I/19
CR
VDC 4
VDC 2
COM
VDC 3
COM
VDC 4
COM
VDC 1
COM
1761-L32BWB Input Voltage Range
0V dc
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
14V dc
5V dc
Off
?
26.4V dc @ 55° C (131° F)
On
1761-L32BWB Output Voltage Range
0V ac
0V dc
5V ac
5V dc
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
?
264V ac
125V dc
Operating Range
2–13
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L32AAA Wiring Diagram
79–132V ac
79–132V ac
L2/N
NOT
NOT AC
USED USED COM
L1
I/0
I/1
I/2
VAC
VDC
O/0 VDC
L2/N
L1
I/3
AC
COM
I/4
I/5
O/1
VAC
O/2
O/3 VAC
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
I/10
I/11
I/12
I/13
I/14
I/15
O/4
O/5
O/6
O/7 VAC
O/8
O/9
O/10 O/11
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
I/16
I/17
I/18
I/19
85–264 VAC
L1
L2/N
VAC
CR
CR
VAC 1
VAC 2
VAC 1
COM
VAC 0
VAC 3
VAC 2
COM
CR
CR
VAC 4
VAC 3
COM
VAC 4
COM
VAC 0
COM
1761-L32AAA Input Voltage Range
0V ac
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
20V ac
Off
132V ac
79V ac
?
On
1761-L32AAA Output Voltage Range
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
0V ac
85V ac
?
2–14
264V ac
Operating Range
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L16BBB Wiring Diagram (Sinking Input Configuration)
14–30V dc
VDC
Com
NOT
NOT DC
USED USED COM
14–30V dc
VDC +
I/0
Hardware
Note: Refer to page 2–2 for additional input configuration options.
I/1
I/2
O/0
VAC
VDC
VDC
Com
I/3
DC
COM
VDC +
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
Sourcing Outputs
DC IN
+ 24V –
VAC
VDC
O/1
DC
24V+
DC
O/2
O/3
O/4
NOT
O/5 24V– USED
CR
VAC 1
VDC 1
VDC 1
COM
VAC 2
VAC 1
COM
VDC 2
VAC 2
COM
VDC 2
COM
1761-L16BBB Input Voltage Range
0V dc
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
5V dc
Off
14V dc
?
26.4V dc @ 55° C (131° F)
On
1761-L16BBB Output Voltage Range
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
0V dc
20.4V dc
?
26.4V dc
Operating Range
2–15
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L32BBB Wiring Diagram (Sinking Input Configuration)
Note: Refer to page 2–2 for additional input configuration options.
Sinking Configuration
Sourcing Configuration
14–30V dc
14–30V dc
VDC
Com
NOT
NOT DC
USED USED COM
I/0
VDC +
VDC +
I/1
I/2
O/0
VAC
VDC
I/3
DC
COM
O/1
DC
24V+
VDC
Com
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
I/10
I/11
I/12
I/13
I/14
I/15
O/8
O/9
O/10 O/11 24V–
DC
NOT
USED
I/16
I/17
I/18
I/19
Sourcing Outputs
DC IN
+ 24V –
VAC
VDC
O/2
O/3
O/4
O/5
O/6
O/7
CR
VAC 1
VAC 2
VAC 1
COM
VDC 1
VDC 2
VDC 2
COM
VAC 2
COM
VDC 1
COM
1761-L32BBB Input Voltage Range
0V dc
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
5V dc
Off
14V dc
?
26.4V dc @ 55° C (131° F)
On
1761-L32BBB Output Voltage Range
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
0V dc
20.4V dc
?
2–16
26.4V dc
Operating Range
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L20AWA-5A Wiring Diagram
Note: Refer to pages 2–20 through 2–22 for additional information on
analog wiring.
79–132V ac
NOT
NOT AC
USED USED COM
L1
I/0
I/1
Analog
Channels
79–132V ac
L2/N
I/2
L2/N
I/3
AC
COM
L1
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
I/10
I/11
IA
SHD
IA/0
V (+)
IA/1
V (+)
IA
(–)
IA
SHD
IA/2
I (+)
IA/3
I (+)
IA
(–)
85–264 VAC
L1
VAC
VDC
L2/N
VAC
O/0 VDC
O/1
VAC
VDC
CR
VAC
O/2
O/3 VDC
CR
NOT
OA
O/4
O/5
O/6
O/7 USED SHD
CR
CR
CR
CR
OA/0
V (+)
OA/0
I (+)
OA
(–)
Analog
Channel
VAC 2
VDC 1
VAC 2
COM
VAC 1
VDC 2
VDC 1
COM
VDC 2
COM
VAC 1
COM
1761-L20AWA-5A Discrete Input Voltage Range
0V ac
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
79V ac
20V ac
Off
?
132V ac
On
1761-L20AWA-5A Relay Output Voltage Range
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
0V ac 5V ac
0V dc 5V dc
?
264V ac
125V dc
Operating Range
2–17
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L20BWA-5A Wiring Diagram (Sinking Input Configuration)
Note: Refer to page 2–2 for additional discrete configuration options.
Refer to pages 2–20 through 2–22 for additional information on
analog wiring.
Analog
Channels
14–30V dc
VDC (–)
VDC (+)
VDC (+)
VDC (–)
+ 24V –
DC
COM
DC OUT
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
DC
COM
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
I/10
I/11
IA
SHD
IA/0
V (+)
IA/1
V (+)
IA
(–)
IA
SHD
IA/2
I (+)
IA/3
I (+)
IA
(–)
85–264 VAC
L1
VAC
VDC
L2/N
VAC
O/0 VDC
O/1
VAC
VDC
VAC
O/2
CR
NOT
OA
O/3 VDC
O/4
O/5
O/6
O/7 USED SHD
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
OA/0
V (+)
OA/0
I (+)
OA
(–)
Analog
Channel
VAC 2
VDC 1
VAC 2
COM
VAC 1
VDC 2
VDC 1
COM
VDC 2
COM
VAC 1
COM
1761-L20BWA-5A Discrete Input Voltage Range
0V dc
0V dc
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
14V dc
14V dc
5V dc
5V dc
Off
?
26.4V dc @ 55° C (131° F)
30V dc @ 30° C (86° F)
On
1761-L20BWA-5A Relay Output Voltage Range
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
0V ac 5V ac
0V dc 5V dc
?
2–18
264V ac
125V dc
Operating Range
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
1761-L20BWB-5A Wiring Diagram (Sinking Input Configuration)
Note: Refer to page 2–2 for additional discrete configuration options.
Refer to pages 2–20 through 2–22 for additional information on
analog wiring.
14–30V dc
VDC (–)
NOT
NOT DC
USED USED COM
DC IN
+ 24V –
I/0
I/1
VAC
VDC
Analog
Channels
14–30V dc
VDC +
I/2
I/3
VAC
O/0 VDC
O/1
VDC (–)
DC
COM
VDC (+)
I/4
VAC
VDC
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
I/10
VAC
O/2
CR
I/11
IA
SHD
NOT
OA
O/3 VDC
O/4
O/5
O/6
O/7 USED SHD
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
IA/0
V (+)
IA/1
V (+)
OA/0
V (+)
IA
(–)
OA/0
I (+)
IA
SHD
IA/2
I (+)
IA/3
I (+)
IA
(–)
OA
(–)
Analog
Channel
VAC 1
VDC 2
VDC 3
VDC 2
COM
VAC 1
COM
VDC 1
VDC 3
COM
VDC 1
COM
1761-L20BWB-5A Discrete Input Voltage Range
0V dc
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
5V dc
Off
14V dc
?
26.4V dc @ 55° C (131° F)
On
1761-L20BWB-5A Relay Output Voltage Range
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
0V ac 5V ac
0V dc 5V dc
?
264V ac
125V dc
Operating Range
2–19
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
Minimizing Electrical Noise on
Analog Controllers
Inputs on analog employ digital high frequency filters that significantly
reduce the effects of electrical noise on input signals. However, because of
the variety of applications and environments where analog controllers are
installed and operated, it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise
will be removed by the input filters.
Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of
environmental noise on analog signals:
• install the MicroLogix 1000 system in a properly rated (i.e., NEMA)
enclosure. Make sure that the MicroLogix 1000 system is properly
grounded.
• use Belden cable #8761 for wiring the analog channels making sure that
the drain wire and foil shield are properly earth grounded.
• route the Belden cable separate from any other wiring. Additional noise
immunity can be obtained by routing the cables in grounded conduit.
A system may malfunction due to a change in the operating environment
after a period of time. We recommend periodically checking system
operation, particularly when new machinery or other noise sources are
installed near the MicroLogix 1000 system.
Grounding Your Analog Cable
Use shielded communication cable (Belden #8761). The Belden cable has
two signal wires (black and clear), one drain wire and a foil shield. The
drain wire and foil shield must be grounded at one end of the cable. Do not
earth ground the drain wire and foil shield at both ends of the cable.
Foil Shield
Insulation
Black Wire
Clear Wire
2–20
Drain Wire
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
Wiring Your Analog Channels
Analog input circuits can monitor current and voltage signals and convert
them to serial digital data. The analog output can support either a voltage or
a current function.
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
(V) Voltage
(I) Current
Sensor 1
Sensor 4
(I) Current
(V) Voltage
Jumper
unused
inputs.
I/10
I/11
IA
SHD
IA/0
V (+)
VAC
VDC
O/4
O/5
O/6
IA/1
V (+)
IA
(–)
IA
SHD
IA/2
I (+)
IA/3
I (+)
IA
(–)
NOT
OA
OA/0
V (+)
OA/0
I (+)
OA
(–)
O/7 USED SHD
– OR –
You can configure either voltage
or current output operation.
meter
For increased noise immunity, connect a ground wire directly from the shield
terminals to chassis ground.
Important: The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs.
Use a power supply that matches the transmitter specifications.
2-Wire Transmitter
Power
Supply
+
–
3-Wire Transmitter
Power
Supply
+
–
+
–
Controller
IA/0 – 3 (+)
IA (–)
Transmitter
Supply
Signal
GND
+
–
4-Wire Transmitter
Power
Supply
Transmitter
Transmitter
Supply
Signal
+
–
+
–
Controller
IA/0 – 3 (+)
IA (–)
Controller
IA/0 – 3 (+)
IA (–)
2–21
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
Analog Voltage and Current
Input and Output Ranges
The following drawings show the analog voltage input range, analog current
input range, analog voltage output range and analog current output range.
Analog Voltage Input Range
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
–10.5V dc
–24V dc
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
10.5V dc
Operating Range
Underrange
24V dc
Overrange
Analog Current Input Range
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
–21 mA
–50 mA
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
21 mA
Underrange
Operating Range
50 mA
Overrange
Note: The analog voltage inputs are protected to withstand the application of
24V dc without damage to the controller. The analog current inputs are
protected to withstand the application of 50 mA without damage.
Analog Voltage Output Range
0V dc
10V dc
Operating Range
Analog Current Output Range
20 mA
4 mA
Operating Range
Note: The analog outputs are protected to withstand the short circuiting of
the voltage or current outputs without damage to the controller.
For information on analog signal and data word values using the nominal
transfer function formula, see page 7–4.
2–22
Chapter 2
Wiring Your Controller
Wiring Your Controller for
High-Speed Counter
Applications
To wire the controller for high-speed counter applications, use input
terminals I/0, I/1, I/2, and I/3. Refer to chapter 14 for information on using
the high-speed counter.
Shielded cable is required for high-speed input signals 0–3 when the filter
setting is set to either 0.10 ms or 0.075 ms. We recommend Belden #9503
for lengths up to 305 m (1000 ft). Shields should be grounded only at the
signal source end of the cable. Ground the shield to the case of the signal
source, so energy coupled to the shield is not delivered to the signal source’s
electronics.
2–23
Chapter
3
Connecting the System
This chapter describes how to wire your controller system. The method you
use and cabling required to connect your controller depends on what type of
system you are employing. Specifically, this chapter contains information
on:
• connecting the HHP
• DH-485 connections
• establishing communication
Important: In order to access the functionality of the Series C or later
discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers, you must
configure your program to operate with these controllers. See
page 18–18 for more information.
Connecting the HHP
Use a serial cable to connect the MicroLogix 1000 HHPs RS-232
communication channel to the MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller, as
shown below.
!
ATTENTION: Chassis ground, user 24V ground, and RS-232
ground are internally connected. You must connect the chassis
ground terminal screw to chassis ground prior to connecting any
devices. It is important that you understand your programming
device’s grounding system before connecting to the controller.
MicroLogix 1000
Programmable Controller
1761-CBL-HM02
Hand-Held Programmer
3–1
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
The 1761-CBL-HM02 Series B or higher cable with pinouts is shown below.
Use this cable to connect the MicroLogix 1000 HHP to the MicroLogix 1000
Programmable Controller.
Connects to the HHP
1 36
Connects to the Controller
7
2
4
5 8
8–pin Locking Mini DIN
8–pin Mini DIN
6 78
3
4
5
12
20188
Programming Device
8–Pin
+24V
1
2
Controller
8–Pin
+24V
1
–24V
–24V
2
RXD
TXD
3
3
4
5
5
6
6
3–2
7
7
TXD
RXD
4
8
GND
GND
8
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
Connecting to a DH-485
Network
Important: Only Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and
all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support DH-485
network connections. In order to access the DH-485
functionality of the Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete
and MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers, you must configure
your program to operate with these controllers. See page 18–18
for more information.
MicroLogix 1000 (Series C or later
discrete or MicroLogix 1000 analog)
PC
APS
1761-CBL-AM00
or
1761-CBL-HM02
PC to port 1
or port 2
connection from
port 1 or port 2
to MicroLogix
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
1761-CBL-AP00
or
1761-CBL-PM02
1761-CBL-AP00
or
1761-CBL-PM02
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
24V dc
(A user supply is not needed if a
MicroLogix 1000 controller is
connected to port 2.)
1747-CP3
or
1761-CBL-AC00
24V dc
(user supplied)
MicroLogix DH-485 Network
DB-9 RS-232 port
mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port
DH-485 port
Recommended Tools
To connect a DH-485 network, you need tools to strip the shielded cable and
to attach the cable and terminators to the AIC+ Advanced Interface
Converter. We recommend the following equipment (or equivalent):
Description
Part Number
Manufacturer
Shielded Twisted Pair Cable
#3106A or #9842
Belden
Stripping Tool
45-164
Ideal Industries
1/8 ” Slotted Screwdriver
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
DH-485 Communication Cable
The suggested DH-485 communication cable is either Belden #3106A or
#9842. The cable is jacketed and shielded with one or two twisted wire pairs
and a drain wire.
One pair provides a balanced signal line, and one additional wire is used for
a common reference line between all nodes on the network. The shield
reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial environment on
network communication.
3–3
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments
daisy-chained together. The total length of the cable segments cannot exceed
1219 m (4000 ft).
When cutting cable segments, make them long enough to route them from
one AIC+ to the next with sufficient slack to prevent strain on the connector.
Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and kinking in the cable.
Use these instructions for wiring the Belden #3106A or #9842 cable. (If you
are using standard Allen-Bradley cables, see the Cable Selection Guide on
page 3–8.)
Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH-485 Connector
Important: A daisy-chained network is recommended. We do not
recommend the following:
Belden
#3106A or
#9842
Belden
#3106A or
#9842
Belden
#3106A or
#9842
Connector
Connector
Connector
Incorrect
Single Cable Connection
Orange with White Stripes
White with Orange Stripes
Shrink Tubing
Recommended
Blue (#3106A) or
Blue with White Stripes (#9842)
6 Termination
5
A
4
B
3 Common
2 Shield
1 Chassis Ground
Drain Wire
Multiple Cable Connection
to Previous Device
to Successive Device
3–4
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
The table below shows connections for Belden #3106A.
For this Wire/Pair
Connect this Wire
To this Terminal
Shield/Drain
Non-jacketed
Terminal 2 – Shield
Blue
Blue
Terminal 3 – (Common)
White with Orange Stripe
Terminal 4 – (Data B)
Orange with White Stripe
Terminal 5 – (Data A)
White/Orange
i e ra e
The table below shows connections for Belden #9842.
For this Wire/Pair
Shield/Drain
Connect this Wire
To this Terminal
Non-jacketed
Terminal 2 – Shield
White with Blue Stripe
Cut back – no connection➀
Blue with White Stripe
Terminal 3 – (Common)
White with Orange Stripe
Terminal 4 – (Data B)
Orange with White Stripe
Terminal 5 – (Data A)
Blue/White
e ie
White/Orange
i e ra e
➀ To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable, cut back the white with blue stripe wire
immediately after the the insulation jacket is removed. This wire is not used by DH-485.
Grounding and Terminating the DH-485 Network
Only one connector at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and 2
jumpered together. This provides an earth ground connection for the shield
of the communication cable.
Both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 jumpered together.
This connects the termination impedance (of 120Ω) that is built into each
AIC+ as required by the DH-485 specification.
End-of-Line Termination
Jumper
Jumper
Belden #3106A or #9842 Cable
1219 m (4000 ft) Maximum
Jumper
3–5
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
Connecting the AIC+
Important: Only Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and
all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support DH-485
network connections.
You can connect an unpowered AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, to the
network without disrupting network activity. In addition, if a MicroLogix
1000 controller powers an AIC+ that is connected to the network, network
activity will not be disrupted should the MicroLogix 1000 controller be
removed from the AIC+.
The figure below shows the external wiring connections and specifications of
the AIC+.
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter
(1761-NET-AIC)
Item
Description
Port 1 – DB-9 RS-232, DTE
Port 2 – mini-DIN 8 RS-232
Port 3 – DH-485 Phoenix plug
DC Power Source selector switch
(cable = port 2 power source, external = external power source connected to item 5)
Terminals for external 24V dc power supply and chassis ground
For additional information on connecting to the AIC+, see the Advanced
Interface Converter (AIC+) and DeviceNet Interface (DNI) Installation
Instructions, Publication 1761-5.11.
3–6
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
DF1 Isolated Point-to-Point Connection
1761-CBL-AM00
or
1761-CBL-HM02
MicroLogix 1000
PC
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
Selection Switch Up
24V dc
(Not needed in this configuration since
the MicroLogix 1000 provides power to
the AIC+ via port 2.)
1747-CP3 or 1761-CBL-AC00
DH-485 Network Connection
PC
MicroLogix 1000 (Series C or later discrete and all analog)
APS
1761-CBL-AM00
or
1761-CBLHM02
PC to port 1
or port 2
connection from
port 1 or port 2
to MicroLogix
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
1761-CBL-AP00
or
1761-CBL-PM02
1761-CBL-AP00
or
1761-CBL-PM02
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
24V dc
(A user supply is not needed if a
MicroLogix 1000 controller is
connected to port 2.)
24V dc
(user supplied)
1747-CP3
or
1761-CBL-AC00
MicroLogix DH-485 Network
DB-9 RS-232 port
mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port
DH-485 port
DF1 Isolated Modem Connection
1761-CBL-AM00
or
1761-CBL-HM02
MicroLogix 1000
Modem
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
Selection Switch Up
24V dc
(Not needed in this configuration
since the MicroLogix 1000 provides
power to the AIC+ via port 2.)
User supplied cable
3–7
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
Cable Selection Guide
1747-CP3
1761-CBL-AC00
Cable
to AIC+
External
Power Supply
Required ➀
Power Selection Switch
Setting➀
SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processor, channel 0
port 1
yes
external
PC COM port
port 1
yes
external
PanelView 550 through NULL modem adapter
port 1
yes
external
Port 1 on another AIC+
port 1
yes
external
to AIC+
External
Power Supply
Required ➀
Power Selection Switch
Setting➀
SLC 500 Fixed,
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and SLC 5/03 processors
port 3
yes
external
PanelView 550 RJ45 port
port 3
yes
external
to AIC+
External
Power Supply
Required
MicroLogix 1000
port 2
no
cable
to port 2 on another AIC+
port 2
yes
external
Length
17 7 P3
1747-CP3
1761 L 00
1761-CBL-AC00
3 (9.8
3m
9 ft)
f
45 cm
c (17.7
17 7 iin)
Connections from
1761-CBL-AS09
1761-CBL-AS03
Cable
1761-CBL-AS03
1761-CBL-AS09
Length
3m (9.8 ft)
9.5m (31.17 ft)
Connections from
1761-CBL-HM02
1761-CBL-AM00
Cable
1761-CBL-AM00
1761
L M00
1761-CBL-HM02➁
Length
45 ccm (17.7
17 7 iin)
2 (6.5
2m
6 ft)
f
Connections from
Power Selection Switch
Setting
➀ External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the
selection switch should be set to cable.
➁ Series B cables or higher are required for hardware handshaking.
3–8
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
1761-CBL-PM02
1761-CBL-AP00
Cable
1761-CBL-AP00
1761
L P00
1761-CBL-PM02➁
to AIC+
External
Power Supply
Required
port 2
yes
MicroLogix 1000
port 1
yes➀
external
external➀
PanelView 550 through NULL modem adapter
port 2
yes
external
PC COM port
port 2
yes
external
to AIC+
External
Power Supply
Required
port 1
yes➀
Length
45 ccm (17.7
17 7 iin)
2 (6.5
2m
6 ft)
f
Connections from
SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processors, channel 0
Power Selection Switch
Setting
user supplied cable
Cable
straight 9–25 pin
Length
––
Connections from
modem or other communication device
Power Selection Switch
Setting
external➀
➀ External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the
selection switch should be set to cable.
➁ Series B cables or higher are required for hardware handshaking.
3–9
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
Recommended User-Supplied Components
These components can be purchased from your local electronics supplier.
Component
Recommended Model
external power supply and chassis
ground
power supply rated for 20.4–28.8V dc
NULL modem adapter
standard AT
straight 9–25 pin RS-232 cable
see table below for port information if making own cables
DB-9 RS-232 Port 1
1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02
cable straight D connector
➀
8-pin mini DIN
Item
DH-485 connector Port 3
Port 1
DB-9 RS-232
Port 2➀
(1761-CBL-PM02 cable)
Port 3
DH-485 Connector
received line signal detector (DCD)
same state as port 1’s DCD signal
chassis ground
received data (RxD)
received data (RxD)
cable shield
transmitted data (TxD)
transmitted data (TxD)
signal ground
DTE ready (DTR)
DTE ready (DTR)
DH-485 data B
signal common (GRD)
signal common (GRD)
DH-485 data A
DCE ready (DSR)
DCE ready (DSR)
termination
request to send (RTS)
request to send (RTS)
not applicable
clear to send (CTS)
clear to send (CTS)
not applicable
not applicable
not applicable
not applicable
➀ An 8-pin mini DIN connector is used for making connections to port 2. This connector is not commercially
available. If you are making a cable to connect to port 2, you must configure your cable to connect to the
Allen-Bradley cable shown above.
➁ On port 1, pin 4 is electronically jumpered to pin 6. Whenever the AIC+ is powered on, pin 4 will match the
state of pin 6.
➂ In the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable, pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB-9 connector.
3–10
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
Powering the AIC+
!
ATTENTION: If you use an external power supply, it must be
24V dc. Permanent damage will result if miswired with the
wrong power source.
Set the DC Power Source selector switch to EXTERNAL before connecting
the power supply to the AIC+.
Bottom View
24VDC
DC
NEUT
CHS
GND
!
ATTENTION: Always connect the CHS GND (chassis ground)
terminal to the nearest earth ground. This connection must be
made whether or not an external 24V dc supply is used.
In normal operation with the MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller
connected to port 2 of the AIC+, the controller powers the AIC+. Any AIC+
not connected to a controller requires a 24V dc power supply. The AIC+
requires 85 mA at 24V dc.
If both the controller and external power are connected to the AIC+, the
power selection switch determines what device powers the AIC+.
Power Options
Below are two options for powering the AIC+:
• Use the 24V dc user power supply (200 mA maximum) built into the
MicroLogix controller. The AIC+ is powered through a hard-wired
connection using a communication cable (1761-CBL-HM02, or
equivalent) connected to port 2.
• Use an external DC power supply with the following specifications:
– operating voltage: 24V dc +20% / –15%
– output current: 120 mA minimum
– rated NEC
Make a hard-wired connection from the external supply to the screw
terminals on the bottom of the AIC+.
3–11
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
!
ATTENTION: If you use an external power supply, it must be
24V dc. Permanent damage will result if miswired with the
wrong power source.
Installing and Attaching the AIC+
1. Take care when installing the AIC+ in an enclosure so that the cable
connecting the MicroLogix 1000 controller to the AIC+ does not interfere
with the enclosure door.
2. Carefully plug the terminal block into the DH-485 port on the AIC+ you
are putting on the network. Allow enough cable slack to prevent stress on
the plug.
3. Provide strain relief for the Belden cable after it is wired to the terminal
block. This guards against breakage of the Belden cable wires.
Establishing Communication
When you connect a MicroLogix 1000 controller, it automatically determines
which protocol is active (DF1 or DH-485), and establishes communication
accordingly. Therefore, no special configuration is required to connect to
either network.
However, to shorten the connection time, you can specify which protocol the
controller should attempt to establish communication with first. This is done
using the Primary Protocol bit, S:0/10. The default setting for this bit is DF1
(0). If the primary protocol bit is set to DF1, the MicroLogix 1000 controller
will attempt to connect using the configured DF1 protocol: either full-duplex
or half-duplex slave. To have the controller first attempt DH-485
communication, set this bit to 1.
For DH-485 networks that will only contain MicroLogix controllers, at least
one controller must have its primary protocol bit set to 1 so that the network
can be initialized.
3–12
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
Automatic Protocol Switching
The MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000
analog controllers perform automatic protocol switching between DH-485
and the configured DF1 protocol. (The controller cannot automatically
switch between DF1 full-duplex and DF1 half-duplex slave.) This feature
allows you to switch from active communication on a DF1 half-duplex
network to the DH-485 protocol to make program changes.
Simply disconnect the MicroLogix controller from the DF1 half-duplex
network and connect it to your personal computer. The controller recognizes
the computer is attempting to communicate using the DH-485 protocol and
automatically switches to it. When your program changes are complete, you
can disconnect your computer, reconnect the modem, and the controller
automatically switches back to the configured DF1 protocol. For example, if
you are using the DH-485 protocol to make program changes and you
connect an HHP, you can switch to active communication on a DF1
full-duplex network.
The following baud rate limitations affect autoswitching:
• If the configured DH-485 baud rate is 19200, the configured DF1 baud
rate must be 4800 or greater.
• If the configured DH-485 baud rate is 9600, the configured DF1 baud rate
must be 2400 or greater.
DeviceNet Communications
You can also connect a MicroLogix to a DeviceNet network using the
DeviceNet Interface (DNI), catalog number 1761-NET-DNI. For additional
information on connecting the DNI, see the Advanced Interface Converter
(AIC+) and DeviceNet Interface (DNI) Installation Instructions, Publication
1761-5.11. For information on how to configure and commission a DNI, see
the DeviceNet Interface User Manual, Publication 1761-6.5.
The figure that follows identifies the ports of the DNI.
DNI DeviceNet Interface
(1761-NET-DNI)
V–
CAN_L
NET
SHIEL
D CAN_H
V+
Use this write–on
area to mark the
DeviceNet node
Address.
MOD
DeviceNet
(Port 1)
(Replacement
connector part no.
1761–RPL– 0000)
–
NODE
DANGER
TX/RX
GND
RS–232
(Port 2)
3–13
Chapter 3
Connecting the System
Cable Selection Guide
1761-CBL-HM02
1761-CBL-AM00
Cable
1761-CBL-AM00
1761
L M00
1761-CBL-HM02➀
Length
45 ccm (17.7
17 7 iin)
2 (6.5
2m
6 fft)
Connections from
port 2
MicroLogix 1000 (all series)
port 2
1761-CBL-PM02
1761-CBL-AP00
Cable
Length
1761-CBL-APM00
1761
L PM00
1761-CBL-PM02➀
45 ccm (17.7
17 7 iin)
2 (6.5
2m
6 fft)
Connections from
to DNI
SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processors, channel 0
port 2
PC COM port
port 2
➀ Series B cables or higher are required for hardware handshaking.
3–14
to DNI
MicroLogix 1000 (all series)
Chapter
4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
This chapter describes your MicroLogix 1000 Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP), its memory module, and its power-up procedure. It also walks you
through the start-up displays and helps you understand some of the
functionality options available to you.
Read this chapter for information about:
• your HHP
• installing memory modules
• the keys you use
• the power-up sequence
• the HHPs functional areas
• the HHPs defaults
Important: The table below provides software compatibility information
necessary for full functionality of your MicroLogix 1000
controller.
Software Package
Version x.x
Functionality Level
v2.10.11 or later
RSLogix 500
9324-RL03000END
Full functionality for MicroLogix 1000 Series D and
analog controllers
v2.0.57
Full functionality for Series D controllers only
RSLogix
R
L ix 500
00 Starter
ar er
9323-RL0100END
v1.24
Series
eries C functionality
f c i a i only
v1.05
A.I.I 500
00
9323 300D
9323-S5300D
A.I.I Micro
Micr
9323-MX300EN
v8.16 or later
Full functionality for MicroLogix 1000 Series D and
analog controllers
v8.15
Series C functionality only
v8.14 or earlier
Series C functionality only; Cannot download to
Series D or analog controllers
APS
9323-PA2E
v6.04 or earlier
MPS
9323-PA1E
v1.0
Series
eries A/B functionality
f c i a i only
About Your HHP
The MicroLogix 1000 Hand-Held Programmer (HHP) allows you to create,
edit, monitor, and troubleshoot Instruction List (Boolean) programs for your
micro controller. With the HHP and either a 10-, 16-, 32-I/O point or analog
micro controller, you eliminate the need for hard-wired relay logic. This
device also allows you to transfer programs to and from an optional
removable memory module.
4–1
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
The hardware features of the HHP are:
1
1 RS-232 communication channel
2 16 character × 2 line display
3 30 key rubber/carbon keypad
2
3
Additional hardware features of the MicroLogix 1000 HHP are:
1
2
3
1 Memory module door
2 Memory module
3 Memory module socket
4–2
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
Installing the Optional
Memory Module
Two optional memory modules are available for the MicroLogix 1000 HHP:
• 8 Kbyte memory module, 1761-HHM-K08 – stores 1 program (possibly
more than 1, depending on program size)
• 64 Kbyte memory module, 1761-HHM-K64 – stores a minimum of
8 programs
For information on loading and storing programs to your memory module,
see page 19–1.
!
!
ATTENTION: Always remove power from the HHP before
inserting or removing the memory module. This guards against
possible damage to the module, as well as undesired controller
faults.
ATTENTION: To avoid potential damage to the memory
modules, handle them by the ends of the carrier or edges of the
plastic housing. Skin oil and dirt can corrode metallic surfaces,
inhibiting electrical contact. Also, do not expose memory
modules to surfaces or areas that may typically hold an
electrostatic charge. Electrostatic charges can alter or destroy
memory.
To insert a memory module use the following procedure:
1. If the MicroLogix 1000 HHP is connected to the controller, remove the
cable from the HHP or turn off power to the controller.
2. Remove the memory module door.
3. Locate the socket on the processor board. Place the memory module onto
the socket and press firmly in place.
4. Replace the memory module door.
5. If the MicroLogix 1000 HHP was connected to the controller, reconnect
the cable to the HHP, or restore power to the controller.
4–3
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
The Keys You Use
When using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP, you will be pressing individual keys
and key sequences for the purposes identified in the illustration below.
Details about individual key functions and key sequences are provided in this
manual at their point of use.
Diagnostic/troubleshooting keys. Allow you to get
your system running and keep it running.
Instruction keys. Allow you to enter all of your
program’s instructions.
General editing keys. Allow you to make
changes in a snap.
Navigation keys. Allow you to move through the
entire program quickly and easily.
Understanding the Keys’ Context Sensitivity
If you look at the labels on each key, you will notice that most of the keys
perform more than one function. The MicroLogix 1000 HHP is designed to
distinguish which function you want to perform, based on the context you are
in at the time you press the key.
4–4
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
Accessing Additional Characters
Several characters are available that are not displayed on the keypad. These
are outlined in the table below.
To Access This
Character:
Press This Key
Sequence:
#
FUN
A
FUN
B
F UN
C
FUN
D
FUN
E
FUN
F
FUN
ANB
0
7
8
9
4
5
6
These characters are useful for entering indexed addresses, hexadecimal
values, and program names.
4–5
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
Identifying the Power-Up
Sequence
When the MicroLogix 1000 HHP is first connected to the controller, the
following sequence occurs:
1. The HHP performs diagnostic self tests. While doing this it displays the
following Copyright screens:
M I C R O P R OGR A MME R
V E R S I ON X . X X
A L L E N - B R A D L E Y C O
C OP Y R I GH T
1 9 9 4
A L L
R I GH T S
R E S E R V E D
These screens will always appear in English, even if you later select an
alternate language for the HHP.
2. The HHP begins connecting to the controller and displays:
C ON N E C T I N G. . .
The HHP automatically finds the controller’s baud rate and connects to it
at that rate.
3. After a successful connection, the HHP displays the home screen.
For discrete controllers:
M I C R O
F R E E : 7 3 7
R P R G
F I L E : 0 2
For analog controllers:
M I C R O
F R E E : 7 2 3
R P R G
F I L E : 0 2
Important: If an error occurs during the power-up sequence, refer to
chapter 20, Troubleshooting, for a list of error codes.
4–6
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
Understanding the HHPs
Functional Areas
There are six main functional areas of the MicroLogix 1000 HHP, each with
a unique purpose. They are:
Home
Menu
Mode
Program
Monitor
Data
Monitor
Multi-Point
Function
Descriptions of each of these areas and the tasks you can complete follow.
Home
Home is the functional area you enter after the HHP powers up. It provides
important program and controller information. You can access all other
functional areas from home.
Screen Definition
The following figure shows the home screen and identifies its main sections.
Program Name
Instruction
Words Free
Force Indicator
P R OGN A ME
F R E E : x x x
Section
Controller Mode
F
R P R G
F I L E : x x
Program File
Number
Description
Program Name
The name of the program currently in the controller.
Force Indicator
If forces exist in the controller, an F appears. If no forces
exist, nothing appears. (See page 18–35 for information
on forcing I/O.)
Controller Mode
The current mode of the controller is displayed. If
program edits exist, the mode flashes. (See page 18–21
for information on valid modes.)
Instruction Words Free
Program File Number
The number of instruction words still available in the
current program.
On entry to the program monitor, the file number to
monitor defaults to this file.
4–7
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
How to Complete Tasks
Home
From Home you can
access these areas:
Menu
Mode
Program Monitor
Data Monitor
Multi-Point Function
You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from
the home screen.
To:
Press:
access the menu options
MENU
I
change the controller’s mode (See page
18–23.)
MODE
O
access the multi-point functional area (See
page 18–31.)
MT-PT
B
+
FAULT
view faults (See page 20–11.)
PRE/LEN
FAULT
clear a fault manually (See page 20–11.)
PRE/LEN
access the program monitor functional area
(See page 17–1.)
access the data monitor functional area (See
page 18–27.)
Access Menu by
pressing this key:
MENU
I
MON
MON
ALL
D EL
ENT
data file
type
(e.g. I)
ENT
Menu
From the menu functional area, you can perform various program and system
tasks. The available menu options are:
1. LANGUAGE
2. ACCEPT EDITS
3. PROG CONFIG
4. MEM MODULE
5. CLEAR FORCES
6. CLEAR PROG
7. COMMS➀
8. CONTRAST
(See page 4–17.)
(See page 18–21.)
(See page 18–1.)
(See page 19–1.)
(See pages 18–37 and 18–39.)
(See page 19–6.)
(See page 19–6.)
(See page 4–18.)
➀ If you have configured your program for operation with Series A or B MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers, this
menu option is BAUD RATE. (See page 19–7.)
4–8
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
Screen Definition
The following figure shows the menu screen and identifies its main sections.
Selected Menu
Option
1 . L A N GU A GE
2 . A C C E P T
E D I T S
Section
Menu Options
Description
Menu Options
The list of options available in the menu functional area.
These options are described in the manual at their point
of use.
Selected Menu Option
The option that the flashing arrow is pointing to.
How to Complete Tasks
Menu
You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from
the menu screen.
To:
go to a menu option when you know its
corresponding number
choose the selected menu option
Press:
menu
option #
ENT
scroll up or down between the menu
options
return to the previous screen
ESC
4–9
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
Access Mode by
pressing this key:
MODE
O
Mode
From the mode functional area, you can change the current mode of the
controller.
Screen Definition
The following figure shows the mode screen and identifies its main sections.
Active Controller Mode
A C T I V E MOD E : R P RG
RP R G
R R U N
Controller Mode
Options
Section
Active Controller Mode
Controller Mode
Options
Description
The current mode of the controller is displayed. See the
table below for a list of the possible display entries.
The controller mode options you can select (RPRG,
RRUN, RCSN, and RSSN) are accessed from this
screen using the arrow keys. Descriptions of each of
these modes and how you change between them can be
found beginning on page 18–21.
The table below shows the possible active controller mode display entries
and the corresponding micro controller mode.
Display Entry
Micro Controller Mode
RPRG
Remote Program
RRUN
Remote Run
RCSN
Remote Test – Continuous Scan
RSSN
Remote Test – Single Scan
RSUS
Remote Suspend➀
FLT
Fault➁
➀ The controller only enters suspend mode if you run a program that executes a suspend instruction.
➁ The controller only enters fault mode if, while a program is executing, a fault occurs within the operating
system or the program, or if S1/13 is set at any time. See page 20–11 for information on identifying and
clearing faults.
4–10
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
How to Complete Tasks
Mode
You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from
the mode screen.
To:
Press:
scroll left or right between the controller mode
options
Access Program
Monitor by pressing
these keys:
MON
E NT
choose the controller option that is currently
highlighted
E NT
return to the previous screen
ESC
Program Monitor
From the program monitor functional area you can create, view, edit,
and troubleshoot your controller programs.
Screen Definition
The following figure shows a typical screen for a bit instruction and
identifies its main sections.
Rung
Number
Controller/
Edit Mode
P 0 0 0
I / 7
Instruction
/
Force Indication
F Ox
0
Data Value
Address
Section
Description
Controller/Edit Mode
The current mode of the controller is displayed in
abbreviated form, where P=RPRG, R=RRUN, T=RCSN
or RSSN, S=RSUS, and F=FLT. If the controller is in
RPRG you can utilize the editing modes as well, where
P=append and O=overwrite. The mode will flash when
edits exist.
Rung Number
The rung number currently being viewed is displayed.
Instruction
The instruction currently being viewed is displayed.
Address
The address currently being viewed.
Force Indication
Indicates that the bit currently being viewed is being
forced.
x=N if forced on, and x=F if forced off. If no force exists,
this field is blank.
Data Value
The data value of the address is shown here.
4–11
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
Program
Monitor
From Program
Monitor you can
access these areas:
Menu
Mode
Data Monitor
Multi-Point Function
How to Complete Tasks
You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from
the program monitor screen.
To:
Press:
access the menu options
MENU
I
change the controller’s mode (See page
18–23.)
MODE
O
access the multi-point functional area (See
page 18–31.)
MT-PT
B
add a bit address to the next available
location in the multi-point list (See page
18–32.)
+
+
MT-PT
B
FUN
execute the trace feature (See page 20–8.)
TRACE
S
delete program instructions, or to delete typed
characters when entering parameters (See
page 17–6.)
D EL
delete program rungs, or to delete all typed
characters from a line (See page 17–6.)
A LL
ALL
DE L
FUN
NEW
RUNG
T
add a rung to the current program file after
the current rung
-
force On an external input data file bit or
output circuit (See page 18–35.)
FON
C
force Off an external input data file bit or
output circuit (See page 18–35.)
FOF
R
-
-
remove a set force from an external input
data file bit or output circuit. (See page
18–35.)
FOF
R
FUN
or
-
FON
C
FUN
search for an instruction or address (See
page 17–8.)
SEARCH
N
toggle the editing mode between overwrite
and append (See page 17–3.)
OV R
view faults manually (See page 20–11.)
clear a fault manually (See page 20–11.)
FAULT
PRE/LEN
FAULT
PRE/LEN
ALL
D EL
Continued on following page
4–12
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
To:
Press:
access the data monitor functional area at the
address shown in the screen
MON
ENT
move up and down between a program’s
rungs and program files
move left and right through each rung of a
program. (When the end of a rung is
reached, the next rung automatically scrolls
into view as you move the cursor right or left
in the program.)
ESC
return to the home screen
enter the # character for an indexed address
(See page 6–9.)
FUN
access the function code table
FUN
MON
data file
type
(e.g. I)
ENT
0
E NT
E NT
enter data you’ve typed or confirm a prompt
Access Data Monitor by pressing
these keys:
ANB
Data Monitor
From the data monitor functional area you can view and edit the data values
used in your controller programs. The data is separated into Output, Input,
Status, Bit, Timer, Counter, Control, and Integer data files.
Screen Definition
The following figure shows an example of an Output data file and identifies
its main sections. (For examples of other data files, see Viewing Data Table
Files on page 18–28.)
Word Address
Bit Address
Force Indication
O / 0
O0
F Ox
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Bit Data
Section
Description
Bit Address
The address of the bit the cursor is currently on.
Word Address
The address of the word currently being viewed.
Force Indication
Indicates that the bit currently being viewed is being forced.
x=N if forced on, and x=F if forced off. If no force exists,
this field is blank.
Bit Data
A binary representation of the data.
4–13
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
Data
Monitor
From Data Monitor
you can access
these areas:
Menu
Mode
Program Monitor
Multi-Point Function
How to Complete Tasks
You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from
the data monitor screen.
To:
Press:
access the menu options
MENU
I
change the controller’s mode (See page
18–23.)
MODE
O
access the multi-point functional area (See
page 18–31.)
MT-PT
B
add a bit address to the next available
location in the multi-point list (See page
18–32.)
+
+
MT-PT
B
FUN
execute the trace feature (See page 20–8.)
TRACE
S
delete typed characters on which the cursor is
located
D EL
delete all typed characters when entering
parameters
A LL
ALL
DE L
FUN
-
force On an external input data file bit or
output circuit (See page 18–35.)
FON
C
force Off an external input data file bit or
output circuit (See page 18–35.)
FOF
R
-
-
remove a set force from an external input
data file bit or output circuit. (See page
18–35.)
FOF
R
FUN
or
-
FON
C
FUN
search for an instruction or address (See
page 17–8.)
view faults manually (See page 20–11.)
clear a fault manually (See page 20–11.)
access the program monitor functional area
(See page 17–1.)
SEARCH
N
FAULT
PRE/LEN
FAULT
PRE/LEN
MON
ALL
D EL
ENT
Continued on following page
4–14
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
To:
Press:
scroll through the data file table
scroll through the bits of individual data files
ESC
return to the home screen
change the radix (See page 18–30.)
+
MT-PT
B
0
E NT
enter data you’ve typed
Access MultiPoint Function by
pressing this key:
ANB
FUN
Multi-Point Function
The multi-point function allows you to simultaneously monitor the data of up
to 16 non-contiguous bit addresses. Since the multi-point list is stored with
the program, you can create a unique list for each program you create. (For
more information on using the multi-point function, see page 18–31.)
Screen Definition
The following figure shows a multi-point screen and identifies its main
sections.
Bit Address
Word Address
Force
Indication
Multi-Point
Indication
I / 1 9
I 1
F Ox
MP
– – – – – – – – – – – – 0 0 1 0
Data Values
Section
Description
Bit Address
The address of the bit the cursor is currently on.
Word Address
The word address of the bit currently being viewed.
Force Indication
Indicates that the bit currently being viewed is being forced.
x=N if forced on, and x=F if forced off. If no force exists,
this field is blank.
Multi-Point Indication
Indicates that you are in the multi-point functional area.
Data Values
The data values of the bit addresses assigned to the
multi-point list are shown here. Dashed lines indicate that
an address has not been assigned to that bit location.
4–15
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
Multi-Point
Function
From Multi-Point
Function you
can access these
areas:
Menu
Mode
Program Monitor
Data Monitor
How to Complete Tasks
You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from the
multi-point screen.
To:
Press:
access the menu options
MENU
I
change the controller’s mode (See page
18–23.)
MODE
O
FAULT
view faults manually (See page 20–11.)
clear a fault manually (See page 20–11.)
PRE/LEN
FAULT
ALL
D EL
PRE/LEN
execute the trace feature (See page 20–8.)
TRACE
S
delete a single address from the multi-point
list (See page 18–34.)
D EL
delete all addresses from the multi-point list
(See page 18–34.)
A LL
ALL
D EL
FUN
-
force On an external input data file bit or
output circuit (See page 18–35.)
FON
C
force Off an external input data file bit or
output circuit (See page 18–35.)
FOF
R
-
-
FOF
R
FUN
remove a set force from an external input
data file bit or output circuit. (See page
18–35.)
or
-
FON
C
FUN
search for an instruction or address (See
page 17–8.)
access the program monitor functional area
(See page 17–1.)
access the data monitor functional area
(See page 18–27.)
SEARCH
N
MON
MON
ENT
data file
type
(e.g. I)
scroll through the multi-point list
4–16
return to the previous screen
ESC
enter data you’ve typed or confirm a prompt
E NT
E NT
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
Changing the HHPs Defaults
When your MicroLogix 1000 HHP arrives, it has the following factory
default settings:
Feature
Default Setting
Language
English
Contrast
You can use the menu options to change the default settings of these features,
as described in the following sections. Any changes you make are saved
when power is cycled, so you will not need to set them every time the HHP
powers up.
Selecting the Language
You can configure the HHP to display prompts and messages in one of six
languages: English, Spanish, German, French, Italian, and Japanese. There
are two methods you can use to select a new default setting.
Using the Menu Option
Follow the steps below to change the language using the menu.
1. Access the menu and choose the option 1.LANGUAGE.
MENU
I
E N GL I S H
E S P A N OL
2. Arrow down to the desired language, select it, and return to the previous
screen.
E NT
ESC
n times
4–17
Chapter 4
Using Your Hand-Held Programmer
Using Short-Cut Keys
The following table shows the short-cut keys you can press from the home
screen to change the language.
To change the
language to:
Press the following keys simultaneously
and hold for 1.5 seconds:
English
ESC
Spanish
German
French
1
ESC
L
ESC
U
ESC
Italian
ES C
Japanese
ESC
2
3
4
5
6
Changing the LCD Display Contrast
Follow the steps below to change the contrast setting for the LCD display.
1. Access the menu and choose the option 8.CONTRAST.
MENU
I
8
C H A N GE
E NT
C ON T R A S T
2. Arrow left or right to select the desired contrast.
3. Enter the selected contrast and return to the previous screen.
E NT
4–18
ES C
Chapter
5
Quick Start for New Users
This chapter can help you get started using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP with
your micro controller. It provides task-oriented procedures to guide you
through a hands-on practice exercise.
Before you begin you should have completed the following tasks:
✔ Your controller should be installed and wired. (See chapters 1 and 2.)
✔ Your HHP should be connected and powered-up. (See chapters 3 and 5.)
What to Do First
Here’s what you’ll be doing to get started with the MicroLogix 1000 HHP:
Preparing to enter a new program
Placing the controller in program mode
Clearing the current program
Entering and running the program
Entering the new program
Changing to run mode
Monitoring operation
Monitoring the program
Monitoring the data
Once you’ve finished these steps you will have a good idea of what it takes
to program your micro controller with a MicroLogix 1000 HHP. You will
also know how to execute and monitor program activity.
If You’d Like More Examples
Be sure you read the last section in this chapter. It directs you to more
examples throughout the manual.
5–1
Chapter 5
Quick Start for New Users
Preparing to Enter a New
Program
Before you can enter a new program, you must complete the two preliminary
procedures described in this section.
Placing the Controller in Program Mode
If the controller is not currently in program mode, you need to change to that
mode. Follow the steps below:
1. From the home screen, access the mode options.
MODE
O
A C T I V E MOD E : R R UN
RP R G
R R U N
2. Select RPRG mode. (The RPRG mode box is already highlighted.)
ENT
Once the controller enters the program mode, you are returned to the
home screen.
Clearing the Current Program
Clear the current program from the controller by following these steps:
1. Access the menu screen.
MENU
I
1 . L A N GU A GE
2 . A C C E P T
E D I T S
5–2
Chapter 5
Quick Start for New Users
2. Arrow down to menu option 6, or press the number 6.
or
6
5 times
6 . C L E A R P R OG
7 . B A U D R A T E
3. Select menu option 6.
ENT
C L E AR P R OGR A M?
Y E S [ E N T ]
N O [ E S C ]
4. Clear the program in the controller.
ENT
C L E A R P R OGR AM?
C L E A R I N G. . . . .
5. Return to the home screen.
ESC
Once the program is cleared, the home screen shows the default program
name MICRO.
5–3
Chapter 5
Quick Start for New Users
Reviewing What You’ve Done So Far
You have completed preparing to enter a new program with your HHP.
✔ Preparing to enter a new program
✔ Placing the controller in program mode
✔
Clearing the current program
Entering and running the program
Entering the new program
Changing to run mode
Monitoring operation
Monitoring the program
Monitoring the data
Continue on to the next section to enter and run a program.
Entering and Running the
Program
You are now ready to create a program in file 2. Once the program is
entered, you will place the controller in run mode so you can monitor the
program.
Entering the New Program
The following rungs consist of LD, OR, ANI, and OUT instructions. You
will learn about these instructions in chapters 6 and 13. For now though, we
will use them to give you an idea of how to enter a simple program using the
MicroLogix 1000 HHP. The following diagram is the ladder representation
of what you will enter in the HHP.
|
I
I
B
|
|–+––] [–––+––––]/[––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )––|
| |
6 |
7
0 |
| |
|
|
| |
B
|
|
| +–––] [––+
|
|
0
|
|
B
O
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––( )–––––+–|
|
0
|
5
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
O
| |
|
+–––( )–––––+ |
|
1
|
5–4
Chapter 5
Quick Start for New Users
Enter the rungs by completing the steps that follow.
Important: If you make an error at any time, you can abandon the operation
by pressing the ESC key.
1. From the home screen, access the program monitor display for the
program MICRO.
MON
ENT
P
S T A R T
F I L E : 0 2
MAI N _ P R OG
The start of file screen appears. This is where you start inserting the
program rungs.
2. Insert a rung in file 2, the main program file.
Remember, the MicroLogix 1000 HHP is designed to distinguish which
function you want to perform based on the context you are in at the time
you press a key. Therefore, pressing the key shown below will
automatically access a new rung, and not a T.
NEW
RUNG
T
P 0 0 0
The P in the upper left-hand corner is flashing because you are making
changes to the program.
3. Enter the first normally open instruction (LD) on the rung. For the input
file type, the / character is automatically displayed by the HHP.
LD
7
MENU
I
P 0 0 0
I / 6
6
ENT
0
5–5
Chapter 5
Quick Start for New Users
4. Place a normally open instruction in parallel (OR) with the first one.
OR
9
+
MT-PT
B
ORB
+ -
ANB
/
E NT
0
P 0 0 0
B / 0
0
5. Enter a normally closed instruction in series (ANI) with the first two.
ANI
5
MENU
I
P 0 0 0
I / 7
7
E NT
/
0
6. Enter the first output instruction (OUT) on the rung.
OUT
1
+
MT-PT
B
ORB
+ -
ANB
/
E NT
0
P 0 0 0
B / 0
0
7. Start a new rung after the first one, and enter another LD instruction.
LD
NEW
RUNG
T
7
+
MT-PT
B
ORB
+ -
ANB
/
P 0 0 1
B / 0
0
ENT
0
8. Add an output instruction to the rung. As with entering the input file
type, the HHP automatically shows the / character for the output file type.
OUT
1
MODE
O
P 0 0 1
O/ 5
5–6
5
E NT
0
Chapter 5
Quick Start for New Users
9. Add the final output instruction to the rung.
OUT
1
MODE
O
1
P 0 0 1
O/ 1
ENT
0
10.Return to the home screen.
ESC
M I C R O
F R E E : * * *
R P R G
F I L E : 0 2
The RPRG is flashing because edits exist. Also, the number of free
instruction words is not known until the program is checked, so three
asterisks are displayed.
Changing to Run Mode
Now that you have entered a program, you can run it by changing to run
mode. Verify the mode by looking in the upper right-hand corner of the HHP
display. Right now it reads RPRG (remote program mode). To change into
remote run mode, RRUN, follow these steps:
1. Access the mode options.
MODE
O
A C T I V E MOD E : R P R G
RP R G
R R U N
5–7
Chapter 5
Quick Start for New Users
2. Arrow right to RRUN.
A C T I V E MOD E : R P R G
R P R G
R R U N
3. Select remote run mode. The program is checked and, if accepted, the
home screen appears. If you get a fault code, refer to chapter 20 to clear
the fault.
ENT
M I C R O
F R E E : 7 2 9
R R U N
F I L E : 0 2
RRUN now appears in the upper right-hand corner of the screen. Also, the
number of free instruction words is displayed.
Reviewing What You’ve Done So Far
You are now monitoring the program file.
✔ Preparing to enter a new program
✔ Placing the controller in program mode
✔ Clearing the current program
✔ Entering and running the program
✔ Entering the new program
✔ Changing to run mode
Monitoring operation
Monitoring the program
Monitoring the data
Continue on with the next section to monitor the operation of your program.
5–8
Chapter 5
Quick Start for New Users
Monitoring Operation
You can monitor the operation of your program by viewing the program files
and the data files.
Monitoring the Program
You should now be running the program MICRO. You can test the operation
of your program by monitoring the relay instruction states. Instruction state
boxes appear to the right of each bit instruction. When filled, these boxes
indicate that logical continuity exists in the program.
1. From the home screen, access the program monitor.
MON
ENT
R 00 1
O/ 1
0
You return to the last location you were at within the program. The
instructions will either be on or off, depending on the input and output
states in your program.
2. Arrow back to bit I/6 on rung 0 of the program. As you do this, look at
the instruction state boxes and see which ones, if any, are filled.
7 times
R 0 0 0
I / 6
0
Currently, I/6 is off. If I/6 is turned on, the instruction state box will be
filled. This will result in a path of logical continuity in the rung, causing
the output instruction state box to be filled as well.
5–9
Chapter 5
Quick Start for New Users
Monitoring the Data
Next you will monitor the input and output data files. These files contain
bits corresponding to the I/O screw terminals of the controller.
1. From the program monitor, go to rung 1. You can access this rung by
entering the rung number as shown here:
MON
1
ENT
R 0 0 1
B / 0
0
2. Access the data monitor for the first instruction on the rung (B/0).
MON
E NT
B / 0
B 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3. Set the cursored bit to 1.
1
B / 0
B 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Notice that the bit is set to 1 as soon as the key is pressed.
4. Now access the output data file.
MON
MODE
O
ENT
O / 0
O0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
Notice that bits O/1 and O/5 are set to 1. These bits turned on when you
set bit B/0 to 1.
5–10
Chapter 5
Quick Start for New Users
5. Return to the data word B/0.
+
MON
MT-PT
B
ENT
B / 0
B 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
6. Reset the cursored bit to 0.
ANB
0
B / 0
B 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7. Return to the output data file.
MON
MODE
O
ENT
O / 0
O0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Notice that bits O/1 and O/5 are set to 0. These bits turned off when you
reset bit B/0 to 0.
8. Return to the home screen.
ESC
M I C R O
F R E E : 7 2 8
R R U N
F I L E : 0 2
5–11
Chapter 5
Quick Start for New Users
Reviewing What You’ve Done So Far
Congratulations! You have finished entering, running, and monitoring a
sample program using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP.
✔ Preparing to enter a new program
✔ Placing the controller in program mode
✔ Clearing the current program
✔ Entering and running the program
✔ Entering the new program
✔ Changing to run mode
✔ Monitoring operation
✔ Monitoring the program
✔ Monitoring the data
The program MICRO that you created in this chapter is actually part of a
bigger application example provided in appendix D called Paper Drilling
Machine. In that application the rungs you entered for MICRO control the
movement of the conveyor belt and drill bit shown below.
Drill
Manuals with
Drilled Holes
Conveyor Belt
What to Do Next
If you want more hands-on experience, chapters 8 through 14 show you more
portions of this application example. If you follow through and add the
rungs provided at the end of each of those chapters, you will have the
complete program entered by the time you reach the end of chapter 14.
Appendix D contains the complete example and its description.
Also, overviews are provided at the beginning of chapters 8 through 14 to
introduce you to the concepts you’ll learn in each chapter.
5–12
Chapter
6
Programming Overview
This chapter explains how to use the MicroLogix 1000 HHP to program the
micro controller. Read this chapter for basic information about:
• principles of machine control
• understanding file organization
• understanding how programs are stored and accessed
• addressing data files
• applying logic to your schematics
• a model for developing your program
Principles of Machine Control
The controller consists of a built-in power supply, central processing unit
(CPU), inputs, which you wire to input devices (such as push buttons,
proximity sensors, limit switches), and outputs, which you wire to output
devices (such as motor starters, solid-state relays, and indicator lights).
Hand-Held
Programmer
(HHP)
User Input Devices
User Output Devices
Inputs
Memory
(Programs and Data)
Outputs
CR
CPU
Processor
Power Supply
Micro Controller
You enter a logic program into the controller using the HHP. The logic
program is based on your electrical relay print diagrams. It contains
instructions that direct control of your application.
6–1
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
With the logic program entered into the controller, placing the controller in
the Run mode initiates an operating cycle. The controller’s operating cycle
consists of a series of operations performed sequentially and repeatedly,
unless altered by your program logic.
overhead
input
scan
service
comms
program
scan
Operating Cycle
output
scan
input scan – the time required for the controller to scan and read all input
data; typically accomplished within µseconds.
program scan – the time required for the controller to execute the
instructions in the program. The program scan time varies depending on
the instructions used and each instruction’s status during the scan time.
Important: Subroutine and interrupt instructions within your logic
program may cause deviations in the way the operating
cycle is sequenced.
6–2
output scan – the time required for the controller to scan and write all
output data; typically accomplished within µseconds.
service communications – the part of the operating cycle in which
communication takes place with other devices, such as a
MicroLogix 1000 HHP or a personal computer.
housekeeping and overhead – time spent on memory management and
updating timers and internal registers.
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Understanding File
Organization
The micro controller provides control through the use of a program. Most of
the operations you perform with the MicroLogix 1000 HHP involve the
program and the two components created with it: program files and data
files.
Program
Program Files
Data Files
(14 Maximum)
(8 Maximum)
Notes on terminology: The term program used in HHP displays is
equivalent to the term processor file that may be used in some programming
software packages.
Program
A program consists of the collective program files and data files. It contains
all the instructions, data, and configuration information pertaining to that
program.
The program is located in the micro controller. It can be transferred to/from
a memory module (optional) located in the HHP, or to/from a personal
computer with programming software.
Program 01
Program 01
Program 01
HHP Memory Module
Micro Controller
Personal Computer
with Programming Software
6–3
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Program Files
Program files contain controller information, the main program, interrupt
subroutines, and any subroutine programs. These files are:
• System Program (file 0) – This file contains various system related
information and user-programmed information such as program name and
password.
• Reserved (file 1) – This file is reserved.
• Main Program (file 2) – This file contains user-programmed instructions
defining how the controller is to operate.
• User Error Fault Routine (file 3) – This file is executed when a fault
occurs. It is only used for this purpose.
• High-Speed Counter Interrupt (file 4) – This file is executed when an
HSC interrupt occurs. It can also be used for a subroutine program.
• Selectable Timed Interrupt (file 5) – This file is executed when an STI
occurs. It can also be used for a subroutine program.
• Subroutine Program (files 6 – 15) – These are used according to
subroutine instructions residing in the main program file or other
subroutine files.
Data Files
Data files contain the status information associated with external I/O and all
other instructions you use in your main and subroutine program files. In
addition, these files store information concerning controller operation. You
can also use the files to store “recipes” and look-up tables if needed.
These files are organized by the type of data they contain. The data file types
are:
• Output – This file stores the state of the output terminals for the
controller.
• Input – This file stores the status of the input terminals for the controller.
• Status – This file stores controller operation information. It is useful for
troubleshooting controller and program operation.
• Bit – This file is used for internal relay logic storage.
• Timer – This file stores the timer accumulator and preset values and the
status bits.
• Counter – This file stores the counter accumulator and preset values and
the status bits.
• Control – This file stores the length, position pointer, and status bits for
specific instructions such as bit shifts and sequencers.
• Integer – This file is used to store numeric values or bit information.
6–4
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Understanding How Programs
are Stored and Accessed
The micro controller uses two devices for storing programs: RAM and
EEPROM. The RAM provides short-term storage (i.e., its data is lost on a
power down), while the EEPROM provides long-term storage (i.e., its data is
not lost on a power down). The diagram below shows how the memory is
allocated in the micro controller’s processor.
RAM
EEPROM
Backup Data
Retentive Data
Program Files
CPU Workspace
Retentive Data
Program Files
CPU
The memory device that is used depends on the operation being performed.
This section describes how memory is stored and accessed during the
following operations:
• saving a program
• normal operation
• power down
• power up
Saving a Program
A program is saved whenever you accept edits or change from RPRG mode
to RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode when program edits exist. When the
program is saved, it is first stored in the volatile RAM. It is then transferred
to the non-volatile EEPROM, where it is stored as both backup data and
retentive data.
Important: If no edits exist and you select the ACCEPT EDITS menu
option, no backup data is written to the controller. It remains
unchanged.
RAM
EEPROM
Backup Data
Retentive Data
Program Files
CPU Workspace
Retentive Data
Program Files
CPU
Important: If you want to ensure that the backup data is the same for every
micro controller you are using, store the program in the memory
module before saving it. Then, when making edits to the
program, load the program from the memory module.
6–5
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Normal Operation
During normal operation, both the micro controller and the HHP access the
program stored in the RAM. Any changes to retentive data that occur due to
program execution or programming commands affect only the retentive data
in the RAM.
The program files are never modified during normal operation. However,
both the CPU and the HHP can read the program files stored in RAM.
EEPROM
RAM
CPU Workspace
Retentive Data
Program Files
Backup Data
Retentive Data
Program Files
CPU
Power Down
When a power down occurs, only the retentive data is transferred from the
RAM to the EEPROM. (The program files do not need to be saved to the
EEPROM since they cannot be modified during normal operation.) If for
some reason power is lost before all of the retentive data is saved to the
EEPROM, the retentive data is lost. This may occur due to an unexpected
reset or a hardware problem.
RAM
EEPROM
Backup Data
Retentive Data
Program Files
CPU Workspace
Retentive Data
Program Files
CPU
6–6
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Power Up
During power up, the micro controller transfers the program files from the
EEPROM to the RAM. The retentive data is also transferred to the RAM,
provided it was not lost on power down, and normal operation begins.
RAM
EEPROM
Backup Data
Retentive Data
Program Files
CPU Workspace
Retentive Data
Program Files
CPU
If retentive data was lost on power down, the backup data from the EEPROM
is transferred to the RAM and used as the retentive data. In addition, status
file bit S5/8 (retentive data lost) is set and a recoverable major error occurs
when the mode is changed to RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN.
RAM
EEPROM
Backup Data
Retentive Data
Program Files
CPU Workspace
Retentive Data
Program Files
CPU
Addressing Data Files
For the purposes of addressing, each data file type is identified by a letter
(identifier) and has an associated allowable range for data storage.
File
Type
Identifier
Output
Input
Status
Bit
Timer
Counter
Control
Integer
O
I
S
B
T
C
R
N
Allowable Word Range, 0 to:
Discrete
Analog
0
1
32
31
39
31
15
104
4
7
–
–
–
–
–
–
The addresses are made up of alphanumeric characters separated by
delimiters. Delimiters include the slash and period.
6–7
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Specifying Logical Addresses
You assign logical addresses to instructions from the highest level (element)
to the lowest level (bit). Addressing examples are shown in the table below.
To specify the address of a:
Use these parameters:➀
Word within an integer file
N 2
File Type
Word Number
Word within a structure file
T
7 . ACC
N
2 / 5
File Type
Structure Number
Delimiter
Word
Bit within an integer file
File Type
Word Number
Bit Delimiter
Bit Number
B
Bit within a bit file
/ 31
File Type
Bit Delimiter
Bit Number
Bit files are bit stream continuous files; therefore, you can address them in two ways: by bit
alone (B/31), or by word and bit (B1/5).
Bit within a structure file
R 7 / DN
File Type
Structure Number
Delimiter
Mnemonic
➀ The addressing parameters required when using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP differ slightly from those required
when using programming software.
You must address at the bit level using mnemonics for timer, counter, or
control data types. The available mnemonics depend on the type of data.
See chapters 8 through 14 for more information.
6–8
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Specifying Indexed Addresses
The indexed address symbol is the # character, which is placed immediately
before the file-type identifier in a logical address. You can use more than
one indexed address in your ladder program.
When you specify indexed addresses, follow these guidelines:
• Make sure the index value (positive or negative) does not cause the
indexed address to exceed the file type boundary.
• When an instruction uses more than two indexed addresses, the controller
uses the same index value for each indexed address.
• Set the index word to the offset value you want immediately before
enabling an instruction that uses an indexed address. The controller starts
operation at the base address plus the offset.
ATTENTION: Instructions with a # sign in an address
manipulate the offset value stored at S24. Make sure you
monitor or load the offset value you want prior to using an
indexed address. Otherwise unpredictable machine operation
could occur with possible damage to equipment and/or injury to
personnel.
!
Entering the # Character
When entering addresses, you can access the indexed address symbol by
pressing the key sequence shown below:
ANB
FUN
0
Example of Indexed Addressing
As an example, a Masked Move (MVM) instruction uses an indexed address
in the source and destination addresses. If the offset value is 10 (stored in
S24), the controller manipulates the data stored at the base address plus the
offset. See the table below.
Value:
Base Address:
Offset Value in
S24:
Offset Address:
Source
N10
10
N20
Destination
N50
10
N60
6–9
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Addressing File Instructions – Using the File Indicator (#)
The file instructions shown below manipulate data table files. These
instructions are addressed with the # sign. They store an offset value in word
S24 (index register), just as with indexed addressing discussed in the last
section.
COP
FLL
BSL
BSR
FFL
FFU
Copy File
Fill File
Bit Shift Left
Bit Shift Right
(FIFO Load)
(FIFO Unload)
LFL
LFU
SQO
SQC
SQL
(LIFO Load)
(LIFO Unload)
Sequencer Output
Sequencer Compare
Sequencer Load
When entering any of the instructions shown above, the # character is
automatically inserted for you.
!
ATTENTION: If you are using file instructions and also
indexed addressing, make sure that you monitor and/or load the
correct offset value prior to using an indexed address. Otherwise,
unpredictable operation could occur, resulting in possible
personal injury and/or damage to equipment.
Entering Numeric Constants
You can enter numeric constants directly into many of the instructions you
program. They are used in place of data file elements.
The range of values for most instructions is –32,768 through +32,767. These
values may be entered and displayed in one of several radixes:
• Decimal
• Hexadecimal
• Binary
The radix default that is used is determined by the operand (e.g., presets are
always displayed as decimal values and masks are always displayed as
hexadecimal values).
6–10
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
When entering hexadecimal characters, you may need to access the following
additional characters, not displayed on the keypad.
To Access This
Character:
Press This Key
Sequence:
A
FUN
B
F UN
C
FUN
D
FUN
E
FUN
F
FUN
7
8
9
4
5
6
You can change the radix for output, input, bit and integer data files. See
page 18–30 for more information.
Applying Logic to Your
Schematics
The program is made from the logic you enter into the micro controller.
Ladder logic instruction programming, which you may already be familiar
with, is one method used to enter logic. Another method is called Instruction
List (Boolean) programming. Your MicroLogix 1000 HHP uses this type of
logic programming. An overview of ladder logic and instruction list
programming is provided below.
Understanding Ladder Logic Instruction Programs
Ladder logic is a graphical programming language based on electrical relay
diagrams. Instead of having electrical rung continuity, ladder logic is
looking for logical rung continuity. A ladder diagram identifies each of the
elements in an electromechanical circuit and represents them graphically.
This allows you to see how your control circuit operates before you actually
start the physical operation of your system.
input instructions
I
][
O
( )
I
]/[
0
output instruction
1
1
6–11
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
In a ladder diagram, each of the input devices are represented in series or
parallel combinations across the rung of the ladder. The last element on the
rung is the output that receives the action as a result of the conditional state
of the inputs on the rung.
Each output instruction is executed by the controller when the rung is
scanned and the conditions on the rung are true. When the rung is not
scanned or the logic conditions on the rung do not create a true logic path,
the output is not executed. The maximum number of instructions per rung
is 128.
Series Connections
One form of logical continuity is series (AND) logic. This means that when
all input conditions in the path are true, energize the output.
b
a
c
In the above example, if A and B are true, energize C.
Parallel Connections
Another form of logical continuity is parallel (OR) logic. This means that
when one or another path of logic is true, energize the output.
a
c
b
In the above example, if A or B is true, energize C.
Parallel logic is formed using branches in your program. Branches can be
established at both input and output portions of a rung. The upper limit on
the number of levels which can be programmed in a branch structure is 75.
6–12
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Input Branching
Use an input branch in your application program to allow more than one
combination of input conditions to form parallel branches (OR-logic
conditions). If at least one of these parallel branches forms a true logic path,
the rung logic is enabled. If none of the parallel branches forms a true logic
path, rung logic is not enabled and the output instruction logic will not be
true. The output is not energized.
a
d
b
c
In the above example, either A and B, or C provides a true logical path.
Output Branching
You can program parallel outputs on a rung to allow a true logic path to
control multiple outputs. When there is a true logic path, all parallel outputs
become true.
a
c
b
d
e
In the above example, either A or B provides a true logical path to all three
output instructions.
Additional input logic instructions (conditions) can be programmed in the
output branches to further control the outputs. When there is a true logic
path, including extra input conditions on an output branch, that branch
becomes true. For instruction list programming, MPS, MRD, and MPP
instructions are sometimes needed for this connection. (See page 8–10.)
Example — Parallel Output Branching with Conditions
c
a
b
d
e
In the above example, either A and D or B and D provide a true logic path
to E.
6–13
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Connecting Blocks
Blocks of input and output instructions can be connected in series and
parallel as well.
Example – Series Block Connection
a
c
b
d
e
In the above example, two blocks of information are connected in series.
Either A or B, and C or D provides a true logical path. For instruction list
programming, the ANB instruction represents this connection. (See page
8–12.)
Example – Parallel Block Connection
a
b
c
d
e
In the above example, two blocks of information are connected in parallel.
Either A and B, or C and D provides a true logical path. For instruction list
programming, the ORB instruction represents this connection. (See page
8–12.)
Nested Branching
Input and output branches can be “nested” to avoid redundant instructions, to
speed-up controller evaluation, and to provide more efficient programming.
A “nested” branch is a branch that starts or ends within another branch. You
can nest branches up to four levels deep.
6–14
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Nested branching can be converted into non-nested branches by repeating
instructions to make parallel equivalents.
Example – Non-Nested Equivalent
a
b
c
f
d
e
Nested branch
a
b
C
d
c
f
e
Non-nested equivalent
parallel branch
Understanding Instruction List Programs
Instruction list (Boolean) programming uses mnemonics to represent all the
functions and connections available in a ladder logic instruction set.
Mnemonics are instructions written in abbreviated form, using two or three
letters that imply the operation of the instruction, such as LD, AND, and
OUT.
LD
I/0
AND I/1
OUT O/1
} input instructions
output instruction
The MicroLogix 1000 HHP allows you to enter an instruction list program
when programming the micro controller.
6–15
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Applying Ladder Logic and Instruction List
In the following illustration, the electromechanical circuit shows PB1 and
PB2, two push buttons, wired in series with an alarm horn. PB1 is a
normally open push button and PB2 is normally closed. This same circuit is
shown in ladder logic by two contacts wired in series with an output.
Contact I/0 and I/1 are examine-if-closed instructions.➀ (For more
information on this instruction, refer to page 8–3.)
Ladder Logic Program
Electromechanical Circuit
PB1
Alarm
Horn
PB2
I
][
I
][
0
➀
Instruction List Program
O
( )
1
1
LD
I/0
AND
I/1
OUT
O/1
Contact I1 would be an examine-if-open instruction ( ]/[ ) if PB2 was a normally open electromechanical circuit.
The table below shows how these circuits operate. The table shows all
possible conditions for the electromechanical circuit, the equivalent state of
the instructions, and the resulting output state.
6–16
If PB1 is:
I/0 state is:
And PB2 is:
I/1 state is:
Then the Alarm Horn (O/1) is:
not pushed
0
not pushed
1
silent
not pushed
0
pushed
0
silent
pushed
1
not pushed
1
alarm
pushed
1
pushed
0
silent
Chapter 6
Programming Overview
Developing Your Logic
Program – A Model
The following diagram can help you develop your application program.
Each process block represents one phase of program development. Use the
checklist at the right of the process block to help you identify the tasks
involved with each process.
Program Development
Process
Design
Functional Specification
Perform
Detailed Analysis
Determine if Special
Programming
Features are Needed
Create Logic
Program
Confirm I/O
Addresses
Enter/Edit
Program
Check for
Completeness
Monitor/Troubleshoot
Program
Program Development
Checklist
❏ Prepare a general description of how you want your
automated process to operate.
❏ Identify the hardware requirements.
❏ Match inputs and outputs with actions of the process.
❏ Add these actions to the functional specifications.
❏
❏
❏
❏
Do you need:
Special interrupt routines?
High-speed counting features?
Sequencing Operations?
FIFO or LIFO stack operations?
❏ Use worksheets if necessary to create program.
❏ Make sure I/O addresses match correct input and
output devices.
❏ Enter program using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP.
❏ Review your functional specification and detailed
analysis for missing or incomplete information.
The resulting program should match your
functional specification.
❏ Monitor and, if necessary, troubleshoot the
program that you entered.
Start program in RRUN,
RCSN, or RSSN mode.
6–17
Chapter
7
Using Analog
This chapter describes the operation of the MicroLogix 1000 analog
controllers. Topics include:
•
•
•
•
I/O Image
I/O Image
I/O Configuration
Input Filter and Update Times
Converting Analog Data
The input and output image files of the MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers
have the following format:
Address
Input Image
Output Image
Address
I:0.0
Discrete Input Word 0
Discrete Output Word 0
O:0.0
I:0.1
Discrete Input Word 1
Reserved
O:0.1
I:0.2
Reserved
Reserved
O:0.2
I:0.3
Reserved
Reserved
O:0.3
I:0.4
Analog Input 0 (Voltage)
Analog Output 0 (Voltage or
Current)
O:0.4
I:0.5
Analog Input 1 (Voltage)
I:0.6
Analog Input 2 (Current)
I:0.7
Analog Input 3 (Current)
Input words 0 and 1 contain discrete input data. Unused inputs in the
discrete inputs image space are reset during each input scan. Input words 2
and 3 are reserved and are not updated by the controller. These inputs have
no direct effect on controller operation, but can be modified like other data
bits.
Input words 4–7 contain the status of the four analog input channels
respectively. Analog input image words are cleared at Going To Run (GTR).
For enabled channels, the analog input image is updated on a cyclical basis.
Output word 0 contains discrete output data. Output words 1–3 are reserved
output image space. Unused outputs in both the discrete output image space
and the reserved output image space have no direct effect on controller
operation. But these outputs can be modified like other data bits. Output
word 4 holds the value of the analog output channel.
7–1
Chapter 7
Using Analog
I/O Configuration
The analog input channels are single-ended (unipolar) circuits and can be
individually enabled or disabled. The default is all input channels enabled.
The two voltage inputs accept"10.5V dc and the two current inputs accept
"21 mA.
The analog output channel is also a single-ended circuit. You can configure
either voltage (0V dc to +10V dc) or current (+4 to +20 mA) output
operation. The default is voltage output.
The output must be configured for either voltage or current, not both. This is
determined by the output configuration. When in the Run mode and the
output is configured for voltage, the voltage output terminal is active and the
current output terminal is inactive. Similarly, when in the Run mode and the
output is configured for current, the current output terminal is active and the
voltage output terminal is inactive. When the system is not in Run mode,
both the voltage and current outputs are inactive. Refer to page 18–14 for
more information on how to configure the analog inputs and outputs with the
MicroLogix 1000 HHP.
Input Filter and Update Times
The MicroLogix analog input filter is programmable. The slower the filter
setting, the more immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise. The more
immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise, the slower the inputs are to
update. Similarly, the faster the filter setting, the less immune the analog
inputs are to electrical noise. The less immune the analog inputs are to
electrical noise, the faster the inputs are to update.
The selected setting is applied to all four analog input channels. The settings
supported are shown in the following table. Both the analog input resolution
and the analog input settling time are a function of the input filter selection.
Programmable Filter Characteristics
1st Notch Freq
(Hz)
Filter
Bandwidth
(-3 dB Freq Hz)
Update Time
(mSec)
Settling Time
(mSec)
Resolution
(Bits)
10
2.62
100.00
400.00
16
50
13.10
20.00
80.00
16
60➀
15.72
16.67
66.67
16
250
65.50
4.00
16.00
15
➀
60 Hz is the default setting.
The total update time for each channel is a combination of the Update Time
and the Settling Time. When more than one analog input channel is enabled,
the maximum update for each channel is equal to one ladder scan time plus
the channel’s Update Time plus Settling Time. When only one analog input
channel is enabled, the maximum update for the channel is equal to the
Update Time plus one ladder scan time.
7–2
Chapter 7
Using Analog
Update Time Examples
Example 1 – All (4) channels enabled with 60 Hz filter selected (default
settings).
Maximum Update Time = (4) x ladder scan time
+ (4) x 16.67 ms
+ (4) x 66.67 ms
= 333.36 ms + (4) x ladder scan times
(Each channel is updated approximately three times per second.)
Example 2 – 1 channel enabled with 250 Hz filter selected.
Maximum Update Time = ladder scan time + 4 ms
Input Channel Filtering
The analog input channels incorporate on-board signal conditioning. The
purpose of this conditioning is to reject the AC power line noise that can
couple into an analog input signal while passing the normal variations of the
input signal.
Frequency components of the input signal at the filter frequency are rejected.
Frequency components below the filter bandwidth (–3 dB frequency) are
passed with under 3 dB of attenuation. This pass band allows the normal
variation of sensor inputs such as temperature, pressure and flow transducers
to be input data to the processor.
Noise signals coupled in at frequencies above the pass band are sharply
rejected. An area of particular concern is the 50/60 Hz region, where pick-up
from power lines can occur.
7–3
Chapter 7
Using Analog
Converting Analog Data
The analog input circuits are able to monitor current and voltage signals and
convert them to digital data. There are six terminals assigned to the input
channels that provide two voltage inputs, two current inputs, and two return
signals (commons).
The analog outputs can support either a current or voltage function. There
are three terminals assigned to the output channels that provide one voltage
output, one current output, and a common (shared) terminal.
The following table shows sample Analog Signal and Data Word values
using the nominal transfer function formula:
N=Iin x 32767/21
where Iin (analog signal) is in milliamperes (mA)
N=Vin x 32767/10.5
where Vin (analog signal) is in volts (V)
N=(Iout – 4 mA) x 32767/16 mA
milliamperes (mA)
N=Vout x 32767/10V
where Iout (analog signal) is in
where Vout (analog signal) is in volts (V)
Analog Signal
Data Word
Input
Output
0V
0
0
5V
15603
16384
10V
32107
32767
4 mA
6241
0
11 mA
17164
14336
20 mA
31207
32767
Converting Analog Input Data
Analog inputs convert current and voltage signals into 16-bit two’s
complement binary values.
To determine an approximate voltage that an input value represents, use one
of the following equations:
10.5V
32,767
input value➀ = input voltage(V)
➀The Input Value is the decimal value of the word in the
input image for the corresponding analog input.
For example, if an input value of 16,021 is in the input image,
the calculated value is:
10.5V
32,767
16,201 = 5.1915(V)
It should be noted that the actual value may vary within the
accuracy limitations of the circuit.
7–4
Chapter 7
Using Analog
To determine an approximate current that an input value represents, you can
use the following equation:
21 mA
input value➁ = input current (mA)
32,767
➁The Input Value is the decimal value of the word in the
input image for the corresponding analog input.
For example, if an input value of 4096 is in the input image,
the calculated value is:
21 mA
4096 = 2.625(mA)
32,767
It should be noted that the actual value may vary within
the accuracy limitations of the module.
Converting Analog Output Data
Use the following equation to determine the decimal value for the current
output:
32,767
16 mA
[Desired Current Output (mA) – 4 mA] = Output Decimal Value
For example, if an output value of 8 mA is desired, the value to be put in the
corresponding word in the output image can be calculated as follows:
32,767
16 mA
(8 mA – 4 mA) = 8192
Use the following equation to determine the decimal value for the voltage
output:
32,767
10V dc
Desired Voltage Output (V dc) = Output Decimal Value
For example, if an output value of 1V dc is desired, the value to be put in the
corresponding word in the output image can be calculated as follows:
32,767
10V dc
1V dc = 3277
7–5
Chapter
8
Using Basic Instructions
This chapter contains general information about basic instructions and
explains how they function in your application program. Each of the basic
instructions includes information on:
• what the instruction symbol looks like
• typical execution time for the instruction
• how to use the instruction
• how to enter the instruction
In addition, the last section contains an application example for a paper
drilling machine that shows the basic instructions in use.
Bit Instructions
HHP
Display
Mnemonic
Function
Name
Code
Purpose
Page
LD
20
Load
Examines a bit for an On condition. It is the first normally open instruction
in a rung or block.
8–3
LDI
21
Load Inverted
Examines a bit for an Off condition. It is the first normally closed instruction
in a rung or block.
8–4
AND
22
And
Examines a bit for an On condition. It is a normally open instruction placed
in series with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block.
(This differs from the AND output instruction discussed in chapter 10.)
8–3
ANI
23
And Inverted
Examines a bit for an Off condition. It is a normally closed instruction
placed in series with any previous input instruction in the current rung or
block.
8–4
OR
24
Or
Examines a bit for an On condition. It is a normally open instruction placed
in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block.
(This differs from the OR output instruction discussed in chapter 11.)
8–3
ORI
25
Or Inverted
Examines a bit for an Off condition. It is a normally closed instruction
placed in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or
block.
8–4
LDT
LDT
26
Load True
Represents a short as the first instruction in a rung or block.
8–6
ORT
ORT
27
Or True
Represents a short in parallel with the previous instruction in the current
rung or block.
8–6
OSR
LD OSR
28
Triggers
ri ers a one-time
e i e event.
e e
8–7
OSR
AND OSR
29
One-Shot
Rising
Risi
( )
OUT
40
Output (Output
Energize)
Represents an output driven by some combination of input logic.
Energized (1) when conditions preceding it permit power continuity in the
rung and de-energized after the rung is false.
8–8
(L)
SET
41
Set (Output
Latch)
Turns a bit on when the rung is executed and this bit retains its state when
the rung is not executed or a power cycle occurs.
8–8
(U)
RST
42
Reset (Output
Unlatch)
Turns a bit off when the rung is executed and this bit retains its state when
the rung is not executed or when power cycle occurs.
8–8
Continued on following page
8–1
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Branch Instructions
Mnemonic
Function
Code
MPS
Name
Purpose
Page
10
Memory Push
Stores the rung state that is present immediately preceding the MPS instruction.
8–10
MRD
11
Memory Read
Reads the rung state stored by the MPS instruction and resumes operation using
that rung state.
8–10
MPP
12
Memory Pop
Removes the rung state stored by the MPS instruction, reads it, and resumes
operation using that rung state.
8–10
ANB
13
And Block
Places two blocks of logic in series with each other (ANDs them).
8–12
ORB
14
Or Block
Places two blocks of logic in parallel with each other (ORs them).
8–12
Timer/Counter Instructions
Mnemonic
Function
Code
TON
Name
Purpose
Page
0
Timer-On Delay
Counts timebase intervals when the instruction is true.
8–16
TOF
1
Timer-Off Delay
Counts timebase intervals when the instruction is false.
8–18
RTO
2
Retentive Timer
Counts timebase intervals when the instruction is true and retains the
accumulated value when the instruction goes false or when power cycle occurs.
8–20
CTU
5
Count Up
Increments the accumulated value at each false-to-true transition and retains the
accumulated value when the instruction goes false or when power cycle occurs.
8–24
CTD
6
Count Down
Decrements the accumulated value at each false-to-true transition and retains
the accumulated value when the instruction goes false or when power cycle
occurs.
8–25
RES
7
Reset
Resets the accumulated value and status bits of a timer or counter. Do not use
with TOF timers.
8–27
About Basic Instructions
Basic instructions are used most commonly for relay replacement functions,
counting, and timing operations. These instructions, when used in
Instruction List (Boolean) programs, represent hardwired logic circuits used
for the control of a machine or equipment.
The basic instructions are separated into four groups: bit, branch, timer, and
counter. Before you learn about the instructions in each of these groups, we
suggest that you read the overview that precedes the group:
• Bit Instructions Overview
• Branch Instructions Overview
• Timer Instructions Overview
• Counter Instructions Overview
8–2
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Bit Instructions Overview
These instructions operate on a single bit of data. During operation, the
controller may set or reset the bit, based on the logical continuity of the rung.
You can address a bit as many times as your program requires.
Important: Using the same address with multiple output instructions is not
recommended.
Bit instructions are used with the following data files:
• Output (O) and input (I) data files. These represent external outputs and
inputs.
• The status data file (S). These values are used to configure and provide
controller status.
• The bit data file (B). These are the internal coils used in your program.
• Timer, counter, and control data files (T, C, and R). These instructions
use various control bits.
• The integer data file (N). Use these addresses (at the bit level) as your
program requires.
Load (LD), And (AND),
and Or (OR)
LD, AND, and OR are all normally open instructions used in your program
to determine if a bit is On. If the bit addressed is on (1) when one of these
instructions is executed, then the instruction is evaluated as true. If the bit
addressed is off (0) when one of these instructions is executed, then the
instruction is evaluated as false. Refer to chapter 16 for instruction list
examples of when to use the LD, AND, and OR instructions.
Important: The bit AND and bit OR instructions discussed here differ from
the word AND and word OR output instructions described in
chapter 11.
Ladder representation:
] [
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
LD 1.54
AND 1.94
OR 1.94
1.72
2.12
2.12
Bit Address State
LD, AND, and OR Instruction
0
False
1
True
Examples of devices that turn on or off include:
• a push button wired to an input (addressed as I/4)
• an output wired to a pilot light (addressed as O/2)
• a timer controlling a light (addressed as T3/DN)
Using LD
Use the LD instruction for normally open contacts that appears first on a
rung or block.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To access the LD instruction, press:
LD
7
P 0 0 0
I / 6
0
8–3
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Using AND
Use the AND instruction for normally open contacts placed in series with
any previous input instruction in the current rung or block.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To access the AND instruction, press:
AND
8
P 0 0 0
I / 7
0
Using OR
Use the OR instruction for normally open contacts placed in parallel with any
previous input instruction in the current rung or block.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To access the OR instruction, press:
OR
9
Load Inverted (LDI),
And Inverted (ANI), and
Or Inverted (ORI)
Ladder representation:
P 0 0 0
B / 0
1
LDI, ANI, and ORI are all normally closed instructions used in your ladder
program to determine if a bit is Off. When the instruction is executed, if the
bit addressed is off (0), then the instruction is evaluated as true. When the
instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is on (1), then the instruction is
evaluated as false.
Bit Address State
]/[
LDI, ANI, and ORI Instruction
0
True
1
False
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
LDI 1.54
ANI 1.94
ORI 1.94
1.72
2.12
2.12
8–4
Examples of devices that turn on or off include:
• motor overload normally closed (N.C.) wired to an input (I/10)
• an output wired to a pilot light (addressed as O/4)
• a timer controlling a light (addressed as T3/DN)
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Using LDI
Use the LDI instruction for normally closed contacts that appears first on a
rung or block.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To access the LDI instruction, press:
LDI
4
P 0 0 0
I / 6
/
0
Using ANI
Use the ANI instruction for normally closed contacts placed in series with
any previous input instruction in the current rung or block.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To access the ANI instruction, press:
ANI
5
P 0 0 0
I / 7
/
0
Using ORI
Use the ORI instruction for normally closed contacts placed in parallel with
any previous input instruction in the current rung or block.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To access the ORI instruction, press:
ORI
6
P 0 0 0
B / 0
/
1
8–5
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Load True (LDT) and Or True
(ORT)
Ladder representation:
The LDT and ORT instructions are used to short circuit a block of logic.
They are useful for debugging a rung when you need a condition that is
always true.
There are no parameters to enter for these instructions.
LDT
] [
] [
ORT
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
LDT 1.54
ORT 1.94
Using LDT
False
Use the LDT instruction to place a short in the first position of a rung or
block. This instruction can only be used if it is immediately used with an OR
or ORB instruction.
n/a
n/a
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 0
FUN
L
2
6
L D T
ENT
Using ORT
Use the ORT instruction to place a short in parallel with any previous input
instruction in the current rung or block.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 0
FUN
8–6
L
2
7
ENT
OR T
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
One-Shot Rising (OSR)
The OSR instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to
occur one time. Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on
the change of state of the rung from false to true.
Ladder representation:
B3
[OSR]
0
True
False
When the rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction go from false to
true, the OSR instruction becomes true for one scan. After one scan is
complete, the OSR instruction becomes false, even if the rung conditions
preceding it remain true. The OSR instruction only becomes true again if the
rung conditions preceding it transition from false to true.
LD OSR 13.02
AND OSR 13.42
11.48
11.88
The controller allows you to use one OSR instruction per output in a rung.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
Entering Parameters
The address assigned to the OSR instruction is not the one-shot address
referenced by your program, nor does it indicate the state of the OSR
instruction. This address allows the OSR instruction to remember its
previous rung state.
Use a bit address from either the bit or integer data file. The addressed bit is
set (1) as long as rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction are true
(even if the OSR instruction has become false); the bit is reset (0) when rung
conditions preceding the OSR instruction are false.
Important: The bit address you use for this instruction must be unique. Do
not use it elsewhere in the program.
Do not use an input or output address to program the address
parameter of the OSR instruction.
Entering the Instruction
HHP Display
Function
Code
LD OSR
OSR
28
appears first on a rung or block
AND OSR
OSR
29
is placed in series with any previous input
instruction in the current rung or block
Mnemonic
Use This Instruction When the Input:
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The example below shows how to access the LD OSR instruction. Use the
same procedure to access the AND OSR instruction, only substitute the
function code with the one provided in the table above.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
L
2
8
E NT
P 0 0 0
B / 0
OS R
0
8–7
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Output (OUT)
Use an OUT instruction in your ladder program to turn On a bit when rung
conditions are evaluated as true.
Ladder representation:
An example of a device that turns on or off is an output wired to a pilot light
(addressed as O/4).
( )
OUT instructions are reset when:
• You enter or return to the RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode or power is
restored.
• The OUT is programmed within an inactive or false Master Control Reset
(MCR) zone.
• Rung conditions are evaluated as false.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
4.43
4.43
Important: A bit that is set within a subroutine using an OUT instruction
remains set until the subroutine is scanned again.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To access the OUT instruction, press:
OUT
1
Set (SET) and Reset (RST)
Ladder representation:
(L)
P 0 0 0
B / 0
0
SET and RST are retentive output instructions. SET can only turn on a bit,
while RST can only turn off a bit. These instructions are usually used in
pairs, with both instructions addressing the same bit.
Your program can examine a bit controlled by SET and RST instructions as
often as necessary.
(U)
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
SET 4.97
RST 4.97
3.16
3.16
8–8
!
ATTENTION: Under fatal error conditions, physical outputs are
turned off. Once the error conditions are cleared, the controller
resumes operation using the data table value of the operand.
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Using SET
When you assign an address to the SET instruction that corresponds to the
address of a physical output, the output device wired to this screw terminal is
energized when the bit is set (turned on or latched).
When rung conditions become false (after being true), the bit remains set and
the corresponding output device remains energized.
When enabled, the SET instruction tells the controller to turn on the
addressed bit. Thereafter, the bit remains on, regardless of the rung
condition, until the bit is turned off (typically by a RST instruction in another
rung).
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To access the SET instruction, press:
SET
L
2
P 0 0 0
B / 0
L
0
Using RST
When you assign an address to the RST instruction that corresponds to the
address of a physical output, the output device wired to this screw terminal is
de-energized when the bit is cleared (turned off or unlatched).
The RST instruction tells the controller to turn off the addressed bit.
Thereafter, the bit remains off, regardless of the rung condition, until it is
turned on (typically by a SET instruction in another rung).
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To access the RST instruction, press:
RST
U
3
Branch Instructions Overview
P 0 0 0
B / 0
U
0
Branch instructions are connecting instructions unique to instruction list
programming. There are two types of branch instructions:
• multiple output circuit connectors (MPS, MRD, and MPP)
• block connectors (ANB and ORB)
Since these instructions are used solely for connecting purposes, there are no
parameters to enter.
8–9
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Memory Push (MPS), Memory
Read (MRD), and Memory Pop
(MPP)
MPS, MRD, and MPP are multiple output circuit connecting instructions.
These instructions work together to store, read, and clear the state of a rung
prior to the execution of an output circuit.
Every MPS instruction used in a program must be paired with an MPP
instruction. An MRD instruction is not always required.
Ladder representation:
] [
] [
( )
MPS
MRD
MPP
] [
( )
] [
( )
Using MPS
The MPS instruction stores the rung state immediately preceding the MPS
instruction. This instruction is required only if both of the following
statements are true:
• An output circuit that contains at least one input instruction immediately
follows the MPS.
• There is at least one other output circuit after the output circuit that
immediately follows the MPS.
Execution Times (µsec) :
MPS 0.40
MRD 0.40
MPP 0.40
Every MPS instruction must be paired with an MPP instruction. Each rung
can use a maximum of four nested MPS instructions.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
ANB
1
0
P 0 0 0
MP S
ENT
The example below illustrates when you would enter the MPS instruction.
b
a
8–10
c
d
Instruction List
NEW RUNG
LD a
MPS
AND b
OUT c
MPP
OUT d
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Using MRD
The MRD instruction reads the rung state stored by the MPS instruction and
resumes operation using that rung state. Each branch structure can have a
maximum of 73 MRD instructions.
This instruction can only be used if all of the following statements are true:
• An MPS instruction was used previously on the rung.
• The MRD is immediately preceded by an output instruction.
• An output circuit immediately follows the MRD.
• The output circuit that follows the MRD is not the last output circuit in
the rung requiring the rung state stored by the MPS. (If it is the last
output circuit requiring the stored rung state, you must use an MPP
instruction instead of an MRD instruction.)
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 0
FUN
1
1
MR D
E NT
The example below illustrates when you would enter the MRD instruction.
b
c
d
e
f
g
a
Instruction List
NEW RUNG
LD a
MPS
AND b
OUT c
MRD
AND d
OUT e
MPP
AND f
OUT g
Using MPP
Like the MRD instruction, the MPP instruction reads the rung state stored by
the MPS instruction and resumes operation using that rung state. Unlike the
MRD instruction, the MPP also clears the rung state from the MPS.
This instruction can only be used if all of the following statements are true:
• An MPS instruction was used previously on the rung.
• The MPP is immediately preceded by an output instruction.
• An output circuit immediately follows the MPP.
• The output circuit that follows the MPP is the last output circuit in the
rung requiring the rung state stored by the MPS. (If it is not the last
output circuit requiring the stored rung state, you must use an MRD
instruction instead of an MPP instruction.)
8–11
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 0
FUN
1
L
MP P
ENT
2
The example below illustrates when you would enter the MPP instruction.
b
a
c
And Block (ANB) and Or
Block (ORB)
Ladder representation:
] [
ANB
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
d
e
Instruction List
NEW RUNG
LD a
OUT b
MPS
AND c
OUT d
MPP
OUT e
ANB and ORB are block connecting instructions. These instructions connect
two blocks of instructions in series or in parallel and produce an result that is
used in the remaining execution of the rung.
Using ANB
The ANB instruction is used to make a series connection of circuit blocks
with two or more contacts. (A series connection of circuit blocks with one
contact requires only an AND or ANI instruction. See page 16–1.)
ORB
Execution Times (µsec):
ANB 0.40
ORB 0.40
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To access the ANB instruction, press:
ANB
0
8–12
P 0 0 0
A NB
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
The example below illustrates when you would enter the ANB instruction.
a
c
b
d
e
Instruction List
NEW RUNG
LD a
OR b
LD c
OR d
ANB
OUT e
Using ORB
The ORB instruction is used to make a parallel connection of circuit blocks
with two or more contacts. (A parallel connection of circuit blocks with one
contact requires only an OR or ORI instruction. See page 16–2.)
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To access the ORB instruction, press:
ORB
+ -
P 0 0 0
O R B
/
The example below illustrates when you would enter the ORB instruction.
a
b
c
d
e
Instruction List
NEW RUNG
LD a
AND b
LD c
AND d
ORB
OUT e
8–13
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Timer Instructions Overview
Each timer address is made of a 3-word element. Word 0 is the control word,
word 1 stores the preset value, and word 2 stores the accumulator value.
15 14 13
Word 0
EN TT DN
Word 1
Preset Value
Word 2
Accumulator Value
Internal Use
EN = Timer Enable Bit
TT = Timer Timing Bit
DN = Timer Done Bit
Entering Parameters
Accumulator Value (ACC)
This is the time elapsed since the timer was last reset. When enabled, the
timer updates this continually.
Preset Value (PRE)
Specifies the value which the timer must reach before the controller sets the
done bit. When the accumulated value becomes equal to or greater than the
preset value, the done bit is set. You can use this bit to control an output
device.
Preset and accumulated values for timers range from 0 to +32,767. If a timer
preset or accumulated value is a negative number, a runtime error occurs.
Timebase
The timebase determines the duration of each timebase interval. The
timebase is selectable as 0.01 (10 ms) second or 1.0 second.
Timer Accuracy
Timer accuracy refers to the length of time between the moment a timer
instruction is enabled and the moment the timed interval is complete.
Timing accuracy is –0.01 to +0 seconds, with a program scan of up to 2.5
seconds. The 1-second timer maintains accuracy with a program scan of up
to 1.5 seconds. If your programs can exceed 1.5 or 2.5 seconds, repeat the
timer instruction rung so that the rung is scanned within these limits.
Important: Timing could be inaccurate if Jump (JMP), Label (LBL), Jump
to Subroutine (JSR), or Subroutine (SBR) instructions skip over
the rung containing a timer instruction while the timer is timing.
If the skip duration is within 2.5 seconds, no time will be lost; if
the skip duration exceeds 2.5 seconds, an undetectable timing
error occurs. When using subroutines, a timer must be executed
at least every 2.5 seconds to prevent a timing error.
8–14
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Entering the Instructions
The following items apply when entering the instructions:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• If you see a down arrow on the display it means there are more options
available. To scroll through the options, press this key:
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. If you want to edit the instruction’s parameters once the entire
instruction is entered, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
Addressing Structure
Address bits and words using the format shown below.
Format
Te.s/b
T
. /b
Explanation
T
Timer file
e
Element
number
Ranges from 0 – 39. These are 3-word elements.
See figure on previous page.
.
Subelement delimiter
s
Subelement
/
Bit delimiter
b
Bit number
PRE or ACC
Addressing Examples
• T0/EN Enable bit
• T0/TT Timer timing bit
• T0/DN Done bit
• T0.PRE Preset value of the timer
• T0.ACC Accumulator value of the timer
• T0.PRE/0 Bit 0 of the preset value
• T0.ACC/0 Bit 0 of the accumulator value
8–15
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Timer On-Delay (TON)
Use the TON instruction to delay the turning on or off of an output. The
TON instruction begins to count timebase intervals when rung conditions
become true. As long as rung conditions remain true, the timer increments
its accumulated value (ACC) each scan until it reaches the preset value
(PRE). The accumulated value is reset when rung conditions go false,
regardless of whether the timer has timed out.
Ladder representation:
TON
TIMER ON DELAY
Timer
T4:0
Time Base
0.01
Preset
100
Accum
66
(EN)
(DN)
Using Status Bits
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
38.34
30.38
This Bit
Is Set When
And Remains Set Until One
of the Following
Timer Done Bit DN (bit 13)
accumulated value is equal to
or greater than the preset value
rung conditions go false
Timer Enable Bit EN (bit 14)
rung conditions are true
rung conditions go false
Timer Timing Bit TT (bit 15)
rung conditions are true and
the accumulated value is less
than the preset value
rung conditions go false or
when the done bit is set
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
F UN
8–16
ANB
0
E NT
P 0 0 0
T 0
T ON
A D D R
P 0 0 0
T ON
P R E
* * * 1 0 0
P 0 0 0
T ON
A C C
* * * 0 6 6
P 0 0 0
0 . 0 1
T ON
S E C
B A S E
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Once instruction entry is complete, the parameters are condensed to two
screens as shown here:
P 0 0 0
T ON
P
1 0 0
A
P 0 0 0
0 . 0 1
T ON
S E C
T 0 0
6 6
B A S E
When the controller changes from the RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode to the
RPRG mode or user power is lost while the instruction is timing but has not
reached its preset value, the following occurs:
• Timer Enable (EN) bit remains set.
• Timer Timing (TT) bit remains set.
• Accumulated value (ACC) remains the same.
On returning to the RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode, the following can
happen:
Condition
Result
If the rung is true:
EN bit remains set.
TT bit remains set.
ACC value is reset.
If the rung is false:
EN bit is reset.
TT bit is reset.
ACC value is reset.
8–17
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Timer Off-Delay (TOF)
Use the TOF instruction to delay turning on or off an output. The TOF
instruction begins to count timebase intervals when the rung makes a
true-to-false transition. As long as rung conditions remain false, the timer
increments its accumulated value (ACC) each scan until it reaches the preset
value (PRE). The controller resets the accumulated value when rung
conditions go true regardless of whether the timer has timed out.
Ladder representation:
TOF
TIMER OFF DELAY
Timer
T4:1
Time Base
0.01
Preset
120
Accum
0
(EN)
(DN)
Using Status Bits
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
39.42
31.65
This Bit
Is Set When
And Remains Set Until One
of the Following
Timer Done Bit DN (bit 13)
rung conditions are true
rung conditions go false and
the accumulated value is
greater than or equal to the
preset value
Timer Timing Bit TT (bit 14)
rung conditions are false and
the accumulated value is less
than the preset value
rung conditions go true or
when the done bit is reset
Timer Enable Bit EN (bit 15)
rung conditions are true
rung conditions go false
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
8–18
1
ENT
P 0 0 0
T 1
T OF
A D D R
P 0 0 0
T OF
P R E
* * * 1 2 0
P 0 0 0
T OF
A C C
* * * * * 0
P 0 0 0
0 . 0 1
T OF
S E C
B A S E
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Once instruction entry is complete, the parameters are condensed to two
screens as shown here:
P 0 0 0
T OF
P
1 2 0
A
P 0 0 0
0 . 0 1
T OF
S E C
T 0 1
0
B A S E
When the controller changes from the RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode to the
RPRG mode, or user power is lost while a timer off-delay instruction is
timing but has not reached its preset value, the following occurs:
• Timer Enable (EN) bit remains set.
• Timer Timing (TT) bit remains set.
• Timer Done (DN) bit remains set.
• Accumulated value (ACC) remains the same.
On returning to the RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode, the following can
happen:
Condition
Result
If the rung is true:
TT bit is reset.
DN bit remains set.
EN bit is set.
ACC value is reset.
If the rung is false:
TT bit is reset.
DN bit is reset.
EN bit is reset.
ACC value is set equal to the preset value.
!
ATTENTION: The Reset (RES) instruction cannot be used with
the TOF instruction because RES always clears the status bits as
well as the accumulated value. (See page 8–27.)
Important: The TOF times inside an inactive MCR Pair.
8–19
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Retentive Timer (RTO)
Use the RTO instruction to turn an output on or off after its timer has been on
for a preset time interval. The RTO instruction is a retentive instruction that
lets the timer stop and start without resetting the accumulated value (ACC).
Ladder representation:
RTO
RETENTIVE TIMER ON
Timer
T4:2
Time Base
0.01
Preset
120
Accum
0
(EN)
(DN)
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
38.34
27.49
The RTO instruction retains its accumulated value when any of the following
occurs:
• Rung conditions become false.
• You change controller operation from the RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode
to the RPRG mode.
• The controller loses power.
• A fault occurs.
Using Status Bits
Is Set When
And Remains Set Until One
of the Following
Timer Done Bit DN (bit 13)
accumulated value is equal to
or greater than the preset value
the appropriate RES instruction
is enabled
Timer Timing Bit TT (bit 14)
rung conditions are true and
the accumulated value is less
than the preset value
rung conditions go false or
when the done bit is set
Timer Enable Bit EN (bit 15)
rung conditions are true
rung conditions go false
This Bit
Important: To reset the retentive timer’s accumulated value and status bits
after the RTO rung goes false, you must program a reset (RES)
instruction with the same address in another rung.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
8–20
L
2
ENT
P 0 0 0
T 2
R T O
A D D R
P 0 0 0
R T O
P R E
* * * 1 2 0
P 0 0 0
R T O
A C C
* * * * * 0
P 0 0 0
0 . 0 1
R T O
S E C
B A S E
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Once instruction entry is complete, the parameters are condensed to two
screens as shown here:
P 0 0 0
R T O
P
1 2 0
A
P 0 0 0
0 . 0 1
R T O
S E C
T 0 2
0
B A S E
When the controller changes from the RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode to the
RPRG or FLT mode or user power is lost while the timer is timing but not
yet at the preset value, the following occurs:
• Timer Enable (EN) bit remains set.
• Timer Timing (TT) bit remains set.
• Accumulated value (ACC) remains the same.
On returning to the RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode or when power is
restored, the following can happen:
Counter Instructions
Overview
Condition
Result
If the rung is true:
TT bit remains set.
EN bit remains set.
ACC value remains the same and resumes incrementing.
If the rung is false:
TT bit is reset.
DN bit remains in its last state.
EN bit is reset.
ACC value remains in its last state.
Each Counter address is made of a 3-word data file element. Word 0 is the
status word, containing six status bits. Word 1 is the preset value. Word 2 is
the accumulated value.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Word 0
CU CD DN OV UN UA
Word 1
Preset Value
Word 2
Accumulator Value
CU
CD
DN
OV
UN
UA
=
=
=
=
=
=
Not Used
Status
Word
Counter Up Enable Bit
Counter Down Enable Bit
Done Bit
Overflow Occurred Bit
Underflow Occurred Bit
Update Counter Accumulator Bit
For high-speed counter instruction information, see chapter 14.
8–21
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Entering Parameters
Accumulator Value (ACC)
This is the number of false-to-true transitions that have occurred since the
counter was last reset.
Preset Value (PRE)
Specifies the value which the counter must reach before the controller sets
the done bit. When the accumulator value becomes equal to or greater than
the preset value, the done status bit is set. You can use this bit to control an
output device.
Preset and accumulated values for counters range from –32,768 to +32,767,
and are stored as signed integers. Negative values are stored in two’s
complement form.
Entering the Instructions
The following items apply when entering the instructions:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• If you see a down arrow on the display it means there are more options
available. To scroll through the options, press this key:
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
8–22
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Addressing Structure
Address bits and words using the format shown below.
Format
Ce.s/b
C
. /b
Explanation
C
Counter file
e
Element
number
Ranges from 0 – 39. These are 3-word elements.
See figure on page 8–21.
.
Subelement delimiter
s
Subelement
/
Bit delimiter
b
Bit number
PRE or ACC
Important: If assigned to a high-speed counter instruction, C0 is not
available as an address for any other counter instructions. For
more information on high-speed counter instructions, see
chapter 14.
Addressing Examples
•
•
•
•
•
•
C0/CU Count up enable bit
C0/CD Count down enable bit
C0/DN Done bit
C0/OV Overflow bit
C0/UN Underflow bit
C0/UA Update accumulator bit
• C0.PRE Preset value of the counter
• C0.ACC Accumulator value of the counter
• C0.PRE/0 Bit 0 of the preset value
• C0.ACC/0 Bit 0 of the accumulated value
8–23
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
How Counters Work
The figure below demonstrates how a counter works. The count value must
remain in the range of –32,768 to +32,767. If the count value goes above
+32,767 or below –32,768, a counter status overflow (OV) or underflow
(UN) bit is set.
A counter can be reset to zero using the reset (RES) instruction. (See page
8–27.)
–32,768
(CTU)
Count Up
0
+32,767
Counter Accumulator Value
Count Down
(CTD)
Underflow
Count Up (CTU)
The CTU is an instruction that counts false-to-true rung transitions. Rung
transitions can be caused by events occurring in the program (from internal
logic or by external field devices) such as parts traveling past a detector or
actuating a limit switch.
Ladder representation:
CTU
COUNT UP
Counter
Preset
Accum
(CU)
C5:0
120
0
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
29.84
26.67
Overflow
(DN)
When rung conditions for a CTU instruction have made a false-to-true
transition, the accumulated value is incremented by one count, provided that
the rung containing the CTU instruction is evaluated between these
transitions. The ability of the counter to detect false-to-true transitions
depends on the speed (frequency) of the incoming signal.
Important: The on and off duration of an incoming signal must not be faster
than the scan time x2 (assuming a 50% duty cycle).
The accumulated value is retained when the rung conditions again become
false. The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset (RES)
instruction that has the same address as the counter reset.
Using Status Bits
This Bit
8–24
Is Set When
And Remains Set Until One
of the Following
Count Up Overflow Bit OV
(bit 12)
accumulated value wraps
around to –32,768 (from
+32,767) and continues
counting up from there
a RES instruction having the
same address as the CTU
instruction is executed OR
the count is decremented less
than or equal to +32,767 with a
CTD instruction
Done Bit DN (bit 13)
accumulated value is equal to
or greater than the preset value
the accumulated value
becomes less than the preset
Count Up Enable Bit EN
(bit 15)
rung conditions are true
rung conditions go false OR
a RES instruction having the
same address as the CTU
instruction is enabled
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
5
ENT
P 0 0 0
C 0
C T U
A D D R
P 0 0 0
C T U
P R E
* * * 1 2 0
P 0 0 0
C T U
A C C
* * * * * 0
Once instruction entry is complete, the parameters are condensed to one
screen as shown here:
P 0 0 0
C T U
P
1 2 0
A
C 0 0
0
The accumulated value is retained after the CTU instruction goes false or
when power is removed from and then restored to the controller. Also, the
on or off status of counter done, overflow, and underflow bits is retentive.
The accumulated value and control bits are reset when the appropriate RES
instruction is enabled. The CU bits are always set prior to entering the
RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN modes.
Count Down (CTD)
The CTD is a retentive output instruction that counts false-to-true rung
transitions. Rung transitions can be caused by events occurring in the
program such as parts traveling past a detector or actuating a limit switch.
Ladder representation:
CTD
COUNT DOWN
Counter
Preset
Accum
(CD)
C5:1
120
0
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
32.19
27.22
(DN)
When rung conditions for a CTD instruction have made a false-to-true
transition, the accumulated value is decremented by one count, provided that
the rung containing the rung containing the CTD instruction is evaluated
between these transitions.
The accumulated counts are retained when the rung conditions again become
false. The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset (RES)
instruction that has the same address as the counter reset.
8–25
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Using Status Bits
This Bit
Is Set When
And Remains Set Until One
of the Following
Count Down Underflow Bit
UN (bit 11)
accumulated value wraps
around to +32,768 (from
–32,767) and continues
counting down from there
a RES instruction having the
same address as the CTD
instruction is enabled. OR
the count is incremented
greater than or equal to
+32,767 with a CTU instruction
Done Bit DN (bit 13)
accumulated value is equal to
or greater than the preset value
the accumulated value
becomes less than the preset
Count Down Enable Bit EN
(bit 14)
rung conditions are true
rung conditions go false OR
a RES instruction having the
same address as the CTD
instruction is enabled
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
6
ENT
P 0 0 0
C 1
C T D
A D D R
P 0 0 0
C T D
P R E
* * * 1 2 0
P 0 0 0
C T D
A C C
* * * * * 0
Once instruction entry is complete, the parameters are condensed to one
screen as shown here:
P 0 0 0
C T D
P
1 2 0
A
C 0 1
0
The accumulated value is retained after the CTD instruction goes false or
when power is removed from and then restored to the controller. Also, the
on or off status of counter done, overflow, and underflow bits is retentive.
The accumulated value and control bits are reset when the appropriate RES
instruction is executed. The CD bits are always set prior to entering the
RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN modes.
8–26
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Reset (RES)
Use a RES instruction to reset a timer or counter. When the RES instruction
is executed, it resets the data having the same address as the RES instruction.
Ladder representation:
T4:0
(RES)
Using a RES instruction for a:
The controller resets the:
Timer
(Do not use a RES instruction with a TOF.)
ACC value to 0
DN bit
TT bit
EN bit
Execution Times (µsec) when:
Counter
ACC value to 0
OV bit
UN bit
DN bit
CU bit
CD bit
Control
POS value to 0
EN bit
EU bit
DN bit
EM bit
ER bit
UL bit
IN and FD go to last state
True
False
15.19
4.25
Important: If using this instruction to reset the high-speed counter
accumulator, see page 14–19.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
7
E NT
P 0 0 0
T 0 0
R E S
When resetting a counter, if the RES instruction is enabled and the counter
rung is enabled, the CU or CD bit is reset.
If the counter preset value is negative, the RES instruction sets the
accumulated value to zero. This in turn causes the done bit to be set by a
count down or count up instruction.
!
ATTENTION: Because the RES instruction resets the
accumulated value, and the done, timing, and enabled bits do not
use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF
instruction. Otherwise, unpredictable machine operation or
injury to personnel may occur.
8–27
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Basic Instructions in the
Paper Drilling Machine
Application Example
To demonstrate the use of basic instructions, this section provides ladder
rungs followed by the optimized instruction list for these rungs. The rungs
are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in
appendix D. You will be updating the main program in file 2 and adding a
subroutine to file 6.
Updating File 2
The rungs shown on the following page are referred to as the program’s
“start-up” logic. They determine the conditions necessary to start the
machine in motion by monitoring the start and stop push buttons. When the
start push button is pressed, it enables the conveyor to move and start
spinning the drill bit. When the stop push button is pressed, it disables the
conveyor motion and turns off the drill motor.
The start-up logic also checks to make sure that the drill is fully retracted (in
the home position) before allowing the conveyor to move.
Drill Home
I/5
Drill On/Off O/1
If you went through chapter 5, Quick Start for New Users, you already
completed a portion of this example’s main program file and saved it under
the program name GETSTART. Adapt that program to the drilling example by
adding the two shaded instructions.
8–28
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Ladder Rungs
Rung 2:3➀
Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed. However,
another condition must also be met before we start the conveyor: the
drill must be in its fully retracted position (home). This rung also
stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed.
|
START
|Drill
STOP
Machine
|
|
Button
|Home LS
Button
RUN
|
|
Latch
|
|
I:0
I:0
I:0
B3
|
|–+––––] [––––––––][––––––+–––]/[–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
| |
6
5
|
7
0
|
| | Machine
|
|
| |
RUN
|
|
| | Latch
|
|
| |
B3
|
|
| +––––] [––––––––––––––––+
|
|
0
|
➀
Rungs 2:0 through 2:2 will be added in chapter 14.
Rung 2:4
Applies the above start logic to the conveyor and drill motor.
| Machine
Drill
|Conveyor
|
|
RUN
Home LS
|Enable
|
| Latch
|
|
B3
I:0
O:0
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+––––] [––––––––( )–––––+–|
|
0
|
5
5
| |
|
|
Drill
| |
|
|
Motor ON
| |
|
|
O:0
| |
|
+–––––––––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
1
|
Instruction List
File
2,
Rung 3➀
Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed. However,
another condition must also be met before we start the conveyor: the
drill bit must be in its fully retracted position (home). This rung also
stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
22
24
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
–] [–
|_] [_|
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
START Button
I/6
0
Drill Home LS
I/5
0
FORCES
––––––
AND
OR
Machine
RUN Latch
B/0
0
23
–]/[–
ANI
STOP Button
I/7
40
–( )–
0
OUT
Machine
RUN Latch
B/0
0
➀
Rungs 2:0 through 2:2 will be added in chapter 14.
8–29
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
File
2,
Rung 4
Applies the above start logic to the conveyor and drill motor.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Machine
RUN Latch
B/0
0
10
22
MPS
–] [–
12
40
40
AND
Drill Home LS
I/5
0
Conveyor Enable
O/5
0
Drill Motor ON
O/1
0
MPP
–( )–
–( )–
OUT
OUT
Adding File 6
This subroutine controls the up and down motion of the drill for the paper
drilling machine.
Drill Home
I/5
Drill On/Off O/1
Drill Retract O/2
Drill Forward O/3
Drill Depth
I/4
Ladder Rungs
Rung 6:0
This section of ladder logic controls the up/down motion of the drill for
the book drilling machine. When the conveyor positions the book under the
drill, the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is set. This rung uses that bit to
begin the drilling operation. Because the bit is set for the entire
drilling operation, the OSR is required to be able to turn off the forward
signal so the drill can retract.
| Drill
|Drill Subr|
Drill
|
| Sequence |
OSR
|
Forward
|
| Start
|
|
|
B3
B3
O:0
|
[–––] [––––––––[OSR]–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(L)––––––|
|
32
48
3
|
8–30
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
Rung 6:1
When the drill has drilled through the book, the body of the drill
actuates the DRILL DEPTH limit switch. When this happens, the DRILL
FORWARD signal is turned off and the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned on.
The drill is also retracted automatically on power up if it is not
actuating the DRILL HOME limit switch.
|
Drill
Drill
|
|
Depth LS
Forward
|
|
I:0
O:0
|
|–+––––] [––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+––––(U)–––––+–|
| |
4
|
|
3
| |
| | 1’st
|Drill
|
| Drill
| |
| | Pass
|Home LS
|
| Retract
| |
| |
S:1
I:0
|
|
O:0
| |
| +––––] [––––––––]/[–––––+
+––––(L)–––––+ |
|
15
5
2
|
Rung 6:2
When the drill is retracting (after drilling a hole), the body of the
drill actuates the DRILL HOME limit switch. When this happens the DRILL
RETRACT signal is turned off, the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is turned off
to indicate the drilling process is complete, and the conveyor is
restarted.
| Drill
|Drill
Drill
|
| Home LS
|Retract
Retract
|
|
I:0
O:0
O:0
|
|––––] [––––––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+––––(U)–––––+–|
|
5
2
|
2
| |
|
| Drill
| |
|
| Sequence
| |
|
| Start
| |
|
|
B3
| |
|
+––––(U)–––––+ |
|
|
32
| |
|
| Conveyor
| |
|
| Start/Stop | |
|
|
| |
|
|
O:0
| |
|
+––––(L)–––––+ |
|
0
|
Rung 6.3
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
Instruction List
File
6,
Rung 0
This section of ladder logic controls the up/down motion of the drill for
the book drilling machine. When the conveyor positions the book under the
drill, the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is set. This rung uses that bit to
begin the drilling operation. Because the bit is set for the entire
drilling operation, the OSR is required to be able to turn off the forward
signal so the drill can retract.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Drill Sequence Start
B/32
0
29
–OSR–
AND–OSR
Drill Subr
B/48
41
–(L)–
OSR
0
SET
Drill Forward
O/3
0
8–31
Chapter 8
Using Basic Instructions
File
6,
Rung 1
When the drill has drilled through the book, the body of the drill
actuates the DRILL DEPTH limit switch. When this happens, the DRILL
FORWARD signal is turned off and the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned on.
The drill is also retracted automatically on power up if it is not
actuating the DRILL HOME limit switch.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
20
|–] [–
LD
23
–]/[–
ANI
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
Drill Depth LS
I/4
0
1’st Pass
S1/15
14
42
41
File
FORCES
––––––
0
Drill Home LS
I/5
0
Drill Forward
O/3
0
Drill Retract
O/2
0
ORB
–(U)–
–(L)–
6,
RST
SET
Rung 2
When the drill is retracting (after drilling a hole), the body of the
drill actuates the DRILL HOME limit switch. When this happens the DRILL
RETRACT signal is turned off, the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is turned off
to indicate the drilling process is complete, and the conveyor is
restarted.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
22
42
42
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
–] [–
–(U)–
–(U)–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
Drill Home LS
I/5
0
Drill Retract
O/2
0
Drill Retract
O/2
0
AND
RST
RST
Drill Sequence Start
B/32
0
41
–(L)–
SET
Conveyor Start/Stop
O/0
0
8–32
FORCES
––––––
Chapter
9
Using Comparison Instructions
This chapter contains general information about comparison instructions and
explains how they function in your application program. Each of the
comparison instructions includes information on:
• what the instruction symbol looks like
• typical execution time for the instruction
• how to use the instruction
• how to enter the instruction
In addition, the last section contains an application example for a paper
drilling machine that shows the comparison instructions in use.
Comparison Instructions
HHP
Display
Mnemonic
Function
Name
Code
EQU
LD EQU
50
EQU
AND EQU
51
EQU
OR EQU
52
NEQ
LD NEQ
53
NEQ
AND NEQ
54
NEQ
OR NEQ
55
LES
LD LES
56
LES
AND LES
57
LES
OR LES
58
LEQ
LD LEQ
59
LEQ
AND LEQ
60
LEQ
OR LEQ
61
GRT
LD GRT
62
GRT
AND GRT
63
GRT
OR GRT
64
GEQ
LD GEQ
65
GEQ
AND GEQ
66
GEQ
OR GEQ
67
Purpose
Page
Equal
a
Test
es whether
e er two values
a es are eequal.
a
9–3
Not Equal
a
Test
es whether
e er onee value
a e is not eequal
a to a sec
second value.
a e
9–4
Less Than
a
Test
es whether
e er onee value
a e is less
ess than
a a sec
second value.
a e
9–5
Less Than or
a
Equal
Test
es whether
e er onee value
a e is less
ess than
a orr eequal
a to a second
sec
value.
a e
9–6
Greater
rea er Than
a
Test
es whether
e er onee value
a e is greater
rea er than
a aanother.
er
9–7
Greater Than or
a
Equal
Test
es whether
e er onee value
a e is greater
rea er than
a orr eequal
a to a sec
second value.
a e
9–8
Continued on following page
9–1
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Comparison Instructions
HHP
Display
Mnemonic
Function
Name
Code
MEQ
LD MEQ
68
MEQ
AND MEQ
69
MEQ
OR MEQ
70
LIM
LD LIM
71
LIM
AND LIM
72
LIM
OR LIM
73
About the Comparison
Instructions
Purpose
Page
Masked
Mas
e
Comparison for
Equal
a
Test
es portions
r i s off two values
a es to see whether
e er they
e are eequal.
a Compares
ares
16-bit data of a source address to 16-bit data at a reference address
through
r
a mask.
as
9–9
Limit Test
Test whether one value is within the limit range of two other values.
9–10
Comparison instructions are used to test pairs of values to condition the
logical continuity of a rung. As an example, suppose a LES instruction is
presented with two values. If the first value is less than the second, then the
comparison instruction is true.
To learn more about the compare instructions, we suggest that you read the
Compare Instructions Overview that follows.
Comparison Instructions
Overview
The following general information applies to comparison instructions.
Entering the Instruction
The following items apply when entering the instructions:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
9–2
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Function Codes
Each comparison instruction has three function codes associated with it. The
code that you use correlates to the way the instruction is used on the rung, as
described in the table below.
If the instruction is
then use the code for
the first instruction on the rung or block
LD <instruction>
in series with another instruction
AND <instruction>
in parallel with another instruction
OR <instruction>
Since there are three codes for each instruction, you do not press a separate
key to enter the action the instruction should take. (i.e., You do not press the
LD instruction key and then enter a function code for EQU to get LD EQU.)
Using Indexed Word Addresses
When using comparison instructions, you have the option of using indexed
word addresses for instruction parameters specifying word addresses.
Indexed addressing is discussed in chapter 6.
Equal (EQU)
Use the EQU instruction to test whether two values are equal. If source A
and source B are equal, the instruction is logically true. If these values are
not equal, the instruction is logically false.
Ladder representation:
EQU
EQUAL
Source A
Source B
N7:11
0
100
Source A must be a word address. Source B can be either a constant or word
address. Negative integers are stored in two’s complement form.
Entering the Instruction
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
LD EQU 21.52
AND EQU 21.92
OR EQU 21.92
6.60
7.00
7.00
HHP Display
Mnemonic
Function
Code
EQU
LD EQU
50
appears first on a rung or block
EQU
AND EQU
51
is placed in series with any previous input
instruction in the current rung or block
EQU
OR EQU
52
is placed in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block
Use This Instruction When the Input:
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The example that follows shows how to enter the LD EQU instruction. Use
the same procedure to enter the other EQU instructions, only substitute the
function code with one from the table above.
9–3
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
To enter the function code, press:
ANB
F UN
5
0
E
ENT
NT
Not Equal (NEQ)
NEQ
Source B
E QU
S R C A
0
P 0 0 0
E QU
S R C B
1 0 0
Use the NEQ instruction to test whether two values are not equal. If source
A and source B are not equal, the instruction is logically true. If the two
values are equal, the instruction is logically false.
Ladder representation:
NOT EQUAL
Source A
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
Source A must be a word address. Source B can be either a constant or word
address. Negative integers are stored in two’s complement form.
N7:11
0
100
Entering the Instruction
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
LD NEQ 21.52
AND NEQ 21.92
OR NEQ 21.92
6.60
7.00
7.00
HHP Display
Mnemonic
Function
Code
NEQ
LD NEQ
53
appears first on a rung or block
NEQ
AND NEQ
54
is placed in series with any previous input
instruction in the current rung or block
NEQ
OR NEQ
55
is placed in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block
Use This Instruction When the Input:
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The example below shows how to enter the LD NEQ instruction. Use the
same procedure to enter the other NEQ instructions, only substitute the
function code with one from the table above.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
9–4
5
U
3
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
N E Q
S R C A
0
P 0 0 0
N E Q
S R C B
1 0 0
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Less Than (LES)
Use the LES instruction to test whether one value (source A) is less than
another (source B). If the value at source A is less than the value of source B
the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is greater than or
equal to the value of source B, the instruction is logically false.
Ladder representation:
LES
LESS THAN
Source A
Source B
N7:11
0
100
Source A must be a word address. Source B can be either a constant or word
address. Negative integers are stored in two’s complement form.
Entering the Instruction
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
LD LES
23.60
AND LES 24.00
OR LES 24.00
6.60
7.00
7.00
HHP Display
Mnemonic
Function
Code
LES
LD LES
56
appears first on a rung or block
LES
AND LES
57
is placed in series with any previous input
instruction in the current rung or block
LES
OR LES
58
is placed in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block
Use This Instruction When the Input:
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The example below shows how to enter the LD LES instruction. Use the
same procedure to enter the other LES instructions, only substitute the
function code with one from the table above.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
5
6
E NT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
L E S
S R C A
0
P 0 0 0
L E S
S R C B
1 0 0
9–5
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Less Than or Equal (LEQ)
Ladder representation:
LEQ
LESS THAN OR EQUAL
Source A
N7:11
0
Source B
100
Source A must be a word address. Source B can be either a constant or word
address. Negative integers are stored in two’s complement form.
Entering the Instruction
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
LD LEQ
23.60
AND LEQ 24.00
OR LEQ 24.00
6.60
7.00
7.00
Use the LEQ instruction to test whether one value (source A) is less than or
equal to another (source B). If the value at source A is less than or equal to
the value of source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source
A is greater than the value of source B, the instruction is logically false.
HHP Display
Mnemonic
Function
Code
LEQ
LD LEQ
59
appears first on a rung or block
LEQ
AND LEQ
60
is placed in series with any previous input
instruction in the current rung or block
LEQ
OR LEQ
61
is placed in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block
Use This Instruction When the Input:
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The example below shows how to enter the LD LEQ instruction. Use the
same procedure to enter the other LEQ instructions, only substitute the
function code with one from the table above.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
9–6
5
9
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
L E Q
S R C A
0
P 0 0 0
L E Q
S R C B
1 0 0
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Greater Than (GRT)
Use the GRT instruction to test whether one value (source A) is greater than
another (source B). If the value at source A is greater than the value of
source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is less than
or equal to the value of source B, the instruction is logically false.
Ladder representation:
GRT
GREATER THAN
Source A
N7:11
0
Source B
100
Source A must be a word address. Source B can be either a constant or word
address. Negative integers are stored in two’s complement form.
Entering the Instruction
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
LD GRT 23.60
AND GRT 24.00
OR GRT 24.00
6.60
7.00
7.00
HHP Display
Mnemonic
Function
Code
GRT
LD GRT
62
appears first on a rung or block
GRT
AND GRT
63
is placed in series with any previous input
instruction in the current rung or block
GRT
OR GRT
64
is placed in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block
Use This Instruction When the Input:
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The example below shows how to enter the LD GRT instruction. Use the
same procedure to enter the other GRT instructions, only substitute the
function code with one from the table above.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
6
L
2
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
GR T
S R C A
0
P 0 0 0
GR T
S R C B
1 0 0
9–7
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Greater Than or Equal (GEQ)
Ladder representation:
GEQ
GRTR THAN OR EQUAL
Source A
N7:11
0
Source B
100
Source A must be a word address. Source B can be either a constant or word
address. Negative integers are stored in two’s complement form.
Entering the Instruction
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
LD GEQ 23.60
AND GEQ 24.00
OR GEQ 24.00
6.60
7.00
7.00
Use the GEQ instruction to test whether one value (source A) is greater than
or equal to another (source B). If the value at source A is greater than or
equal to the value of source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at
source A is less than the value of source B, the instruction is logically false.
HHP Display
Mnemonic
Function
Code
GEQ
LD GEQ
65
appears first on a rung or block
GEQ
AND GEQ
66
is placed in series with any previous input
instruction in the current rung or block
GEQ
OR GEQ
67
is placed in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block
Use This Instruction When the Input:
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The example below shows how to enter the LD GEQ instruction. Use the
same procedure to enter the other GEQ instructions, only substitute the
function code with one from the table above.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
9–8
6
5
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
GE Q
S R C A
0
P 0 0 0
GE Q
S R C B
1 0 0
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Masked Comparison for Equal
(MEQ)
Ladder representation:
Entering Parameters
MEQ
MASKED EQUAL
Source
N7:11
Mask
Use the MEQ instruction to compare data of a source address with data of a
reference address. Use of this instruction allows portions of the data to be
masked by a separate word.
• Source is the address of the value you want to compare.
• Mask is the address of the mask through which the instruction moves
0000H
Compare
data. The mask can be a hexadecimal value (constant).
• Compare is an integer value or the address of the reference.
100
If the 16 bits of data at the source address are equal to the 16 bits of data at
the compare address (less masked bits), the instruction is true. The
instruction becomes false as soon as it detects a mismatch. Bits in the mask
word mask data when reset; they pass data when set.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
LD MEQ 28.39
AND MEQ 28.79
OR MEQ 28.79
7.69
8.09
8.09
Entering the Instruction
HHP Display
Mnemonic
Function
Code
MEQ
LD MEQ
68
appears first on a rung or block
MEQ
AND MEQ
69
is placed in series with any previous input
instruction in the current rung or block
MEQ
OR MEQ
70
is placed in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block
Use This Instruction When the Input:
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The example below shows how to enter the LD MEQ instruction. Use the
same procedure to enter the other MEQ instructions, only substitute the
function code with one from the table above.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
6
8
E NT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
ME Q
S R C
P 0 0 0
ME Q
MA S K
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 0 0
ME Q
C OMP
1 0 0
0
9–9
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Limit Test (LIM)
Use the LIM instruction to test for values within or outside a specified range,
depending on how you set the limits.
Ladder representation:
Entering Parameters
LIM
LIMIT TEST
Low Lim
The Low Limit, Test, and High Limit values can be word addresses or
constants, restricted to the following combinations:
• If the Test parameter is a constant, both the Low Limit and High Limit
parameters must be word addresses.
• If the Test parameter is a word address, the Low Limit and High Limit
parameters can be either a constant or a word address.
4
Test
N7:0
0
1
High Lim
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
LD LIM 36.93
AND LIM 37.33
OR LIM 37.33
7.69
8.09
8.09
Entering the Instruction
HHP Display
Mnemonic
Function
Code
LIM
LD LIM
71
appears first on a rung or block
LIM
AND LIM
72
is placed in series with any previous input
instruction in the current rung or block
LIM
OR LIM
73
is placed in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block
Use This Instruction When the Input:
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The example below shows how to enter the LD LIM instruction. Use the
same procedure to enter the other LIM instructions, only substitute the
function code with one from the table above.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 0
F UN
9–10
7
1
L I M
ENT
L OW
4
P 0 0 0
N 0
L I M
T E S T
0
P 0 0 0
L I M
H I G H
1
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
True/False Status of the Instruction
If the Low Limit has a value equal to or less than the High Limit, the
instruction is true when the Test value is between the limits or is equal to
either limit. If the Test value is outside the limits, the instruction is false, as
shown below.
False
–32,768
True
False
Low Limit
+ 32,767
High Limit
Example, low limit less than high limit:
Low
Limit
High
Limit
Instruction is True
when Test value is
Instruction is False
when Test value is
5
8
5 through 8
–32,768 through 4 and 9 through 32,767
If the Low Limit has a value greater than the High Limit, the instruction is
false when the Test value is between the limits. If the Test value is equal to
either limit or outside the limits, the instruction is true, as shown below.
True
–32,768
False
High Limit
True
Low Limit
+ 32,767
Example, low limit greater than high limit:
Low
Limit
High
Limit
8
5
Instruction is True
when Test value is
–32,768 through 5 and 8 through 32,767
Instruction is False
when Test value is
6 and 7
9–11
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Comparison Instructions in
the Paper Drilling Machine
Application Example
To demonstrate the use of comparison instructions, this section provides
ladder rungs followed by the optimized instruction list for these rungs. The
rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in
appendix D. You will be adding an instruction to file 2 and beginning a
subroutine in file 7.
Adding to File 2
To begin you will once again need to return to the rungs first entered in
chapter 5 in the program GETSTART. One more instruction needs to be added
to the first rung to keep track of the drill life. This rung is indicated below
by the shading. Notice that text has also been added to the rung comment.
Important: Do not add this instruction if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
Address O0/6 is only valid for 32 I/O controllers.
Ladder Rung
Rung 2:3
Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed. However,
there are other conditions that must also be met before we start the
conveyor. They are: the drill must be in its fully retracted position
(home); the drill bit must not be past its maximum useful life. This rung
also stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed or when the drill
life is exceeded.
|
START
|Drill
STOP
|change
|
Machine
|
|
Button
|Home LS
Button
|drill bit |
RUN
|
|
|NOW
|
Latch
|
|
I:0
I:0
I:0
O:0
B3
|
|–+––––] [––––––––][–––––+––––]/[––––––––]/[––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
| |
6
5
|
7
6
0
|
| | Machine
|
|
| |
RUN
|
|
| | Latch
|
|
| |
B3
|
|
| +––––] [––––––––––––––––+
|
|
0
|
9–12
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Instruction List
File
2,
Rung 3
Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed. However,
another condition must also be met before we start the conveyor: the
drill bit must be in its fully retracted position (home). This rung also
stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
22
24
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
–] [–
|_] [_|
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
START Button
I/6
0
Drill Home LS
I/5
0
FORCES
––––––
AND
OR
Machine
RUN Latch
B/0
0
23
–]/[–
ANI
STOP Button
I/7
23
–]/[–
0
ANI
change drill bit NOW
O/6
0
40
–( )–
OUT
Machine
RUN Latch
B/0
0
Beginning a Subroutine in File 7
This section of ladder keeps track of the total inches of paper the current drill
bit has drilled through. As the current bit wears out, a light illuminates on
the operator panel, as shown below, to warn the operator to change the drill
bit.
Note: For 32 I/O controllers: If the operator ignores this warning too long,
this ladder shuts the machine down until the operator changes the bit.
OPERATOR PANEL
Start I/6
Stop I/7
Thumbwheel for
Thickness in 1/4”
Change Tool Soon
O/4
Tool Change Reset
Change Tool Now
O/6
5 Hole
3 Hole
I/11–I/14
(Keyswitch)
I/8
7 Hole
I/9–I/10
9–13
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Ladder Rung
Rung 7:0➀
Examines the number of 1/4 in. thousands that have accumulated over the
life of the current drill bit. If the bit has drilled between
100,000–101,999 1/4 in. increments of paper, the ”change drill” light
illuminates steadily. When the value is between 102,000–103,999, the
”change drill” light flashes at a 1.28 second rate. When the value
reaches 105,000, the ”change drill” light flashes, and the ”change drill
now” light illuminates.
|
1/4 in.
100,000
|
|
Thousands
1/4 in.
|
|
increments
|
|
have
|
|
occurred
|
|
+GEQ–––––––––––––––+
B3
|
|–––+–+GRTR THAN OR EQUAL+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––+–|
|
| |Source A
N7:11|
16
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| |Source B
100|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
1/4 in.
102,000
| |
|
|
Thousands
1/4 in.
| |
|
|
increments | |
|
|
have
| |
|
|
occurred
| |
|
| +GEQ–––––––––––––––+
B3
| |
|
+–+GRTR THAN OR EQUAL+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
| |Source A
N7:11|
17
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| |Source B
102|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
1/4 in.
change
| |
|
|
Thousands
drill bit | |
|
|
NOW
| |
|
| +GEQ–––––––––––––––+
O:0
| |
➁
|
+–+GRTR THAN OR EQUAL+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
| |Source A
N7:11|
6
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| |Source B
105|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
100,000
|102,000
change
| |
|
|
1/4 in.
|1/4 in.
drill
| |
|
|
increments|increments
bit
| |
|
|
have
|have
soon
| |
|
|
occurred |occurred
| |
|
|
B3
B3
O:0
| |
|
+–+––––––––––––––––––––] [––––––––]/[––––––––––––––––+––( )–––––+ |
|
|
16
17
|
4
|
|
|
100,000
|102,000
|1.28
|
|
|
|
1/4 in.
|1/4 in.
|second
|
|
|
|
increments|increments|free
|
|
|
|
have
|have
|running
|
|
|
|
occurred |occurred |clock bit |
|
|
|
B3
B3
S:4
|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––––] [––––––––] [––––––––] [–––––+
|
|
16
17
7
|
➀ More rungs are added to this subroutine at the end of chapters 10 and 11.
➁ This branch accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this branch if you
are using a 16 I/O controller.
9–14
Chapter 9
Using Comparison Instructions
Instruction List
File
7,
Rung 0➀
Examines the number of 1/4 in. thousands that have accumulated over the
life of the current drill bit. If the bit has drilled between
100,000–101,999 1/4 in. increments of paper, the ”change drill” light
illuminates steadily. When the value is between 102,000–103,999, the
”change drill” light flashes at a 1.28 second rate. When the value
reaches 105,000, the ”change drill” light flashes, and the ”change drill
now” light illuminates.
FUN
CODE
––––
10
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
66
–GEQ–
40
–( )–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
MPS
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
1/4 in. Thousands
SRCA N11
SRCB
0000H
100
FORCES
––––––
AND–GEQ
OUT
100,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/16
0
11
66
MRD
–GEQ–
AND–GEQ
1/4 in. Thousands
SRCA N11
SRCB
40
–( )–
0000H
102
OUT
102,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/17
0
11
66
MRD
–GEQ–
AND–GEQ➁
1/4 in. Thousands
SRCA N11
SRCB
40
–( )–
0000H
105
OUT
change drill bit NOW
O/6
0
12
20
MPP
|–] [–
LD
100,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/16
0
23
–]/[–
ANI
102,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/17
0
20
|–] [–
LD
100,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/16
0
22
–] [–
AND
102,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/17
0
22
–] [–
AND
1.28 second free running clock bit
S4/7
0
14
ORB
13
ANB
40
–( )–
OUT
change drill bit soon
O/4
0
➀ More rungs are added to this subroutine at the end of chapters 10 and 11.
➁ This branch accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this branch if you
are using a 16 I/O controller.
9–15
Chapter
10
Using Math Instructions
This chapter contains general information about math instructions and
explains how they function in your logic program. Each of the math
instructions includes information on:
• what the instruction symbol looks like
• typical execution time for the instruction
• how to use the instruction
• how to enter the instruction
In addition, the last section contains an application example for a paper
drilling machine that shows the math instructions in use.
Math Instructions
Mnemonic
Function
Code
Name
Purpose
Page
ADD
80
Add
Adds source A to source B and stores the result in the destination.
10–4
SUB
81
Subtract
Subtracts source B from source A and stores the result in the destination.
10–5
MUL
82
Multiply
Multiplies source A by source B and stores the result in the destination.
10–8
DIV
83
Divide
Divides source A by source B and stores the result in the destination and the
math register.
10–9
DDV
84
Double Divide
Divides the contents of the math register by the source and stores the result in
the destination and the math register.
10–10
CLR
85
Clear
Sets all bits of a word to zero.
10–11
SQR
86
Square Root
Calculates the square root of the source and places the integer result in the
destination.
10–11
SCL
87
Scale Data
Multiplies the source by a specified rate, adds to an offset value, and stores the
result in the destination.
10–12
About the Math Instructions
These instructions perform the familiar four function math operations. The
majority of the instructions take two input values, perform the specified
arithmetic function, and output the result to an assigned memory location.
For example, both the ADD and SUB instructions take a pair of input values,
add or subtract them, and place the result in the specified destination. If the
result of the operation exceeds the allowable value, an overflow or underflow
bit is set.
Since these are output instructions, they do not have LD, AND, and OR
equivalents.
To learn more about the math instructions, we suggest that you read the Math
Instructions Overview that follows.
10–1
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Math Instructions Overview
The following general information applies to math instructions.
Entering the Instructions
The following items apply when entering the instructions:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
Using Indexed Word Addresses
You have the option of using indexed word addresses for instruction
parameters specifying word addresses. Indexed addressing is discussed in
chapter 6.
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
The arithmetic status bits are found in Word 0, bits 0–3 in the controller
status file. After an instruction is executed, the arithmetic status bits in the
status file are updated:
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
sets if carry is generated; otherwise cleared.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
S0/2
Zero (Z)
S0/3
Sign (S)
indicates that the actual result of a math instruction does
not fit in the designated destination.
indicates a 0 value after a math, move, or logic instruction.
indicates a negative (less than 0) value after a math, move,
or logic instruction.
Overflow Trap Bit, S5/0
Minor error bit (S5/0) is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or
division by zero. If this bit is set upon execution of an END statement or a
Temporary End (TND) instruction, the recoverable major error code 0020 is
declared.
10–2
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occurs, you can
avoid a controller fault by using an reset (RST) instruction with address S5/0
in your program. The rung must be between the overflow point and the END
or TND statement.
Changes to the Math Register, S13 and S14
Status word S13 contains the least significant word of the 32-bit values of
the MUL and DDV instructions. It contains the remainder for DIV and DDV
instructions. It also contains the first four BCD digits for the Convert from
BCD (FRD) and Convert to BCD (TOD) instructions.
Status word S14 contains the most significant word of the 32-bit values of
the MUL and DDV instructions. It contains the unrounded quotient for DIV
and DDV instructions. It also contains the most significant digit (digit 5) for
TOD and FRD instructions.
10–3
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Add (ADD)
Use the ADD instruction to add one value (source A) to another value
(source B) and place the result in the destination.
Ladder representation:
Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant, however both
sources cannot be a constant. The destination must be a word address.
ADD
ADD
Source A
N7:12
0
N7:10
0
N7:10
0
Source B
Dest
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
33.09
6.78
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
sets if carry is generated; otherwise resets.
Carry (C)
S0/1
Overflow (V)
S0/2
Zero (Z)
sets if overflow is detected at destination; otherwise resets.
On overflow, the minor error flag is also set. The value
–32,768 or 32,767 is placed in the destination. If S2/14
(math overflow selection bit) is set, then the unsigned,
truncated overflow remains in the destination.
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets.
S0/3
Sign (S)
sets if result is negative; otherwise resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
10–4
ANB
8
0
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 1 2
A D D
S R C A
0
P 0 0 0
N 1 0
A D D
S R C B
0
P 0 0 0
N 1 0
A D D
D E S T
0
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Subtract (SUB)
Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value (Source B) from another
(source A) and place the result in the destination.
Ladder representation:
Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant, however both
sources cannot be a constant. The destination must be a word address.
SUB
SUBTRACT
Source A
N7:10
0
1000
Source B
Dest
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
N7:20
0
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
sets if borrow is generated; otherwise resets.
Carry (C)
S0/1
Overflow (V)
S0/2
Zero (Z)
sets if underflow; otherwise reset. On underflow, the minor
error flag is also set. The value –32,768 or 32,767 is
placed in the destination. If S2/14 (math overflow selection
bit) is set, then the unsigned, truncated overflow remains in
the destination.
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets.
S0/3
Sign (S)
sets if result is negative; otherwise resets.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
33.52
6.78
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
8
1
E NT
P 0 0 0
N 1 0
S U B
S R C A
0
P 0 0 0
S U B
S R C B
1 0 0 0
P 0 0 0
N 2 0
S U B
D E S T
0
10–5
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
32-Bit Addition and
Subtraction
You have the option of performing 16-bit or 32-bit signed integer addition
and subtraction. This is facilitated by status file bit S2/14 (math overflow
selection bit).
Math Overflow Selection Bit S2/14
Set this bit when you intend to use 32-bit addition and subtraction. When
S2/14 is set, and the result of an ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, or NEG instruction
cannot be represented in the destination address (due to math underflow or
overflow):
• The overflow bit S0/1 is set.
• The overflow trap bit S5/0 is set.
• The destination address contains the unsigned truncated least significant
16 bits of the result.
When S2/14 is reset (default condition), and the result of an ADD, SUB,
MUL, DIV, or NEG instruction cannot be represented in the destination
address (due to math underflow or overflow):
• The overflow bit S0/1 is set.
• The overflow trap bit S5/0 is set.
• The destination address contains 32767 if the result is positive or –32768
if the result is negative.
Note that the status of bit S2/14 has no effect on the DDV instruction. Also,
it has no effect on the math register content when using MUL and DIV
instructions.
Example of 32-bit Addition
The following example shows how a 16-bit signed integer is added to a
32-bit signed integer. Remember that S2/14 must be set for 32-bit addition.
Note that the value of the most significant 16 bits (B3) of the 32-bit number
is increased by 1 if the carry bit S0/0 is set and is decreased by 1 if the
number being added (B1) is negative.
To avoid a major error from occurring at the end of the scan, you must
unlatch overflow trap bit S5/0 as shown.
Add 16–bit value B1 to 32–bit value B3 B2
Add Operation
Binary
Hex
Decimal➀
Addend
Addend
B3
B2
B1
0000 0000 0000 0011 0001 1001 0100 0000 0003 1940
0101 0101 1010 1000
55A8
203,072
21,928
Sum
B3
B2
0000 0000 0000 0011 0110 1110 1110 1000 0003 6EE8
225,000
➀ The programming device displays 16-bit decimal values only. The decimal value of a 32-bit integer is derived from the displayed
binary or hex value. For example, 0003 1940 Hex is 164x3 + 163x1 + 162x9 + 161x4 + 160x0 = 203,072.
10–6
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Ladder Rung
B3
] [
ADD
B3
[OSR]
1
0
ADD
Source A
B3:1
0101010110101000
Source B
B3:2
0001100101000000
Dest
B3:2
0001100101000000
ADD
S:0
] [
0
ADD
Source A
1
When the rung goes true for
a single scan, B1 is added
to B2. The result is placed
in B2.
If a carry is generated (S0/0
set), 1 is added to B3.
Source B
B3:3
0000000000000011
Dest
B3:3
0000000000000011
B3
] [
31
SUB
SUBTRACT
Source A
B3:3
0000000000000011
Source B
1
If B1 is negative (B/31 set),
1 is subtracted from B3.
Dest
B3:3
0000000000000011
S:5
(U)
0
Overflow trap bit S5/0 is
unlatched to prevent a major
error from occurring at the
end of the scan.
Instruction List
FUN
CODE
––––
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
20
|–] [–
LD
B/0
0
29
–OSR–
AND–OSR
B/1
0
80
ADD
10
MPS
22
–] [–
80
ADD
11
22
SRCA B1
SRCB B2
DEST B2
S0/0
SRCA
SRCB B3
DEST B3
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
0101010110101000
1940H
1940H
0
1
0003H
0003H
MRD
–] [–
81
AND
SUB
12
42
AND
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
B/31
SRCA B3
SRCB
DEST B3
0
0003H
1
0003H
MPP
–(U)–
RST
S5/0
0
10–7
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Multiply (MUL)
Use the MUL instruction to multiply one value (source A) by another
(source B) and place the result in the destination.
Ladder representation:
Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant, however both
sources cannot be a constant. The destination must be a word address.
MUL
MULTIPLY
Source A
N7:4
0
60
Source B
Dest
If the result is larger than +32,767 or smaller than –32,767 (16-bits), the
32-bit result is placed in the math register.
N7:6
0
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
57.96
6.78
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
always resets.
Carry (C)
S0/1
Overflow (V)
S0/2
S0/3
Zero (Z)
Sign (S)
sets if overflow is detected at destination; otherwise resets.
On overflow, the minor error flag is also set. The value
–32,768 or 32,767 is placed in the destination. If S2/14
(math overflow selection bit) is set, then the unsigned,
truncated overflow remains in the destination.
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets.
sets if result is negative; otherwise resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
8
L
2
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 4
MU L
S R C A
0
P 0 0 0
MU L
S R C B
6 0
P 0 0 0
N 6
MU L
D E S T
0
Changes to the Math Register
The math register contains the 32-bit signed integer result of the multiply
operation. This result is valid at overflow.
10–8
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Divide (DIV)
Use the DIV instruction to divide one value (source A) by another
(source B), and place the rounded quotient in the destination. If the
remainder is 0.5 or greater, the destination is rounded up.
Ladder representation:
DIV
DIVIDE
Source A
Source B
Dest
Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant; however, both
sources cannot be a constant. The destination must be a word address.
100
T4:0.PRE
100
C5:1.PRE
120
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
With this Bit:
S0/0
Carry (C)
The Controller:
always resets.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
147.87
6.78
S0/1
Overflow (V)
S0/2
Zero (Z)
S0/3
Sign (S)
sets if division by zero or overflow is detected; otherwise
resets. On overflow, the minor error flag is also set. The
value 32,767 is placed in the destination. If S2/14 (math
overflow selection bit) is set, then the unsigned, truncated
overflow remains in the destination.
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets; undefined if overflow
is set.
sets if result is negative; otherwise resets; undefined if
overflow is set.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 0
FUN
8
U
3
D I V
S R C A
1 0 0
P 0 0 0
D I V
T 0 0 . P R E
S R C B
1 0 0
P 0 0 0
D I V
C 0 1 . P R E
D E S T
1 2 0
E NT
Changes to the Math Register
The unrounded quotient is placed in the most significant word; the remainder
is placed in the least significant word.
10–9
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Double Divide (DDV)
The 32-bit content of the math register is divided by the 16-bit source value
and the rounded quotient is placed in the destination. If the remainder is 0.5
or greater, the destination is rounded up.
Ladder representation:
DDV
The source can either be a word address or a constant. The destination must
be a word address.
DOUBLE DIVIDE
Source
N7:2
1000
Dest
N7:5
0
This instruction typically follows a MUL instruction that creates a 32-bit
result.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
157.06
6.78
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
always resets.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
sets if division by zero or if result is greater than 32,767 or
less than –32,768; otherwise resets. On overflow, the
minor error flag is also set. The value 32,767 is placed in
the destination.
S0/2
Zero (Z)
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets.
S0/3
Sign (S)
sets if result is negative; otherwise resets; undefined if
overflow is set.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
8
4
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 2
D D V
S R C
1 0 0 0
P 0 0 0
N 5
D D V
D E S T
0
Changes to the Math Register
Upon instruction execution, the unrounded quotient is placed in the most
significant word of the math register. The remainder is placed in the least
significant word of the math register.
10–10
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Clear (CLR)
Use the CLR instruction to set the destination to zero. All of the bits reset.
The destination must be a word address.
Ladder representation:
CLR
CLEAR
Dest
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
N7:11
0
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
20.80
4.25
With this Bit:
S0/0
Carry (C)
The Controller:
always resets.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
always resets.
S0/2
Zero (Z)
always sets.
S0/3
Sign (S)
always resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
5
8
Square Root (SQR)
Ladder representation:
E NT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
C L R
D E S T
0
When this instruction is evaluated as true, the square root of the absolute
value of the source is calculated and the rounded integer result is placed in
the destination. The source and the destination must be word addresses.
SQR
SQUARE ROOT
Source
Dest
N7:8
0
N7:11
0
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
71.25
6.78
The instruction calculates the square root of a negative number without
overflow or faults. In applications where the source value may be negative,
use a comparison instruction to evaluate the source value to determine if the
destination may be invalid.
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
sets if the source is negative; otherwise cleared.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
always resets.
S0/2
Zero (Z)
sets when destination value is zero.
S0/3
Sign (S)
always resets.
10–11
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
8
6
Scale Data (SCL)
Ladder representation:
E NT
P 0 0 0
N 8
S QR
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
S QR
S R C
0
D E S T
0
When this instruction is true, the value at the source address is multiplied by
the rate value. The rounded result is added to the offset value and placed in
the destination.
SCL
SCALE
Source
N7:0
100
Rate [/10000] 25000
Offset
127
Dest
Important: Anytime an underflow or overflow occurs in the destination
file, minor error bit S5/0 must be reset. This must occur before
the end of the current scan to prevent major error code 0020
from being declared. This instruction can overflow before the
offset is added.
N7:1
377
Entering Parameters
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
169.18
6.78
10–12
The value for the following parameters is between –32,768 to 32,767.
• Source must be a word address.
• Rate is the positive or negative value you enter divided by 10,000. It can
be a constant or a word address.
• Offset can either be a constant or a word address.
• Dest must be a word address.
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
is reserved.
Carry (C)
S0/1
Overflow (V)
S0/2
S0/3
Zero (Z)
Sign (S)
sets if an overflow is detected; otherwise resets. On
overflow, minor error bit S:5/0 is also set and the value
–32,768 or 32,767 is placed in the destination. The
presence of an overflow is checked before and after the
offset value is applied.➀
sets when destination value is zero.
sets if the destination value is negative; otherwise resets.
➀ If the result of the Source times the Rate, divided by 10000 is greater than 32,767, the SCL instruction
overflows, causing error 0020 (Minor Error Bit), and places 32,767 in the Destination. This occurs regardless
of the current offset.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
F UN
8
7
E NT
P 0 0 0
N 0
S C L
S R C
1 0 0
P 0 0 0
S C L
R / 1 0 K
2 5 0 0 0
P 0 0 0
S C L
OF S T
1 2 7
P 0 0 0
N 1
S C L
D E S T
3 7 7
10–13
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
The following example takes a 0V to 10.5V analog input from a MicroLogix 1000
analog controller and scales the raw input data to a value between 0 and 100%. The
input value range is 0V to 10V which corresponds to 0 to 31,207 counts. The scaled
value range is 0 to 100 percent.
Application Example – Convert Voltage Input to Percent
100
(Scaled Max.)
Scaled Value
(percent)
(Scaled Min.)
0
0V
(Input Min.)
31,207 10V
(Input Max.)
Input Value
Calculating the Linear Relationship
Use the following equations to calculate the scaled units:
Scaled value = (input value x rate) + offset
Rate = (scaled max. – scaled min.) / (input max. – input min.)
= (100 – 0) / (31,207 – 0)
= .00320 (or 32/10000)
Offset = scaled min. – (input min. x rate)
= 0 − (0 × .00320) = 0
As shown below, if the input value is 10, the scaled value is .032.
Ladder representation:
SCL
SCALE
Source
Rate [/10000]
Offset
Dest
10–14
.032 = (10 x .0032) + 0
I:0.4
32
0
N7:0
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Math Instructions in the Paper
Drilling Machine Application
Example
To demonstrate the use of math instructions, this section provides ladder
rungs followed by the optimized instruction list for these rungs. The rungs
are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in
appendix D. You will be adding to the subroutine in file 7 that was started in
chapter 9.
Ladder Rungs
Rung 7:1
Resets the number of 1/4 in. increments and the 1/4 in. thousands when the
”drill change reset” keyswitch is energized. This should occur following
each drill bit change.
| drill change
1/4 in.
|
| reset keyswitch
Thousands
|
|
I:0
+CLR–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–+CLEAR
+–+–|
|
8
| |Dest
N7:11| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
1/4 in.
| |
|
|
increments
| |
|
|
| |
|
| +CLR–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+CLEAR
+–+ |
|
|Dest
N7:10|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 7:5➀
Keeps a running total of how many inches of paper have been drilled with
the current drill bit. Every time a hole is drilled, the thickness (in
1/4 ins) is added to the running total (kept in 1/4 ins). The OSR is
necessary because the ADD executes every time the rung is true, and the
drill body would actuate the DRILL DEPTH limit switch for more than 1
program scan. Integer N7:12 is the integer–converted value of the BCD
thumbwheel on inputs I:0/11 – I:0/14.
| Drill
|Drill Wear
1/4 in.
|
| Depth LS | OSR 1
increments
|
|
|
|
I:0
B3
+ADD–––––––––––––––+ |
|––––] [–––––––[OSR]–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+ADD
+–|
|
4
24
|Source A
N7:12| |
|
|
0| |
|
|Source B
N7:10| |
|
|
0| |
|
|Dest
N7:10| |
|
|
0| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
➀
Rungs 7:2 through 7:4 are added at the end of Chapter 11.
10–15
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
Rung 7:6
When the number of 1/4 in. increments surpasses 1000, determines how many
increments are past 1000 and stores in N7:20. Adds 1 to the total of 1000
1/4 in. increments and re–initializes the 1/4 in. increments accumulator
to how many increments were beyond 1000.
|
1/4 in.
|
|
increments
|
|
|
| +GEQ–––––––––––––––+
+SUB–––––––––––––––+
|
|–+GRTR THAN OR EQUAL+–––––––––––––––––––––––+–+SUBTRACT
+–+–|
| |Source A
N7:10|
| |Source A
N7:10| | |
| |
0|
| |
0| | |
| |Source B
1000|
| |Source B
1000| | |
| |
|
| |
| | |
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |Dest
N7:20| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
1/4 in.
| |
|
|
Thousands
| |
|
| +ADD–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+ADD
+–+ |
|
| |Source A
1| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Source B
N7:11| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:11| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
1/4 in.
| |
|
|
increments
| |
|
|
| |
|
| +MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MOVE
+–+ |
|
|Source
N7:20|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
|Dest
N7:10|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 7:7
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
Instruction List
File
7,
Rung 1
Resets the number of 1/4 in. increments and the 1/4 in. thousands when the
”drill change reset” keyswitch is energized. This should occur following
each drill bit change.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
drill change reset keyswitch
I/8
0
85
CLR
1/4 in. Thousands
DEST N11
85
0000H
CLR
1/4 in. increments
DEST N10
0000H
10–16
FORCES
––––––
Chapter 10
Using Math Instructions
File
7,
Rung 5➀
Keeps a running total of how many inches of paper have been drilled with
the current drill bit. Every time a hole is drilled, adds the thickness
(in 1/4 ins) to the running total (kept in 1/4 ins). The OSR is necessary
because the ADD executes every time the rung is true, and the drill body
would actuate the DRILL DEPTH limit switch for more than 1 program scan.
Integer N7:12 is the integer–converted value of the BCD thumbwheel on
inputs I:0/11 – I:0/14.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
29
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
–OSR–
80
➀
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
Drill Depth LS
I/4
0
Tool Wear
B/24
0
FORCES
––––––
AND–OSR
ADD
OSR 1
SRCA N12
0000H
1/4 in. increments
SRCB N10
0000H
1/4 in. increments
DEST N10
0000H
Rungs 7:2 through 7:4 are added at the end of Chapter 11.
File
7,
Rung 6
When the number of 1/4 in. increments surpasses 1000, determines how many
increments are past 1000 and stores in N7:20. Adds 1 to the total of
’1000 1/4 in.’ increments and re–initializes the 1/4 in. increments
accumulator to how many increments were beyond 1000.
FUN
CODE
––––
65
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–GEQ–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–GEQ
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
1/4 in. increments
SRCA N10
0000H
SRCB
1000
81
SUB
1/4 in. increments
SRCA N10
0000H
SRCB
1000
DEST N20
0000H
80
106
ADD
MOV
SRCA
1/4 in. Thousands
SRCB N11
1/4 in. Thousands
DEST N11
1
0000H
0000H
SRC N20
0000H
1/4 in. increments
DEST N10
0000H
10–17
Chapter
11
Using Data Handling Instructions
This chapter contains general information about the data handling
instructions and explains how they function in your application program.
Each of the instructions includes information on:
• what the instruction symbol looks like
• typical execution time for the instruction
• how to use the instruction
• how to enter the instruction
In addition, the last section contains an application example for a paper
drilling machine that shows the data handling instructions in use.
Data Handling Instructions
Mnemonic
Function
Code
Name
Purpose
Page
TOD
100
Convert to BCD
Converts the integer source value to BCD format and stores it in the destination.
11–2
FRD
101
Convert from BCD
Converts the BCD source value to an integer and stores it in the destination.
11–3
DCD
102
Decode 4 to 1 of
16
Decodes a 4-bit value (0 to 15), turning on the corresponding bit in the 16-bit
destination.
11–7
ENC
103
Encodes a 16-bit source to a 4-bit value. Searches the source from the lowest to
Encode 1 of 16 to 4 the highest bit, and looks for the first set bit. The corresponding bit position is
written to the destination as an integer.
COP
104
Copy File
FLL
105
Fill File
The COP instruction copies data from the source file to the destination file The
FLL instruction loads a source value into each position in the destination file.
11–10
MOV
106
Move
Moves the source value to the destination.
11–15
MVM
107
Masked Move
Moves data from a source location to a selected portion of the destination.
11–16
AND
108
And
Performs a bitwise AND operation. (This differs from the AND input instruction
discussed in chapter 7.)
11–18
OR
109
Or
Performs a bitwise inclusive OR operation. (This differs from the OR input
instruction discussed in chapter 7.)
11–19
XOR
110
Exclusive Or
Performs a bitwise Exclusive OR operation.
11–20
NOT
111
Not
Performs a NOT operation.
11–21
NEG
112
Negate
Changes the sign of the source and stores it in the destination.
11–22
FFL
113
FIFO Load
FFU
114
FIFO Unload
The FFL instruction loads a word into a FIFO stack on successive false-to-true
transitions. The FFU unloads a word from the stack on successive false-true
transitions. The first word loaded is the first to be unloaded.
11–25
LFL
115
LIFO Load
LFU
116
LIFO Unload
The LFL instruction loads a word into a LIFO stack on successive false-to-true
transitions. The LFU unloads a word from the stack on successive false-to-true
transitions. The last word loaded is the first to be unloaded.
11–28
11–8
11–1
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
About the Data Handling
Instructions
Use these instructions to convert information, manipulate data in the
controller, and perform logic operations.
Since these are output instructions, they do not have LD, AND, and OR
equivalents.
In this chapter you will find a general overview preceding groups of
instructions. Before you learn about the instructions in each of these groups,
we suggest that you read the overview. This chapter contains the following
overviews:
• Move and Logical Instructions Overview
• FIFO and LIFO Instructions Overview
Convert to BCD (TOD)
Use this instruction to convert 16-bit integers into BCD values.
Ladder representation:
The source must be a word address. The destination parameter can be a
word address in a data file, or it can be the math register, S13 and S14.
TOD
TO BCD
Source
Dest
N7:11
0
S:13
00000000
If the integer value you enter is negative, the sign is ignored and the
conversion occurs as if the number was positive.
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
49.64
6.78
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
always resets.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
S0/2
Zero (Z)
sets if the BCD result is larger than 9999. On overflow, the
minor error flag is also set.
sets if destination value is zero.
S0/3
Sign (S)
sets if the source word is negative; otherwise resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
As you enter the instruction, you can return to previously entered operands
by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter new
parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one.
Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the instruction’s
parameters you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page 17–4.)
11–2
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
To enter the function code, press:
ANB
F UN
ANB
0
1
0
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
T OD
S R C
P 0 0 0
S 1 3
T OD
D E S T
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H
0
Changes to the Math Register
Contains the 5-digit BCD result of the conversion. This result is valid at
overflow.
Important: To convert numbers larger than 9999 decimal, the destination
must be the Math Register (S13). You must reset the Minor
Error Bit (S5/0) to prevent an error.
Convert from BCD (FRD)
Use this instruction to convert BCD values to integer values.
Ladder representation:
The source parameter can be a word address in a data file, or it can be the
math register, S13. The destination must be a word address.
FRD
FROM BCD
Source
Dest
N7:14
0000
N7:12
0
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
always resets.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
sets if non-BCD value is contained at the source or the
value to be converted is greater than 32,767; otherwise
reset. On overflow, the minor error flag is also set.
S0/2
Zero (Z)
sets if destination value is zero.
S0/3
Sign (S)
always resets.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
56.88
5.52
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
As you enter the instruction, you can return to previously entered operands
by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter new
parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one.
Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the instruction’s
parameters you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page 17–4.)
11–3
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
ANB
1
0
1
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 1 4
F R D
S R C
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 0 0
N 1 2
F R D
D E S T
0
Important: Always provide filtering of all BCD input devices prior to
performing the FRD instruction. The slightest difference in
point-to-point input filter delay can cause the FRD instruction to
overflow due to the conversion of a non-BCD digit.
Example 1
In the following example, the two rungs cause the controller to verify that the
value I0 remains the same for two consecutive scans before it executes the
FRD. This prevents the FRD from converting a non-BCD value during an
input value change.
Important: To convert numbers larger than 9999 BCD, the source must be
the Math Register (S13). You must reset the Minor Error Bit
(S5/0) to prevent an error.
Ladder Rungs
S:1
]/[
15
EQU
EQUAL
Source A
Source B
FRD
N7:1
0
I:0.0
0
FROM BCD
Source
Dest
I:0.0
0000
N7:2
0
MOV
MOVE
Source
Dest
11–4
I:0.0
0
N7:1
0
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Instruction List
FUN
CODE
––––
21
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–]/[–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LDI
51
–EQU–
AND–EQU
SRCA N1
SRCB I0
0000H
0000H
FRD
SRC I0
DEST N2
0000H
0000H
101
FUN
CODE
––––
106
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
MOV
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
S1/15
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SRC I0
DEST N1
VALUE
–––––
0
VALUE
–––––
0000H
0000H
FORCES
––––––
FORCES
––––––
Example 2
The BCD value 32760 in the math register is converted and stored in N10.
The maximum source value is 32767, BCD.
0000 0000 0000 0011
15
0
S14
0
0
0
3
0010 0111 0110 0000
15
2
S13
7
6
0
5–digit BCD
0
3 2 7 6 0 N10 Decimal 0111 1111 1111 1000
You should convert BCD values to integer before you manipulate them in
your program. If you do not convert the values, the controller manipulates
them as integers and their value may be lost.
Important: If the math register (S13 and S14) is used as the source for the
FRD instruction and the BCD value does not exceed 4 digits, be
sure to clear word S14 before executing the FRD instruction. If
S14 is not cleared and a value is contained in this word from
another math instruction located elsewhere in the program, an
incorrect decimal value will be placed in the destination word.
Clearing S14 before executing the FRD instruction is shown below. When
the input condition I/1 is set (1), a BCD value (transferred from a 4-digit
thumbwheel switch for example) is moved from word N2 into the math
register. Status word S14 is then cleared to make certain that unwanted data
is not present when the FRD instruction is executed.
11–5
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Ladder Rung
MOV
I:0
] [
MOVE
Source
1
N7:2
4660
S:13
4660
Dest
0001 0010 0011 0100
CLR
CLEAR
Dest
S:14
0
FRD
FROM BCD
Source
Dest
S:13
00001234
N7:0
1234
The programming
software displays S13
and S14 in BCD.
0000 0100 1101 0010
Instruction List
FUN
CODE
––––
20
11–6
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
I/1
VALUE
–––––
0
106
MOV
SRC N2
DEST S13
4660
4660
85
CLR
DEST S14
0000H
101
FRD
SRC S13
DEST N0
00001234H
1234
FORCES
––––––
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Decode 4 to 1 of 16 (DCD)
When executed, this instruction sets one bit of the destination word. The
particular bit that is turned On depends on the value of the first four bits of
the source word. See the table below.
Ladder representation:
DCD
Use this instruction to multiplex data in applications such as rotary switches,
keypads, and bank switching.
DECODE 4 to 1 of 16
Source
N7:11
0000
Dest
N7:12
0000000000000000
Source
Bit
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
27.67
6.78
Destination
15–04 03 02 01 00
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Entering Parameters
• Source is the address that contains the information to be decoded. Only
the first four bits (0–3) are used by the DCD instruction. The remaining
bits may be used for other application specific needs.
• Destination is the address of the word where the decoded data is to be
stored.
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
Unaffected.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
As you enter the instruction, you can return to previously entered operands
by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter new
parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one.
Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the instruction’s
parameters you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page 17–4.)
11–7
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
To enter the function code, press:
ANB
FUN
1
0
L
2
Encode 1 of 16 to 4 (ENC)
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
D C D
S R C
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 0 0
N 1 2
D C D
D E S T
0 0 0 0 H
When the rung is true, this output instruction searches the source from the
lowest to the highest bit and looks for the first set bit. The corresponding bit
position is written to the destination as an integer, as shown in the table
below.
Ladder representation:
ENC
ENCODE 1 of 16 to 4
Source
N7:11
0000000000000000
Dest
N7:23
0000
Source
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
54.80
6.78
Bit
Destination
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15–04 03 02 01 00
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Entering Parameters
• Source is the address of the word to be encoded. Only one bit of this
word should be on at any one time. If more than one bit in the source is
set, the destination bits are set based on the least significant bit that is set.
If a source of zero is used, all of the destination bits are reset and the zero
bit is set.
• Destination is the address that contains the bit encode information. Bits
4–15 of the destination are reset by the ENC instruction.
11–8
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
The arithmetic status bits are found in Word 0, bits 0–3 in the controller
status file. After an instruction is executed, the arithmetic status bits in the
status file are updated:
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
always resets.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
S0/2
Zero (Z)
sets if more than one bit in the source is set; otherwise
reset. The math overflow bit (S5/0) is not set.
sets if destination value is zero.
S0/3
Sign (S)
always resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
As you enter the instruction, you can return to previously entered operands
by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter new
parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one.
Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the instruction’s
parameters you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page 17–4.)
To enter the function code, press:
F UN
ANB
1
0
U
3
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
E N C
S R C
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 0 0
N 2 3
E N C
D E S T
0 0 0 0 H
11–9
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Copy File (COP) and
Fill File (FLL) Instructions
Ladder representation:
COP
COPY FILE
Source
Dest
Length
#C5:11
#N7:14
25
The destination file type determines the number of words that an instruction
transfers. For example, if the destination file type is a counter and the source
file type is an integer, three integer words are transferred for each element in
the counter-type file.
After a COP or FLL instruction is executed, index register S24 is cleared to
zero.
Using COP
FLL
FILL FILE
Source
Dest
Length
N7:11
#C5:12
5
This instruction copies blocks of data from one location into another. It uses
no status bits. If you need an enable bit, program an output instruction
(OUT) in parallel using an internal bit as the output address. The following
figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated.
Source
Destination
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True False
COP 27.31+5.06/word
FLL 26.86+3.62/word
6.60
6.60
File to File
Entering Parameters
Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction:
• Source is the address of the first word in the file to be copied. You must
use the file indicator (#) in the address. (The HHP inserts the # character
automatically.)
• Destination is the address of the first word in the file where the data is to
be stored. You must use the file indicator (#) in the address. (The HHP
inserts the # character automatically.)
• Length is the number of words or elements in the file to be copied. See
the table below.
If the
th destination
d tination file
fil type
t p is
i aa(n):
n:
then you can specify a maximum length of:
Output
Discrete
1
Analog
5
Input
2
8
Status
33
—
Bit
32
—
Timer
40
—
Counter
32
—
Control
16
—
Integer
105
—
Important: The maximum lengths apply when the source is of the
same file type.
11–10
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
All elements are copied from the source file into the destination file each
time the instruction is executed. Elements are copied in ascending order.
If your destination file type is a timer, counter, or control file, be sure that the
destination words corresponding to the status elements of your source file
contain zeros.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The following items apply when entering the instruction:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
To enter the function code, press:
F UN
ANB
1
0
4
ENT
P 0 0 0
# C 1 1
C OP
S R C
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 0 0
# N 1 4
C OP
D E S T
0
P 0 0 0
C OP
L E N
2 5
11–11
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Using FLL
The following figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated. The
instruction fills the words of a file with a source value. It uses no status bits.
If you need an enable bit, program a parallel output that uses a storage
address.
Destination
Source
Word to File
Entering Parameters
Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction:
• Source is a constant or element address. The file indicator (#) is not
required for an element address.
• Destination is the starting address of the file you want to fill. You must
use the file indicator (#) in the address.
• Length is the number of words or elements in the file to be filled.
If the
th destination
d tination file
fil type
t p iis a:
then you can specify a maximum length of:
Output
Discrete
1
Analog
5
Input
2
8
Status
33
—
Bit
32
—
Timer
40
—
Counter
32
—
Control
16
—
Integer
105
—
All elements are filled from the source value (typically a constant) into the
specified destination file each scan the rung is true. Elements are filled in
ascending order.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The following items apply when entering the instruction:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
11–12
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
ANB
1
0
5
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
F L L
S R C
P 0 0 0
# C 1 2
F L L
D E S T
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 0 0
F L L
L E N
0
5
Move and Logical Instructions
Overview
The following general information applies to move and logical instructions.
Entering Parameters
• Source is the address of the value on which the logical or move operation
is to be performed. It can be a word address or a constant. If the
instruction has two source operands, it will not accept constants in both
operands.
• Destination is the address where the resulting data is stored. It must be a
word address.
Entering the Instructions
You enter the instructions from within the program monitor functional area.
The following items apply when entering the instructions:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
11–13
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Using Indexed Word Addresses
You have the option of using indexed word addresses for instruction
parameters specifying word addresses. Indexed addressing is discussed in
chapter 6.
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
The arithmetic status bits are found in Word 0, bits 0–3 in the controller
status file. After an instruction is executed, the arithmetic status bits in the
status file are updated:
Bit
Name
Description
S0/0
Carry (C)
Set if a carry is generated; otherwise cleared.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
Indicates that the actual result of a math instruction
does not fit in the designated destination.
S0/2
Zero (Z)
Indicates a 0 value after a math, move, or logic
instruction.
S0/3
Sign (S)
Indicates a negative (less than 0) value after a
math, move, or logic instruction.
Overflow Trap Bit, S5/0
Minor error bit (S5/0) is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or
division by zero. If this bit is set upon execution of an END statement or a
Temporary End (TND) instruction, the recoverable major error code 0020 is
declared.
In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occurs, you can
avoid a controller fault by using a reset (RST) instruction with address S5/0
in your program. The rung must be between the overflow point and the END
or TND statement.
Changes to the Math Register, S13 and S14
Move and logical instructions do not affect the math register.
11–14
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Move (MOV)
This output instruction moves the source data to the destination location. As
long as the rung remains true, the instruction moves the data each scan.
Ladder representation:
MOV
MOVE
Source
23
Entering Parameters
Dest
O:0.0
0
Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction:
• Source is the address or constant of the data you want to move.
• Destination is the address where the instruction moves the data.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
25.05
6.78
Tip
If you wish to move one word of data without affecting the math flags, use a
copy (COP) instruction with a length of 1 word instead of the MOV
instruction.
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
always resets.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
always resets.
S0/2
Zero (Z)
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets.
S0/3
Sign (S)
sets if result is negative (most significant bit is set);
otherwise resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
ANB
1
0
6
P 0 0 0
MOV
S R C
2 3
P 0 0 0
O0
MOV
D E S T
0 0 0 0 H
E NT
11–15
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Masked Move (MVM)
The MVM instruction is a word instruction that moves data from a source
location to a destination and allows portions of the destination data to be
masked by a separate word. As long as the rung remains true, the instruction
moves the data each scan.
Ladder representation:
MVM
MASKED MOVE
Source
B3:0
Mask
F0F0
Dest
B3:2
Entering Parameters
Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction:
• Source is the address of the data you want to move.
• Mask is the address of the mask through which the instruction moves
data; the mask can be a hex value (constant).
• Destination is the address where the instruction moves the data.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
33.28
6.78
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
always resets.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
always resets.
S0/2
Zero (Z)
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets.
S0/3
Sign (S)
sets if result is negative; otherwise resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
11–16
ANB
1
0
7
ENT
P 0 0 0
B 0
MV M
S R C
0 0 0 1 H
P 0 0 0
MV M
MA S K
F 0 F 0 H
P 0 0 0
B 2
MV M
D E S T
0 0 0 0 H
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Operation
When the rung containing this instruction is true, data at the source address
passes through the mask to the destination address. See the following HHP
displays and figure.
P 0 0 0
B 0
MV M
S R C
5 5 5 5 H
P 0 0 0
MV M
MA S K
F 0 F 0 H
P 0 0 0
B 2
MV M
D E S T
F F F F H
B2 before move
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
source B0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Mask F0F0
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
B2 after move
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
Mask data by setting bits in the mask to zero; pass data by setting bits in the
mask to one. The mask can be a constant value or you can vary the mask by
assigning a direct address. Bits in the destination that correspond to zeros in
the mask are not altered.
11–17
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
And (AND)
The value at source A is ANDed bit by bit with the value at source B and
then stored in the destination. (This instruction differs from the AND input
instruction discussed in chapter 8.)
Ladder representation:
AND
BITWISE AND
Source A
Truth Table
255
Dest = A AND B
Source B
N7:0
100
N7:0
100
Dest
A
0
1
0
1
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
34.00
6.78
B
0
0
1
1
Dest
0
0
0
1
Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant; however, both
sources cannot be a constant. The destination must be a word address.
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
With this Bit:
The controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
always resets.
S0/1
S0/2
Overflow (V)
Zero (Z)
always resets.
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets.
S0/3
Sign (S)
sets if most significant bit is set; otherwise resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
11–18
ANB
1
0
8
P 0 0 0
A N D
S R C A
2 5 5
P 0 0 0
N 0
A N D
S R C B
1 0 0
P 0 0 0
N 0
A N D
D E S T
1 0 0
ENT
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Or (OR)
The value at source A is ORed bit by bit with the value at source B and then
stored in the destination. (This instruction differs from the OR input
instruction discussed in chapter 8.)
Ladder representation:
OR
Truth Table
BITWISE INCLUS OR
Source A
255
Dest = A OR B
Source B
N7:0
100
N7:0
100
Dest
A
0
1
0
1
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
33.68
6.78
B
0
0
1
1
Dest
0
1
1
1
Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant; however, both
sources cannot be a constant. The destination must be a word address.
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
always resets.
S0/1
S0/2
Overflow (V)
Zero (Z)
always resets.
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets.
S0/3
Sign (S)
sets if result is negative (most significant bit is set)
otherwise resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
ANB
1
0
9
P 0 0 0
OR
S R C A
2 5 5
P 0 0 0
N 0
OR
S R C B
1 0 0
P 0 0 0
N 0
OR
D E S T
1 0 0
ENT
11–19
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Exclusive Or (XOR)
The value at source A is Exclusive ORed bit by bit with the value at source B
and then stored in the destination.
Ladder representation:
Truth Table
XOR
BITWISE EXCLUS OR
Source A
255
Source B
Dest = A XOR B
A
0
1
0
1
N7:0
100
N7:0
100
Dest
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
33.64
6.92
B
0
0
1
1
Dest
0
1
1
0
Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant; however, both
sources cannot be a constant. The destination must be a word address.
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
always resets.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
always resets.
S0/2
Zero (Z)
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets
S0/3
Sign (S)
sets if result is negative (most significant bit is set);
otherwise resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
11–20
ANB
1
1
0
P 0 0 0
X OR
S R C A
2 5 5
P 0 0 0
N 0
X OR
S R C B
1 0 0
P 0 0 0
N 0
X OR
D E S T
1 0 0
E NT
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Not (NOT)
The source value is NOTed bit by bit and then stored in the destination (one’s
complement).
Ladder representation:
Truth Table
NOT
NOT
Source
Dest = NOT A
N7:4
0
N7:11
0
Dest
A
0
1
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
28.21
6.78
Dest
1
0
The source and destination must be word addresses.
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
Carry (C)
always resets.
S0/1
Overflow (V)
always resets.
S0/2
Zero (Z)
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets.
S0/3
Sign (S)
sets if result is negative (most significant bit is set);
otherwise resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
1
1
1
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 4
N OT
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
N OT
S R C
0
D E S T
0
11–21
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Negate (NEG)
Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of a value. If you negate a
negative value, the result is a positive; if you negate a positive value, the
result is a negative. The destination contains the two’s complement of the
source.
Ladder representation:
NEG
NEGATE
Source
The source and destination must be word addresses.
N7:4
0
N7:11
0
Dest
Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
29.48
6.78
With this Bit:
The Controller:
S0/0
clears if 0 or overflow, otherwise sets.
Carry (C)
S0/1
Overflow (V)
S0/2
S0/3
Zero (Z)
Sign (S)
sets if overflow, otherwise reset. Overflow occurs only if
–32,768 is the source. On overflow, the minor error flag is
also set. The value 32,767 is placed in the destination. If
S14 is set, then the unsigned, truncated overflow remains
in the destination.
sets if result is zero; otherwise resets.
sets if result is negative; otherwise resets.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
11–22
1
1
L
2
E NT
P 0 0 0
N 4
N E G
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
N E G
S R C
0
D E S T
0
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
FIFO and LIFO Instructions
Overview
FIFO instructions load words into a file and unload them in the same order as
they were loaded. The first word in is the first word out.
LIFO instructions load words into a file and unload them in the opposite
order as they were loaded. The last word in is the first word out.
Entering Parameters
Enter the following parameters when programming these instructions:
• Source is a word address or constant (–32,768 to 32,767) that becomes
the next value in the stack.
• Destination (Dest) is a word address that stores the value that exits from
the stack.
This Instruction:
Unloads the Value from:
FIFO’s FFU
First word
LIFO’s LFU
The last word entered
• FIFO/LIFO is the address of the stack. It must be an indexed word
address in the bit, input, output, or integer file. (The HHP inserts the #
character automatically.) Use the same FIFO address for the associated
FFL and FFU instructions; use the same LIFO address for the associated
LFL and LFU instructions.
• Control is the address of the control structure. The control structure
stores the status bits, the stack length, and the position value Do not use
the control file address for any other instruction.
Status bits of the control structure are addressed by mnemonic. These
include:
– Empty Bit EM (bit 12) is set by the controller to indicate the stack is
empty.
– Done Bit DN (bit 13) is set by the controller to indicate the stack is
full. This inhibits loading the stack.
– FFU/LFU Enable Bit EU (bit 14) is set on a false-to-true transition
of the FFU/LFU rung and is reset on a true-to-false transition.
– FFL/LFL Enable Bit EN (bit 15) is set on a false-to-true transition
of the FFL/LFL rung and is reset on a true-to-false transition.
• Length specifies the maximum number of words in the stack. Address
the length value by mnemonic (LEN).
• Position is the next available location where the instruction loads data
into the stack. This value changes after each load or unload operation.
Address the position value by mnemonic (POS).
11–23
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Entering the Instructions
The following items apply when entering the instructions:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
Effects on Index Register S24
The value present in S24 is overwritten with the position value when a
false-to-true transition of the FFL/FFU or LFL/LFU rung occurs. For the
FFL/LFL, the position value determined at instruction entry is placed in S24.
For the FFU/LFU, the position value determined at instruction exit is placed
in S24.
When the DN bit is set, a false-to-true transition of the FFL/LFL rung does
not change the position value or the index register value. When the EM bit is
set, a false-to-true transition of the FFU/LFU rung does not change the
position value or the index register value.
11–24
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
FIFO Load (FFL) and
FIFO Unload (FFU)
FFL and FFU instructions are used in pairs. The FFL instruction loads words
into a user-created file called a FIFO stack. The FFU instruction unloads
words from the FIFO stack in the same order as they were entered.
Ladder representation:
FFL
FIFO LOAD
Source
FIFO
Control
Length
Position
N7:10
#N7:12
R6:0
34
9
(EN)
(DN)
(EM)
FFU
FIFO UNLOAD
FIFO
Dest
Control
Length
Position
#N7:12
N7:11
R6:0
34
9
(EU)
(DN)
(EM)
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True False
FFL
61.13
FFU 73.78+4.34 x
position value
Entering the Instructions
33.67
34.90
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
While entering the FFL instruction, you see these screens:
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
1
1
U
3
ENT
P 0 0 0
N 1 0
F F L
S R C
P 0 0 0
# N 1 2
F F L
F I F O
P 0 0 0
R 0
F F L
C T R L
P 0 0 0
F F L
L E N
* * * * 3 4
P 0 0 0
F F L
P OS
* * * * * 9
11–25
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
While entering the FFU instruction, you see these screens:
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
1
1
4
ENT
P 0 0 0
# N 1 2
F F U
F I F O
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
F F U
D E S T
P 0 0 0
R 0
F F U
C T R L
P 0 0 0
F F U
L E N
* * * * 3 4
P 0 0 0
F F U
P OS
* * * * * 9
Operation
The operation of the FFL – FFU instruction pair is shown on the following
page. The screens shown to the left of the figure are the condensed screens
that appear after instruction entry is complete.
11–26
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
P 0 0 0
N 1 0
P 0 0 0
# N 1 2
P 0 0 0
L
P 0 0 0
# N 1 2
F F L
Destination
S R C
0
F F L
F F L
3 4
P
F F U
F I F O
0
N11
FFU instruction unloads
data from stack #N12 at
position 0, N12.
R 0 0
9
F I F O
0
F F U
P 0 0 0
L
F F U
3 4
P
D E S T
0
N12
0
N13
1
N14
2
N15
3
N16
Source
N10
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
Position
4
N17
5
N18
6
N19
7
N20
34 words are
allocated for FIFO
stack starting at
N12, ending at N45.
8
N21
9
N45
33
FFL instruction loads data
into stack #N12 at the next
available position, 9 in this
case.
R 0 0
9
FFL–FFU Instruction Pair
Loading and Unloading of Stack #N12
FFL Instruction
When rung conditions change from false-to-true, the controller sets the FFL
enable bit (EN). This loads the contents of the Source, N10, into the stack
structure indicated by the position number, 9. The position value then
increments.
The FFL instruction loads an element at each false-to-true transition of the
rung, until the stack is filled (34 elements). The controller then sets the done
bit (DN), inhibiting further loading.
FFU Instruction
When rung conditions change from false-to-true, the controller sets the FFU
enable bit (EU). This unloads the contents of the element at stack position 0
into the Destination, N11. All data in the stack is shifted one element toward
position zero and the highest numbered element is zeroed. The position
value then decrements.
The FFU instruction unloads an element at each false-to-true transition of the
rung, until the stack is empty. The controller then sets the empty bit (EM).
11–27
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
LIFO Load (LFL) and
LIFO Unload (LFU)
LFL and LFU instructions are used in pairs. The LFL instruction loads
words into a user-created file called a LIFO stack. The LFU instruction
unloads words from the LIFO stack in the opposite order as they were
entered.
Ladder representation:
LFL
LIFO LOAD
Source
LIFO
Control
Length
Position
N7:10
#N7:12
R6:0
34
9
(EN)
(DN)
(EM)
LFU
LIFO UNLOAD
LIFO
Dest
Control
Length
Position
#N7:12
N7:11
R6:0
34
9
(EU)
(DN)
(EM)
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True False
LFL 61.13
LFU 64.20
Entering the Instructions
33.67
35.08
You enter the instructions from within the program monitor functional area.
While entering the LFL instruction, you see these screens:
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
11–28
1
1
5
E NT
P 0 0 0
N 1 0
L F L
S R C
P 0 0 0
# N 1 2
L F L
L I F O
P 0 0 0
R 0
L F L
C T R L
P 0 0 0
L F L
L E N
* * * * 3 4
P 0 0 0
L F L
P OS
* * * * * 9
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
While entering the LFU instruction, you see these screens:
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
1
1
6
ENT
P 0 0 0
# N 1 2
L F U
L I F O
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
L F U
D E S T
P 0 0 0
R 0
L F U
C T R L
P 0 0 0
L F U
L E N
* * * * 3 4
P 0 0 0
L F U
P OS
* * * * * 9
Operation
The operation of the LFL – LFU instruction pair is shown on the following
page. The screens shown to the left of the figure are the condensed screens
that appear after instruction entry is complete.
11–29
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
P 0 0 0
N 1 0
P 0 0 0
# N 1 2
P 0 0 0
L
P 0 0 0
# N 1 2
L F L
0
L F L
L F L
3 4
P
L F U
L I F O
0
N11
LFU instruction unloads
data from stack #N12 at
position 8.
R 0 0
9
L I F O
0
L F U
P 0 0 0
L
L F U
3 4
P
D E S T
0
R 0 0
9
N12
0
N13
1
N14
2
N15
3
N16
Source
N10
P 0 0 0
N 1 1
Position
Destination
S R C
4
N17
5
N18
6
N19
7
N20
34 words are
allocated for LIFO
stack starting at
N12, ending at N45.
8
N21
9
N45
33
LFL instruction loads data
into stack #N12 at the next
available position, 9 in this
case.
LFL–LFU Instruction Pair
Loading and Unloading of Stack #N12
LFL Instruction
When rung conditions change from false-to-true, the controller sets the LFL
enable bit (EN). This loads the contents of the Source, N10, into the stack
element indicated by the position number, 9. The position value then
increments.
The LFL instruction loads an element at each false-to-true transition of the
rung, until the stack is filled (34 elements). The controller sets the done bit
(DN), inhibiting further loading.
LFU Instruction
When rung conditions change from false-to-true, the controller sets the LFU
enable bit (EU). This unloads data from the last element loaded into the
stack (at the position value minus 1), placing it in the Destination, N11. The
position value then decrements.
The LFU instruction unloads one element at each false-to-true transition of
the rung, until the stack is empty. The controller then sets the empty bit
(EM).
11–30
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Data Handling Instructions in
the Paper Drilling Machine
Application Example
To demonstrate the use of data handling instructions, this section provides
ladder rungs, followed by the optimized instruction list for these rungs. The
rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in
appendix E. You will be adding to the subroutine in file 7 that was started in
chapter 9.
Ladder Rungs
Rung 7:2➀
Moves the single-digit BCD thumbwheel value into an internal integer
register. This is done to properly align the four BCD input signals prior
to executing the BCD to Integer instruction (FRD). The thumbwheel is used
to allow the operator to enter the thickness of the paper that is to be
drilled. The thickness is entered in 1/4 in. increments. This provides a
range of 1/4 in. to 2.25 in.
|
BCD bit 0 |FRD bit 0
|
|
I:0
N7:14
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+––––] [––––––––( )–––––+–|
|
|
11
0
| |
|
| BCD bit 1 |FRD bit 1 | |
|
|
I:0
N7:14
| |
|
+––––] [––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
|
12
1
| |
|
| BCD bit 2 |FRD bit 2 | |
|
|
I:0
N7:14
| |
|
+––––] [––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
|
13
2
| |
|
| BCD bit 3 |FRD bit 3 | |
|
|
I:0
N7:14
| |
|
+––––] [––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
14
3
|
Rung 7:3
Converts the BCD thumbwheel value from BCD to integer. This is done
because the controller operates upon integer values. This rung also
”debounces” the thumbwheel to ensure that the conversion only occurs on
valid BCD values. Note that invalid BCD values can occur while the
operator is changing the BCD thumbwheel. This is due to input filter
propagation delay differences between the four input circuits that provide
the BCD input value.
| 1’st
previous
debounced
|
| pass
scan’s
BCD value
|
| bit
BCD input
|
|
value
|
|
S:1
+EQU–––––––––––––––+
+FRD–––––––––––––––+
|
|–+––]/[–––––––+EQUAL
+–+–––––––+FROM BCD
+–+––+–|
| |
15
|Source A
N7:13| |
|Source
N7:14| | | |
| |
|
0| |
|
0000| | | |
| |
|Source B
N7:14| |
|Dest
N7:12| | | |
| |
|
0| |
|
0| | | |
| |
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
+––––––––––––––––––+ | | |
| |
| Math
Math
| | |
| |
| Overflow
Error
| | |
| |
| Bit
Bit
| | |
| |
|
S:0
S:5
| | |
| |
+––––] [–––––––––(U)–––––––––+ | |
| |
1
0
| |
| |
this
| |
| |
scan’s
| |
| |
BCD input
| |
| |
value
| |
| |
+MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
| +––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+MOVE
+–+ |
|
|Source
N7:14|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
|Dest
N7:13|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
➀ This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung if you are
using a 16 I/O controller.
11–31
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
Rung 7:4
Ensures that the operator cannot select a paper thickness of 0. If this
were allowed, the drill bit life calculation could be defeated resulting
in poor quality holes due to a dull drill bit. Therefore the minimum
paper thickness used to calculate drill bit wear is 1/4 in.
|
debounced
debounced
|
|
BCD
BCD
|
|
value
value
|
| +EQU–––––––––––––––+
+MOV–––––––––––––––+ |
|–+EQUAL
+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––+MOVE
+–|
| |Source A
N7:12|
|Source
1| |
| |
0|
|
| |
| |Source B
0|
|Dest
N7:12| |
| |
|
|
0| |
| +––––––––––––––––––+
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Instruction List
File
7,
Rung 2➀
Moves the single digit BCD thumbwheel value into an internal integer
register. This is done to properly align the four BCD input signals prior
to executing the BCD to Integer instruction (FRD). The thumbwheel is used
to allow the operator to enter the thickness of the paper that is to be
drilled. The thickness is entered in 1/4 in. increments. This provides a
range of 1/4 in. to 2.25 in.
FUN
CODE
––––
10
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
22
–] [–
AND
BCD bit 0
40
–( )–
OUT
FRD bit 0
MNEMONIC
––––––––
MPS
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
I/11
N14/0
11
–] [–
AND
BCD bit 1
40
–( )–
OUT
FRD bit 1
I/12
N14/1
11
0
0
0
0
MRD
22
–] [–
AND
BCD bit 2
40
–( )–
OUT
FRD bit 2
I/13
N14/2
12
0
0
MPP
–] [–
AND
BCD bit 3
I/14
40
FORCES
––––––
MRD
22
22
VALUE
–––––
–( )–
OUT
0
FRD bit 3
N14/3
0
➀ This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung if you are
using a 16 I/O controller.
11–32
Chapter 11
Using Data Handling Instructions
File
7,
Rung 3
Converts the BCD thumbwheel value from BCD to integer. This is done
because the controller operates upon integer values. This rung also
”debounces” the thumbwheel to ensure that the conversion only occurs on
valid BCD values. Note that invalid BCD values can occur while the
operator is changing the BCD thumbwheel. This is due to input filter
propagation delay differences between the four input circuits that provide
the BCD input value.
FUN
CODE
––––
10
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
23
–]/[–
ANI
1’st pass bit
51
–EQU–
AND–EQU
previous scan’s BCD input value
MNEMONIC
––––––––
MPS
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
S1/15
VALUE
–––––
0
SRCA N13
SRCB N14
101
FRD
0000H
0000H
debounced BCD value
SRC N14
DEST N12
22
42
–] [–
–(U)–
0000H
0000H
AND
Math Overflow Bit
S0/1
0
Math Error Bit
S5/0
0
RST
12
MPP
106
MOV
this scan’s BCD input value
SRC N14
DEST N13
File
7,
FORCES
––––––
0000H
0000H
Rung 4
Ensures that the operator cannot select a paper thickness of 0. If this
were allowed, the drill bit life calculation could be defeated, resulting
in poor quality holes due to a dull drill bit. Therefore, the minimum
paper thickness used to calculate drill bit wear is 1/4 in.
FUN
CODE
––––
50
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–EQU–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–EQU
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
VALUE
–––– –––––––
–––––
debounced BCD value
SRCA N12
SRCB
106
MOV
FORCES
––––––
0000H
0
debounced BCD value
SRC
DEST N12
1
0000H
11–33
Chapter
12
Using Program Flow Control Instructions
This chapter contains general information about the program flow
instructions and explains how they function in your application program.
Each of the instructions includes information on:
• what the instruction symbol looks like
• typical execution time for the instruction
• how to use the instruction
• how to enter the instruction
In addition, the last section contains an application example for a paper
drilling machine that shows the program flow control instructions in use.
Program Flow Control Instructions
HHP
Display
LBL
SBR
Mnemonic
Function
Code
Name
JMP
130
Jump to Label
LD LBL
131
Label
JSR
132
Jump to Subroutine
LD SBR
133
Subroutine
RET
134
Return from Subroutine
MCR
135
TND
Purpose
Page
Jump forward or backward to the specified label instruction.
12–2
Jump to a designated subroutine and return.
12–3
Master Control Reset
Turn off all non-retentive outputs in a section of ladder program.
12–6
136
Temporary End
Mark a temporary end that halts program execution.
12–7
SUS
137
Suspend
Identifies specific conditions for program debugging and system
troubleshooting.
12–7
IIM
138
Immediate Input with
Mask
Program an Immediate Input with Mask.
12–8
IOM
139
Immediate Output with
Mask
Program an Immediate Output with Mask.
12–9
About the Program Flow
Control Instructions
Use these instructions to control the sequence in which your program is
executed.
Since these are output instructions (except LD LBL and LD SBR), they do
not have LD, AND, and OR equivalents.
12–1
Chapter 12
Using Program Flow Control Instructions
Jump (JMP) and
Label (LBL)
Use these instructions in pairs to skip portions of the ladder program.
If the Rung Containing the
Jump Instruction is:
True
Ladder representation:
2
(JMP)
False
2
]LBL[
9.04
1.45
Skips from the rung containing the JMP instruction to the rung
containing the designated LBL instruction and then continues
executing. You can jump forward or backward.
Does not execute the JMP instruction.
Jumping forward to a label saves program scan time by omitting a program
segment until needed. Jumping backward lets the controller execute program
segments repeatedly.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True False
JMP
LBL
Then the Program:
6.78
0.99
Important: Be careful not to jump backwards an excessive number of
times. The watchdog timer could time out and fault the
controller. Use a counter, timer, or the “program scan” register
(system status register, word S3, bits 0–7) to limit the amount of
time you spend looping inside of JMP/LBL instructions.
Entering Parameters
Enter a decimal label number from 0 to 999. You can place up to 1,000
labels in each subroutine file.
Using JMP
The JMP instruction causes the controller to skip rungs. You can jump to the
same label from one or more JMP instruction.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
Asterisks appear on the display to indicate that the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
1
U
ANB
3
0
P 0 1 1
E NT
J MP
L B L #
2
Using LBL
This input instruction is the target of JMP instructions having the same label
number. This instruction has no control bits.
Important: You must program this instruction as the first instruction of a
rung. (Since it must be the first instruction on the rung, the
LBL instruction is also known as LD LBL.)
12–2
Chapter 12
Using Program Flow Control Instructions
You can program multiple jumps to the same label by assigning the same
label number to multiple JMP instructions. However, label numbers must be
unique.
Important: Do not jump (JMP) into an MCR zone. Instructions that are
programmed within the MCR zone starting at the LBL
instruction and ending at the ‘END MCR’ instruction are
always evaluated as though the MCR zone is true, regardless of
the true state of the “Start MCR” instruction.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
Asterisks appear on the display to indicate that the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 9
F UN
1
U
3
1
Jump to Subroutine (JSR),
Subroutine (SBR), and
Return (RET)
Ladder representation:
JSR
JUMP TO SUBROUTINE
SBR file number
..
.
10
ENT
L B L
L B L #
2
The JSR, SBR, and RET instructions are used to direct the controller to
execute a separate subroutine file within the ladder program and return to the
instruction following the JSR instruction.
Important: If you use the SBR instruction, the SBR instruction must be the
first instruction on the first rung in the program file that
contains the subroutine. (Since it must be the first instruction
on the rung, the SBR instruction is also known as LD SBR.)
Use a subroutine to store recurring sections of program logic that must be
executed from several points within your application program. A subroutine
saves memory because you program it only once.
SBR
SUBROUTINE
RET
RETURN
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True False
JSR 22.24
SBR 1.45
RET 31.11
4.25
0.99
3.16
Update critical I/O within subroutines using immediate input and/or output
instructions (IIM, IOM), especially if your application calls for nested or
relatively long subroutines. Otherwise, the controller does not update I/O
until it reaches the end of the main program (after executing all subroutines).
!
ATTENTION: Outputs controlled within a subroutine remain in
their last state until the subroutine is executed again.
12–3
Chapter 12
Using Program Flow Control Instructions
Nesting Subroutine Files
Nesting subroutines allows you to direct program flow from the main
program to a subroutine and then on to another subroutine.
You can nest up to eight levels of subroutines. If you are using an STI
subroutine, HSC interrupt subroutine, or user fault routine, you can nest
subroutines up to three levels from each subroutine.
The following figure illustrates how subroutines may be nested.
Main
Program
Level 1
Subroutine File 6
6
JSR
SBR
Level 2
Subroutine File 7
SBR
Level 3
Subroutine File 8
SBR
7
JSR
8
JSR
RET
RET
RET
Example of Nesting Subroutines to Level 3
An error occurs if more than the allowable levels of subroutines are called
(subroutine stack overflow) or if more returns are executed than there are call
levels (subroutine stack underflow).
Using JSR
When the JSR instruction is executed, the controller jumps to the subroutine
instruction (SBR) at the beginning of the target subroutine file and resumes
execution at that point. You cannot jump into any part of a subroutine except
the first instruction in that file.
You must program each subroutine in its own program file by assigning a
unique file number (4–15).
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
Asterisks appear on the display to indicate that the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 1 0
FUN
12–4
1
U
3
L
2
E NT
J S R
S B R #
1 0
Chapter 12
Using Program Flow Control Instructions
Using SBR
The target subroutine is identified by the file number that you entered in the
JSR instruction. This instruction serves as a label or identifier for a program
file as a regular subroutine file.
This instruction has no control bits. It is always evaluated as true. Use of
this instruction is optional; however, we recommend using it for clarity.
Important: The instruction must be programmed as the first instruction of
the first rung of a subroutine. (Since it must be the first
instruction on the rung, the SBR instruction is also known as
LD SBR.)
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 0
FUN
1
U
3
U
3
S B R
ENT
Using RET
This output instruction marks the end of subroutine execution or the end of
the subroutine file. It causes the controller to resume execution at the
instruction following the JSR instruction.
The rung containing the RET instruction may be conditional if this rung
precedes the end of the subroutine. In this way, the controller omits the
balance of a subroutine only if its rung condition is true.
Without an RET instruction, the END instruction (always present in the
subroutine) automatically returns program execution to the instruction
following the JSR instruction in your calling ladder file.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 1 4
FUN
1
U
3
4
R E T
E NT
12–5
Chapter 12
Using Program Flow Control Instructions
Master Control Reset (MCR)
Ladder representation:
(MCR)
Use MCR instructions in pairs to create program zones that turn off all the
non-retentive outputs in the zone. Rungs within the MCR zone are still
scanned, but scan time is reduced due to the false state of non-retentive
outputs. Non-retentive outputs are reset when their rung goes false.
If the MCR Rung that Starts the Zone is:
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
3.98
4.07
Then the Controller:
True
Executes the rungs in the MCR zone based on
each rung’s individual input condition (as if the
zone did not exist).
False
Resets all non-retentive output instructions in the
MCR zone regardless of each rung’s individual
input conditions.
MCR zones let you enable or inhibit segments of your program, such as for
recipe applications.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 9
FUN
1
U
3
5
MC R
ENT
When you program MCR instructions, note that:
• You must end the zone with an unconditional MCR instruction.
• You cannot nest one MCR zone within another.
• Do not jump into an MCR zone. If the zone is false, jumping into it
activates the zone.
Important: The MCR instruction is not a substitute for a hard-wired master
control relay that provides emergency stop capability. You still
must install a hard-wired master control relay to provide
emergency I/O power shutdown.
!
12–6
ATTENTION: If you start instructions such as timers or
counters in an MCR zone, instruction operation ceases when the
zone is disabled. Re-program critical operations outside the zone
if necessary.
Chapter 12
Using Program Flow Control Instructions
Temporary End (TND)
This instruction, when its rung is true, stops the controller from scanning the
rest of the program file, updates the I/O, and resumes scanning at rung 0 of
the main program (file 2). If this instruction’s rung is false, the controller
continues the scan until the next TND instruction or the END statement. Use
this instruction to progressively debug a program or conditionally omit the
balance of your current program file or subroutines.
Ladder representation:
(TND)
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
7.78
3.16
Important: If you use this instruction inside a nested subroutine, execution
of all nested subroutines is terminated.
Do not execute this instruction from the user error fault routine
(file 3), high-speed counter interrupt routine (file 4), or
selectable timed interrupt routine (file 5), or a fault will occur.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 6
FUN
U
1
3
6
Suspend (SUS)
T N D
E NT
When this instruction is executed, it causes the controller to enter the
Suspend Idle mode and stores the Suspend ID in word 7 (S7) at the status
file. All outputs are de-energized.
Ladder representation:
SUS
SUSPEND
Suspend ID
Use this instruction to trap and identify specific conditions for program
debugging and system troubleshooting.
604
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
10.85
7.87
Entering Parameters
Enter a suspend ID number from –32,768 to +32,767 when you program the
instruction.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
Asterisks appear on the display to indicate that the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 4
FUN
1
U
3
7
ENT
S U S
I D #
6 0 4
12–7
Chapter 12
Using Program Flow Control Instructions
Immediate Input with Mask
(IIM)
Ladder representation:
IIM
For the mask, a 1 in an input’s bit position passes data from the source to the
destination. A 0 inhibits data from passing from the source to the
destination.
IMMEDIATE INPUT w MASK
Slot
I:O.O
Mask
000B
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
35.72
6.78
This instruction allows you to update data prior to the normal input scan.
Data from a specified input is transferred through a mask to the input data
file, making the data available to instructions following the IIM instruction in
the ladder program.
Entering Parameters
For all micro controllers, specify I0. For 16 I/O controllers, I0/0–9 are valid
and I0/10–15 are considered unused inputs (they do not physically exist).
For 32 I/O controllers, I0/0–15 and I1/0–3 are valid. Specify I1 if you want
to immediately update the last four input bits.
Mask – Specify a Hex constant or register address.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The following items apply when entering the instruction:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
12–8
1
U
3
8
E NT
P 0 0 7
I 0
I I M
A D D R
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 0 7
I I M
MA S K
OOOB H
Chapter 12
Using Program Flow Control Instructions
Immediate Output with Mask
(IOM)
This instruction allows you to update the outputs prior to the normal output
scan. Data from the output image is transferred through a mask to the
specified outputs. The program scan then resumes.
Ladder representation:
IOM
Entering Parameters
IMMEDIATE OUT w MASK
Slot
O:0.0
Mask
003F
For all micro controllers, specify O0. For 16 I/O controllers, O0/0–5 are
valid and O0/6–15 are considered unused inputs (they do not physically
exist). For 32 I/O controllers, O0/0–11 are valid and O0/12–15 are unused.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
41.59
6.78
Mask – Specify a Hex constant or register address.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The following items apply when entering the instruction:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
1
U
3
9
ENT
P 0 0 6
O0
I OM
A D D R
0 0 2 2 H
P 0 0 6
I OM
MA S K
OO3 F H
12–9
Chapter 12
Using Program Flow Control Instructions
Program Flow Control
Instructions in the Paper
Drilling Machine Application
Example
To demonstrate the use of program flow control instructions, this section
provides ladder rungs followed by the optimized instruction list for these
rungs. The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example
described in appendix E. You will be adding to the main program in file 2.
The new rungs are needed to call the other subroutines containing the logic
necessary to run the machine.
Ladder Rungs
Rung 2:5
Calls the drill sequence subroutine. This subroutine manages the
operation of a drilling sequence and restarts the conveyor upon completion
of the drilling sequence.
|
+JSR–––––––––––––––+ |
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+JUMP TO SUBROUTINE+–|
|
|SBR file number 6| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 2:6
Calls the subroutine that tracks the amount of wear on the current drill
bit.
|
+JSR–––––––––––––––+ |
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+JUMP TO SUBROUTINE+–|
|
|SBR file number 7| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 2:7
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
Instruction List
File
2,
Rung 5
Calls the drill sequence subroutine. This subroutine manages the
operation of a drilling sequence and restarts the conveyor upon completion
of the drilling sequence.
FUN
CODE
––––
132
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
File
2,
MNEMONIC
––––––––
JSR
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SBR#
VALUE
–––––
6
FORCES
––––––
Rung 6
Calls the subroutine that tracks the amount of wear on the current drill
bit.
FUN
CODE
––––
132
12–10
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
JSR
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SBR#
VALUE
–––––
7
FORCES
––––––
Chapter
13
Using Application Specific Instructions
This chapter contains general information about the application specific
instructions and explains how they function in your application program.
Each of the instructions includes information on:
• what the instruction symbol looks like
• typical execution time for the instruction
• how to use the instruction
• how to enter the instruction
In addition, the last section contains an application example for a paper
drilling machine that shows the application specific instructions in use.
Application Specific Instructions
HHP
Display
INT
Mnemonic
Function
Code
Name
Purpose
Page
BSL
150
Bit Shift Left
Loads a bit of data into a bit array, shifts the pattern of data to the
left through the array, and unloads the last bit of data in the array.
13–3
BSR
151
Bit Shift Right
Loads a bit of data into a bit array, shifts the pattern of data to the
right through the array, and unloads the last bit of data in the
array.
13–4
SQO
152
Sequencer Output
SQC
153
Sequencer Compare
Control sequential machine operations by transferring 16-bit data
through a mask to image addresses.
13–6
SQL
154
Sequencer Load
Capture referenced conditions by manually stepping the machine
through its operating sequences.
13–12
STD
155
Selectable Timer
Interrupt Disable
156
Selectable Timer
Interrupt Enable
13–17
STE
Output instructions, associated with the Selectable Timed
Interrupt function. STD and STE are used to prevent an STI from
occurring during a portion of the program.
STS
157
Selectable Timer
Interrupt Start
Initiates a Selectable Timed Interrupt.
13–18
LD INT
158
Interrupt Subroutine
Associated with Selectable Timed Interrupts or HSC Interrupts.
13–19
About the Application
Specific Instructions
These instructions simplify your program by allowing you to use a single
instruction or pair of instructions to perform common complex operations.
Since these are output instructions (except LD INT), they do not have LD,
AND, and OR equivalents.
In this chapter, you will find a general overview preceding groups of
instructions. Before you learn about the instructions in each of these groups,
we suggest that you read the overview. This chapter contains the following
overviews:
• Bit Shift Instructions Overview
• Sequencer Instructions Overview
• Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) Function Overview
13–1
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Bit Shift Instructions
Overview
The following general information applies to bit shift instructions.
Entering Parameters
Enter the following parameters when programming these instructions:
• File is the address of the bit array you want to manipulate. You must use
the file indicator (#) in the bit array address. (The HHP inserts the #
character automatically.)
• Control is the address of the control element that stores the status byte of
the instruction, the size of the array (in number of bits). Note that the
control address should not be used for any other instruction.
The control element is shown below.
15
13
11 10
00
Word 0
EN
DN
ER UL
Word 1
Size of bit array (number of bits)
Word 2
Reserved
Not used
Status bits of the control element may be addressed by mnemonic. They
include:
– Unload Bit UL (bit 10) is the instruction’s output.
– Error Bit ER (bit 11), when set, indicates the instruction detected an
error such as entering a negative number for the length or position.
Avoid using the unload bit when this bit is set.
– Done Bit DN (bit 13), when set, indicates the bit array shifted one
position.
– Enable Bit EN (bit 15) is set on a false-to-true transition of the rung
and indicates the instruction is enabled.
When the register shifts and input conditions go false, the enable, done,
and error bits are reset.
• Bit Address is the address of the source bit. The status of this bit is
inserted in either the first (lowest) bit position (BSL) or last (highest) bit
position (BSR).
• Length (size of bit array) is the number of bits in the bit array, up to 1680
bits. A length value of 0 causes the input bit to be transferred to the UL
bit.
A length value that points past the end of the programmed file causes a
major error to occur. If you alter a length value with your program, make
certain that the altered value is valid.
The instruction invalidates all bits beyond the last bit in the array (as
defined by the length) up to the next word boundary.
Entering the Instructions
The following items apply when entering the instructions:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
13–2
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
Effects on Index Register S24
The shift operation clears the index register S24 to zero.
Bit Shift Left (BSL)
When the rung goes from false-to-true, the controller sets the enable bit (EN
bit 15) and the data block is shifted to the left (to a higher bit number) one bit
position. The specified bit at the bit address is shifted into the first bit
position. The last bit is shifted out of the array and stored in the unload bit
(UL bit 10). The shift is completed immediately.
Ladder representation:
BSL
BIT SHIFT LEFT
File
#B3:1
Control
R6:3
Bit Address
I:0/5
Length
58
(EN)
(DN)
For wraparound operation, set the bit address to the last bit of the array or to
the UL bit.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True False
53.71+5.24 x
position value
Entering the Instruction
19.80
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
ANB
1
5
0
ENT
P 0 0 9
# B 1
B S L
F I L E
P 0 0 9
R 3
B S L
C T R L
P 0 0 9
B S L
L E N
* * * * 5 8
P 0 0 9
I / 5
B S L
B I T
13–3
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Operation
The operation of the BSL instruction is shown in the figure below. The
screens shown above the figure are the condensed screens that appear after
instruction entry is complete.
P 0 0 9
# B 1
B S L
F I L E
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 0 9
L
B S L
5 8
P
P 0 0 9
I / 5
B S L
R 0 3
0
B I T
0
Source Bit
I0/5
Data block is shifted one bit at a
time from bit B/16 to bit B/73.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25
47 46 45 44 43 42 41
63 62 61 60 59 58 57
73
RESERVED
24
40
56
72
23
39
55
71
22
38
54
70
21
37
53
69
20
36
52
68
19
35
51
67
18
34
50
66
17
33
49
65
16
32
48
64
58 Bit Array #B1
Unload Bit
(R3/10)
If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan, you must create a loop in
your application using the JMP, LBL, and CTU instructions.
Bit Shift Right (BSR)
Ladder representation:
BSR
BIT SHIFT RIGHT
File
#B3:2
Control
R6:4
Bit Address
I:0/6
Length
38
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True False
53.34+3.98 x 19.80
position value
13–4
(EN)
(DN)
When the rung goes from false-to-true, the controller sets the enable bit (EN
bit 15) and the data block is shifted to the right (to a lower bit number) one
bit position. The specified bit at the bit address is shifted into the last bit
position. The first bit is shifted out of the array and stored in the unload bit
(UL bit 10). The shift is completed immediately.
For wraparound operation, set the bit address to the first bit of the array or to
the UL bit.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
1
5
1
ENT
P 0 1 1
# B 2
B S R
F I L E
P 0 1 1
R 4
B S R
C T R L
P 0 1 1
B S R
L E N
* * * * 3 8
P 0 1 1
I / 6
B S R
B I T
Operation
The operation of the BSR instruction is shown in the figure below. The
screens shown above the figure are the condensed screens that appear after
instruction entry is complete.
P 0 1 1
# B 2
B S R
P 0 1 1
L
B S R
3 8
P
P 0 1 1
I / 6
B S R
F I L E
0 0 0 0 H
R 0 4
0
B I T
0
Unload Bit
(R4/10)
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
69 68 67 66 65 64
RESERVED
38 Bit Array #B2
Data block is shifted one bit at a
time from bit B/69 to bit B/32.
Source Bit
I0/6
If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan, you must create a loop in
your application using the JMP, LBL, and CTU instructions.
13–5
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Sequencer Instructions
Overview
The following general information applies to sequencer instructions.
Entering the Instructions
The following items apply when entering the instructions:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
Effects on Index Register S24
The value present in the index register S24 is overwritten when the sequencer
instruction is true. The index register value will equal the position value of
the instruction.
Sequencer Output (SQO) and
Sequencer Compare (SQC)
These instructions transfer 16-bit data to word addresses for the control of
sequential machine operations.
Ladder representation:
Entering Parameters
SQO
SEQUENCER OUTPUT
File
#B3:1
Mask
0F0F
Dest
O:0.0
Control
R6:5
Length
4
Position
2
(EN)
(DN)
Enter the following parameters when programming these instructions:
• File is the address of the sequencer file. You must use the file indicator
(#) for this address. (The HHP inserts the # character automatically.)
Sequencer file data is used as follows:
Instruction
SQC
SEQUENCER COMPARE
File
#B3:8
Mask
FFF0
Source
I:0.0
Control
R6:3
Length
4
Position
2
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True False
SQO 60.52
SQC 60.52
13–6
27.40
27.40
(EN)
(DN)
(FD)
Sequencer File Stores
SQO
Data for controlling outputs
SQC
Reference data for monitoring inputs
• Mask (SQO, SQC) is a hexadecimal code or the address of the mask
word or file through which the instruction moves data. Set mask bits to
pass data and clear mask bits to prevent the instruction from operating or
corresponding destination bits. Use a mask word or file if you want to
change the mask according to application requirements.
If the mask is a file, its length will be equal to the length of the sequencer
file. The two files track automatically.
• Source is the address of the input word or file for a SQC from which the
instruction obtains data for comparison to its sequencer file.
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
• Destination is the address of the output word or file for a SQO to which
the instruction moves data from its sequencer file.
Important: You can address the mask, source, or destination of a
sequencer instruction as a word or file. If you address it
as a file (using file indicator #), the instruction
automatically steps through the source, mask, or
destination file.
• Control (SQO, SQC) is the control structure that stores the status byte of
the instruction, the length of the sequencer file, and the current position in
the file. You should not use the control address for any other instruction.
15
13
11
08
Word 0
EN
DN
ER
FD
Word 1
Length of sequencer file
Word 2
Position
00
Status bits of the control structure include:
– Found Bit FD (bit 08) – SQC only. When the status of all
non-masked bits in the source address match those of the
corresponding reference word, the FD bit is set. This bit is assessed
each time the SQC instruction is evaluated while the rung is true.
– Error Bit ER (bit 11) is set when the controller detects a negative
position value, or a negative or zero length value. When the ER bit is
set, the minor error bit (S2) is also set. Both bits must be cleared.
– Done Bit DN (bit 13) is set by the SQO or SQC instruction after it
has operated on the last word in the sequencer file. It is reset on the
next false-to-true rung transition after the rung goes false.
– Enable EN (bit 15) is set by a false-to-true rung transition and
indicates the SQO or SQC instruction is enabled.
• Length is the number of steps of the sequencer file starting at position 1.
The maximum number you can enter is 104 words. Position 0 is the
startup position. The instruction resets (wraps) to position 1 at each cycle
completion.
• Position is the word location or step in the sequencer file from/to which
the instruction moves data.
Tip
You may use the RES instruction to reset a sequencer. All control bits
(except FD) are reset to zero. The position is also set to zero. Program the
address of your control register in the RES (e.g., R0).
Using SQO
This output instruction steps through the sequencer file whose bits have been
set to control various output devices.
When the rung goes from false-to-true, the instruction increments to the next
step (word) in the sequencer file. Data stored there is transferred through a
mask to the destination address specified in the instruction. Data is written to
the destination word every time the instruction is executed.
13–7
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
The done bit is set when the last word of the sequencer file is transferred. On
the next false-to-true rung transition, the instruction resets the position to step
one.
If the position is equal to zero at startup, when you switch the controller from
the RPRG mode to the RRUN mode, instruction operation depends on
whether the rung is true or false on the first scan.
• If true, the instruction transfers the value in step zero.
• If false, the instruction waits for the first rung transition from false-to-true
and transfers the value in step one.
The bits mask data when reset and pass data when set. The instruction will
not change the value in the destination word unless you set mask bits.
The mask can be fixed or variable. It will be fixed if you enter a
hexadecimal code. It will be variable if you enter an element address or a
file address for changing the mask with each step.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
13–8
1
5
L
2
E NT
P 0 1 4
# B 1
S QO
F I L E
P 0 1 4
S QO
MA S K
0 F 0 F H
P 0 1 4
O0
S QO
D E S T
P 0 1 4
R 5
S QO
C T R L
P 0 1 4
S QO
L E N
* * * * * 4
P 0 1 4
S QO
P OS
* * * * * 2
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Operation
The operation of the SQO instruction is shown in the figure below. The
screens shown above the figure are the condensed screens that appear after
instruction entry is complete.
P 0 1 4
# B 1
S QO
F I L E
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 1 4
S QO
MA S K
0 F 0 F H
P 0 1 4
O0
S QO
D E S T
0 0 2 2 H
P 0 1 4
L
S QO
4
P
R 0 5
2
Destination O0
15
0000
8
0101
7
0000
External Outputs
Associated with O0
0
1010
Mask Value 0F0F
15
0000
8
1111
7
0000
0
1111
Sequencer Output File #B1
Word
B1
2
3
4
5
0000
1010
1111
0101
0000
0000
0010
0101
0101
1111
0000
1111
0100
0101
0000
0000
0101
1010
0101
1111
Step
0
1
2
3
4
Current Step
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
13–9
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Using SQC
When the status of all non-masked bits in the source word match those of the
corresponding reference word, the instruction sets the found bit (FD) in the
control word. Otherwise, the found bit (FD) is cleared.
The bits mask data when reset and pass data when set.
The mask can be fixed or variable. If you enter a hexadecimal code, it is
fixed. If you enter an element address or a file address for changing the
mask with each step, it is variable.
When the rung goes from false-to-true, the instruction increments to the next
step (word) in the sequencer file. Data stored there is transferred through a
mask and compared against the source for equality. While the rung remains
true, the source is compared against the reference data for every scan. If
equal, the FD bit is set in the SQCs control counter.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
13–10
1
5
U
3
ENT
P 0 1 4
# B 8
S QC
F I L E
P 0 1 4
S QC
MA S K
F F F 0 H
P 0 1 4
I 0
S QC
D E S T
P 0 1 4
R 3
S QC
C T R L
P 0 1 4
S QC
L E N
* * * * * 4
P 0 1 4
S QC
P OS
* * * * * 2
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Operation
The operation of the SQC instruction is shown in the figure below. The
screens shown above the figure are the condensed screens that appear after
instruction entry is complete.
P 0 1 4
# B 8
S QC
F I L E
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 1 4
S QC
MA S K
F F F 0 H
P 0 1 4
I 0
S QC
S R C
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 1 4
L
S QC
4
P
R 0 3
2
Input Word I0
0010
0100
1001
1101
Mask Value FFF0
1111
1111
1111
0000
Sequencer Ref File #B8
Word
B8
9
10 0010
11
12
0100
1001
Step
0
1
1010 2
3
4
The SQC FD bit is set when the instruction detects that an input
word matches (thru mask) its corresponding reference word.
The FD bit R3/FD is set in this example, since the input word
matches the sequencer reference value using the mask value.
13–11
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Sequencer Load (SQL)
Ladder representation:
The SQL instruction stores 16-bit data into a sequencer load file at each step
of sequencer operation. The source of this data can be an I/O or internal
word address, a file address, or a constant.
SQL
SEQUENCER LOAD
File
#B3:8
Source
I:0.0
Control
R6:3
Length
4
Position
2
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
53.41
28.12
(EN)
(DN)
Entering Parameters
Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction:
• File is the address of the sequencer file. You must use the file indicator
(#) for this address. (The HHP inserts the # character automatically.)
• Source can be a word address, file address, or a constant (–32,768 to
32,767).
If the source is a file address, the file length equals the length of the
sequencer load file. The two files step automatically, according to the
position value.
• Length is the number of steps of the sequencer load file (and also of the
source if the source is a file address), starting at position 1. The
maximum number you can enter is 104 words. Position 0 is the startup
position. The instruction resets (wraps) to position 1 at each cycle
completion.
• Position is the word location or step in the sequencer file to which data is
moved.
• Control is a control file address. The status bits, length value, and
position value are stored in this element. Do not use the control file
address for any other instruction.
The control element is shown below:
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Word 0
EN
DN
Word 1
Length
Word 2
Position
ER
Status bits of the control structure include:
– Error Bit ER (bit 11) is set when the controller detects a negative
position value or a negative or zero length value. When the ER bit is
set, the minor error bit (S2) is also set. Both bits must be cleared.
– Done Bit DN (bit 13) is set after the instruction has operated on the
last word in the sequencer load file. It is reset on the next false-to-true
rung transition after the rung goes false.
– Enable Bit EN (bit 15) is set on a false-to-true transition of the SQL
rung and reset on a true-to-false transition.
13–12
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
F UN
1
5
4
ENT
P 0 1 4
# N 3 0
S QL
F I L E
P 0 1 4
I 0
S QL
S R C
P 0 1 4
R 4
S QL
C T R L
P 0 1 4
S QL
L E N
* * * * * 4
P 0 1 4
S QL
P OS
* * * * * 2
13–13
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Operation
The operation of the SQL instruction is shown in the figure below. The
screens shown above the figure are the condensed screens that appear after
instruction entry is complete. Input word I0 is the source. Data in this word
is loaded into integer file #N30 by the sequencer load instruction.
P 0 1 4
# N 3 0
S QL
F I L E
0
P 0 1 4
I 0
S QL
S R C
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 1 4
L
S QL
4
P
R 0 4
2
External Inputs
Associated with I0
Source I0
15
0000
8
0101
7
0000
0
1010
Sequencer Load File #N30
Word
Step
N30 0000 0000 0000 0000 0
31 1010 0010 1111 0101 1
32 0000 0101 0000 1010 2
33 0000 0000 0000 0000 3
34 0000 0000 0000 0000 4
Current Step
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
When rung conditions change from false-to-true, the SQL enable bit (EN) is
set. The control element R4 increments to the next position in the sequencer
file and loads the contents of source I0 into the corresponding location in the
file. The SQL instruction continues to load the current data into this location
each scan that the rung remains true. When the rung goes false, the enable
bit (EN) is reset.
The instruction loads data into a new file element at each false-to-true
transition of the rung. When step 4 is completed, the done bit (DN) is set.
Operation cycles to position 1 at the next false-to-true transition of the rung
after position 4.
If the source were a file address such as #N40, files #N40 and #N30 would
both have a length of 5 (0–4) and would track through the steps together per
the position value.
13–14
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Selectable Timed Interrupt
(STI) Function Overview
The Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) function allows you to interrupt the
scan of the application program automatically, on a periodic basis, to scan a
subroutine file. Afterwards, the controller resumes executing the application
program from the point where it was interrupted.
Basic Programming Procedure for the STI Function
To use the STI function in your application file:
1. Enter the desired rungs in File 5. (File 5 is designated for the STI
subroutine.)
2. Enter the setpoint (the time between successive interrupts) using the
program configuration option of the HHP’s menu. (See page 18–9.) The
range is 10–2550 ms (entered in 10 ms increments). A setpoint of zero
disables the STI function.
Important: The setpoint value must be a longer time than the execution
time of the STI subroutine file, or a minor error bit is set.
Operation
After you restore your program and enter the RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode,
the STI begins operation as follows:
1. The STI timer begins timing.
2. When the STI interval expires, the program scan is interrupted and the
STI subroutine file is scanned; the STI timer is reset.
3. If while executing the STI (file 5), another STI interrupt occurs the STI
pending bit (S2/0) is set.
4. If while an STI is pending the STI timer expires, the STI lost bit (S5/10)
is set.
5. When the STI subroutine scan is completed, scanning of the program
resumes at the point where it left off, unless an STI is pending. In this
case the subroutine is immediately scanned again.
6. The cycle repeats.
For identification of your STI subroutine, include an INT instruction as the
first instruction on the first rung of the file.
STI Subroutine Content
The STI subroutine contains the rungs of your application logic. You can
program any instruction inside the STI subroutine except a TND instruction.
IIM or IOM instructions are needed in an STI subroutine if your application
requires immediate update of input or output points. End the STI subroutine
with an RET instruction.
13–15
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
JSR stack depth is limited to three. You may call other subroutines to a level
three deep from an STI subroutine.
Interrupt Latency and Interrupt Occurrences
Interrupt latency is the interval between the STI timeout and the start of the
interrupt subroutine. STI interrupts can occur at any point in your program,
but not necessarily at the same point on successive interrupts. The table
below shows the interaction between an interrupt and the controller operating
cycle.
STI
Input Scan
Program Scan
Between instruction updates
Output Scan
Communication
Between communication packets
Controller Overhead
At start and end
Events in the controller operating cycle
Note that STI execution time adds directly to the overall scan time. During
the latency period, the controller is performing operations that cannot be
disturbed by the STI interrupt function.
Interrupt Priorities
Interrupt priorities are as follows:
1. User Fault Routine
2. High-Speed Counter
3. Selectable Timed Interrupt
An executing interrupt can only be interrupted by an interrupt having a
higher priority.
Status File Data Saved
Data in the following words is saved on entry to the STI subroutine and
re-written upon exiting the STI subroutine.
• S0 Arithmetic flags
• S13 and S14 Math register
• S24 Index register
13–16
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Selectable Timed Disable
(STD) and Enable (STE)
These instructions are generally used in pairs. The purpose is to create zones
in which STI interrupts cannot occur.
Ladder representation:
STD
SELECTABLE TIMED DISABLE
Using STD
STE
When true, this instruction resets the STI enable bit and prevents the STI
subroutine from executing. When the rung goes false, the STI enable bit
remains reset until a true STS or STE instruction is executed. The STI timer
continues to operate while the enable bit is reset.
SELECTABLE TIMED ENABLE
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True False
STD 6.69
STE 10.13
Entering the Instruction
3.16
3.16
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 7
FUN
1
5
5
S T D
ENT
Using STE
This instruction sets the STI enable bit and allows execution of the STI
subroutine. When the rung goes false, the STI enable bit remains set until a
true STD instruction is executed. This instruction has no effect on the
operation of the STI timer or setpoint. When the enable bit is set, the first
execution of the STI subroutine can occur at any point up to the full STI
interval.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 7
FUN
1
5
6
S T E
ENT
STD/STE Zone Example
In the program that follows, the STI function is in effect. The STD and STE
instructions in rungs 6 and 12 are included in the program to avoid having
STI subroutine execution at any point in rungs 7 through 11.
The STD instruction (rung 6) resets the STI enable bit and the STE
instruction (rung 12) sets the enable bit again. The STI timer increments and
may time out in the STD zone, setting the pending bit S2/0 and lost bit
S5/10.
13–17
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
The first pass bit S1/15 and the STE instruction in rung 0 are included to
insure that the STI function is initialized following a power cycle. You
should include this rung any time your program contains an STD/STE zone
or an STD instruction.
Program File 3
0
S:1
] [
15
1
] [
STE
SELECTABLE TIMED ENABLE
( )
] [
2
3
4
5
STD
SELECTABLE TIMED DISABLE
6
STI interrupt
execution will
not occur
between STD
and STE.
7
] [
] [
( )
] [
] [
( )
8
9
10
11
STE
SELECTABLE TIMED ENABLE
12
13
] [
( )
] [
14
15
16
17
Selectable Timed Start (STS)
Ladder representation:
STS
SELECTABLE TIMED START
File
5
Time
140
Execution Times (µsec) when:
13–18
True
False
24.59
6.78
END
Use the STS instruction to condition the start of the STI timer upon entering
the RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode – rather than starting automatically. You
can also use it to set up or change setpoint/frequency of the STI routine that
is executed when the STI timer expires.
This instruction is not required to configure a basic STI interrupt application.
The STS instruction requires you to enter the parameter for the STI setpoint
using the HHP’s program configuration menu option. Upon a true execution
of the rung, this instruction enters the setpoint in the status file (S30),
overwriting the existing data. At the same time, the STI timer is reset and
begins timing; at timeout, the STI subroutine execution occurs. When the
rung goes false, the STI function remains enabled at the setpoint you’ve
entered in the STS instruction.
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instructions from within the program monitor functional area.
The following items apply when entering the instructions:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
5
1
7
Interrupt Subroutine (INT)
P 0 0 9
S T S
F I L E
5
P 0 0 9
S T S
T I ME
1 4 0
ENT
This instruction serves as a label or identifier of a program file as an interrupt
subroutine (INT label) versus a regular subroutine (SBR label).
Ladder representation:
This instruction has no control bits and is always evaluated as true. Use of
this instruction is optional; however, we recommend using it.
INT
INTERRUPT SUBROUTINE
Important: The instruction must be programmed as the first instruction of
the first rung of a subroutine. (Since it must be the first
instruction on the rung, the INT instruction is also known as
LD INT.)
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
1.45
0.99
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
P 0 0 9
FUN
1
5
8
I N T
ENT
13–19
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Application Specific
Instructions in the Paper
Drilling Machine Application
Example
To demonstrate the use of application specific instructions, this section
provides ladder rungs followed by the optimized instruction list of these
rungs. The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example
described in appendix E. You will begin a subroutine in file 4.
This portion of the subroutine tells the conveyor where to stop to allow a
hole to be drilled. The stop positions are different for each hole pattern
(3-hole, 5-hole, 7-hole), so separate sequencers are used to store and access
each of the three hole patterns.
Important: If you use a 16 I/O controller, only the 5 hole drill pattern can
be used.
OPERATOR PANEL
Start I/6
Stop I/7
Thumbwheel for
Thickness in 1/4”
Change Drill Soon
O/4
Change Drill Now
O/6
5 Hole
Drill Change Reset
3 Hole
I/11–I/14
(Keyswitch)
I/8
Drill
Drilled Holes
13–20
7 Hole
I/9–I/10
Hole Selector
Switch
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Ladder Rungs
Rung 4:0
Resets the hole count sequencers each time the low preset is reached. The
low preset has been set to zero to cause an interrupt to occur each time
that a reset occurs. The low preset is reached anytime that a reset C5:0
or hardware reset occurs. This ensures that the first preset value is
loaded into the HSC at each entry into the RRUN mode and each time that
the external reset signal is activated.
|
interrupt
3 hole
|
|
occurred
preset
|
|
due to
sequencer
|
|
low preset
|
|
reached
|
| +INT––––––––––––––––––––+
C5:0
R6:4
|
|–+INTERRUPT SUBROUTINE
+––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––+–––(RES)––––+–|
| +–––––––––––––––––––––––+
IL
|
| |
|
| 5 hole
| |
|
| preset
| |
|
| sequencer | |
|
|
R6:5
| |
|
+–––(RES)––––+ |
|
|
| |
|
| 7 hole
| |
|
| preset
| |
|
| sequencer | |
|
|
R6:6
| |
|
+–––(RES)––––+ |
|
|
Rung 4:1➀
Keeps track of the hole number that is being drilled and loads the correct
HSC preset based on the hole count. This rung is only active when the
”hole selector switch” is in the ”3–hole” position. The sequencer uses
step 0 as a null step upon reset. It uses the last step as a ”go forever”
in anticipation of the ”end of manual” hard-wired external reset.
| hole
|hole
3 hole
|
| selector |selector
preset
|
| switch
|switch
sequencer
|
| bit 0
|bit 1
|
|
I:0
I:0
+SQO–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––]/[––––––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––+–+SEQUENCER OUTPUT +–(EN)–+–|
|
9
10
| |File
#N7:50+–(DN) | |
|
| |Mask
FFFF|
| |
|
| |Dest
N7:7|
| |
|
| |Control
R6:4|
| |
|
| |Length
5|
| |
|
| |Position
0|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
| |
|
| force the
| |
|
| sequencer
| |
|
| to increment
| |
|
| on next scan
| |
|
|
R6:4
| |
|
+––––(U)––––––––––––––––––––+ |
|
EN
|
➀
This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung if you are using a 16
I/O controller.
13–21
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Rung 4:2
Is identical to the previous rung except that it is only active when the
”hole selector switch” is in the ”5–hole” position.
| hole
|hole
5 hole
|
| selector |selector
preset
|
| switch
|switch
sequencer
|
| bit 0
|bit 1
|
|
I:0
I:0
+SQO–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [––––––––]/[–––––––––––––––––––––+–+SEQUENCER OUTPUT +–(EN)–+–|
➁
|
9
10
| |File
#N7:55+–(DN) | |
|
| |Mask
FFFF|
| |
|
| |Dest
N7:7|
| |
|
| |Control
R6:5|
| |
|
| |Length
7|
| |
|
| |Position
0|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
| force the
| |
|
| sequencer
| |
|
| to increment
| |
|
| on the next
| |
|
| scan
| |
|
|
R6:5
| |
|
+––––(U)––––––––––––––––––––+ |
|
EN
|
Rung 4:3➀➂
Is identical to the two previous rungs except that it is only active when
the ”hole selector switch” is in the ”7–hole” position.
| hole
|hole
7 hole
|
| selector |selector
preset
|
| switch
|switch
sequencer
|
| bit 0
|bit 1
|
|
I:0
I:0
+SQO–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [––––––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––+–+SEQUENCER OUTPUT +–(EN)–+–|
|
9
10
| |File
#N7:62+–(DN) | |
|
| |Mask
FFFF|
| |
|
| |Dest
N7:7|
| |
|
| |Control
R6:6|
| |
|
| |Length
9|
| |
|
| |Position
0|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
| force the
| |
|
| sequencer
| |
|
| to increment
| |
|
| on the next
| |
|
| scan
| |
|
|
R6:6
| |
|
+––––(U)––––––––––––––––––––+ |
|
EN
|
➀
This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung if you are using a 16
I/O controller.
➁ This instruction accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this instruction if you are
using a 16 I/O controller.
➂ More rungs will be added to this subroutine at the end of chapter 14.
13–22
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
Instruction List
File
4,
Rung 0
Resets the hole count sequencers each time that the low preset is reached.
The low preset has been set to zero to cause an interrupt to occur each
time that a reset occurs. The low preset is reached anytime that a reset
C5:0 or hardware reset occurs. This ensures that the first preset value
is loaded into the high–speed counter at each entry into the RRUN mode and
each time that the external reset signal is activated.
FUN
CODE
––––
158
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–INT–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–INT
22
–] [–
AND
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
interrupt occurred due to low preset reached
C0/IL
0
7
RES
3 hole preset sequencer
R4
7
RES
5 hole preset sequencer
R5
7
RES
7 hole
preset sequencer
R6
File
4,
Rung 1➀
Keeps track of the hole number that is being drilled and loads the correct
high–speed counter preset based on the hole count. This rung is only
active when the ”hole selector switch” is in the ”3–hole” position. The
sequencer uses step 0 as a null step upon reset. It uses the last step as
a ”go forever” in anticipation of the ”end of manual” hard-wired external
reset.
FUN
CODE
––––
21
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–]/[–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LDI
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
hole selector switch bit 0
I/9
0
22
–] [–
AND
hole
152
SQO
selector switch bit 1
I/10
0
FILE #N50
MASK
FFFFH
High Preset Value
(counts to next hole)
DEST N7
3 hole preset sequencer
CTRL R4
LEN
5
POS
0000H
42
–(U)–
RST
force the sequencer to increment on next scan
R4/EN
1
➀
This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung if you are using a 16
I/O controller.
13–23
Chapter 13
Using Application Specific Instructions
File
4,
Rung 2
Is identical to the previous rung except that it is only active when the
”hole selector switch” is in the ”5–hole” position.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
hole selector switch bit 0
I/9
0
23
–]/[–
ANI➁
hole
152
SQO
selector switch bit 1
I/10
0
FILE #N55
MASK
FFFFH
High Preset Value
(counts to next hole)
DEST N7
5 hole preset sequencer
CTRL R5
LEN
7
POS
0000H
42
–(U)–
RST
force the sequencer to increment on the next scan
R5/EN
1
File
4,
Rung 3➀➂
Is identical to the two previous rungs except that it is only active when
the ”hole selector switch” is in the ”7–hole” position.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
hole selector switch bit 0
I/9
0
22
–] [–
AND
hole
152
SQO
selector switch bit 1
I/10
0
FILE #N62
MASK
FFFFH
High Preset Value
(counts to next hole)
DEST N7
7 hole preset sequencer
CTRL R6
LEN
9
POS
0000H
42
–(U)–
RST
force the sequencer to increment on the next scan
R6/EN
1
➀
This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung if you are using a 16
I/O controller.
➁ This instruction accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this instruction if you are
using a 16 I/O controller.
➂ More rungs will be added to this subroutine at the end of chapter 14.
13–24
Chapter
14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
This chapter contains general information about the high-speed counter
instructions and explains how they function in your application program.
Each of the instructions includes information on:
• what the instruction symbol looks like
• typical execution time for the instruction
• how to use the instruction
• how to enter the instruction
• what happens to the HSC when going to the RRUN mode
In addition, the last section contains an application example for a paper
drilling machine that shows the high-speed counter instructions in use.
High-Speed Counter Instructions
Mnemonic
Function
Name
Code
Purpose
Page
HSC
170
High-Speed Counter
Applies configuration to the high-speed counter hardware, updates the
image accumulator, enables counting when the HSC rung is true, and
disables counting when the HSC rung is false.
14–4
HSL
171
High-Speed Counter Load
Configures the low and high presets, the output patterns, and mask bit
patterns.
14–15
RES
7
High-Speed Counter Reset
Writes a zero to the hardware accumulator and image accumulator.
14–19
RAC
172
High-Speed Counter Reset
Accumulator
Writes the value specified to the hardware accumulator and image
accumulator.
14–20
HSE
173
High-Speed Counter
Interrupt Enable
HSD
174
High-Speed Counter
Interrupt Disable
Enables or disables execution of the high-speed counter interrupt
subroutine when a high preset, low preset, overflow, or underflow is
reached.
14–21
OUT
40
Update High-Speed
Provides you with real-time access to the hardware accumulator value by
Counter Image Accumulator updating the image accumulator.
About the High-Speed
Counter Instructions
14–23
The high-speed counter instructions used in your program configure, control,
and monitor the controllers’ hardware counter. The hardware counter’s
accumulator increments or decrements in response to external input signals.
When the high-speed counter is enabled, data table counter C0 is used by the
program for monitoring the high-speed counter accumulator and status. The
high-speed counter operates independent to the controller scan.
Since these are output instructions, they do not have LD, AND, and OR
equivalents.
When using the high-speed counter, make sure you adjust your input filters
accordingly. See page 18–12 for more information on input filters.
Before you learn about these instructions, read the overview that follows on
the next page. Refer to page 2–23 for information on wiring your controller
for high-speed counter applications.
14–1
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
High-Speed Counter
Instructions Overview
Use the high-speed counter instructions to perform specific actions after a
preset count is reached. These actions include the automatic and immediate
execution of the high-speed counter interrupt routine (file 4) and the
immediate update of outputs based on a source and mask pattern you set.
Counter Data File Elements
The high-speed counter instructions reference counter C0. The HSC
instruction is fixed at C0. It is comprised of three words. Word 0 is the
status word, containing 15 status bits. Word 1 is the preset value. Word 2 is
the accumulated value. Once assigned to the HSC instruction, C0 is not
available as an address for any other counter instructions.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Word 0
CU CD DN OV UN UA HP LP IV IN IH IL PE LS IE
Word 1
Preset Value
Word 2
Accumulator Value
CU
CD
DN
OV
UN
UA
HP
LP
IV
IN
IH
IL
PE
LS
IE
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Status
Word
Counter Up Enable Bit
Counter Down Enable Bit
High Preset Reached Bit
Overflow Occurred Bit
Underflow Occurred Bit
Update High-Speed Counter Accumulator Bit
Accumulator ≥ High Preset Bit
Accumulator ≤ Low Preset Bit
Overflow Caused High-Speed Counter Interrupt Bit
Underflow Caused High-Speed Counter Interrupt Bit
High Preset Reached Caused Interrupt Bit
Low Preset Reached Caused Interrupt Bit
High-Speed Counter Interrupt Pending Bit
High-Speed Counter Interrupt Lost Bit
High-Speed Counter Interrupt Enable Bit
Counter preset and accumulated values are stored as signed integers.
Using Status Bits
The high-speed counter status bits are retentive. When the high-speed
counter is first configured, bits 3–7, 14, and 15 are reset and bit 1 (IE) is set.
• Counter Up Enable Bit CU (bit 15) is used with all of the high-speed
counter types. If the HSC instruction is true, the CU bit is set to one. If
the HSC instruction is false, the CU bit is set to zero. Do not write to this
bit.
• Counter Down Enable Bit CD (bit 14) is used with the Bidirectional
Counters (modes 3–8). If the HSC instruction is true, the CD bit is set to
one. If the HSC instruction is false, the CD bit is set to zero. Do not
write to this bit.
• High Preset Reached Bit DN (bit 13) For the Up Counters (modes 1
and 2), this bit is an edge triggered latch bit. This bit is set when the high
preset is reached. You can reset this bit with an OTU instruction or by
executing an RAC or RES instruction.
The DN bit is a reserved bit for all other Counter options (modes 3–8).
14–2
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
• Overflow Occurred Bit OV (bit 12) For the Up Counters (modes 1 and
2), this bit is set by the controller when the high preset is reached if the
DN bit is set.
Tip
For the Bidirectional Counters (modes 3–8), the OV bit is set by the
controller after the hardware accumulator transitions from 32,767 to
–32,768. You can reset this bit with an OTU instruction or by executing
an RAC or RES instruction for both the up and bidirectional counters.
• Underflow Occurred Bit UN (bit 11) is a reserved bit for the Up
Counters (modes 1 and 2). Do not write to this bit.
Tip
For the Bidirectional Counters (modes 3–8), the UN bit is set by the
controller when the hardware accumulator transitions from –32,768 to
+32,767. You can reset this bit with an OTU instruction or by executing
an RAC or RES instruction.
• Update High-Speed Counter Accumulator Bit UA (bit 10) is used
with an OTE instruction to update the instruction image accumulator
value with the hardware accumulator value. (The HSC instruction also
performs this operation each time the rung with the HSC instruction is
evaluated as true.)
• Accumulator ≥ High Preset Bit HP (bit 9) is a reserved bit for all Up
Counters (modes 1 and 2).
For the Bidirectional Counters (modes 3–8), if the hardware accumulator
becomes greater than or equal to the high preset, the HP bit is set. If the
hardware accumulator becomes less than the high preset, the HP bit is
reset by the controller. Do not write to this bit. (Exception – you can set
or reset this bit during the initial configuration of the HSC instruction.
See page 14–23 for more information.)
• Accumulator ≤ Low Preset Bit LP (bit 8) is a reserved bit for all Up
Counters.
For the Bidirectional Counters, if the hardware accumulator becomes less
than or equal to the low preset, the LP bit is set by the controller. If the
hardware accumulator becomes greater than the low preset, the LP bit is
reset by the controller. Do not write to this bit. (Exception – you can set
or reset this bit during the initial configuration of the HSC instruction.
See page 14–23 for more information.)
• Overflow Caused High-Speed Counter Interrupt Bit IV (bit 7) is set
to identify an overflow as the cause for the execution of the high-speed
counter interrupt routine. The IN, IH, and IL bits are reset by the
controller when the IV bit is set. Examine this bit at the start of the
high-speed counter interrupt routine (file 4) to determine why the
interrupt occurred.
• Underflow caused User Interrupt Bit IN (bit 6) is set to identify an
underflow as the cause for the execution of the high-speed counter
interrupt routine. The IV, IH, and IL bits are reset by the controller when
the IN bit is set. Examine this bit at the start of the high-speed counter
interrupt routine (file 4) to determine why the interrupt occurred.
14–3
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
• High Preset Reached Caused User Interrupt Bit IH (bit 5) is set to
•
•
•
•
High-Speed Counter (HSC)
Ladder representation:
HSC
HIGH SPEED COUNTER
Type Up (Res,Hld)
Counter
C5:0
High Preset
1
Accum
1
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
21.00
21.00
(CU)
(CD)
(DN)
identify a high preset reached as the cause for the execution of the
high-speed counter interrupt routine. The IV, IN, and IL bits are reset by
the controller when the IH bit is set. Examine this bit at the start of the
high-speed counter interrupt routine (file 4) to determine why the
interrupt occurred.
Low Preset Reached Caused High-Speed Counter Interrupt Bit IL
(bit 4) is set to identify a low preset reached as the cause for the execution
of the high-speed counter interrupt routine. The IV, IN, and IH bits are
reset by the controller when the IL bit is set. Examine this bit at the start
of the high-speed counter interrupt routine (file 4) to determine why the
interrupt occurred.
High-Speed Counter Interrupt Pending Bit PE (bit 3) is set to
indicate that a high-speed counter interrupt is waiting for execution. This
bit is cleared by the controller when the high-speed counter interrupt
routine begins executing. This bit is reset if an RAC or RES instruction is
executed. Do not write to this bit.
High-Speed Counter Interrupt Lost Bit LS (bit 2) is set if an
high-speed counter interrupt occurs while the PE bit is set. You can reset
this bit with an OTU instruction or by executing an RAC or RES
instruction.
High-Speed Counter Interrupt Enable Bit IE (bit 1) is set when the
high-speed counter interrupt is enabled to run when an high-speed counter
interrupt condition occurs. It is reset when the interrupt is disabled. This
bit is also set when the high-speed counter is first configured. Do not
write to this bit.
Use this instruction to configure the high-speed counter. Only one HSC
instruction can be used in a program. The high-speed counter is not
operational until the first true execution of the HSC instruction. When the
HSC rung is false, the high-speed counter is disabled from counting but all
other HSC features are operational.
The Counter address of the HSC instruction is fixed at C0.
After the HSC is configured, the image accumulator is updated with the
current hardware accumulator value every time the HSC instruction is
evaluated as true or false.
Entering Parameters
Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction:
• Type indicates the counter selected. Refer to page 14–5 for making your
high-speed counter selection. Each type is available with reset and hold
functionality.
• High Preset is the accumulated value that triggers a user-specified action
such as updating outputs or generating an high-speed counter interrupt.
• Accumulator is the number of accumulated counts.
14–4
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
The table that follows uses the terminology shown here to indicate the status
of counting:
• Up↑ – increments by 1 when the input energizes (edge).
• Down↑ – decrements by 1 when the input energizes (edge).
• Reset↑ – resets the accumulator to zero when the input energizes (edge).
• Hold – disables the high-speed counter from counting while the input is
energized (level).
• Count – increments or decrements by 1 when the input energizes (edge).
• Direction – allows up counts when the input is de-energized and down
counts while the input is energized (level).
• A – input pulse in an incremental (quadrature) encoder (edge/level)
• B – input pulse in an incremental (quadrature) encoder (edge/level)
• Z – reset pulse in an incremental (quadrature) encoder (edge/level)
• ↑ – the signal is active on the rising edge only (off to on).
The table below lists the types of high-speed counter you can choose.
High-Sp d Counter
High-Speed
Count r Type
T p
Input Terminal Used
High-Sp d Counter
High-Speed
Count r Functionality
Functionalit
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
Up
Up Counter operation uses a single-ended
input.
Up↑
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Up
(with external reset and hold)
Up Counter operation uses a single-ended
input with external reset and hold inputs.
Up↑
Not Used
Reset↑
Hold
Pulse and direction
Bidirectional operation uses both pulse
and direction inputs.
Count↑
Direction
Not Used
Not Used
Pulse and direction
(with external reset and hold)
Bidirectional operation uses both pulse
and direction inputs with external reset and
hold inputs.
Count↑
Direction
Reset↑
Hold
Up and down
Bidirectional operation uses both up and
down inputs.
Up↑
Down↑
Not Used
Not Used
Up and down
(with external reset and hold)
Bidirectional operation uses both up and
down pulse inputs with external reset and
hold inputs.
Up↑
Down↑
Reset↑
Hold
Encoder
Bidirectional operation uses quadrature
encoder inputs.
A
B
Not Used
Not Used
Encoder
(with external reset and hold)
Bidirectional operation uses both
quadrature encoder inputs with external
reset and hold inputs.
A
B
Z
Hold
Pag
Page
1
14–5
14–9
14–10
14–12
One difference between Up Counters and Bidirectional Counters is that for
Bidirectional Counters the accumulator and preset values are not changed by
the high-speed counter when the presets are reached. The RAC and HSL
instructions must be used for this function. The Up Counters clear the
accumulator values and re-load the high preset values when the previous
preset is reached.
14–5
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The following items apply when entering the instruction:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• If you see a down arrow on the display it means there are more options
available. To scroll through the options, press this key:
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
14–6
ANB
1
7
0
ENT
P 0 0 8
H S C
U P R E S / H L D
T Y P E
P 0 0 8
C 0 0
H S C
C N T R
P 0 0 8
H S C
P R E
* * * * * 1
P 0 0 8
H S C
A C C
* * * – 0 1
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Once instruction entry is complete, the parameters are condensed to two
screens as shown here:
P 0 0 8
H S C
U P R E S / H L D
P 0 0 8
P
H S C
1
A
T Y P E
C 0 0
– 1
Using the Up Counter and the Up Counter with Reset and Hold
Up counters are used when the parameter being measured is uni-directional,
such as material being fed into a machine or as a tachometer recording the
number of pulses over a given time period.
Both types of Up Counters operate identically, except that the Up Counter
with reset and hold uses external inputs 2 and 3.
For the Up Counter, each Off-to-On state change of input I0/0 adds 1 to the
accumulator until the high preset is reached. The accumulator is then
automatically reset to zero. The Up Counter operates in the 0 to +32,767
range inclusive and can be reset to zero using the Reset (RES) instruction.
When the HSC instruction is first executed true, the:
• Accumulator C0.ACC is loaded to the hardware accumulator.
• High preset C0.PRE is loaded to the hardware high preset.
Operation
Tip
If you move data to the high preset without using the RAC instruction (with a
MOV) after the high-speed counter is configured, the data is loaded to the
instruction image but is not loaded to the hardware. The modified high
preset value is not loaded to the hardware until the existing hardware high
preset is reached or an RAC or RES instruction is executed.
The high preset value loaded to the hardware must be between 1 and 32,767
inclusive or an error (37H) occurs. Any value between –32,768 and +32,767
inclusive can be loaded to the hardware accumulator.
The Following Condition
A high preset is reached
Occurs when
either the hardware accumulator transitions from the
hardware high preset –1 to the hardware high preset, or
the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value greater
than or equal to the hardware high preset, or
the hardware high preset is loaded with a value that is less
than or equal to the hardware accumulator.
14–7
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
When a high preset is reached, no counts are lost.
• Hardware and instruction accumulators are reset.
• Instruction high preset is loaded to the hardware high preset.
• If the DN bit is not set, the DN bit is set. The IH bit is also set and the IL,
IV, and IN bits are reset.
• If the DN bit is already set, the OV bit is set. The IV bit is also set and
the IL, IV and IN bits are reset.
• High-speed counter interrupt file (file 4) is executed if the interrupt is
enabled.
The following tables summarize what the input state must be for the
corresponding high-speed counter action to occur:
Up Counter
Input State
Input Count
(I/O)
Input
Direction (I/1)
Input Reset
(I/2)
Input Hold
(I/3)
HSC Rung
High-Sp d
High-Speed
Counter Action
Turning
Off-to-On
NA
NA
NA
True
Count Up
NA
NA
NA
NA
False
Hold Count
NA (Not Applicable)
Up Counter with Reset and Hold
Input state
Input Count
(I/O)
Input
Direction (I/1)
Input Hold
(I/3)
HSC Rung
High-Sp d
High-Speed
Counter Action
Turning
Off-to-On
NA
Off, On, or
Turning Off
Off
True
Count Up
NA
NA
Off, On, or
Turning Off
On
NA
Hold Count
NA
NA
Off, On, or
Turning Off
NA
False
Hold Count
Off, On, or
Turning Off
NA
Off, On, or
Turning Off
NA
NA
Hold Count
NA
NA
Turning On
NA
NA
Reset to 0
NA (Not Applicable)
14–8
Input Reset
(I/2)
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Using the Bidirectional Counter and the Bidirectional Counter with Reset
and Hold
Bidirectional counters are used when the parameter being measured can
either increment or decrement. For example, a package entering and leaving
a storage bin is counted to regulate flow through the area.
The Bidirectional Counters operate identically except for the operation of
inputs 1 and 0. For the Pulse and Direction type, input 0 provides the pulse
and input 1 provides the direction. For the Up and Down type, input 0
provides the Up count and input 1 provides the Down count. Both types are
available with and without reset and hold. Refer to page 14–5 for more
information regarding Bidirectional Counter types.
For the Bidirectional Counters, both high and low presets are used. The low
preset value must be less than the high preset value or an error (37H) occurs.
The hardware low preset default is –32,768.
Bidirectional Counters operate in the –32,768 to +32,767 range inclusive and
can be reset to zero using the Reset (RES) instruction.
Operation
When the HSC instruction is first executed true, the:
• Instruction accumulator is loaded to the hardware accumulator.
• Instruction high preset is loaded to the hardware high preset.
After the first true HSC instruction execution, data can only be transferred to
the hardware accumulator via the RES or RAC instruction or to the hardware
high and low presets via the HSL instruction.
Any instruction accumulator value between –32,768 and +32,767 inclusive
can be loaded to the hardware.
The Following Condition
A high preset is reached
Occurs when
either the hardware accumulator transitions from the
hardware high preset –1 to the hardware high preset, or
the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value greater
than or equal to the hardware high preset, or
the hardware high preset is loaded with a value that is less
than or equal to the hardware accumulator.
14–9
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
When a high preset is reached, the:
• HP bit is set.
• High-speed counter interrupt file (file 4) is executed if the interrupt is
enabled. The IH bit is set and the IL, IV, and IN bits are reset.
Unlike the Up Counters, the accumulator value is not reset and the high
preset value is not loaded from the image to the hardware high preset
register.
The Following Condition
Occurs when
either the hardware accumulator transitions from the
hardware low preset +1 to the hardware low preset, or
the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value less than
or equal to the hardware low preset, or
the hardware low preset is loaded with a value that is
greater than or equal to the hardware accumulator.
A low preset is reached
When the low preset is reached, the:
• LP bit is set.
• High-speed counter interrupt file (file 4) is executed if the interrupt is
enabled. The IL bit is set and the IH, IV, and IN bits are reset.
An overflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from
+32,767 to –32,768. When an overflow occurs, the:
• OV bit is set.
• High-speed counter interrupt file (file 4) is executed if the interrupt is
enabled. The IV bit is set and the IH, IL, and IN bits are reset.
An underflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from
–32,768 to +32,767. When an underflow occurs, the:
• UN bit is set.
• High-speed counter interrupt file (file 4) is executed if the interrupt is
enabled. The IN bit is set and the IH, IL, and IV bits are reset.
The following tables summarize what the input state must be for the
corresponding high-speed counter action to occur:
Bidirectional Counter (Pulse/direction)
Input State
Input Count
(I/0)
Input
Direction (I/1)
Input Hold
(I/3)
HSC Rung
High-Speed
Count r
Counter
Action
Turning
Off-to-On
Off
NA
NA
True
Count Up
Turning
Off-to-On
On
NA
NA
True
Count Down
NA
NA
NA
NA
False
Hold Count
NA (Not Applicable)
14–10
Input Reset
(I/2)
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold (Pulse/direction)
Input State
Input Count
(I/0)
Input
Direction (I/1)
Input Reset
(I/2)
Input Hold
(I/3)
HSC Rung
High-Speed
Count r
Counter
Action
Turning
Off-to-On
Off
Off, On, or
Turning Off
Off
True
Count Up
Turning
Off-to-On
On
Off, On, or
Turning Off
Off
True
Count Down
NA
NA
Off, On, or
Turning Off
NA
False
Hold Count
NA
NA
Off, On, or
Turning Off
On
NA
Hold Count
Off, On, or
Turning Off
NA
Off, On, or
Turning Off
NA
NA
Hold Count
NA
NA
Turning On
NA
NA
Reset to 0
NA (Not Applicable)
Bidirectional Counter (Up/down count)
Input Up
Count (I/0)
Input State
Input Down
Count (I/1)
HSC Rung
High-Sp d
High-Speed
Counter Action
Turning
Off-to-On
Off, On, or
Turning Off
True
Count Up
Off, On, or
Turning Off
Turning
Off-to-On
True
Count Down
NA
NA
False
Hold Count
NA (Not Applicable)
Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold (Up/down count)
Input State
Input Up
Count (I/0)
Input Down
Count (I/1)
Input Reset
(I/2)
Input Hold
(I/3)
HSC Rung
High-Speed
Counter
Count r
Action
Turning
Off-to-On
Off, On, or
Turning Off
Off, On, or
Turning Off
Off
True
Count Up
Off, On, or
Turning Off
Turning
Off-to-On
Off, On, or
Turning Off
Off
True
Count Down
NA
NA
Off, On, or
Turning Off
NA
False
Hold Count
NA
NA
Off, On, or
Turning Off
On
NA
Hold Count
Off, On, or
Turning Off
Off, On, or
Turning Off
Off, On, or
Turning Off
NA
NA
Hold Count
NA
NA
Turning On
NA
NA
Reset to 0
NA (Not Applicable)
14–11
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
When up and down input pulses occur simultaneously, the high-speed
counter counts up, then down.
Using the Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold with a Quadrature
Encoder
The Quadrature Encoder is used for determining direction of rotation and
position for rotating, such as a lathe. The Bidirectional Counter counts the
rotation of the Quadrature Encoder.
Bidirectional Counters operate in the –32,768 to +32,767 range inclusive and
can be reset to zero using the reset (RES) instruction. The figure below
shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0, 1, and 2. The count
direction is determined by the phase angle between A and B. If A leads B,
the counter increments. If B leads A, the counter decrements.
The counter can be reset using the Z input. The Z outputs from the encoders
typically provide one pulse per revolution.
Input 0
A
Input 1
B
Quadrature Encoder
Z
(Reset input)
Input 2
Forward Rotation
Reverse Rotation
A
B
1
Count
14–12
2
3
2
1
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Operation
For the Bidirectional Counters, both high and low presets are used. The low
preset value must be less than the high preset value or an error (37H) occurs.
When the HSC instruction is first executed true, the:
• Instruction accumulator is loaded to the hardware accumulator.
• Instruction high preset is loaded to the hardware high preset.
Any instruction accumulator value between –32,768 and +32,767 inclusive
can be loaded to the hardware.
After the first true HSC instruction execution, data can only be transferred to
the hardware accumulator via an RES or RAC instruction, or to the hardware
high and low presets via the HSL instruction.
The Following Condition
A high preset is reached
Occurs when
either the hardware accumulator transitions from the
hardware high preset –1 to the hardware high preset, or
the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value greater
than or equal to the hardware high preset, or
the hardware high preset is loaded with a value that is less
than or equal to the hardware accumulator.
When a high preset is reached, the:
• HP bit is set.
• High-speed counter interrupt file (file 4) is executed if the interrupt is
enabled. The IH bit is set and the IL, IN, and IV bits are reset.
Unlike the Up Counters, the accumulator value does not reset and the high
preset value does not get loaded from the image to the hardware high preset
register.
The Following Condition
A low preset is reached
Occurs when
either the hardware accumulator transitions from the
hardware low preset +1 to the hardware low preset, or
the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value less than
or equal to the hardware low preset, or
the hardware low preset is loaded with a value that is
greater than or equal to the hardware accumulator.
14–13
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
When a low preset is reached, the:
• LP bit is set.
• High-speed counter interrupt file (file 4) is executed if the interrupt is
enabled. The IL bit is set and the IH, IN, and IV bits are reset.
An overflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from
+32,767 to –32,768. When an overflow occurs, the:
• OV bit is set.
• High-speed counter interrupt file (file 4) is executed if the interrupt is
enabled. The IV bit is set and the IH, IL, and IN bits are reset.
An underflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from
–32,768 to +32,767. When an underflow occurs, the:
• UN bit is set.
• High-speed counter interrupt file (file 4) is executed if the interrupt is
enabled. The IN bit is set and the IH, IL, and IV bits are reset.
The following tables summarize what the input state must be for the
corresponding high-speed counter action to occur:
Bidirectional Counter (Encoder)
Input State
Input A (I/0)
Input B (I/1)
HSC Rung
High-Speed
Counterr Action
Count
ction
Turning On
Off
True
Count Up
Turning Off
Off
True
Count Down
NA
On
NA
Hold Count
NA
NA
False
Hold Count
NA (Not Applicable)
Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold (Encoder)
Input State
Input A (I/0)
Input B (I/1)
Input Z (I/2)
Input Hold
(I/3)
HSC Rung
High-Speed
Count r
Counter
Action
Turning On
Off
Off
Off
True
Count Up
Turning Off
Off
Off
Off
True
Count Down
Off or On
NA
Off
NA
NA
Hold Count
NA
On
Off
NA
NA
Hold Count
NA
NA
Off
NA
False
Hold Count
NA
NA
Off
On
NA
Hold Count
Off
Off
On➀
NA
NA
Reset to 0
NA (Not Applicable)
➀ The optional hardware high-speed counter reset is the logical coincidence of A x B x Z.
14–14
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
High-Speed Counter Load
(HSL)
Ladder representation:
HSL
HSC LOAD
Counter
Source
Length
C5:0
N7:5
5
(CU)
(DN)
This instruction allows you to set the low and high presets, low and high
output source, and the output mask. When either a high or low preset is
reached, you can instantly update selected outputs.
If you are using the HSL instruction with the Up Counter, the high preset
must be ≥ 1 and ≤ +32,767 or an error (37H) occurs. For the bidirectional
counters, the high preset must be greater than the low preset or an error
(37H) occurs.
The Counter referenced by this instruction has the same address as the HSC
instruction counter and is fixed at C0.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
66.00
7.00
Entering Parameters
Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction:
• Source is an address that identifies the first of five data words used by the
HSL. The source can be either an integer or binary file element.
• Length is the number of elements starting from the source. This number
is always 5.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The following items apply when entering the instruction:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
14–15
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
1
7
1
ENT
P 0 0 8
C 0 0
H S L
C N T R
P 0 0 8
N 5
H S L
S R C
P 0 0 8
H S L
0
L E N
5
Operation
The HSL instruction allows you to configure the high-speed counter to
instantaneously and automatically update external outputs whenever a high
or low preset is reached. The physical outputs are automatically updated in
less than 30 µs. (The physical turn-on time of the outputs is not included in
this amount.) The output image is then automatically updated at the next poll
for user interrupts or at the next IOM instruction or output scan, whichever
occurs first.
With this instruction, you can change the high preset for the up counters or
both the high and low presets for Bidirectional Counters during run. You can
also modify the output mask configuration during run.
The source address is either an integer or binary file element. For example,
if N5 is selected as the source address, the additional parameters for the
execution of this instruction would appear as shown on the following page.
14–16
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Parameter
Image
Location
Up Counter
Only
Bidirectional
Counters
Description
N5
Output Mask
Output Mask
Identifies which group of four bits in the output file
(word 0) are controlled.
000F=bits 3–0
00F0=bits 7–4
0003=bits 0 and 1
00FF= bits 7–0
N6
Output
Source
Output High
Source
(Up count) The status of bits in this word are
written “through” the mask to the actual outputs.
N7
High Preset
High Preset
(Up count) When the accumulator reaches this
value, the output source is written through the
output mask to the actual outputs and the HSC
subroutine (file 4) is scanned.
N8
Reserved
Output Low
Source
(Down count) The status of bits in this word are
written “through” the mask to the actual outputs.
N9
Reserved
Low Preset
(Down count) When the accumulator reaches
this value, the output source is written through
the output mask to the actual outputs and the
HSC subroutine (file 4) is scanned.
The bits in the output mask directly correspond to the physical outputs. If a
bit is set to 1, the corresponding output can be changed by the high-speed
counter. If a bit is set to 0, the corresponding output cannot be changed by
the high-speed counter.
The bits in the high and low sources also directly correspond to the physical
outputs. The high source is applied when the high preset is reached. The
low source is applied when the low preset is reached. The final output states
are determined by applying the output source over the mask and updating
only the unmasked outputs (those with a 1 in the mask bit pattern).
You can always change the state of the outputs via the user program or
programming device regardless of the output mask. The high-speed counter
only modifies selected outputs and output image bits based on source and
mask bit patterns when the presets are reached. The last device that changes
the output image (i.e., user program or high-speed counter) determines the
actual output pattern.
!
ATTENTION: Forces override any output control from either
the high-speed counter or from the output image. Forces may
also be applied to the high-speed counter inputs. Forced inputs
are recognized by the high-speed counter (e.g. a forced count
input off and on increments the high-speed accumulator).
The high-speed counter hardware is updated immediately when the HSL
instruction is executed regardless of high-speed counter type (Up Counter or
Bidirectional Counter). For the Up Counters, the last two registers are
ignored since the low preset does not apply.
14–17
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
If a fault occurs due to the HSL instruction, the HSL parameters are not
loaded to the high-speed counter hardware. You can use more than one HSL
instruction in your program. The HSL instructions can have different image
locations for the additional parameters.
!
ATTENTION: Do not change a preset value and an output
mask/source with the same HSL instruction as the accumulator is
approaching the old preset value.
If the high-speed counter is enabled and the HSL instruction is
evaluated true, the high-speed counter parameters in the HSL
instruction are applied immediately without stopping the
operation of the high-speed counter. If the same HSL instruction
is being used to change the high-speed counter controlled
mask/source and the preset, the mask/source is changed first and
the preset second. (The preset is changed within 40 µs after the
mask/source.) If the original preset is reached after the new
mask/source is applied but before the new preset is applied, the
new outputs are applied immediately.
14–18
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
High-Speed Counter Reset
(RES)
The RES instruction allows you to write a zero to the hardware accumulator
and image accumulator.
Ladder representation:
The Counter referenced by this instruction has the same address as the HSC
instruction counter and is entered as C0.
C5:0
RES)
)
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
51.00
6.00
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
7
E NT
P 0 0 0
C 0 0
R E S
Operation
Execution of this instruction immediately:
• removes pending high-speed counter interrupts
• resets the hardware and instruction accumulators
• resets the PE, LS, OV, UN, and DN status bits
• loads the instruction high preset to the hardware high preset (if the
high-speed counter is configured as an up counter)
• resets the IL, IH, IN, or IV status bits
You can have more than one RES instruction in your program.
14–19
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
High-Speed Counter Reset
Accumulator (RAC)
This instruction allows you to write a specific value to the hardware
accumulator and image accumulator.
Ladder representation:
The Counter referenced by this instruction has the same address as the HSC
instruction counter and is fixed at C0.
RAC
RESET TO ACCUM VALUE
Counter
C5:0
Source
1
Entering Parameters
Enter the following parameter when programming this instruction:
• Source represents the value that is loaded to the accumulator. The source
can be a constant or an address.
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
56.00
6.00
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The following items apply when entering the instruction:
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
1
7
L
2
E NT
P 0 0 8
C 0 0
R A C
C N T R
P 0 0 8
R A C
S R C
* * * * * 1
Once instruction entry is complete, the parameters appear as shown here:
P 0 0 8
P
R A C
1
A
P 0 0 8
R A C
C 0 0
– 1
S R C
1
14–20
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Operation
Execution of the RAC:
• removes pending high-speed counter interrupts
• resets the PE, LS, OV, UN, and DN status bits
• loads a new accumulator value to the hardware and instruction image
• loads the instruction high preset to the hardware high preset (if the
high-speed counter is configured as an Up Counter)
• resets the IL, IH, IN, or IV status bits
The source can be a constant or any integer element in files 0–7. The
hardware and instruction accumulators are updated with the new accumulator
value immediately upon instruction execution.
You can have more than one RAC instruction per program referencing the
same source or different sources.
High-Speed Counter Interrupt
Enable (HSE) and Disable (HSD)
Ladder representation:
These instructions enable or disable a high-speed counter interrupt when a
high preset, low preset, overflow, or underflow is reached. Use the HSD and
HSE in pairs to provide accurate execution for your application.
The Counter referenced by these instructions has the same address as the
HSC instruction counter and is fixed at C0.
HSE
HSC INTERRUPT ENABLE
COUNTER
C5:0
HSD
HSC INTERRUPT DISABLE
COUNTER
C5:0
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True False
HSE 10.00
HSD 8.00
7.00
7.00
Using HSE
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
1
7
U
3
E NT
P 0 0 8
C 0 0
H S E
C N T R
14–21
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Operation
When the high-speed counter interrupt is enabled, user subroutine (file 4) is
executed when:
• A high or low preset is reached.
• An overflow or underflow occurs.
When in RSSN mode and in an idle condition, the high-speed counter
interrupt is held off until the next scan trigger is received from the
programming device. The high-speed counter accumulator counts while idle.
If the HSE is subsequently executed after the pending bit is set, the interrupt
is executed immediately.
The default state of the high-speed counter interrupt is enabled (the IE bit is
set to 1).
If the high-speed counter interrupt routine is executing and another
high-speed counter interrupt occurs, the second high-speed counter interrupt
is saved but is considered pending. (The PE bit is set.) The second interrupt
is executed immediately after the first one is finished executing. If a
high-speed counter interrupt occurs while a high-speed counter interrupt is
pending, the most recent high-speed counter interrupt is lost and the LS bit is
set.
Using HSD
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
1
7
4
E NT
P 0 0 8
C 0 0
H S D
C N T R
Operation
The HSD instruction disables the high-speed counter interrupt, preventing
the interrupt subroutine from being executed.
If the HSE is subsequently executed after the pending bit is set, the interrupt
is executed immediately.
This HSD instruction does not cancel an interrupt, but results in the pending
bit (C0/PE) being set when:
• A high or low preset is reached.
• An overflow or underflow occurs.
14–22
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Update High-Speed Counter
Image Accumulator (OUT)
Ladder representation:
C5:0
)
UA
When an OUT bit instruction is addressed for the high-speed counter (C0)
UA bit, the value in the hardware accumulator is written to the value in the
image accumulator (C0.ACC). This provides you with real-time access to
the hardware accumulator value. This is in addition to the automatic transfer
from the hardware accumulator to the image accumulator that occurs each
time the HSC instruction is evaluated.
)
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
False
12.00
7.00
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
To enter the OUT instruction, press:
OUT
1
P 0 0 0
C 0 0 / U A
0
Operation
This instruction transfers the hardware accumulator to the instruction
accumulator. When the OUT instruction is executed true, the hardware
accumulator is loaded to the instruction image accumulator (C0.ACC).
What Happens to the HSC
When Going to RRUN Mode
Once initialized, the HSC instruction retains its previous state when going
through a mode change or power cycle. This means that the HSC
Accumulator (C0.ACC) and High Preset values are retained. Outputs under
the direct control of the HSC also retain their previous state. The Low Preset
Reached and High Preset Reached bits (C0/LP and C0/HP) are also retained.
They are examined by the HSC instruction during the high-speed counter’s
first true evaluation in the RRUN mode to differentiate a retentive RRUN
mode entry from an external or initial Accumulator (C0.ACC) modification.
At the first true HSC instruction execution after going to run, the Low Preset
is initialized to –32,768 and the output mask and high and low output
patterns are initialized to zero. Use the HSL instruction during the first pass
to restore any values necessary for your application.
You can modify the behavior of the high-speed counter at RRUN mode entry
by adjusting the HSC parameters prior to the first true execution of the HSC
instruction. The following example ladder rungs and instruction lists
demonstrate different ways to adjust the HSC parameters.
14–23
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Example 1
To enter the RRUN mode and have the HSC Outputs, ACC, and Interrupt
Subroutine resume their previous state, apply the following:
Ladder Rungs
Rung 2:0
No action required. (Remember that all OUT instructions are zeroed when
entering the RRUN mode. Use SET/RST instructions in place of OUT
instructions in your conditional logic requiring retention.)
| S:1
+HSL–––––––––––––––+ |
|––][––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HSC LOAD
+–|
|
15
|Counter
C5:0| |
|
|Source
N7:0| |
|
|Length
5| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 2:1
|
+HSC––––––––––––––––––––+
|
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HIGH SPEED COUNTER
+–(CU)–|
|
|Type Encoder(Res,Hld) +–(CD) |
|
|Counter
C5:0+–(DN) |
|
|High Preset
1000|
|
|
|Accum
0|
|
|
+–––––––––––––––––––––––+
|
Instruction List
File
2,
Rung 1
No action required. (Remember that all OUT instructions are zeroed when
entering the RRUN mode. Use SET/RST instructions in place of OUT
instructions in your conditional logic requiring retention.)
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
171
14–24
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
HSL
File
2,
FUN
CODE
––––
170
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
S1/15
CNTR C0
SRC N0
LEN
VALUE
–––––
0
FORCES
––––––
5
Rung 1
MNEMONIC
––––––––
HSC
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
TYPE
CNTR C0
PRE
ACC
VALUE
FORCES
–––––
––––––
Encoder (Res,Hld)
1000
0000H
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Example 2
To enter the RRUN mode and retain the HSC ACC value while having the
HSC Outputs and Interrupt Subroutine reassert themselves, apply the
following:
Ladder Rungs
Rung 2:0
Unlatch the C5:0/HP and C5:0/LP bits during the first scan BEFORE the HSC
instruction is executed for the first time.
| S:1
+HSL–––––––––––––––+
|––][–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HSC LOAD
+–
|
15
|Counter
C5:0|
|
|Source
N7:0|
|
|Length
5|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rung 2:1
| S:1
C5:0
|
|––][––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–(U)––+|––|
|
15
|
HP | |
|
| C5:0 | |
|
+––(U)––+ |
|
LP
|
Rung 2:2
|
+HSC––––––––––––––––––––+
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HIGH SPEED COUNTER
+–(CU)–|
|
|Type Encoder (Res,Hld)+–(CD) |
|
|Counter
C5:0+–(DN) |
|
|High Preset
1000|
|
|
|Accum
0|
|
|
+–––––––––––––––––––––––+
|
Instruction List
File
2,
Rung 0
Unlatch the C5:0/HP and C5:0/LP bits during the first scan BEFORE the HSC
instruction is executed for the first time.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
171
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
HSL
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
S1/15
CNTR C0
SRC N0
LEN
VALUE
–––––
0
FORCES
––––––
5
File
2,
Rung 1
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
42
–(U)–
RST
C0/HP
0
42
–(U)–
RST
C0/LP
0
File
2,
FUN
CODE
––––
170
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
S1/15
VALUE
–––––
0
FORCES
––––––
Rung 2
MNEMONIC
––––––––
HSC
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
TYPE
CNTR C0
PRE
ACC
VALUE
FORCES
–––––
––––––
Encoder (Res,Hld)
1000
0000H
14–25
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Example 3
To enter the RRUN mode and have the HSC ACC and Interrupt Subroutine
resume their previous state, while externally initializing the HSC outputs,
apply the following:
Ladder Rungs
Rung 2:0
Unlatch or latch the output bits under HSC control during the first scan
after the HSC instruction is executed for the first time. (Note, you could
place this rung before the HSC instruction; however, this is not
recommended.)
| S:1
+HSL–––––––––––––––+ |
|––][–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HSC LOAD
+–|
|
15
|Counter
C5:0| |
|
|Source
N7:0| |
|
|Length
5| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 2:1
|
+HSC––––––––––––––––––––+
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HIGH SPEED COUNTER
+–(CU)–|
|
|Type Encoder (Res,Hld)+–(CD) |
|
|Counter
C5:0+–(DN) |
|
|High Preset
1000|
|
|
|Accum
0|
|
|
+–––––––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:2
This rung is programmed with the knowledge of an HSL mask of 0007 (Outputs
0–2 are used) and initializes the HSC outputs each RRUN mode entry.
Outputs O/0 and O/1 are off, while Output O/2 is on.
| S:1
O:0
|
|––][––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+––(U)––+|––|
|
15
|
0
| |
|
| O:0
| |
|
+––(U)–––+ |
|
|
1
| |
|
| O:0
| |
|
+––(L)–––+ |
|
2
|
14–26
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Instruction List
File
2,
Rung 0
Unlatch or latch the output bits under HSC control during the first scan
after the HSC instruction is executed for the first time. (Note, you could
place this rung before the HSC instruction; however, this is not
recommended.)
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
171
HSL
File
2,
FUN
CODE
––––
170
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
File
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
2,
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
S1/15
CNTR C0
SRC N0
LEN
VALUE
–––––
0
FORCES
––––––
5
Rung 1
MNEMONIC
––––––––
HSC
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
TYPE
CNTR C0
PRE
ACC
VALUE
FORCES
–––––
––––––
Encoder (Res,Hld)
1000
0000H
Rung 2
This rung is programmed with the knowledge of an HSL mask of 0007 (Outputs
0–2 are used) and initializes the HSC outputs each RRUN mode entry.
Outputs O/0 and O/1 are off, while Output O/2 is on.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
S1/15
42
–(U)–
RST
O/0
0
42
–(U)–
RST
O/1
0
41
–(L)–
SET
O/2
0
VALUE
–––––
0
FORCES
––––––
14–27
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
High-Speed Counter
Instructions in the Paper
Drilling Machine Application
Example
To demonstrate the use of the HSC instruction, this section provides ladder
rungs followed by the optimized instruction list for these rungs. The rungs
are part of the paper drilling machine application example started in
chapter 5. Refer to appendix E for the complete paper drilling machine
application example.
Drill Home
I/5
Drilled
Holes
Drill Depth
I/4
Quadrature A–B Encoder and Drive
I/0 I/1
Drill On/Off O/1
Drill Retract O/2
Drill Forward O/3
Photo–Eye Reset I/2
Counter Hold I/3
Photo–Eye
Reflector
Conveyor Enable wired in series to the Drive O/5
Conveyor Drive Start/Stop wired in series to the Drive O/0
20226
The main program file (file 2) initializes the HSC instruction, monitors the
machine start and stop buttons, and calls other subroutines necessary to run
the machine. Refer to the comments preceding each rung for additional
information.
14–28
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Adding to File 2
Ladder Rungs
Rung 2:0
Initializes the high–speed counter each time that the RRUN mode is
entered. The high–speed counter data area (N7:5 – N7:9) was chosen to
correspond with the starting address (source address) of our HSL
instruction. Note that the HSC instruction is disabled each entry into
the RRUN mode until the first time that it is executed as true. (The high
preset was ”pegged” on initialization to prevent a high preset interrupt
from occurring during the initialization process.)
| 1’st
Output Mask
|
| Pass
(only use bit 0
|
|
ie. O:0/0)
|
|
S:1
+MOV–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–+MOVE
+–+–|
|
15
| |Source
1| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:5| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| High Output Pattern | |
|
|
(turn off O:0/0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
| +MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MOVE
+–+ |
|
| |Source
0| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:6| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| High Preset Value
| |
|
| (counts to next hole)| |
|
| |
|
| +MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MOVE
+–+ |
|
| |Source
32767| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:7| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| Low output pattern | |
|
|
(turn on O:0/0
| |
|
|
each reset)
| |
|
| |
|
| +MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MOVE
+–+ |
|
| |Source
1| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:8| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| Low preset value
| |
|
| (cause low preset
| |
|
|
int at reset)
| |
|
| |
|
| +MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MOVE
+–+ |
|
| |Source
0| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:9| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| High Speed Counter | |
|
|
| |
|
| +HSL–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+ –+HSC LOAD
+–+ |
|
|Counter
C5:0|
|
|
|Source
N7:5|
|
|
|Length
5|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
14–29
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Rung 2:1
This HSC instruction is not placed in the high–speed counter interrupt
subroutine. If this instruction were placed in the interrupt subroutine,
the high–speed counter could never be started or initialized (because an
interrupt must first occur in order to scan the high–speed counter
interrupt subroutine).
|
High Speed Counter
|
|
+HSC––––––––––––––––––––+
|
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HIGH SPEED COUNTER
+–(CU)–|
|
|Type Encoder (Res,Hld)+–(CD) |
|
|Counter
C5:0+–(DN) |
|
|High Preset
1250|
|
|
|Accum
1|
|
|
+–––––––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:2
This rung forces a high–speed counter low preset interrupt to occur each
RRUN mode entry. An interrupt can only occur on the transition of the
high–speed counter accum to a preset value (accum reset to 1, then 0).
This is done to allow the high–speed counter interrupt subroutine
sequencers to initialize. The order of high–speed counter initialization
is: (1)load high–speed counter parameters (2)execute HSL instruction
(3)execute true HSC instruction (4)(optional) force high–speed counter
interrupt to occur.
| 1’st
High Speed Counter
|
| Pass
|
|
S:1
+RAC––––––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–+RESET TO ACCUM VALUE +–+–|
|
15
| |Counter
C5:0| | |
|
| |Source
1| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| +–––––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
High Speed
| |
|
|
Counter
| |
|
|
C5:0
| |
|
+–––(RES)–––––––––––––––––+ |
14–30
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Instruction List
File
2,
Rung 0
Initializes the high–speed counter each time the RRUN mode is entered.
The high–speed counter data area (N7:5 – N7:9) corresponds with the
starting address (source address) of the HSL instruction. The HSC
instruction is disabled each entry into the RRUN mode until the first time
that it is executed as true. (The high preset was ”pegged” on
initialization to prevent a high preset interrupt from occurring during
the initialization process.)
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
1’st Pass
S1/15
106
MOV
106
MOV
106
MOV
MOV
106
MOV
0
1
0000H
Output Mask (only use bit 0 ie. O:0/0)
DEST N5
SRC
0
0000H
High Output Pattern (turn off O:0/0)
DEST N6
SRC
32767
0000H
(counts to next hole)
SRC
1
0000H
Low output pattern (turn on
DEST N8
SRC
Low preset value
DEST N9
171
FORCES
––––––
SRC
High Preset Value
DEST N7
106
VALUE
–––––
O:0/0 each reset)
0
0000H
(cause low preset intat reset)
HSL
High Speed Counter
CNTR C0
Output Mask (only use bit 0 ie. O:0/0)
SRC N5
LEN
5
File
2,
Rung 1
This HSC instruction is not placed in the high–speed counter interrupt
subroutine. If this instruction were placed in the interrupt subroutine,
the high–speed counter could never be started or initialized (because an
interrupt must first occur in order to scan the high–speed counter
interrupt subroutine).
FUN
CODE
––––
170
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
HSC
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
TYPE
VALUE
FORCES
–––––
––––––
Encoder (Res,Hld)
High Speed Counter 1250
CNTR C0
0000H
PRE
ACC
14–31
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
File
2,
Rung 2
Forces a high–speed counter low preset interrupt to occur each RRUN mode
entry. An interrupt can only occur on the transition of the high–speed
counter accum to a preset value (accum reset to 1, then 0). This is done
to allow the high–speed counter interrupt subroutine sequencers to
initialize. The order of high–speed counter initialization is: (1)load
high–speed counter parameters (2)execute HSL instruction (3)execute true
HSC instruction (4)(optional) force high–speed counter interrupt to
occur.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
1’st Pass
S1/15
132
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
0
RAC
High Speed Counter
CNTR C0
SRC
1
7
RES
High Speed Counter
C0
Rungs 2.0 and 2.2 are required to write several parameters to the high-speed
counter data file area. These two rungs are conditioned by the first pass bit
during one scan when the controller is going from RPRG to RRUN mode.
The high-speed counter is used to control the conveyer position. It counts
pulses supplied by the conveyer’s encoder via hardware inputs I/0 and I/1.
Hardware inputs I/2 (reset) and I/3 (hold) are connected to a photo-switch
ensuring the HSC instruction only counts encoder pulses when a manual is in
front of the drill and that the high-speed counter is reset at the leading edge
of each manual.
The high-speed counter clears the conveyer drive output bit (O/0) each time a
high preset is reached. As a result, the drive decelerates and stops the
conveyer motor. The high-speed counter clears the output within
microseconds ensuring accuracy and repeatability.
The high-speed counter sets the conveyer drive output bit (O/0) each time a
low preset is reached. As a result, the drive accelerates and maintains the
conveyer motor.
When the manual has travelled the specified distance set by the high-speed
counter high preset value, the high-speed counter interrupt subroutine signals
the main program to perform the drilling sequence. For more information
regarding the interrupt subroutine used in this program, refer to the
application example in chapter 13.
This example uses the Quadrature Encoder with reset and hold instruction.
The high-speed counter accumulator increments and decrements based on the
quadrature relationship of the encoder’s A and B inputs (I/0 and I/1). The
accumulator is cleared to zero when the reset is activated or when the RES
instruction is executed.
14–32
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
All presets are entered as a relative offset to the leading edge of a manual.
The presets for the hole patterns are stored in the SQO instructions. (Refer to
chapter 13 for the SQO instruction.)
The high-speed counter external reset input (I/2) and the external hold input
(I/3) are wired in parallel to prevent the high-speed counter from counting
while the reset is active.
The input filter delays for both the high-speed counter A and B inputs (I/0
and I/1) as well as the high-speed counter reset and hold inputs (I/2 and I/3)
can be adjusted. Refer to chapter 18 for more information on adjusting
filters.
Adding to File 4
Ladder Rungs
Rung 4:5
| interrupt occurred due to low preset reached
|
| C5:0
+RET–––––––––––––––+–|
|––––][––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+RETURN
+ |
|
IL
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 4:6
This rung signals the main program (file 2) to initiate a drilling
sequence. The high–speed counter has already stopped the conveyor at the
correct position using its high preset output pattern data (clear O:0/0).
This occurred within microseconds of the high preset being reached (just
prior to entering this high–speed counter interrupt subroutine). The main
program resets the drill sequence start bit and sets the conveyor drive
bit (O:0/0) upon completion of the drilling sequence.
| interrupt occurred
|
Drill Sequence Start |
| due to high preset reached |
|
|
C5:0
B3
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(L)–––––|
|
IH
32
|
Rung 4:7
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
14–33
Chapter 14
Using High-Speed Counter Instructions
Instruction List
File
4,
Rung 5
Interrupt occurred due to low preset reached.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
interrupt occurred due to low preset reached
C0/IL
0
134
File
RET
4,
Rung 6
Signals the main program (file 2) to initiate a drilling sequence. The
high–speed counter has already stopped the conveyor at the correct
position using its high preset output pattern data (clear O:0/0). This
occurred within microseconds of the high preset being reached (just prior
to entering this high–speed counter interrupt subroutine). The drill
sequence subroutine resets the drill sequence start bit and sets the
conveyor drive bit (O:0/0) upon completion of the drilling sequence.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
interrupt occurred due to hi preset reached
C0/IH
0
41
–(L)–
SET
Drill Sequence Start
B/32
0
14–34
Chapter
15
Using Communication Protocols
This chapter contains information about communication and the message
(MSG) instruction. Specifically, this chapter contains information on:
•
•
•
•
•
types of communication
what the MSG instruction symbol looks like
typical execution time for the MSG instruction
how to use the MSG instruction
application examples and timing diagrams
Important: Only Series B or later MicroLogix 1000 HHPs and Series C or
later MicroLogix 1000 controllers support the MSG instruction.
Only Series C MicroLogix 1000 HHPs fully support Series D
functionality.
Only Series C MicroLogix 1000 HHPs will support MicroLogix
1000 analog controllers.
You cannot use the MicroLogix 1000 HHP to select or
configure DF1 half-duplex slave communications in
Series D discrete or Series A analog MicroLogix 1000
controllers.
Message Instruction
Mnemonic
Function Code Name
Purpose
Page
MSG
200
This instruction transfers data from one node to another via the communication
port. When the instruction is enabled, the message is sent to a communication
buffer. Replies are processed at the end of scan.
15–2
Types of Communication
Message
Read/Write
Communication is the ability of a device to send data or status to other
devices. This capability typically falls into one of two categories:
initiator (master) or responder (slave). Each of these are described below:
Initiator (Master) Communication
Initiator products can begin communication processes, which includes
requesting information from other devices (reading) or sending information
to other products (writing). In addition, initiator products are usually capable
of replying to other devices when they make requests to read information.
The Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and the Series A
or later MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers are in this class.
Initiator products can begin communication processes with other initiator
products (peer-to-peer communication) or with responder (slave) products
(initiator-to-responder communication).
15–1
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Responder (Slave) Communication
Responder products can only reply to other products. These devices are not
capable of initiating an exchange of data; they only reply to requests made
from initiator products. The Series A and B MicroLogix 1000 controllers are
in this class.
Message Instruction (MSG)
Ladder representation:
MSG
READ/WRITE MESSAGE
Read/Write
WRITE
Target Device SLC500/ML1000
Control Block
N7:0
Control Block Length 7
(EN)
(DN)
(ER)
Execution Times (µsec) when:
True
180➀
False
48
➀ This only includes the amount of time
needed to set up the operation requested. It
does not include the time it takes to service the
actual communication, as this time varies with
each network configuration. As an example,
144ms is the actual communication service
time for the following configuration: 3 nodes
on DH-485 (2=MicroLogix 1000 programmable
controllers and 1=PLC-500 A.I. Series
programming software), running at 19.2K
baud, with 2 words per transfer.
The MSG is an output instruction that allows the controller to initiate an
exchange of data with other devices. The relationship with the other devices
can be either peer-to-peer communication or master-to-slave communication.
The type of communication required by a particular application determines
the programming configuration requirements of the MSG instruction.
Entering Parameters
When entering a message instruction, the following parameters need to be entered:
• Read/Write – read indicates that the local processor (processor in which
the instruction is located) is receiving data; write indicates that the
processor is sending data.
• Target Device – identifies the type of command used to establish
communication. The target device can be a MicroLogix 1000 controller or
SLC family processor using SLC commands, or a common interface file by
selecting the CIF (Common Interface File) format. Valid options are:
– SLC500/ML1000 – Allows communication between a
MicroLogix 1000 controller and any other MicroLogix 1000 controller
or SLC 500 family processor.
– CIF – (Common Interface File) Allows communication between a
MicroLogix 1000 controller and a non-MicroLogix 1000/SLC 500
device. The CIF data is automatically delivered to integer file 9 in
SLC 500 processors or integer file 7 in MicroLogix 1000 controllers.
The CIF protocol is also used for PLC-2 type messages.
• Control Block Address – an integer file address that you select. It
consists of seven integer words, containing the status bits, target file
address, and other data associated with the MSG instruction.
• Control Block Length – fixed at seven elements. This field cannot be
altered.
• Target Node – the node address of the target device. Valid entries are
0–254 for DF1; 0–31 for DH-485.
• Local Address – the address of the local device.
• Target Address – If SLC500/ML1000 is selected as the target device, a
target address must be entered.
• Target Offset – If CIF is selected as the target device, you must enter a
value for the offset into the CIF.
• Message Length – specifies the length of the message instruction in
elements. 1-word elements are limited to 1–41; 3-word elements are
limited to 1–13.
Important: When running a MicroLogix 1000 program on an SLC 5/03 or
SLC 5/04 processor, the MSG control block length increases from
7 to 14 words. If you plan to run a MicroLogix 1000 program
with one of these processors, make sure that the program has at
least 7 unused words following each MSG control block.
15–2
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
The following table illustrates combinations of message types and target
devices and their valid file types.
Message
Type
Initiating Device
SLC500/ML1000
Write
MicroLogix 1000
O,I,S,B,T,C,R,N
MicroLogix 1000
O,I,S,B,T,C,R,N
SLC500/ML1000
Read
MicroLogix 1000
O,I,S,B,T,C,R,N
MicroLogix 1000
O,I,S,B,T,C,R,N
CIF
Write
MicroLogix 1000
O,I,S,B,T,C,R,N
MicroLogix 1000
N7
CIF
Read
MicroLogix 1000
O,I,S,B,T,C,R,N
MicroLogix 1000
N7
SLC500/ML1000
Write
MicroLogix 1000
O,I,S,B,T,C,R,N
SLC 500
O➃,I➃,S,B,T,C,R,N
SLC500/ML1000
Read
MicroLogix 1000
O,I,S,B,T,C,R,N
SLC 500
O➃,I➃,S,B,T,C,R,N
CIF
Write
MicroLogix 1000
O,I,S,B,T,C,R,N
SLC 500
N9
CIF
Read
MicroLogix 1000
O,I,S,B,T,C,R,N
SLC 500
N9
Command Type
➀
Valid File
Types
Target Device➀➁➂
Valid File Types
The DF1 Full-Duplex protocol can be used if the target device supports it. Such devices include MicroLogix
1000 controllers (any series), SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04 and SLC 5/05 processors, and PLC-5 processors (CIF
command type only).
➁
The DH-485 protocol can be used if the target device supports it. Such devices include MicroLogix 1000
controllers (except for Series A and B discrete controllers) and SLC 500, SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC
5/04 or SLC 5/05 processors.
➂ The DF1 Half-Duplex protocol can also be used with Series D or later discrete and all analog MicroLogix 1000
controllers, but a master is required, such as an SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04 or SLC 5/05 processor.
➃ SLC 500, SLC 5/01, and SLC 5/02 processors do not support O or I file access from a MSG instruction.
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04 and SLC 5/05 processors do support O and I file access, but only when unprotected.
Control Block Layout
The control block layouts shown below illustrate SLC500/ML1000 type messages.
Control Block Layout – SLC500/ML1000
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
EN ST DN ER
EW NR TO
Word
Error Code
0
Node Number
1
Reserved for length (in elements)
2
File Number
3
File Type (O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N)
4
Element Number
5
Subelement Number
6
15–3
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Control Block Layout – CIF
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
EN ST DN ER
EW NR TO
Word
Error Code
0
Node Number
1
Reserved for Length (in elements)
2
Offset Bytes
3
Not used
4
Not used
5
Not used
6
Using Status Bits
Read/Write:
READ
Target Device:
SLC500/ML1000
Control Block:
N7:0
Local Destination File Address:
***
Target Node:
0
Target File Address:
***
Message Length in elements
***
ignore if timed out:
to be retried:
awaiting execution:
0
0
0
TO
NR
EW
error:
message done:
message transmitting:
message enabled:
0
0
0
0
ER
DN
ST
EN
control bit address:
N7:0/8
ERROR CODE: 0
Error Code Desc:
MSG Instruction Status Bits
The right column in the display above lists the various MSG instruction
status bits. These are explained below:
• Time Out Bit TO (bit 08) Temporarily set this bit (1) to clear an
existing MSG instruction. This bit has no effect unless the ST bit has first
been set due to receiving an ACK (acknowlege). Your application must
supply its own timeout value. This bit is reset on any false-to-true rung
transition.
• Negative Response Bit NR (bit 09) is set if the target processor is
responding to your message, but can not process the message at the
present time. The NR bit is reset at the next false-to-true MSG rung
transition that has a transmit buffer available. It is used to determine
when to send retries. The ER bit is also set at this time. Use this
feedback to initiate a retry of your message at a later time. This bit is
used with DH-485 protocol only.
• Enabled and Waiting Bit EW (bit 10) is set on any false-to-true MSG
rung transition. This bit is reset when an ACK or NAK (no acknowledge)
is received, or on any true-to-false MSG rung transition.
Important: The operation of the EW bit has changed since Series C.
• Error Bit ER (bit 12) is set when message transmission has failed. The
ER bit is reset the next time the rung goes from false to true.
15–4
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
• Done Bit DN (bit 13) is set when the message is transmitted
successfully. The DN bit is reset (cleared) the next time the rung goes
from false to true.
• Start Bit ST (bit 14) is set when the processor receives
acknowledgement from the target device. This identifies that the target
device has started to process the MSG request. The ST bit is reset when
the DN, ER, or TO bit is set or on a false-to-true rung transition.
• Enable Bit EN (bit 15) is set only if the transmit buffer is available. If
the transmit buffer is not available, the EN flag remains false. When the
transmit buffer becomes available, the EN flag goes true. It remains set
until the next false rung execution after the MSG completes (DN bit set)
or an error occurs (ER bit set).
Important: The operation of the EN bit has changed since Series C.
The operation associated with a message read or write
instruction is performed when you enable the instruction.
Replies are processed at the end of the scan.
15–5
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Controller Communication Status Bit
When using the MSG instruction, you should also use the following
controller communication status bit:
Active Protocol Bit (S:0/11) – This is a read-only bit that indicates which
communication protocol is currently enabled or functioning: where 0 = DF1
(default) and 1 = DH-485. Use this bit in your program to restrict message
operation to a specific protocol.
Entering the Instruction
You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area.
The following items apply when entering the instruction:
Important: Only Series B or later MicroLogix 1000 HHPs and Series C or
later MicroLogix 1000 controllers support the MSG instruction.
Only Series C MicroLogix 1000 HHPs fully support Series D
functionality.
Only Series C MicroLogix 1000 HHPs will support MicroLogix
1000 analog controllers.
In order to enter the instruction, your program must be
configured to operate with Series C or later MicroLogix 1000
controllers. See page 18–18 for more information.
• Whenever you see asterisks on the display, the HHP is waiting for data
entry (i.e., a number).
• When entering the target address, an element or subelement is entered by
first pressing the right arrow key. For example, to enter the address
I1:8.9, you would press the following key sequence:
MENU
I
1
8
9
• If you see a down arrow on the display it means there are more options
available. To scroll through the options, press this key:
• You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key:
Then if you want to edit that operand, press DEL or FUN-DEL and enter
new parameters. Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next
one. Once the entire instruction is entered, if you want to edit the
instruction’s parameters, you must go into the overwrite mode. (See page
17–4.)
15–6
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
To enter the function code, press:
FUN
L
ANB
2
0
ANB
0
Note:
When entering the target file type, the
MicroLogix default file number is
automatically inserted. If you want to
change the file number, simply press
the desired number.
ENT
P 0 0 8
W R I T E
M S G
T Y P E
P 0 0 8
M S G
S L C 5 0 0 / M L
D E V
Select Read or Write
Select SLC500/ML1000
or CIF
P 0 0 8
N 0
M S G
C B L K
Enter Control Block
Address
P 0 0 8
7
M S G
C B L N
Enter Control Block
Length (Set at 7)
P 0 0 8
M S G
N OD E
* * * * * 5
Identify Target Node
P 0 0 8
N 1 5
M S G
L O C A L
Enter Local Address
P 0 0 8
N 2 5
M S G
T A R G
Enter Target Address
P 0 0 8
M S G
L E N
* * * * * 2
Enter Data Length in
Elements
15–7
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Once the instruction is entered, the parameters are displayed as six screens,
as shown here:
P 0 0 8
M S G
S L C 5 0 0 / M L
T Y P E
W R I T E
P 0 0 8
N 0
M S G
C B L K
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 0 8
M S G
N OD E
5
P 0 0 8
B 7
M S G
L O C A L
0 0 0 0 H
P 0 0 8
M S G
T A R G
R 9 1 : 8 2
P 0 0 8
M S G
L E N
2
15–8
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Timing Diagram for a
Successful MSG Instruction
The following section illustrates a successful timing diagram for a MSG
instruction in a Series D or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controller or a
MicroLogix 1000 analog controller.
Target node
Rung goes True. receives packet.
Control Block Status Bits
Target node processes packet
Target node successfully and returns data
(read) or writes data (success).
sent reply.
Programming
1
Bit 10 EW 0
Enabled and Waiting
1
Bit 15 EN 0
Enabled
1
Bit 14 ST 0
Start
1
Bit 13 DN 0
Done
1
Bit 12 ER 0
Error
1
Bit 9 NR 0
Negative Response
1
Bit 8 TO 0
Time Out
The EW bit is set (1) and the ST, DN, NR, and TO flags are cleared. If the
transmit buffer is not available, the EN flag remains false (0).
When rung conditions go true and the transmit buffer becomes available, the
EN flag goes true (1). The EN bit remains set until either the DN, ER, or TO
bit is set. The TO bit has no effect unless the ST bit has first been set.
If the Target Node successfully receives the MSG packet, it sends back an
ACK (acknowledge). The ACK causes the processor to clear bit S:2/7. (Bit
S:2/7 is valid for Series C discrete only). Note that the Target Node has not
yet examined the MSG packet to see if it understands your request. It is
replying to the initial connection.
At the next end of scan, the EW bit is cleared (0) and the ST bit is set (1).
Once the ST bit is set, the processor waits indefinitely for a reply from the
Target Node. The Target Node is not required to respond within any given
time frame. At this time, no other MSG instruction is serviced.
Note: If the Target Node faults or power cycles during the time frame after
the ST bit is set and before the reply is returned, you will never receive a
reply. No other MSG instructions are able to be serviced unless this MSG is
terminated in error using the TO bit. This is why it is recommended you use
a timer in conjunction with the TO bit to clear any pending instructions.
(When the TO bit is set [1] it clears pending messages.) Typically message
transactions are completed within a couple of seconds. It is up to the
programmer to determine how long to wait before clearing the buffer and
then re-transmitting.
15–9
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Step 4 is not shown in the timing diagram.
If you do not receive an ACK, step 3 does not occur. Instead a NAK (no
acknowledge) is received. When this happens, the ST bit remains clear. A
NAK indicates:
•
•
the Target Node is too busy, or
it received a MSG packet with a bad checksum.
No response indicates:
• either the Target Node is not there, or
• it does not respond because the MSG packet was corrupted in
transmission.
When a NAK occurs, the EW bit is cleared. (Note that the NR bit will only
be set for DH-485 and NAK conditions. An crror code 02H, Target Node is
busy, is received which causes the NR bit to be set.) The ER bit is also set
which indicates that the MSG instruction failed.
Monitor the NR bit. If it is set, indicating that the Target Node is busy, you
may want to initiate some other process (e.g., an alarm or a retry later). The
NR bit is cleared when the rung logic preceding the MSG changes from false
to true.
When an ACK occurs, the Target Node sends one of three responses shown
in Step 6.
Following the successful receipt of the packet, the Target Node sends a reply
packet. The reply packet will contain one of the following responses:
•
•
•
I have successfully performed your write request.
I have successfully performed your read request, and here is your data.
I have not performed your request because of an error.
At the next end of scan, following the Target Node’s reply, the MicroLogix
1000 controller examines the MSG packet from the target device. If the
reply contains “I have successfully performed your write request,” the DN bit
is set and the ST bit is cleared. The MSG instruction is complete. If the
MSG rung is false, the EN bit is cleared the next time the MSG instruction is
scanned.
If the reply contains “I have successfully performed your read request, and
here is your data,” the data is written to the appropriate data table, the DN bit
is set, and the ST bit is cleared. The MSG instruction function is complete.
If the MSG rung is false, the EN bit is cleared the next time the MSG
instruction is scanned.
If the reply contains “I have not performed your request, because of an
error,” the ER bit is set and the ST bit is cleared. The MSG instruction
function is complete. If the MSG rung is false, the EN bit is cleared the next
time the MSG instruction is scanned.
15–10
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Any MSG instruction that is in progress during a network protocol switch is
not processed and is discarded. For more information on network protocol
switching, see page 3–12.
When an error condition occurs, the error code is stored in the lower byte of
the first control word assigned to the MSG instruction.
Error
Code
02H
Target node is busy.
03H
Target node cannot respond because message is too large.
Description of Error Condition
05H
Target node cannot respond because it does not understand the command parameters OR
the control block may have been inadvertently modified.
Local processor is offline (possible duplicate node situation).
06H
Target node cannot respond because requested function is not available.
07H
Target node does not respond.
08H
Target node cannot respond.
09H
Local modem connection has been lost.
0AH
Buffer unavailable to receive SRD reply.
0BH
Target node does not accept this type of MSG instruction.
0CH
Received a master link reset.
04H
15H
Target node cannot respond because of incorrect command parameters or unsupported
command.
Local channel configuration parameter error exists.
18H
Broadcast (Node Address 255) is not supported.
1AH➀
Target node cannot respond because another node is file owner (has sole file access).
1BH➀
37H
Target node cannot respond because another node is program owner (has sole access to all
files).
Message timed out in local processor.
39H
Message was discarded due to a communication protocol switch.
3AH
Reply from target is invalid.
50H
Target node is out of memory.
60H
Target node cannot respond because file is protected.
E7H
Target node cannot respond because length requested is too large.
EBH
Target node cannot respond because target node denies access.
ECH
Target node cannot respond because requested function is currently unavailable.
FAH
Target node cannot respond because another node is file owner (has sole file access).
FBH
Target node cannot respond because another node is program owner (has sole access to all
files).
10H
➀
Error codes 1A and 1B valid for Series C discrete only.
Note: For 1770–6.5.16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set users:
The MSG error code reflects the STS field of the reply to your MSG
instruction. Codes E0 – EF represent EXT STS codes 0 – F. Codes F0 – FC
represent EXT STS codes 10 – 1C.
15–11
Programming
MSG Instruction Error Codes
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Application Examples that
Use the MSG Instruction
Example 1 – Continuously Writing Data from a MicroLogix Controller
In this example, a communication link is created between two Series C or
higher MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers, where one controller is writing
data to another. The communication link is set up for continuous operation
with automatic recovery. Performance in logic is as fast as possible, with the
primary restriction being the communication link protocol (DH-485 or DF1
full-duplex) and the baud rate.
Although the DH-485 protocol is demonstrated here, this example can be
used with either DH-485 or DF1 protocols. To run this on DF1, you would
only need to change the active protocol bit (rung 2.2), the default primary
protocol bit (S2:0/10 in the status file), and the message instruction variables.
For maximum possible communication performance (throughput), select
DF1 full duplex running at 38.4k baud.
Rung 2:0
This rung monitors the write message instruction for errors or lockup
conditions and restarts communication whenever the link becomes valid.
Lockup conditions are situations that may arise if the communication path
is somehow corrupted. Some examples would be power lost at destination
device or a cut cable. Error conditions are typically caused from noise
on the communication link, faulty device(s) on the network, etc.
| Write Message
Message Error
Message Retry Timer
|
| No Response
Retry Timer
|
|
N7:50
T4:9
+TON–––––––––––––––+
|
|–+––] [–––––––––––+–––––––]/[–––––––––––––+TIMER ON DELAY
+–(EN)+–|
| |
9
|
DN
|Timer
T4:9+–(DN) |
| | Write Message |
|Time Base
0.01|
|
| | Error
|
|Preset
100<|
|
| | N7:50
|
|Accum
0<|
|
| +––––] [–––––––––+
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
| |
12
|
|
| | Write Message |
|
| | Start
|
|
| | N7:50
|
|
| +––––] [–––––––––+
|
|
14
|
Rung 2:1
The Time Out bit (TO) associated with each message instruction is used to
clear the controllers communication buffer and message instruction.
Setting these bits basically places the controllers communication section
in the same condition as when the controller power up. These bits allow
control program to reset or recover from unexpected events (e.g., errors,
power problems, media problems).
| Message Error
Write Message
|
| Retry Timer
Time Out
|
|
T4:9
N7:50
|
|–+––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )––––––––––––|
| |
DN
8
|
15–12
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Rung 2:2
Write message with preceding logic. It is STRONGLY recommended that bit
S2:0/11 (active protocol bit) be used to condition all message
instructions. This bit only allows the message instruction to operate
when the correct protocol is active. NOTE: If DF1 was the protocol used
by the message instruction, use –]/[– S2:0/11 for the preceding logic.
| DH-485 Active
Write Message Ins.
|
| S2:0
+MSG–––––––––––––––––––––+|
|
|–––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+Read/Write Message
+–(EN)+–|
|
11
|Read/Write
Write+–(DN) |
|
|Target Device
500CPU+–(ER) |
|
|Control Block
N7:50|
|
|
|Control Block Length
7|
|
|
|
Setup Screen
|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:3
This rung monitors the message instruction for “Done” conditions. When
the message is done, the enable bit is cleared allowing communication to
run again. The error retry bit is also used to reset the message if an
error or lockup condition is encountered.
| Write Message
Write Message
|
| Done
Enabled
|
|
N7:50
N7:50
|
|–+––––] [––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(U)––––––––––––|
| |
13
|
15
|
| | Message Error
|
|
| | Retry Timer
|
|
| | T4:9
|
|
| +––––] [––––––––––––––––+
|
|
DN
|
Rung 2.4
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
15–13
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Example 2 – Continuously Reading Data from a MicroLogix Controller
In this example, a communication link is created between two Series C or
higher MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers, where one controller is reading
data from another. The communication link is set-up for continuous
operation with automatic recovery. Performance in logic is as fast as
possible, with the primary restriction being the communication link protocol
(DH-485 or DF1 full-duplex) and the baud rate.
Although the DH-485 protocol is demonstrated here, this example can be
used with either DH-485 or DF1 protocols. To run this on DF1, you would
only need to change the active protocol bit (rung 2.2), the default primary
protocol bit (S2:0/10 in the status file), and the message instruction variables.
For maximum possible communication performance (throughput), select
DF1 full duplex running at 38.4k baud.
Rung 2:0
This rung monitors the read message instruction for errors or lockup
conditions and restarts communication whenever the link becomes valid.
Lockup conditions are situations that may arise if the communication path
is somehow corrupted. Some examples would be power lost at destination
device, or a cut cable. Error conditions are typically caused from noise
on the communication link, faulty device(s) on the network, etc.
| Read Message
Message Error
Message Retry Timer
|
| No Response
Retry Timer
|
|
N7:60
T4:9
+TON–––––––––––––––+
|
|–+––] [–––––––––––+–––––––]/[–––––––––––––+TIMER ON DELAY
+–(EN)+–|
| |
9
|
DN
|Timer
T4:9+–(DN) |
| | Read Message
|
|Time Base
0.01|
|
| | Error
|
|Preset
100<|
|
| | N7:60
|
|Accum
0<|
|
| +––––] [–––––––––+
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
| |
12
|
|
| | Read Message
|
|
| | Start
|
|
| | N7:60
|
|
| +––––] [–––––––––+
|
|
14
|
Rung 2:1
The Time Out bit (TO) associated with each message instruction is used to
clear the controllers communication buffer and message instruction.
Setting these bits basically places the controllers communication section
in the same condition as when the controller power up. These bits allow
control program to reset or recover from unexpected events (e.g., errors,
power problems, media problems).
| Message Error
Read Message
|
| Retry Timer
Time Out
|
|
T4:9
N7:60
|
|–+––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )––––––––––––|
| |
DN
8
|
15–14
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Rung 2:2
Read message with preceding logic. It is STRONGLY recommended that bit
S2:0/11 (active protocol bit) be used to condition all message
instructions. This bit only allows the message instruction to operate
when the correct protocol is active. NOTE: If DF1 was the protocol used
by the message instruction, use –]/[– S2:0/11 for the preceding logic.
| DH-485 Active
Read Message Ins.
|
| S2:0
+MSG–––––––––––––––––––––+|
|
|–––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+Read/Write Message
+–(EN)+–|
|
11
|Read/Write
Read+–(DN) |
|
|Target Device
500CPU+–(ER) |
|
|Control Block
N7:60|
|
|
|Control Block Length
7|
|
|
|
Setup Screen
|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:3
This rung monitors the message instruction for “Done” conditions. When
the message is done, the enable bit is cleared allowing communication to
run again. The error retry bit is also used to reset the message if an
error or lockup condition is encountered.
| Read Message
Read Message
|
| Done
Enabled
|
|
N7:60
N7:50
|
|–+––––] [––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(U)––––––––––––|
| |
13
|
15
|
| | Message Error
|
|
| | Retry Timer
|
|
| | T4:9
|
|
| +––––] [––––––––––––––––+
|
|
DN
|
Rung 2.4
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
15–15
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Example 3 – Report on Exception/Change of State, Write Data from a
MicroLogix Controller
In this example, a communication link is created between two Series C or
higher MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers, where one controller is writing
data to another. The communication link is set-up for continuous operation
with automatic recovery. Performance in logic is as fast as possible, with the
primary restriction being the communication link protocol (DH-485 or DF1
full-duplex) and the baud rate.
Although the DH-485 protocol is demonstrated here, this example can be
used with either DH-485 or DF1 protocols. To run this on DF1, you would
only need to change the active protocol bit (rung 2.2), the default primary
protocol bit (S2:0/10 in the status file), and the message instruction variables.
For maximum possible communication performance (throughput), select
DF1 full duplex running at 38.4k baud.
Rung 2:0
This rung monitors the write message instruction for errors or lockup
conditions and restarts communication whenever the link becomes valid.
Lockup conditions are situations that may arise if the communication path
is somehow corrupted. Some examples would be power lost at destination
device, or a cut cable. Error conditions are typically caused from noise
on the communication link, faulty device(s) on the network, etc.
| Write Message
Message Error
Message Retry Timer
|
| No Response
Retry Timer
|
|
N7:50
T4:9
+TON–––––––––––––––+
|
|–+––] [–––––––––––+–––––––]/[–––––––––––––+TIMER ON DELAY
+–(EN)+–|
| |
9
|
DN
|Timer
T4:9+–(DN) |
| | Write Message |
|Time Base
0.01|
|
| | Error
|
|Preset
1|
|
| | N7:50
|
|Accum
0|
|
| +––––] [–––––––––+
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
| |
12
|
|
| | Write Message |
|
| | Start
|
|
| | N7:50
|
|
| +––––] [–––––––––+
|
|
14
|
Rung 2:1
The Time Out bit (TO) associated with each message instruction is used to
clear the controllers communication buffer and message instruction.
Setting these bits basically places the controllers communication section
in the same condition as when the controller power up. These bits allow
control program to reset or recover from unexpected events (e.g., errors,
power problems, media problems).
| Message Error
Write Message
|
| Retry Timer
Time Out
|
|
T4:9
N7:50
|
|–+––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )––––––––––––|
| |
DN
8
|
15–16
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Rung 2:2
Write message with report by exception (RE) or change of state (COS)
logic. COS is used to only transmit data/information when some type of
change has occurred (time, data, etc.). This type of communications is
extremely beneficial on networks because any time you can limit
unnecessary traffic on a network, your ability to send information without
delays is improved. It is STRONGLY recommended that bit S2:0/11 (active
protocol bit) be used to condition all message instructions. This bit
only allows the message instruction to operate when the correct protocol
is active. NOTE: If DF1 was the protocol used by the message
instruction, use –]/[– S2:0/11 for the preceding logic.
| DH-485 Active
Write Message Ins.
|
| S2:0
+NEQ–––––––––––––––+
+MSG–––––––––––––––––––––+
|
|–––] [–––––––+Not Equal
|–––+Read/Write Message
+–(EN)+–|
|
11
|Source A
I:0.0|
|Read/Write
Write+–(DN) |
|
|
96<|
|Target Device
500CPU+–(ER) |
|
|Source B
N7:25|
|Control Block
N7:50|
|
|
|
0<|
|Control Block Length
7|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Setup Screen
|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:3
This rung monitors the message instruction for “Done” conditions. When
the message is done, the enable bit is cleared allowing communication to
run again. The error retry bit is also used to reset the message if an
error or lockup condition is encountered.
| Write Message
Write Message
|
| Done
Enabled
|
|
N7:50
N7:50
|
|–+––––] [––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(U)––––––––––––|
| |
13
|
15
|
| | Message Error
|
|
| | Retry Timer
|
|
| | T4:9
|
|
| +––––] [––––––––––––––––+
|
|
DN
|
Rung 2:4
This MOV instruction is used to set N7:25 to I:0.0 after the message is
successfully transmitted. This stops the message instruction in rung 2.2
from executing. If I:0.0 changes, the NEQ instruction in rung 2.2
triggers the message instruction to write data to the target device.
(N7:25 is used in the comparison in rung 2.2 to enable or disable the
message instruction from being processed.)
| Write Message
|
| Done
COS Buffer Register
|
|
N7:50
+MOV–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––|Move
+–––|
|
13
|Source
I:0.0|
|
|
|
96|
|
|
|Dest
N7:25|
|
|
|
0<|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2.5
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
15–17
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Example 4 – Continuously Reading and Writing Data with a MicroLogix
Controller
In this example, a communication link is created between two Series C or
higher MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers. This example creates a
master/slave communication link between two controllers (one controller
reading and writing data to another controller) with a MicroLogix 1000 as
the master. The communication link is set-up for continuous operation with
automatic recovery. Performance in logic is as fast as possible, with the
primary restriction being the communication link protocol (DH-485 or DF1
full-duplex) and the baud rate.
Although the DH-485 protocol is demonstrated here, this example can be
used with either DH-485 or DF1 protocols. To run this on DF1, you would
only need to change the active protocol bit (rungs 2.2 and 2.3), the default
primary protocol bit (S2:0/10 in the status file), and the message instruction
variables. For maximum possible communication performance (throughput),
select DF1 full duplex running at 38.4k baud.
Rung 2:0
This rung monitors both message instructions for errors or lockup
conditions and restarts communication whenever the link becomes valid.
Lockup conditions are situations that may arise if the communication path
is somehow corrupted. Some examples would be power lost at destination
device or a cut cable. Error conditions are typically caused from noise
on the communication link, faulty device(s) on the network, etc.
| Write Message
Message Error
Message Retry Timer
|
| No Response
Retry Timer
|
|
N7:50
T4:9
+TON–––––––––––––––+
|
|–+––] [–––––––––––+–––––––]/[–––––––––––––+TIMER ON DELAY
+–(EN)+–|
| |
9
|
DN
|Timer
T4:9+–(DN) |
| | Write Message |
|Time Base
0.01|
|
| | Error
|
|Preset
100<|
|
| | N7:50
|
|Accum
0<|
|
| +––––] [–––––––––+
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
| |
12
|
|
| | Write Message |
|
| | Start
|
|
| | N7:50
|
|
| +––––] [–––––––––+
|
| |
14
|
|
| | Read Message
|
|
| | Error
|
|
| | N7:60
|
|
| +––––] [–––––––––+
|
| |
12
|
|
| | Read Message
|
|
| | No Response
|
|
| | N7:60
|
|
| +––––] [–––––––––+
|
| |
9
|
|
| | Read Message
|
|
| | Start
|
|
| | N7:60
|
|
| +––––] [–––––––––+
|
|
14
|
15–18
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Rung 2:1
The Time Out bit (TO) associated with each message instruction is used to
clear the controllers communication buffer and message instruction.
Setting these bits, basically places the controllers communication section
in the same condition as when the controller power up. These bits allow
control program to reset or recover from unexpected events (e.g., errors,
power problems, media problems).
| Message Error
Write Message
|
| Retry Timer
Time Out
|
|
T4:9
N7:50
|
|––––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––( )––––––––––+–|
|
DN
|
8
| |
|
| Read Message
| |
|
| Time Out
| |
|
| N7:60
| |
|
+––––( )–––––––––+ |
|
8
|
Rung 2:2
Write message with preceding logic. It is STRONGLY recommended that bit
S2:0/11 (active protocol bit) be used to condition all message
instructions. This bit only allows the message instruction to operate
when the correct protocol is active. The read message enabled bit
(N7:60/15) is used to “open” the rung of the write message when the read
message is active. This sequences the write message to proper state,
allowing immediate transmission when the read message completes its
operation. NOTE: If DF1 was the protocol used by the message
instruction, use –]/[– S2:0/11 for the preceding logic.
| DH-485 Active
Read Message
Write Message Ins.
|
|
Enabled
|
| S2:0
N7:60
+MSG–––––––––––––––––––––+|
|
|–––] [–––––––––––––––]/[––––––––––––+Read/Write Message
+–(EN)+–|
|
11
15
|Read/Write
Write+–(DN) |
|
|Target Device
500CPU+–(ER) |
|
|Control Block
N7:50|
|
|
|Control Block Length
7|
|
|
|
Setup Screen
|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:2
Write message with preceding logic. It is STRONGLY recommended that bit
S2:0/11 (active protocol bit) be used to condition all message
instructions. This bit only allows the message instruction to operate
when the correct protocol is active. The write message enabled bit
(N7:50/13) is used to enable the read message as soon as the write message
completes its operation. NOTE: If DF1 was the protocol used by the
message instruction, use –]/[– S2:0/11 for the preceding logic.
| DH-485 Active
Read Message
Read Message Ins.
|
|
Enabled
|
| S2:0
N7:50
+MSG–––––––––––––––––––––+|
|
|–––] [–––––––––––––––] [––––––––––––+Read/Write Message
+–(EN)+–|
|
11
13
|Read/Write
Read+–(DN) |
|
|Target Device
500CPU+–(ER) |
|
|Control Block
N7:60|
|
|
|Control Block Length
7|
|
|
|
Setup Screen
|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––––––––+
|
15–19
Chapter 15
Using Communication Protocols
Rung 2:3
This rung monitors the message instruction for “Done” conditions. When
both messages are done, both messages are reset, allowing the sequence to
be restarted in the next scan. The error retry bit is also used to reset
both messages if an error or lockup condition is encountered.
| Read Message
Write Message
Write Message
|
| Done
Done
Enabled
|
|
N7:60
N7:50
N7:50
|
|–+––––] [––––––––––] [–––+––––––––––––––––––––––+––––(U)––––––––––+––|
| |
13
13 |
|
15
| |
| | Message Error
|
| Read Message
| |
| | Retry Timer
|
| Enabled
| |
| | T4:9
|
| N7:60
| |
| +––––] [––––––––––––––––+
+––––(U)––––––––––+ |
|
DN
15
|
Rung 2.5
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
15–20
Chapter
16
Instruction List Programming
This chapter uses programming examples to teach you instruction list
programming. The chapter also lists programming considerations.
Programming Examples
In the section Applying Logic to Your Schematics, page 6–11, you learned
the concepts behind ladder logic. You were also shown the instruction list
(Boolean) equivalent of a simple rung of logic. This section builds on that
by showing you some more rung examples and their equivalent instruction
list(s).
Important: Although the rung examples shown here use only bit
instructions, you can apply the methodology that is shown to
any of the instructions you learned about in chapters 8–14.
Because of the flexibility of instruction list programming, there is often more
than one instruction list representation possible for the same rung. However,
there is always one representation that is considered to be the most
optimized. This is the shortest list representation possible for the rung.
Important: For instruction list programming, you must begin every rung by
pressing the key shown here:
NEW
RUNG
T
To help you remember to do this, each instruction list example
in this chapter begins with the words NEW RUNG. (See page
17–2 for more information.)
Input Rung Examples
Examples of input rungs and their optimized instruction list representation
are provided below. Since many of these rungs have more than one possible
instruction list representation, optional representations are shown to the right
of the optimized list.
Series Inputs
This example shows the instruction list for a simple series connection.
a
b
c
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
AND b
OUT c
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
LD b
ANB
OUT c
16–1
Chapter 16
Instruction List Programming
Parallel Inputs
When the inputs are in parallel, the instruction list representation is as
follows:
c
a
b
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
OR b
OUT c
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
LD b
ORB
OUT c
Parallel Input Branching
An input branch can be used to allow more than one combination of input
conditions on parallel branches. An example of this type of rung is shown
below.
a
d
b
c
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
AND b
OR c
OUT d
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
LD b
ANB
OR c
OUT d
Option 2
NEW RUNG
LD a
LD b
ANB
LD c
ORB
OUT d
Series Block Connection
When two blocks of instructions are connected in series, an ANB instruction
is used, as shown here:
a
c
b
d
e
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
OR b
LD c
OR d
ANB
OUT e
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
OR b
LD c
LD d
ORB
ANB
OUT e
Option 2
NEW RUNG
LD a
LD b
ORB
LD c
LD d
ORB
ANB
OUT e
(See page 8–12 for more information regarding the use of the ANB
instruction.)
16–2
Chapter 16
Instruction List Programming
Parallel Block Connection
If two blocks of instructions are connected in parallel, an ORB instruction is
used. An example of this type of block connection is provided below.
a
b
c
d
e
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
AND b
LD c
AND d
ORB
OUT e
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
LD b
ANB
LD c
AND d
ORB
OUT e
Option 2
NEW RUNG
LD a
LD b
ANB
LD c
LD d
ANB
ORB
OUT e
(See page 8–12 for more information regarding the use of the ORB
instruction.)
Nested Input Branching
You can nest input branches to avoid using redundant instructions. This
example shows how ANB and ORB instructions are used together in these
type of rungs. (See page 8–12 for more information regarding the use of
these instructions.)
a
b
c d
e
h
g
f
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
AND b
LD c
LD d
LD e
AND f
ORB
ANB
AND g
ORB
OUT h
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
LD b
ANB
LD c
LD d
LD e
AND f
ORB
ANB
AND g
ORB
OUT h
Option 2
NEW RUNG
LD a
LD b
ANB
LD c
LD d
LD e
LD f
ANB
ORB
ANB
LD g
ANB
ORB
OUT h
16–3
Chapter 16
Instruction List Programming
Output Rung Examples
This section shows you examples of output rungs and their optimized
instruction list representation. Like the input rungs, many output rungs have
more than one possible instruction list representation. Therefore, where
applicable an optional representation is shown to the right of the optimized
list.
Single Output
It is possible to have a rung made up of just an output. An example of such a
rung is shown below.
a
Optimized
NEW RUNG
OUT a
Output Branching
You can program parallel outputs on a rung to allow a true logic path to
control multiple outputs, as shown in the following example.
Important: It is possible to have a rung with output branching and no input
instruction.
a
b
c
d
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
OUT b
OUT c
OUT d
Output Branching With Conditions
As stated in chapter 6, additional input logic instructions, or conditions, can
be programmed in the output branches to further control the outputs.
Four different examples of output branching with conditions are provided for
you. Study each example to get a better understanding of when you need to
use multiple output circuit connecting instructions (MPS, MRD, and MPP) in
your output branches. (See page 8–10 for more information regarding the
use of these instructions.)
16–4
Chapter 16
Instruction List Programming
Example 1 – Multiple output circuit that does not require connecting
instructions.
b
a
c
d
Optimized
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
OUT b
AND c
OUT d
NEW RUNG
LD a
OUT b
LD c
ANB
OUT d
Example 2 – This example requires MPS and MPP connecting instructions.
Optimized
b
a
c
d
NEW RUNG
LD a
MPS
AND b
OUT c
MPP
OUT d
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
MPS
LD b
ANB
OUT c
MPP
OUT d
Example 3 – This example also requires MPS and MPP instructions.
b
a
c
d
e
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
OUT b
MPS
AND c
OUT d
MPP
OUT e
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
MPS
OUT b
MRD
AND c
OUT d
MPP
OUT e
Example 4 – This example requires all three output circuit connectors: MPS,
MRD, and MPP.
b
c
d
e
f
g
a
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
MPS
AND b
OUT c
MRD
AND d
OUT e
MPP
AND f
OUT g
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
MPS
LD b
ANB
OUT c
MRD
LD d
ANB
OUT e
MPP
LD f
ANB
OUT g
16–5
Chapter 16
Instruction List Programming
Output Branching with Block Connections
The example below shows how you use ANB and ORB instructions in a
rung’s output circuit. (See page 8–12 for more information regarding the use
of these instructions.)
e
c
b
a d
f
g
h
i
j
k
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
MPS
LD b
AND c
OR d
ANB
OUT e
MPP
LD f
AND g
LD h
AND i
ORB
ANB
AND j
OUT k
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
MPS
LD b
LD c
ANB
LD d
ORB
ANB
OUT e
MPP
LD f
LD g
ANB
LD h
LD i
ANB
ORB
ANB
AND j
OUT k
Nested Output Branches
The example below requires multiple MPS/MPP instructions in a rung. (See
page 8–10 for more information regarding the use of these instructions.)
16–6
c
b
a
d
i
e
f
g
h
j
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
MPS
AND b
OUT c
MRD
AND d
MPS
AND e
OUT f
MPP
AND g
OUT h
MPP
AND i
OUT j
Option 1
NEW RUNG
LD a
MPS
LD b
ANB
OUT c
MRD
LD d
ANB
MPS
LD e
ANB
OUT f
MPP
LD g
ANB
OUT h
MPP
LD i
ANB
OUT j
Chapter 16
Instruction List Programming
Putting it All Together
The example that follows combines all of the input and output concepts that
have been presented to you. The optimized instruction list is shown beneath
the rung.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
i
h
j
k
l
m
n
o
t
p
q
r
s
u
Optimized
NEW RUNG
LD a
LD b
AND c
LD d
AND e
ORB
ANB
AND f
LD g
AND h
OR i
ANB
AND j
MPS
AND k
OUT l
MRD
AND m
OUT n
MRD
AND o
MPS
AND p
OUT q
MPP
AND r
OUT s
MPP
AND t
OUT u
16–7
Chapter 16
Instruction List Programming
Programming Considerations
16–8
Since more than one instruction list representation may be possible for a
single rung, you should be aware of the following programming issues if you
are using programming software with your MicroLogix 1000 HHP:
• Any rung created in the HHP and saved to the controller, uploaded to
programming software and edited, downloaded to the controller, and then
monitored by the HHP will have the optimized instruction list
representation. Thus, the program size and scan time may decrease if you
originally created a program with a non-optimized list representation.
• Any rung created using programming software, downloaded to the
controller, and then monitored by the HHP will have the optimized
instruction list representation.
• Any rung created using programming software, downloaded to the
controller, edited by the HHP and saved to the controller, and then
uploaded to the programming software will have all unnecessary branches
removed. Thus, the program size and scan time may decrease.
Chapter
17
Entering and Editing Your Program
Read this chapter to enter and edit program files using your
MicroLogix 1000 HHP. This chapter describes:
• entering the program monitor
• editing considerations
• editing in append and overwrite modes
• deleting instructions and rungs
• searching for specific addresses
Entering the Program Monitor
Once you understand the structure of instruction lists, you can begin entering
the instructions into the program files. You do this in the program monitor
functional area. This section shows you how to access the program monitor
and describes the main screens within it.
Accessing the Program Monitor
To access the program monitor display for the program, begin at the home
screen and press the key sequence shown here:
MON
ENT
If this is the first time you are entering the program monitor, you will see the
Start of File screen (explained below). If you entered the program monitor
before, you return to the last location you were at within the program.
Program Monitor Screen Definitions
There are four key screens used within the program monitor. The Start of
File and the End of File screens are created automatically as part of every
program file. The Start of Rung and First Instruction on Rung screens are
created by you as you add rungs to the program files. Each of these screens
is explained below.
Start of File Screen
P
S T A R T
F I L E : 0 2
MA I N _ P R OG
The Start of File screen signifies the top of a program file. It is from this
screen that you add the first rung to the file.
17–1
Chapter 17
Entering and Editing Your Program
File names appear in the lower left-hand corner of only two of the Start of
File screens. Program file 2 has the default name MAIN_PROG since it is the
main program file, and file 3 has the default name USER_FAULT since this
program file is only executed when a fault occurs. (The program file names
can be changed using the programming software.)
End of File Screen
P 0 0 0
E N D
F I L E : 0 2
As the name implies, this screen signifies the end of a program file. If you
do not add any rungs to a program file, the End of File screen is labeled rung
0, as it is considered the only rung in the file.
Start of Rung Screen
P 0 0 0
The Start of Rung screen shows the Start of Rung (SOR) symbol. As the
name implies, this symbol indicates the start of a new rung.
Important: Every rung must begin with an SOR symbol. To add an SOR
symbol to the program file, press the key shown here:
NEW
RUNG
T
To create the first rung in the program file, you must press this
key while viewing the Start of File screen.
First Instruction on Rung Screen
P 0 0 0
I / 6
0
The First Instruction on Rung screen shows the SOR symbol to the left of the
first instruction entered onto the rung. For example, the screen above shows
the SOR symbol to the left of a LD instruction.
17–2
Chapter 17
Entering and Editing Your Program
Editing Considerations
Before you begin to edit an existing program, you should store the program
on a memory module (or save it on a personal computer with programming
software). That way, if you edit a program and then decide that you don’t
want to accept the edits you have made (i.e., you want the original program
back), you can reload the original unedited program to the controller.
Editing Modes
When the controller is in RPRG mode, you can edit program files from
within the MicroLogix 1000 HHPs program monitor functional area. The
HHP has two editing modes:
• append (P)
• overwrite (O)
A letter appears in the upper left-hand corner of the program monitor display
to indicate what mode is currently selected. This letter starts flashing once
edits are made to the program. The default mode is append (P).
Edit Mode
P
S T A R T F I L E : 0 2
MA I N _ P R O G
In general, append mode is used to add a new instruction or rung, while
overwrite mode is used to write over or edit the parameters of existing
instructions. To toggle between the edit modes, press the key shown here:
OV R
Each mode is explained in more detail below.
Append Mode
To add an instruction or a rung to a program, the MicroLogix 1000 HHP
must be in append mode. The instruction or rung is always added after the
instruction or rung currently displayed by the HHP.
Adding an Instruction
Follow these steps to add an instruction:
1. Make sure that the edit mode is set to append (P). Toggle the edit mode
key if necessary.
2. Arrow to the location where you want to add an instruction. The table
below describes from where you can add an instruction.
You can add an instruction:
But you must:
at the beginning of an existing rung
go to the Start of Rung screen.
after an existing instruction on a
rung
have the existing instruction
displayed (any parameter of it).
17–3
Chapter 17
Entering and Editing Your Program
Important: You cannot add an instruction when the current display
is the End of File screen. To add an instruction to the
end of a rung, you must be on the rung’s last instruction.
3. Press the instruction key or enter the function code corresponding to the
instruction you want to enter.
Adding a Rung
Follow these steps to add a rung:
1. Make sure that the edit mode is set to append (P). Toggle the edit mode
key if necessary.
OV R
2. Arrow to the location you want to add a rung. The table below describes
from where you can add a rung.
You can add a rung:
But you must:
at the beginning of a program file
go to the Start of File screen.
after an existing rung
have the existing rung displayed
(any instruction on it).
Important: You cannot add a rung when the current display is the
End of File screen. To add a rung to the end of the
program file, you must be on the file’s last rung.
3. Add the rung by pressing the New Rung key.
NEW
RUNG
T
4. Add the instructions you want on the new rung.
Overwrite Mode
With the MicroLogix 1000 HHP in overwrite mode, you can either write
over the current parameters of an instruction or you can write over an entire
instruction to replace it with a new one.
Overwriting an Instruction’s Parameters
The steps below describe how to write over the parameters of an existing
instruction.
1. Change the edit mode to overwrite (if you haven’t already).
OV R
2. Arrow to the instruction with the parameters you want to change.
17–4
Chapter 17
Entering and Editing Your Program
3. Press the key sequence shown below.
FUN
E NT
ENT
4. You are now able to change any or all of the current parameters for this
instruction. The table below describes your options.
If you want to:
Then you should:
accept the current parameters
press ENT.
change the current parameters
use DEL as a destructive
backspace, or FUN-DEL to delete
the entire displayed address. Then
key in the desired address and
press ENT.
Once the instruction is accepted, the instruction immediately after the
instruction you wrote over is displayed.
Overwriting an Instruction
The steps below describe how to write over an existing instruction.
1. Change the edit mode to overwrite (if you haven’t already).
OV R
2. Arrow to the instruction you want to replace.
Important: You cannot write over the Start of File, Start of Rung, or
End of File screens.
3. Press the instruction key or enter the function code corresponding to the
instruction you want to enter.
A. If this instruction is of the same instruction class as the instruction it is
overwriting (e.g., LD and LDI), the current parameters are loaded for
the new instruction. The table below describes your options.
If you want to:
accept the current parameters
change the current parameters
Then you should:
press ENT.
use DEL as a destructive
backspace, or FUN-DEL to delete
the entire displayed address. Then
key in the desired address and
press ENT.
B. If this instruction is of a different instruction class, no parameters are
loaded. Key in the desired address and press ENT.
Once the instruction is accepted, the instruction immediately after the
instruction you wrote over is displayed.
17–5
Chapter 17
Entering and Editing Your Program
Deleting Instructions and
Rungs
While in either append or overwrite edit mode, you can delete individual
instructions and rungs. You can also delete a range of rungs within a single
program file.
Important: If you delete an instruction or rung(s), you cannot undo the
deletion.
Deleting an Instruction
You can delete a single instruction while viewing any parameter of that
instruction by pressing the key shown below.
A LL
D EL
Important: A confirmation screen will not appear; the instruction is simply
deleted. If you delete an instruction, you cannot undo the
deletion.
Once the instruction is deleted, the instruction that immediately followed it
on the rung appears on the display. The only exceptions to that rule are
described in the table below:
If the deleted instruction was:
the last instruction on a rung
the only instruction on a rung
Then the display shows:
the first instruction of the next rung.
an empty Start of Rung screen.
You cannot delete the Start of Rung screen unless all other instructions on the
rung are deleted first. However, you can delete the entire rung.
Deleting a Single Rung
To delete a single rung, follow these steps:
1. While viewing any instruction located on the rung you want to delete,
press the key sequence shown here:
FUN
A LL
D EL
D E L E T E
x x x
R U N G( S ) :
The confirmation screen shown above appears. The number of the rung
to be deleted is shown in the lower left-hand corner.
17–6
Chapter 17
Entering and Editing Your Program
2. If this is the rung you want to delete, press ENT. If you do not want to
delete this rung, press ESC.
Important: If you delete a rung, you cannot undo the deletion.
Once the rung is deleted, the rung that immediately followed it in the
program file is displayed.
Deleting a Range of Rungs
Deleting a range of rungs uses the same key sequence required to delete a
single rung. Follow these steps to delete multiple rungs:
1. Start at the first or last rung of the range of rungs you want to delete.
2. While viewing any instruction located on that rung, press the key
sequence shown here:
FUN
A LL
DEL
D E L E T E
x x x
R U N G( S ) :
The confirmation screen shown above appears. The number of the first
rung to be deleted is shown in the lower left-hand corner.
3. Press the key shown below to indicate you are deleting a range of rungs.
ORB
+ -
/
A dash appears on the screen.
4. Type in the number of the last rung to be deleted. This number can be
less than or greater than the first rung. The screen now looks like this:
D E L E T E R U N G( S ) :
x x x – x x x
5. Press ENT to delete the range of rungs. The rungs indicated and all the
rungs in between are deleted. To abort this procedure, press ESC.
Important: If you delete a range of rungs, you cannot undo the
deletion.
Once the range of rungs is deleted, the rung that immediately followed it in
the program file is displayed.
17–7
Chapter 17
Entering and Editing Your Program
Searching for Specific
Addresses
The search option allows you to quickly locate addresses in program files.
You can search for either an address that you enter or an address that is
displayed.
Searching for an Address You Enter
To enter an address and search for it, press the key sequence shown here:
MON
address
SEARCH
N
This type of search can be invoked from any of the four functional areas:
• home screen
• program monitor
• data monitor
• multi-point
The search begins from the top of the first program file and searches down
through all of the files. If the search option cannot find the address you
enter, the message NOT FOUND is displayed.
Searching for an Address That is Displayed
You can search for the address that is currently displayed on the
MicroLogix 1000 HHP by pressing the key shown here:
SEARCH
N
The table below shows the functional areas from which the search can be
invoked and from where in the program the search begins.
From this Functional Area:
The Search Begins From the:
Program Monitor
current display and searches down to
the last program file. Search does not
wrap around from the last file to the first
file.
Data Monitor
Multi-Point
top of the first program file and searches
down through all of the files.
If the search option cannot find the displayed address, the message NOT
FOUND appears.
17–8
Chapter 17
Entering and Editing Your Program
Searching for Bit Addresses Versus Word Addresses
The following table outlines whether a search finds a bit address or a word
address when searching from the home screen, program monitor, or
multi-point functional areas.
If the address entered or
displayed is a:
bit address
word address
Then the search finds:
only bit instructions referencing that bit.
only word instructions referencing that
word.
The table below shows whether a search finds a bit address or a word address
when searching from the data monitor functional area.
If the address entered or
displayed is a(n):
output, input, bit, or integer
address
timer, counter, or control address
status file address
Then the search finds:
either word or bit instructions, depending
on the current radix: integers and
hexadecimal radixes find word
addresses, while binary radixes find bit
addresses.
any bit instructions or parameters of
word instructions referencing that Timer,
Counter, or Control element.
either word or bit instructions, depending
on the level currently displayed.
17–9
Chapter
18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
This chapter shows you the procedures for:
• changing the program configuration defaults
• accepting your program edits
• changing processor modes
• monitoring your controller
• viewing data table files
• using the multi-point function
• forcing inputs and outputs
Changing the Program
Configuration Defaults
Every default MICRO program is configured with the settings shown in the
table below. The table shows the default program configuration settings and
indicates whether you need to save your program for the configuration
changes to take affect.
Program Configuration
Default Setting
Must Save Program
for Change to Take
Affect
See Page
Program Name
MICRO
Yes
18–2
User Password
No password
No
18–2
Master Password
No password
No
18–2
Run Always
Start-Up Protection
No
No
Yes
Yes
18–5
18–6
Fault Override
No
Yes
18–7
Extended I/O Configuration➀
No
Yes
18–8
STI Setpoint
0 (x 10 ms)
No
18–9
STI Enabled
Yes
Yes
18–10
Watchdog Scan
10 (x 10 ms)
No
18–11
Input Filters
8.00 msec for all groups
Yes
18–12
Analog Config
Channel Enable
Filter Setting
Output Config
All Channels Enabled
60 Hz
Voltage Output
Yes
18–14
Lock Program
No
Yes
18–17
Controller Version
Series A and B discrete
controllers
Yes
18–18
➀
Valid for Series A – C discrete only.
18–1
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
You can change these default settings by accessing the program configuration
menu:
MENU
I
U
3
N A ME
U S E R
E NT
P R OG
P A S S WR D
Naming the Program
You can enter a new name for your program using any combination of the
letters or numbers available on the MicroLogix 1000 HHP keypad (i.e.,
A–F,I,N,O,R,S,T, and 0–9). The maximum length is eight characters.
Follow the steps below to change the program name.
1. Access the program configuration menu.
2. Select the first option, NAME PROG.
ENT
E N T E R
P R OG
N A ME :
3. Type in a new name for your program.
4. Enter the name and return to the previous functional area.
E NT
ES C
ES C
Your new program name is now displayed in the upper left-hand corner.
5. You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect. For
information on accepting edits, see page 18–21.
Setting the User and Master Passwords
Password protection prevents access to a program and prevents changes from
being made to the program. Each program may contain two passwords: the
user password and the master password. The master password overrides the
user password.
You can use passwords in the following combinations:
18–2
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Only User Password Designated
Only Master Password Designated
User Password and Master Password
Designated
You must enter the user password to gain access to the
program.
You do not have to enter the master password to gain
access to the program. A master password is used by itself
to allow access if a user password has been entered.
You must enter either the user password or the master
password to gain access to the program.
Generally, if you are using a number of controllers, each controller is given a
different user password and a master password is applied to all of the
controllers. You can use the master password to change or remove any
password.
Important: There is no password override to defeat the protection. Contact
your Allen-Bradley representative if you are not able to locate
your password.
To enter a user password and/or master password:
1. Access the program configuration menu.
2. Arrow down to the option USER PASSWORD or MASTER PASSWORD and
select it.
ENT
1 or 2 times
N E W
P A S S W R D :
Important: If a password already exists, you are prompted to enter it
before you can enter a new password.
18–3
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
3. Type in a new password using any combination of the numbers available
on the MicroLogix 1000 HHP keypad (i.e., 0–9). You can only use
numeric-based passwords. The maximum length for a password is ten
characters.
4. Enter the new password.
E NT
R E E N T E R
P A S S W R D:
Another screen appears so you can verify the new password.
5. Retype the new password, enter it, and return to the home screen.
E NT
ES C
ES C
Important: To remove password protection from a program, you need to
enter an empty password. To do this, follow the steps shown
above but do not type (or retype) a new password when
prompted. Instead, just press ENT to bypass the prompts.
18–4
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Setting the Run Always Bit
This selection determines what mode the controller will enter at power up
following a power down or an unexpected reset.
When this bit is set to NO, the controller powers up in the mode it was in
prior to losing power, with one exception: If the controller was in one of the
test modes (RCSN or RSSN) when power was removed, the controller enters
RPRG when power is applied. With this setting you must manually clear the
faults that caused the power down.
When this bit is set to YES, the controller automatically clears any major and
minor errors that caused the power down or unexpected reset and then
attempts to enter RRUN mode when power is applied.
!
ATTENTION: Unexpected resets may occur due to
electromagnetic noise, improper grounding, or an internal
controller hardware failure. If an unexpected reset occurs and the
Run Always bit is set, the controller will enter the RRUN mode;
therefore, make sure your application is designed to safely handle
this situation.
To change the bit setting:
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Access the program configuration menu.
3. Arrow down to the option RUN ALWAYS and select it.
E NT
3 times
R U N A L W A Y S
Y E S
N O
4. Select the option YES and return to the home screen.
ENT
ESC
ESC
5. You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect. For
information on accepting edits, see page 18–21.
18–5
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Setting the Start-Up Protection Bit
This selection allows you to check for, and attempt to recover from, major
errors before starting the first scan of your program.
When this bit is set to NO, the controller will fault if a major error occurs
while in RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode.
When this bit is set to YES and power is cycled when the controller starts in
RRUN mode, the controller executes the user-fault routine prior to the
execution of the first program scan. You can then clear the Major Error
Halted bit (S1/13) to resume operation in the RRUN mode.
If user-fault routine does not reset bit S1/13, the fault mode results.
Therefore, program the user-fault routine logic accordingly. When executing
the startup protection fault routine, the Major Error Fault (S6) will contain
the value 0016H.
To change the bit setting:
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Access the program configuration menu.
3. Arrow down to the option START PROTECT and select it.
E NT
4 times
S T A R T
Y E S
P R OT E C T
N O
4. Select the option YES and return to the home screen.
E NT
ESC
ES C
5. You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect. For
information on accepting edits, see page 18–21.
18–6
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Setting the Fault Override Bit
If the controller is faulted while in RRUN mode, this selection determines
whether or not the controller attempts to clear the errors at power up.
When this bit is set to NO, after power is cycled in the controller, you must
manually clear the faults that occurred while in RRUN mode.
When this bit is set to YES, the controller automatically clears any major and
minor errors on power up and then attempts to enter RRUN mode when
power is applied.
To change the bit setting:
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Access the program configuration menu.
3. Arrow down to the option FLT OVERRIDE and select it.
E NT
5 times
F L T
OV E R R I D E
Y E S
N O
4. Select the option YES and return to the home screen.
ENT
ESC
ESC
5. You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect. For
information on accepting edits, see page 18–21.
18–7
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Setting the Extended I/O Configuration Bit
When this bit is set to NO and unused outputs are written to, the controller
will fault. Therefore, this bit must be set to YES if writing to unused outputs.
(For a 16 I/O controller, O/6–O/15 are unused outputs. For a 32 I/O
controller, O/12–O/15 are unused outputs.)
Note: This selection is valid for Series A–C discrete only.
To change the bit setting:
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Access the program configuration menu.
3. Arrow down to the option EXTEND IO CNFG and select it.
E NT
6 times
E X T E N D
Y E S
I O C N F G
N O
4. Select the option YES and return to the home screen.
E NT
ESC
ES C
5. You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect. For
information on accepting edits, see page 18–21.
18–8
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Setting the STI Setpoint
The STI setpoint is the time between successive executions of the STI
subroutine. The allowable range is from 10 ms to 2550 ms (entered in 10 ms
increments). A setpoint of zero disables the setpoint function.
Important: The setpoint value must be a longer time than the execution
time of the STI subroutine file, or a minor error bit is set.
To change the setting:
1. Access the program configuration menu.
2. Arrow up to the option STI SETPOINT and select it.
6 times
ENT
S T I
S E T P OI N T
( x 10
ms )
0
3. Type in a new setpoint.
4. Enter the setpoint and return to the home screen.
ENT
ES C
ES C
18–9
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Setting the STI Enabled Bit
This selection determines if execution of the STI is allowed.
When this bit is set to NO, execution of the STI is not allowed.
When this bit is set to YES, execution of the STI is allowed (provided the STI
setpoint is non-zero). If reset when an interrupt occurs, the STI subroutine
does not execute and the STI Pending bit is set. The STI Timer continues to
run when this bit is disabled. The STE instruction sets this bit. The STD
instruction clears this bit.
To change the bit setting:
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Access the program configuration menu.
3. Arrow up to the option STI ENABLED and select it.
5 times
E NT
S T I
E N A B L E D
Y E S
N O
4. Select the option YES and return to the home screen.
E NT
ESC
ES C
5. You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect. For
information on accepting edits, see page 18–21.
18–10
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Selecting the Watchdog Scan
This byte value contains the number of 10 ms ticks allowed during a program
cycle. The default value is 10 (100 ms), but you can increase this to 255
(2.55 seconds) or decrease it to 1, as your application requires.
Important: If the watchdog value equals the current scan time value, a
watchdog major error will be declared (code 0022).
To change the setting:
1. Access the program configuration menu.
2. Arrow up to the option WATCHDOG SCAN and select it.
4 times
ENT
WA T C H D OG
( x 10
ms )
S C A N
1 0
3. Type in a new scan time.
4. Enter the setpoint and return to the home screen.
ENT
ES C
ES C
18–11
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Setting the Input Filters
This option allows you to select input filter response times for the
1761-L16BWA and 1761-L32BWA micro controllers.
The input filter response time is the time from when the external input
voltage reaches an on or off state to when the micro controller recognizes
that change of state. The higher you set the response time, the longer it takes
for the input state change to reach the micro controller. However, setting
higher response times also provides better filtering of high frequency noise.
I N P U T
F I L T E R S
L OC K P R OG
You can apply a unique input filter setting to each of the three input groups:
• 0 and 1
• 2 and 3
• 4 to x; where x=5 for 10 I/O point controllers, x=9 for 16 I/O point
controllers, x=19 for 32 I/O point controllers, and x=11 for analog
controllers
Important: The input filter response times for the 1761-L16AWA and
1761-L32AWA micro controllers are fixed at 8ms. Selecting
any other input filter response time for these controllers will not
change the response time of the inputs. However, your response
times given by your software will not show the actual times.
Also, the Input Filter Modified Bit (S5/13) will be set when the
controller is in run or test mode.
The minimum and maximum response times associated with each input filter
setting can be found on page A–6.
To change the input filter settings:
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Access the program configuration menu.
3. Arrow up to the option INPUT FILTERS and select it.
3 times
E NT
I N P U T S
I N P U T S
18–12
0
2
A N D
A N D
1
3
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
4. Scroll up or down to the input group you want to change and select it.
The following display appears:
8 . 0 0
1 6 . 0 0
MS E C
MS E C
5. Scroll to the response time you want and select it.
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed, then return to the home screen.
ES C
ES C
ES C
7. You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect. For
information on accepting edits, see page 18–21.
18–13
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Selecting the Filter Setting for Analog Input Channels
This option allows you to select the filter setting for the analog input
channels. The same setting is used for all four channels.
To change the filter setting for analog input channels:
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Access the program configuration menu.
6 times
E NT
3. Arrow up to the option ANALOG CONFIG and select it.
2 times
E NT
Note: The function is only available when the Micro Term is attached to an
analog controller.
C H A N N E L
E N A B L E
F I L T E R S E T T I N G
4. Arrow up to the option FILTER SETTING and select it.
2 times
E NT
Select a filter setting from the following list:
• 10 Hz
• 50 Hz
• 60 Hz
• 250 Hz
5. Scroll to the setting you want and select it.
6. Enter to store the filter setting and return to the ANALOG CONFIG
submenu.
E NT
7. Escape to return to the submenu without changing the filter setting.
ESC
18–14
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Selecting Channel Enable for the Analog Input Channels
This option allows you to enable/disable input channels 0–3 of the analog
controller.
To enable/disable the analog input channels:
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Access the program configuration menu.
6 times
ENT
3. Arrow up to the option ANALOG CONFIG and select it.
2 times
ENT
Note: The function is only available when the Micro Term is attached to an
analog controller.
C H A N N E L
E N A B L E
F I L T E R S E T T I N G
4. Enter to select the option CHANNEL ENABLE.
ENT
5. Arrow left or right to the setting you want for the displayed channel
(enabled or disabled) and select it.
6. Enter to store the selected setting and advance to the next channel screen.
ENT
7. Scroll up/down to move to the previous/next channel screen without
storing the setting.
8. Escape to return to the to the ANALOG CONFIG submenu without storing
the current setting.
ES C
18–15
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Configuring the Analog Output
The analog controller’s output channel can be configured to support either
current or voltage operation.
To configure the analog output:
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Access the program configuration menu.
6 times
E NT
3. Arrow up to the option ANALOG CONFIG and select it.
2 times
E NT
Note: The function is only available when the Micro Term is attached to an
analog controller.
F I L T E R
OU T P U T
S E T T I N G
C ON F I G
4. Arrow up to the option OUTPUT CONFIG and select it.
1 time
E NT
5. Arrow up/down to move between the two settings (0 – 10V or 4 – 20 mA).
6. Enter to store the selected setting and return to the ANALOG CONFIG
submenu.
E NT
7. Escape to return to the to ANALOG CONFIG submenu without storing the
current setting.
ESC
18–16
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Setting the Lock Program Function
This option allows you to prevent proprietary algorithms from being viewed
on the display or from being stored in a memory module. When this function
is set to NO, access to a controller program is unrestricted. This is the default.
When this function is set to YES, access to a controller program is only
permitted when a matching program exists in the memory module. If a
memory module is not present or a matching program does not exist, you can
only perform the following functions:
• change the language
• change the display contrast
• change the controller mode
• view/clear faults
• monitor/edit data
• view the multi-point list
• force I/O and/or clear forces
• clear the controller program
• clear a memory module program
• load a different program
Important: If you lose or delete the memory module’s copy of the program,
you must clear the controller memory and re-enter the program.
18–17
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
To change the function setting:
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Access the program configuration menu.
3. Arrow up to the option LOCK PROG and select it.
2 times
E NT
L OC K
Y E S
P R OG
N O
4. Select the option YES and return to the home screen.
E NT
ESC
ES C
5. You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect. For
information on accepting edits, see the section that follows.
Important: You must cycle power on the MicroLogix 1000 HHP for
the lock to be enforced.
Changing the Version of Controllers that the Program Supports
The CONTROL VERSION option allows your program to access the
communication functions of Series C/D MicroLogix 1000 discrete
controllers.
Important: The control version function is only available when the Micro
Term is attached to a series C/D discrete controller containing a
series A/B program. It is not available when the Micro Term is
attached to an analog controller.
To change the default setting (ML-A/B):
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Access the program configuration menu.
18–18
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
3. Arrow up to the option CONTROL VERSION and select it.
1 time
ENT
S E T
T Y P E
Y E S [ E N T ]
M L - C/D
N O[ E S C ]
4. Press ENT to select support of Series C/D discrete controllers. (Press ESC
to continue support of Series A and B discrete controllers.)
Important: You cannot revert a program back to Series A or B
discrete controller support once you’ve configured it for
Series C/D discrete controller support.
5. Return to the home screen.
ES C
ESC
6. You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect. For
information on accepting edits, see page 18–21.
18–19
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Accepting Your Program Edits
There are two ways you can accept the edits made to your program. Both of
these methods initiate the verification and save of the program. These
methods are:
• using the ACCEPT EDITS option from the menu while in RPRG mode.
• changing from RPRG mode to any run or test mode (RRUN, RCSN, or
RSSN)
Using the ACCEPT EDITS Menu Option
To use this method, select ACCEPT EDITS from the menu as shown below.
Important: A confirmation screen does not appear. Be certain you want to
accept the edits you’ve made to the program before you select
this menu option.
MENU
I
L
2
E NT
2 . AC C E P T
E D I T S
C H EC K I N G. . . . .
F R E E WOR D S : 7 2 8
WR I T I N G. . . . .
When the verification is completed, the screen displays the number of free
user words. If an error message appears, see chapter 19 for definitions of the
program verification error codes and the recommended action(s) you should
take.
Once the program edits are accepted, the menu screen reappears. The
controller remains in RPRG mode.
Changing from RPRG Mode to any Run or Test Mode
For information on accepting edits using this method, see the section below,
Changing Controller Modes.
Changing Controller Modes
18–20
The following section describes the available modes of operation for the
micro controller, how to change between those modes using the
MicroLogix 1000 HHP, and the tasks you can perform in each mode.
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Modes of Operation
All controller modes are considered to be remote, which indicates that the
modes can be changed via the communication channels.
The current mode of the controller is shown in the upper right-hand corner of
the MicroLogix 1000 HHPs home screen. The table below shows the
possible display entries and the corresponding micro controller mode.
Display Entry
Micro Controller Mode
RPRG
Remote Program
RRUN
Remote Run
RCSN
Remote Test – Continuous Scan
RSSN
Remote Test – Single Scan
RSUS
Remote Suspend➀
FLT
Fault➁
➀ The controller only enters suspend mode if you run a program that executes a suspend instruction.
➁ The controller only enters fault mode if, while a program is executing, a fault occurs within the operating
system or the program, or setting S1/13 in any mode. See page 20–11 for information on identifying and
clearing faults.
You can place the micro controller in remote program, run, and test modes
using the mode key. Each of these modes is described below. (Changing
modes is described on page 18–22.)
Remote Program Mode
The remote program mode (RPRG) allows you to modify your program, edit
data, and transfer programs to and from the memory module. In this mode
the processor does not scan or execute the ladder program and all outputs are
de-energized.
Remote Test Mode
While you are in the remote test mode, the controller monitors input devices,
scans or executes the program, and updates the output data files without
energizing output circuits or devices. There are two remote test modes
available:
• Remote Continuous Scan (RCSN) – This test mode is the same as the
remote run mode (described below), except output circuits are not
energized. This allows you to troubleshoot or test your program without
energizing external output devices on a continuous basis.
• Remote Single Scan (RSSN) – In this test mode, the controller executes
a single operating cycle that reads the inputs, executes the program, and
updates all data without energizing output circuits.
Remote Run Mode
While you are in the remote run mode (RRUN), the controller monitors input
devices, scans or executes the program, energizes output devices, and acts on
enabled I/O forces.
18–21
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Changing Remote Modes
The following steps show how to change from RPRG mode to RRUN mode.
Important: When changing from RPRG mode to any other mode of
operation (RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN), any edits that exist in the
current program are accepted automatically. (Edits exist
whenever the mode is flashing on the HHP display.)
1. Enter the mode options.
MODE
O
A C T I V E MOD E : R P RG
RP R G
R R U N
The current mode, RPRG, is shown on the top line. The bottom line
shows the mode options. The arrows to the left and right indicate that
more options are available.
2. Arrow over to RRUN.
A C T I V E MOD E : R P R G
R P R G
R R U N
3. Select RRUN. If edits exist in the current program, the program is
checked and if accepted, the home screen appears. If you get a fault code,
refer to chapter 19 to clear the fault. If an error message appears, see
chapter 19 for a definition of the program verification error code and the
recommended action(s) you should take.
ENT
M I C R O
F R E E : 7 2 8
R R U N
F I L E : 0 2
RRUN now appears in the upper right-hand corner of the screen. Also, the
number of free instruction words is displayed.
18–22
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Tasks You Can Perform
This table shows you what tasks you are allowed to perform in each of the
possible modes.
Activity
cti it
Remote Controller Mode
Program
Test
Run
Fault
Suspend
Change the language.
X
X
X
X
X
Accept program edits.
X
Change the following program
configuration settings:
• Program Name
• Run Always
• Start-Up Protection
• Fault Override
• Extend I/O Configuration
• STI Enabled
• Input Filters
• Lock Program
X
Change the following program
configuration settings:
• User Password
• Master Password
• STI Setpoint
• Watchdog Scan
X
X
X
X
X
Load and store programs using the
memory module.
X
Clear programs in the memory module.
X
X
X
X
X
Clear all forces.
X
X
X
X
X
Clear a program in the controller.
X
X
X
Change the baud rate and contrast.
X
X
X
X
X
Change to a different mode.
X
X
X
Run your program with output points
disabled.
X
X
View faults manually.
X
X
X
X
X
Force inputs and outputs.
X
X
X
X
X
Monitor and edit the program in the
controller (without rung state indication).
X
X
X
Monitor the program, rung state, and
data as it is being executed.
Monitor and edit data files.
X
X
X
X
X
Change the radix.
X
X
X
X
X
Use the search, trace, and multi-point
functions.
X
X
X
X
X
Access the function code table.
X
X
X
X
X
18–23
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Monitoring Your Controller
This section shows you how to monitor the program files and data table files.
If a fault occurs while monitoring your controller, follow the procedure on
page 20–11 to clear the fault.
Monitoring Program Files
Program files contain controller information, the main instruction list
program, and any subroutine programs. Monitoring your program files
allows you to watch the instruction parameters of timers, counters, and
accumulated values change, and to see bits turn on and off as your program
runs.
To monitor a program file, follow these steps:
1. From the home screen or data monitor, access the program monitor
display for the program.
MON
E NT
R
S T A R T
M I C R O
F I L E : 0 2
You return to the last location you were at within the program.
2. Arrow to the program file you want to monitor and move through the
rungs, as described in the table below:
To:
move up and down through a program’s
rungs and program files
move left and right through each rung of a
program. (When the end of a rung is reached
the next rung automatically scrolls into view
as you move the cursor right or left in the
program.)
18–24
Press:
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Using Short Cut Keys
The following table shows the short cut keys you can press to go directly to
the file and rung you want to monitor.
To go to:
Press the following key sequence:
a designated file and
rung (e.g., 5/3)
rung 0 of a designated
file (e.g., 10/0)
MON
file
number
MON
a designated rung in
the current file (e.g., 4)
ORB
+ -
file
number
MO N
rung
number
/
ORB
+ -
rung
number
E NT
ENT
/
E NT
Monitoring Data Table Files
The data table files contain information used in your program. By
monitoring the data table files, you can watch how the data changes as your
program runs. Data table files that you can monitor include:
• Output (O)
• Input (I)
• Status (S)
• Bit (B)
• Timer (T)
• Counter (C)
• Control (R)
• Integer (N)
See page 18–27 for example displays of each data table file.
To monitor a data element used as an instruction parameter, begin at the
program monitor display.
1. Arrow to the instruction parameter you want to monitor.
2. Access the data monitor to view the data table for the current instruction.
MON
ENT
18–25
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
3. Scroll through the bits of individual data files or through the data file
table using the keys described in the table below.
To:
Press:
scroll through the bits of individual data files
scroll through the data file table
Using Short Cut Keys
The following table shows the short cut keys you can press to go directly to
the particular data file type, word address, and bit address you want to
monitor.
To go to:
a designated data file
type, word, and bit
(e.g., N5/3)
MON
data file
type
MON
data file
type
word 0, bit 0 of a
designated data file
type (e.g., N0/0)
MON
data file
type
MON
ORB
word
address
a designated data file
type and word
(e.g., N20)
word 0 of a
designated data file
type (e.g., N0)
18–26
Press the following key sequence:
bit
address
/
+ -
word
address
data file
type
ORB
+ -
E NT
ENT
/
E NT
ENT
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Viewing Data Table Files
This section shows you how to access each type of data table file. It also
describes how to change the radix display for output, input, bit, and integer
data files.
Accessing Data Table Files
An example of how to access each type of data table file is shown below.
The sample screen is provided to show you how each data table file looks.
Output Data Files
To access the output data file for O/5, press the key sequence shown below.
For the output file type, the / character is automatically displayed by the
MicroLogix 1000 HHP.
MON
MODE
O
5
ENT
O / 5
O0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Input Data Files
Access the input data file for I/6 as shown below. For the input file type,
the / character is automatically displayed by the MicroLogix 1000 HHP.
MON
MENU
I
6
ENT
I / 6
I 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Status Data File
To access the math register:
MON
S 13
TRACE
S
1
MA T H
U
3
ENT
R E GL
0 0 0 0 H
18–27
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Bit Data File
Access the bit data file for B/8 as follows:
+
MON
MT-PT
B
ORB
+ -
/
ENT
8
B / 8
B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Timer Data File
To view the Timer Enable Bit (EN) for T0:
MON
NEW
RUNG
T
ANB
0
ORB
E NT
/
+ -
1 time
T 00
E N 1
P 1 0 0 0 0
A
T T 1
8 9 4 6
Counter Data File
To access the Accumulator Value (ACC) for C5:
-
MON
FAULT
FON
C
C 05
P
5
1
CD 0
A
ENT
PRE/LEN
D N 0
– 1
Control Data File
Access the Enable Bit (EN) for R12 as follows:
-
MON
FOF
R
1
L
ORB
2
+ -
E NT
/
6 times
R 12
L
18–28
0
E N 0
P
E U 0
0
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Integer Data File
To access integer data file N3:
SEARCH
N
MON
U
3
ENT
N3
1 0 0
Changing the Radix
Radix refers to the way numeric-based information is displayed. You can
change the radix for output, input, bit, and integer data files. Since the
displays for timer, counter, control, and status data files are pre-formatted,
the option of changing the radix is not available for those data files.
The radix choices are:
• binary (default radix for output, input, and bit files)
• hexadecimal
• decimal (default radix for integer file)
Important: When you exit the data monitor, the display remains in the last
radix you selected.
In the following example the display of an output file is changed from binary
to hexadecimal to decimal and back to binary.
1. Access the output data table file.
MON
MODE
O
ENT
O / 0
O0
F ON
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
The output file defaults to a binary display.
2. Change the display to a hexadecimal radix using the hot key sequence.
FUN
ANB
0
O0
0 F 0 B H
18–29
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
3. Change the display to a decimal radix.
FUN
ANB
0
O0
3 8 5 1
4. Return to the binary radix display.
FUN
ANB
0
O / 0
O0
F ON
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
Important: Notice that the forces only appear in the binary radix.
Using the Multi-Point
Function
The function allows you to monitor up to 16 non-contiguous bits of data at a
time. Since the multi-point list is stored with the program, you can create a
unique list for each micro controller program you create. The multi-point list
stays with the program even if it is edited by programming software.
There are two ways to add addresses to the multi-point list: manually,
entering each address while in the multi-point screen; or automatically, using
short-cut keys from the program monitor or data monitor screens.
You can also change or delete addresses that are already entered into the
multi-point list.
Manually Entering Addresses
Follow the steps below to manually enter an address into the multi-point list.
1. Access the multi-point functional area.
+
MT-PT
B
* * * * *
MP
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
The dashed lines represent open points on the list, where addresses can be
entered. If some addresses have already been entered to your program’s
list, the display will have 0s or 1s in place of some or all of the dashed
lines.
18–30
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
2. Arrow to the position you want to enter an address. This can be any open
point on the list.
3. Bring up a prompt to enter the address.
+
FUN
MT-PT
B
* * * * *
A D D R :
MP
4. Enter the address of the bit you want to monitor. I/3 is shown here as an
example:
MENU
I
U
3
ENT
I / 3
I 0
MP
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 0
The address is added to the multi-point list at the location you selected in
step 2.
Automatically Entering Addresses
You can use short-cut keys to add a bit address to the multi-point list. Follow
the steps below.
1. While in either the program monitor or the data monitor, arrow to the bit
address you want to add to the multi-point list.
2. Add the address to the list.
+
FUN
MT-PT
B
The address is added to the next available open point in the multi-point
functional area.
Important: If the list is full, the message LIST FULL is displayed.
The address is not added to the multi-point list.
3. If you want to verify that the address was added, enter the multi-point
functional area.
+
MT-PT
B
Press ESC to return to the last screen.
18–31
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Changing Multi-Point Addresses
You can change an entry in the multi-point list by writing over the current
address. Follow the steps below.
1. Access the multi-point functional area.
+
MT-PT
B
I / 3
I 0
MP
– – – – – – – 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
2. Arrow to the address you want to write over.
3. Bring up a prompt to enter the address.
+
FUN
MT-PT
B
I / 3
A D D R :
I 0
MP
4. Enter the address of the new bit you want to monitor. B/0 is shown here
as an example:
+
MT-PT
B
ORB
+ -
/
ANB
0
ENT
B / 0
B 0
MP
– – – – – – – 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
The new address is added to the multi-point list at the location you
selected in step 2.
18–32
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Removing Multi-Point Addresses
You can remove individual addresses from the multi-point list or you can
delete the entire list.
Deleting Individual Addresses
Follow these steps to delete a single bit address from the multi-point list:
1. Access the multi-point functional area.
+
MT-PT
B
I / 3
I 0
MP
– – – – – – – 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
2. Arrow to the address you want to delete.
3. Remove the address from the list.
A LL
DEL
A dashed line replaces the bit data, indicating that this is now an open
point on the list.
Deleting All Addresses
Follow these steps to remove all of the addresses currently entered in the
multi-point list:
1. Access the multi-point functional area.
+
MT-PT
B
I / 3
I 0
MP
– – – – – – – 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
2. From any location in the list, press the delete all key sequence.
ALL
FUN
D EL
C L E AR L I S T ?
Y E S [ E N T ]
N O [ E S C ]
18–33
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
3. Confirm the deletion to remove the addresses.
E NT
Press ESC if you do not want to clear the list.
Forcing Inputs and Outputs
The Force function allows you to override the actual status of external input
circuits by forcing external input data file bits On or Off. You can also
override the controller logic and status of output data file bits by forcing
output circuits On or Off.
Important: Forces are always enabled but must be set to be active.
You can set forces while the controller is in any mode.
!
ATTENTION: To avoid possible personal injury and damage to
equipment, investigate the effects on machine operation before
forcing external input data file bits or external output circuits.
!
ATTENTION: Forces override any output control from either
the high-speed counter or from the output image. Forces may
also be applied to the high-speed counter inputs. Forced inputs
are recognized by the high-speed counter (e.g. forcing a count
input On and Off increments the high-speed accumulator).
Forcing External Input Data File Bits
Setting forces on input data file bits affects the input data file and also the
program logic. The effects on the program logic of set forces can be seen
from the program monitor and the data monitor functional areas when in
RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN.
The following is an example program monitor display of instruction I/6 in
rung 0. The display indicates that the controller is in RRUN and no forces
exist on this bit.
R 0 0 0
I / 6
18–34
0
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
To force On the external input file address, follow the steps below.
1. Press the force On key. A confirmation screen appears.
-
FON
C
F OR CE B I T ON ?
Y E S [ E N T ]
N O [ E S C ]
2. Accept the confirmation to force the bit On.
ENT
R 0 0 0
I / 6
F ON
1
This simulates the closing of the external input circuit. However, the
actual open/closed status of the external input circuit no longer affects the
program logic.
For the previous example, the following is now true:
• The instruction state box is filled, indicating that I/6 is true.
• FOn appears in the upper right-hand corner, indicating that the input is
forced On.
• The data value, shown in the lower right-hand corner, is now a 1.
• The controller’s Forced I/O LED is on continuously.
18–35
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Guide to Forcing External Input Data File Bits
The following occurs in the Run or Test mode:
• Forcing of input data file bits and resultant data changes appear in the
data file displays.
• The ladder program is scanned and ladder logic is applied.
• Instruction state boxes are filled for true bit instructions.
The table below shows the keys and key sequences involved with setting and
clearing forces. A confirmation screen appears following each of these.
Key or Key Sequence
Operation
-
If the controller is in RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN, the bit is forced
Off and the data file bit remains forced until the force is
removed.
-
If the controller is in RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN, the bit is forced
On and the data file bit remains forced until the force is
removed.
FOF
R
FON
C
Affects the cursored external input address. It removes the
set force from the data file, if applicable. Other forces are
unaffected.
-
FOF
R
FUN
or
-
FON
C
FUN
MENU
I
5
ENT
Affects all forced external input bit addresses and external
output circuits. It removes set forces from all external input
bit addresses and output circuits.
The displays below show an example of setting a force while in Run or Test
mode.
R 0 0 0
I / 6
18–36
0
Initial conditions.
Bit is Off.
No forces exist.
Bit is On.
No forces exist.
R 0 0 0
I / 6
1
R 0 0 0
I / 6
F ON
1
Bit is On.
Force is On.
R 0 0 0
I / 6
F OF
0
Bit is Off.
Force is Off.
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Forcing an External Output Circuit
A forced external output circuit is independent of the internal logic of the
program and the output data file. Setting forces on output circuits affects
only the output circuit. Set forces do not affect the output data file or the
program logic. The effects of set forces can be seen from the program
monitor and the data monitor functional areas only while in RRUN. (RCSN
and RSSN do not energize output circuits.)
The following is an example program monitor display of instruction O/1 in
rung 1. The display indicates that the controller is in RRUN and no forces
exist.
R 00 1
O/ 1
0
The procedure for forcing external output circuits is the same as forcing
external input data file bits.
1. Press the force On key. A confirmation screen appears.
-
FON
C
F OR CE B I T ON ?
Y E S [ E N T ]
N O [ E S C ]
2. Accept the confirmation to force the bit On.
ENT
R 00 1
O/ 1
F ON
0
For the display shown above, the following is now true:
• Output O/1 is forced On; however, the instruction state box is not filled
because the instruction is not logically true.
• The controller’s output LED is on.
• The controller’s Forced I/O LED is on continuously.
18–37
Chapter 18
After You’ve Entered Your Program
Guide to Forcing External Output Circuits
The following occurs in the Run mode:
• The program is scanned and control logic is applied.
• Instruction state boxes are filled for true bit instructions.
• Controller output LEDs go on and are maintained for all forced external
output circuits.
The table below shows the keys and key sequences involved with setting and
clearing forces. A confirmation screen appears following each of these.
Key or Key Sequence
Operation
-
If the controller is in RRUN, the bit is forced Off and the
output circuit remains forced until the force is removed. The
data file bit is unaffected.
-
If the controller is in RRUN, the bit is forced On and the
output circuit remains forced until the force is removed. The
data file bit is unaffected.
FOF
R
FON
C
Affects the cursored external output circuit. It removes the
set force. Other forces are unaffected.
-
FOF
R
FUN
or
-
FON
C
FUN
MENU
I
5
ENT
Affects all forced external input bit addresses and external
output circuits. It removes set forces from all external input
bit addresses and output circuits.
The displays below show an example of setting a force while in Run mode.
R 00 1
O/ 1
18–38
0
Initial conditions.
Bit is Off.
No forces exist.
Bit is On.
No forces exist.
R 00 1
O/ 1
1
R 00 1
O/ 1
F ON
0
Bit is Off. (Set forces do not
affect ouput data file bits.)
Force is On.
R 00 1
O/ 1
F OF
0
Bit is Off.
Force is Off.
Chapter
19
Common Procedures
Several of the menu items may be required after the control program has
been running. This chapter gives you details about these procedures and
other commonly performed tasks. The common procedures included here
are:
• using a memory module
• clearing a program from the micro controller
• changing the micro controller’s baud rate
• changing the micro controller’s communication defaults
Using a Memory Module
You can use a memory module to store and retrieve programs. To use the
memory module, access the menu and choose the option MEM MODULE.
MENU
I
4
E NT
L OA D P R OGR A M
S T O R E P R O G RA M
The options available for use with the memory module appear. You can
scroll through the options using the down arrow key. These options are:
• load program (from the memory module to the controller)
• store program (from the controller to the memory module)
• clear program (in the memory module)
Each of these options is described in this section. For information on
installing and removing the memory module, see page 4–3.
!
ATTENTION: Always remove power from the HHP before
inserting or removing the memory module. This guards against
possible damage to the module, as well as undesired controller
faults.
19–1
Chapter 19
Common Procedures
Retrieving a Program from a Memory Module
You can retrieve a program from a memory module using the LOAD
PROGRAM option. Follow the steps below.
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Go to the menu and choose the option MEM MODULE.
3. Select LOAD PROGRAM.
L OA D :
P R OGR A M1
P R OGR A M2
A sub-menu appears listing the names of the programs contained on the
memory module. If there are no programs, dashed lines appear in place
of program names. In such a case, since there are no programs to load,
you must press ESC to exit the sub-menu.
4. Arrow down to the program you want to load and select it.
E NT
n times
L OA D :
P R OGR A M3
L OA D I N G. . .
Various screens appear to indicate the program is loading. Once the
program is loaded to the controller, the MicroLogix 1000 HHP returns
you to the home screen. (If the program is password protected, you are
first prompted to enter the password.)
Important: If a program already exists in the controller with the
same name as the one you are about to load, a
confirmation screen appears asking if you want to
overwrite the existing program.
If you do not want to write over the existing program, press
ESC to exit the sub-menu.
If you want to overwrite the existing program, press ENT.
Various screens appear to indicate the program is loading.
Once the program is loaded to the controller, the
MicroLogix 1000 HHP returns you to the home screen. (If
the program is password protected, you are first prompted to
enter the password.)
19–2
Chapter 19
Common Procedures
Storing a Program to a Memory Module
You can store the program you currently have loaded in the controller to a
memory module. Follow the steps below.
1. Put the controller in RPRG mode (if it is not already in that mode).
2. Go to the menu and choose the option MEM MODULE.
3. Select STORE PROGRAM.
S T OR E :
ME MMOD
P R OGR A M1
F R E E : 0 0 8 K
The name of the program and the amount of memory remaining in the
module is shown.
4. Begin the storing process.
E NT
S T OR E :
P R OGR A M1
C H E C K I N G. . .
Important: If edits exist in the program, the program is verified for
errors (saved in the controller) before it is stored in the
memory module. Programs with errors cannot be saved
in the controller or stored in the memory module.
Various screens appear to indicate the program is being stored to the
memory module. Once the program is stored, you are returned to the
memory module sub-menu.
Important: If an OVERWRITE PROG? confirmation screen or a MEM
MOD FULL message appears, see the appropriate section
below.
If an OVERWRITE PROG? Confirmation Screen Appears
If a program already exists in the memory module with the same name as the
one you are about to store, a confirmation screen appears asking if you want
to overwrite the existing program. (The memory module acts like a floppy
disk.)
If you want to write over the existing program, press ENT. Various screens
appear to indicate the program is being stored to the memory module. Once
the program is stored, you are returned to the memory module sub-menu.
19–3
Chapter 19
Common Procedures
If you do not want to write over the existing program, press ESC to exit the
sub-menu. Then if you still want to store the program that is currently
loaded in the controller to a memory module, do one of the following:
• Go to the program configuration menu and rename the current program
(see page 18–2). Then store the program to the memory module under its
new name.
• Replace the memory module that is currently in the MicroLogix 1000
HHP with one that does not have a program with this name. Then store
the program to that memory module.
!
ATTENTION: Always remove power from the HHP before
inserting or removing the memory module. This guards against
possible damage to the module, as well as undesired controller
faults.
If a MEM MOD FULL Message Appears
If the module does not have sufficient memory to store the program, the
message MEM MOD FULL appears. Press any key to remove the message.
You are then returned to the memory module options screen.
If you still want to store the program that is currently loaded in the controller
to a memory module, do one of the following:
• Clear a program(s) from the memory module to make room for the
program that is currently loaded. (See the next section.) Then try storing
the program to the memory module again.
• Replace the memory module that is currently in the MicroLogix 1000
HHP with one that has more memory available. Then store the program
to that memory module.
!
19–4
ATTENTION: Always remove power from the HHP before
inserting or removing the memory module. This guards against
possible damage to the module, as well as undesired controller
faults.
Chapter 19
Common Procedures
Clearing a Program from a Memory Module
You can clear a program currently stored on a memory module by following
the steps below:
1. Go to the menu and choose the option MEM MODULE.
2. Select CLEAR PROGRAM.
C L E A R :
P R OGR A M1
P R OGR A M2
A sub-menu appears listing the names of the programs contained on the
memory module. If there are no programs, dashed lines appear in place
of program names. In such a case, since there are no programs to clear,
you must press ESC to exit the sub-menu.
3. Arrow down to the program you want to clear and select it.
ENT
n times
C L E A R P ROGR A M?
P R OGR A M3 :
0 0 2 K
A confirmation screen appears that shows the name of the program and its
size. If you do not want to clear this program, press ESC to exit the
sub-menu.
4. Clear the program in the memory module.
E NT
C L E A R :
P R OGR A M3
C L E A R I N G. . .
Once the program is cleared from the module, you are returned to the
memory module sub-menu.
19–5
Chapter 19
Common Procedures
Clearing a Program from the
Micro Controller
If you want to create a new program, you need to first clear the current
program from the controller. Follow the steps below.
1. Enter the menu and choose the option CLEAR PROG.
MENU
I
6
E NT
C L E AR P R OGR A M?
Y E S [ E N T ]
N O [ E S C ]
2. Clear the program from the controller.
ENT
C L E A R P R OGR AM?
C L E A R I N G. . . . .
Once the program is cleared, the menu options are displayed. You can
return to the previous functional areas by pressing ESC.
Important: All program configuration settings are returned to their defaults.
See page 18–1 for information of changing the default settings.
Changing the Micro
Controller’s Baud Rate
Follow the steps below to change the controller’s baud rate. (The default is
9600 baud.)
Important: These steps apply only to programs configured for Series A and
B MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers. If you have configured
your program for Series C or later discrete controllers or for
MicroLogix analog controllers, see page 19–7 for directions on
changing the baud rate.
1. Enter the menu and choose the option BAUD RATE.
MENU
I
7
E NT
9 6 0 0
2 4 0 0
The arrow points to the controller’s current baud rate.
19–6
Chapter 19
Common Procedures
2. Arrow down to the desired baud rate and select it.
ENT
n times
The MicroLogix 1000 HHP resets itself to the new baud rate and runs
through the power-up sequence.
Changing the Micro
Controller’s Communication
Defaults
If you configure your program to be compatible with Series C or later
MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers or MicroLogix 1000 analog
controllers, option number 7 in the menu functional area is COMMS (instead of
BAUD RATE). This menu option allows you to change any or all of the
following:
• the controller’s active communication protocol
• the default baud rates for each protocol
• the default node addresses for each protocol
The steps below walk you through the five sub-menus of the COMMS option.
Press ESC at any time to exit the sub-menus.
1. Enter the menu and choose the option COMMS. The first screen that
appears is the Main Protocol sub-menu, as shown below.
MENU
I
7
MA I N
D F 1
E NT
P R O T O COL
D H 4 8 5
Use this sub-menu to specify which protocol the controller should attempt
to establish communication with first. Although the MicroLogix 1000
controller will automatically find which protocol is active (DF1
full-duplex or DH-485) and establish communication accordingly, you
can shorten the connection time by choosing the appropriate main
protocol.
19–7
Chapter 19
Common Procedures
2. The default setting for the main protocol is DF1.
– To accept the default setting (DF1) , press ENT.
– To change the default setting, arrow right to select DH-485 and then
press ENT.
The arrow points to the controller’s current DF1 baud rate.
9 6 0 0
2 4 0 0
D F 1
D F 1
3. Arrow down to the desired DF1 baud rate and select it.
E NT
n times
4. The DF1 node address sub-menu appears next.
D F 1
N OD E
A D D R : 1
0 – 2 5 4
– To accept the default setting (1), press ENT.
– To change the default setting, delete the 1 by pressing DEL, type in the
new number, and then press ENT.
The arrow points to the controller’s current DH-485 baud rate.
1 9 2 0 0
9 6 0 0
D H 4 8 5
D H 4 8 5
5. Arrow down to the desired DH-485 baud rate and select it.
E NT
n times
19–8
Chapter 19
Common Procedures
6. The DH-485 node address sub-menu appears next.
D H 4 8 5
N OD E
A D D R : 1
1 – 3 1
– To accept the default setting (1), press ENT.
– To change the default setting, delete the 1 by pressing DEL, type in the
new number, and then press ENT.
A P P L Y COMMS
Y E S [ E N T ]
N O [ E S C ]
7. Accept the communication settings.
ENT
A P P L Y I N G C OMMS
R E S E T T I N G U NI T
The MicroLogix 1000 HHP resets itself to the new communication settings
and runs through the power-up sequence.
Note: You cannot use the MicroLogix 1000 HHP to select or configure the
DF1 half-duplex slave protocol for Series D discrete or Series A
analog MicroLogix 1000 controllers.
19–9
Chapter
20
Troubleshooting Your System
This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller. Topics include:
• understanding the controller LED status
• identifying HHP errors
• using the trace feature
• controller error recovery model
• identifying controller faults
• recovering your work
• calling Allen-Bradley for assistance
Understanding the Controller
LED Status
Between the time you apply power to the controller and the time it has to
establish communication with a connected programming device, the only
form of communication between you and the controller is through the LEDs.
When Operating Normally
When power is applied, only the power LED turns on and remains on, as
shown on the left in the figure below. This is part of the normal power up
sequence.
When the controller is placed in RRUN mode, the run LED also turns on and
remains on, as shown on the right in the figure below. If a force exists, the
force LED is on as well.
When powered up:
Refer to the following key to determine
the status of the LED indicators:
Indicates the LED is OFF.
Indicates the LED is ON.
Indicates the LED is FLASHING.
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
Status of LED does not matter.
POWER
RUN
FAULT
FORCE
When placed in RRUN:
POWER
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
RUN
FAULT
FORCE
20–1
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
When an Error Exists
If an error exists within the controller, the controller LEDs operate as
described in the following tables.
If the LEDs indicate:
The
Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
POWER
RUN
FAULT
FORCE
No input
power
er orr
power supply
error
No Line Power
Verify proper line voltage and connections to the
controller.
Power Supply Overloaded
This problem can occur intermittently if power
supply is overloaded when output loading and
temperature varies.
If the LEDs indicate:
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
The
Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
POWER
RUN
FAULT
Hardware
fa
fault
FORCE
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Recommended Action
Controller Memory Error
Cycle power. Contact your local Allen-Bradley
representative if the error persists.
Loose Wiring
Verify connections to the controller.
If the LEDs indicate:
The
Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause
POWER
ÉÉ
RUN
FAULT
FORCE
Refer to the following key to determine
the status of the LED indicators:
Indicates the LED is OFF.
Indicates the LED is ON.
Indicates the LED is FLASHING.
Status of LED does not matter.
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
20–2
Application
fault
Hardware/Software Major
Fault Detected
Recommended Action
1. Monitor Status File Word S6 for major error
code.
2. Remove hardware/software condition causing
fault.
3. Use the hot key sequence FAULT-DEL to
clear the fault.
4. Attempt to enter RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN
mode. If unsuccessful, repeat recommended
action steps above or contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor.
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Identifying HHP Errors
When an error occurs while accepting edits, the MicroLogix 1000 HHP
displays an error message screen as shown here:
Label
Error Code (Hex)
Program Verification Error Location
(file and rung numbers)
E R R : x x x x H f f / r r r
<
me s s a g e
>
Advisory Message
Use the tables in this section to find the error code and the associated
recommended action(s) you should take to clear the error. The tables are
grouped by error type as described in the table below.
If the error code begins with a
then the error type is
0
Hardware
1, 5, 6, or F
Communication
2
Miscellaneous
3
Program Verification
Hardware Error Messages
Error Code
(Hex)
Description
Recommended Action
HARDWARE
FAILURE
The HHP encountered a
ROM, RAM, or keypad
failure.
Disconnect the HHP from the
micro controller, then reconnect
it. If the error persists, record
the error code and contact your
local
ca Allen-Bradley
e ra e
representative.
0004
NO CONTROLLER
The HHP cannot
establish a
communication link to
the micro controller.
Disconnect the HHP from the
micro controller, then reconnect
it. If the error persists, record
the error code and contact your
local Allen-Bradley
representative.
0006
MEM MOD MISSING
The HHP cannot
establish a connection to
the memory module.
Disconnect the HHP from the
micro controller. Then either
reconnect it, or replace the
memory module in the HHP
with a new one.
0001
Advisory Message
0002
0003
20–3
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Communication Error Messages
Error Code
(Hex)
20–4
Advisory Message
Description
Recommended Action
1000
ILLEGAL COMMAND
A communication error
has occurred between
the HHP and the micro
controller.
Disconnect the HHP from the
micro controller, then reconnect
it. If the error persists, record
the error code and contact your
local Allen-Bradley
representative.
5000
ILLEGAL ADDRESS
During download the
HHP has written data
beyond a file boundary in
the micro controller.
Disconnect the HHP from the
micro controller, then reconnect
it. If the error persists, record
the error code and contact your
local Allen-Bradley
representative.
6000
NOT ALLOWED
A communication error
has occurred between
the HHP and the micro
controller.
Disconnect the HHP from the
micro controller, then reconnect
it. If the error persists, record
the error code and contact your
local Allen-Bradley
representative.
F00B
ACCESS DENIED
The micro controller
must be in program
mode.
Use the HHP to change the
controller’s mode to RPRG and
try the operation again.
F00C
NOT AVAILABLE
The micro controller
must be in program
mode.
Use the HHP to change the
controller’s mode to RPRG and
try the operation again.
F01A
FILE OPEN
A communication error
occurred between the
HHP and the micro
controller.
Disconnect the HHP from the
micro controller, then reconnect
it. If the error persists, record
the error code and contact your
local Allen-Bradley
representative.
F01B
PROGRAM OWNED
A communication error
occurred between the
HHP and the micro
controller.
Disconnect the HHP from the
micro controller, then reconnect
it. If the error persists, record
the error code and contact your
local Allen-Bradley
representative.
all other
1xxx, 5xxx,
6xxx, or
Fxxx codes
CONTROLLER
ERROR
A communication error
occurred between the
HHP and the micro
controller.
Disconnect the HHP from the
micro controller, then reconnect
it. If the error persists, record
the error code and contact your
local Allen-Bradley
representative.
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Miscellaneous Error Messages
Error Code
(Hex)
Advisory Message
Description
Recommended Action
2000
NO RESPONSE
A communication error
occurred between the
HHP and the micro
controller.
Disconnect the HHP from the
micro controller, then reconnect
it. If the error persists, record
the error code and contact your
local Allen-Bradley
representative.
2001
INVALID DEVICE
The device that the HHP
is attached to is telling
the HHP that it is not a
micro controller.
Make sure your HHP is
connected to a micro controller.
If the error persists, record the
error code and contact your
local Allen-Bradley
representative.
Program Verification Error Messages
Error Code
(Hex)
Advisory Message
Description
Recommended Action
3000
MISSING SOR
The rung does not begin
with a start of rung
instruction.
Add a start of rung instruction to
the beginning of the rung using
the NEW RUNG key.
3001
INVALID INPUT
The first input instruction
on the rung is not a load
instruction (e.g., LD, LDI,
LD EQU).
Change the input instruction
immediately after the Start of
Rung instruction to a load
instruction.
3002
MISSING OUTPUT
The rung does not end
with an output
instruction.
Add the appropriate output
instruction to the end of the
rung.
3003
INVALID RUNG
An instruction or
instruction block needs
an ANB or ORB to
properly join it with the
previous input logic on
the rung.
Check that all instructions or
instruction blocks have been
properly joined to the previous
input logic on the rung with an
ANB or ORB.
3004
INVALID RUNG
An MPP is missing from
the rung.
Add an MPP at the proper
location.
3005
INVALID ORB
An ORB instruction is
illegally positioned on the
rung.
Move the ORB to the correct
location on the rung or remove
it if the application does not
require it.
3006
INVALID ANB
An ANB instruction is
illegally positioned on the
rung.
Move the ANB to the correct
location on the rung or remove
it if the application does not
require it.
3007
INVALID ORB, OR
The position of an OR or
ORB instruction after an
MPS, MRD, or MPP
instruction has created
an illegal rung.
Review and rewrite the
instruction list logic. Two rungs
may be required to implement
the desired functionality.
20–5
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Error Code
(Hex)
20–6
Advisory Message
Description
Recommended Action
3008
INVALID MRD, MPP
MRD and/or MPP
instructions are not
preceded by an output
instruction.
Ensure that each MRD and
MPP instruction is preceded by
an output instruction or remove
them if the application does not
require them.
3009
INVALID MRD, MPS
An MRD instruction is
used illegally.
Ensure that the MRD instruction
is preceded by an MPS
instruction or remove the MRD
if the application does not
require it.
300A
INVALID MPP, MPS
An MPP instruction is
used illegally.
Ensure that the MPP instruction
is preceded by an MPS
instruction or remove the MPP if
the application does not require
it.
300B
INVALID LDT
The LDT instruction is
used illegally.
Ensure that the LDT is followed
by an OR or ORB instruction on
the rung or remove the LDT if
the application does not require
it.
300C
INVALID HSC
An instruction is using
the data table address
C0 when an HSC
instruction is present in
the program.
Change the instruction’s
address to something other
than C0 or remove the HSC
instruction if the application
does not require it.
300D
INVALID SBR, INT
The SBR or INT
instruction is used
illegally.
Move the SBR or INT
instruction so it is the first
instruction on the first rung of
the program file or remove the
instruction if the application
does not require it.
300E
INVALID LBL
The LBL instruction is
used illegally.
Move the LBL instruction so it is
the first instruction on the rung
or remove the instruction if the
application does not require it.
300F
INVALID FOR FILE
An SBR, INT, or RET
instruction exists in
program file 2.
Move the instruction to the
correct file or remove it if the
application does not require it.
3010
INVALID OSR
An OSR instruction is
illegally positioned on the
rung.
Move the instruction to a correct
position on the rung or remove
the instruction if the application
does not require it.
3011
INVALID COMPARE
A comparison instruction
has a constant value as
the first operand.
Change the first operand of the
instruction so it is not a constant
value or remove the instruction
if the application does not
require it.
3012
INVALID ADDRESS
An instruction is
referencing an address
outside of the data table
space.
Ensure that the operands for
each instruction are within the
micro controller’s data file
space.
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Error Code
(Hex)
Advisory Message
Description
Recommended Action
3013
INVALID ADDRESS
An instruction is
referencing a status file
address outside of the
data table space.
Ensure that the status file
operands for each instruction
are within the micro controller’s
data file space.
3014
BRANCH NEST ERR
The program’s structure
exceeds the allowable
number of nested
branches (4).
Ensure that the program
contains no more than 4 nested
MPS instructions at a time, as
each MPS counts toward a
nested branch.
3015
BRANCH LEVEL
ERR
The program’s structure
exceeds the allowable
number of levels per
nested branch (75).
Ensure that for each MPS/MPP
pair, there are no more than 73
MRDs within them.
3016
TOO MANY INST
A rung contains more
than the allowable
number of instructions
(128).
Redesign the program file so
there are no more than 128
instructions on each rung.
3017
TOO MANY HSC’S
The program contains
more than the allowable
number of HSC
instructions (1).
Remove the extra HSC
instructions so only one exists
in the program or divide the
program so that each HSC
instruction is in a separate
program.
3018
UNMATCHED MCR’S
The program is missing
either a starting or
ending MCR instruction.
Ensure that the program has a
starting and an ending MCR
instruction or remove the MCR
instruction if the application
does not require it.
3019
INVALID MCR
The program’s ending
MCR is illegally placed
on a rung that contains
other instructions.
Rearrange the logic so the
MCR instruction is the only
instruction on a rung.
301A
INVALID FILE
The file number specified
by a JSR instruction is
outside the allowable
range of program files
(3–15).
Specify a program file between
3 and 15.
301B
INVALID RES
A RES instruction resets
a timer address
previously used by a
TOF instructions.
Change the RES or TOF
address or remove one if the
application does not require it.
301C
INVALID TOF
A TOF instruction
specifies a timer address
previously reset by a
RES instruction.
Change the TOF or RES
address or remove one if the
application does not require it.
301D
INVALID LBL
The same label number
is specified by more than
one LBL instruction.
Give the LBL instruction a
unique label number or remove
the instruction if the application
does not require it.
20–7
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Error Code
(Hex)
Using the Trace Feature
Advisory Message
Description
Recommended Action
301E
INVALID JMP
A JMP instruction
specifies a label number
for which no
corresponding LBL
instruction exists.
Ensure that a valid LBL
instruction and label number
exist in the program or remove
the instruction if the application
does not require it.
301F
INVALID ADDRESS
A file instruction exceeds
the allowable data file
size.
Ensure that the address of the
file plus the length does not go
beyond the data file for the
address specified or remove
the instruction if the application
does not require it.
3023
INVALID W/O HSC
The program does not
contain an HSC
instruction, yet has an
OUT instruction with the
address of C0/UA.
Either change the address of
the OUT instruction, add an
HSC instruction or remove the
OUT instruction if the
application does not require it.
3024
INVALID ADDRESS
A bit specific to the HSC
instruction is used
illegally in the program.
Make sure that the bits specific
to the HSC operation are from
data file address C0. Also, if
any other instructions have bit
references from data file
address C0, change those
references to a different data
file.
3Fxx
INTERNAL ERROR
An error has occurred
within the HHP.
Record the error code and
contact your local Allen-Bradley
representative.
The trace feature helps you locate faulty inputs that prevent outputs from
turning on or off as they should. The trace feature will find the following:
• output coils (OUT, RST, and SET)
• timer, counter, and control instructions (BSL, BSR, CTD, CTU, FFL,
FFU, HSC, HSD, HSE, HSL, LFL, LFU, RAC, RES, RTO, SQC, SQL,
SQO, TOF, TON)
For output coils and timer, counter, and control instructions, the trace begins
from the current location in the program and continues to the end of the
program. For all other instructions, the trace begins from the top of the first
program file and traces down through all of the files.
If the address you are tracing is found, you can invoke the trace feature once
again to search for other instances of the same address. For all instructions,
the trace begins from the current location in the program and continues to the
end of the program. When the last program file is reached, the trace feature
does not wrap around to the first program file.
If at any time the trace feature cannot find the address, the message NOT
FOUND is displayed.
You can execute trace for either an address that you enter or an address that
is displayed.
20–8
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Tracing an Address You Enter
To enter an address and trace it, press the key sequence shown here:
MON
address
TRACE
S
This type of tracing method can be invoked from any of the four functional
areas:
• home screen
• program monitor
• data monitor
• multi-point
Tracing an Address That is Displayed
You can trace the address that is currently displayed on the MicroLogix 1000
HHP by pressing the key shown here:
TRACE
S
You can invoke trace using this method from the following functional areas:
• program monitor
• data monitor
• multi-point
Tracing Bit Addresses Versus Word Addresses
The following table outlines whether the trace feature finds a bit address or a
word address when invoked from any of the functional areas.
If the address entered or displayed is a(n):
Then the trace finds:
output, bit, integer, or status file address
only bit instructions referencing
that bit. To invoke the trace
feature, the current radix must be
binary.
timer, counter, or control address
any bit instructions or parameters
of word instructions referencing
that Timer, Counter or Control
element
20–9
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Controller Error Recovery
Model
Use the following error recovery model to help you diagnose software and
hardware problems in the micro controller. The model provides common
questions you might ask to help troubleshoot your system. Refer to the
recommended pages within the model and to S6 of the status file on page
B–8 for further help.
Start
Identify the error code
and description.
No
Is the error hardware
related?
Yes
Refer to appendix B for
probable cause and
recommended action.
Are the wire
connections tight?
No
Tighten wire
connections.
Yes
Clear fault using either
function key F9 or F10.
Is the Power
LED On?
No
Does the
No
controller have power
supplied?
Yes
Yes
Place the controller in
RPRG mode.
Is the Run LED On
constantly?
Check power.
No
Refer to page 20–2
for probable cause and
recommended action.
Yes
Is the Fault LED On?
Correct the condition
causing the fault.
Yes
Return controller to
RRUN, RCSN, or,
RSSN mode.
Test and verify system
operation.
20–10
Refer to page 20–2
for probable cause and
recommended action.
No
Is an input or
No
output LED showing
proper status?
Yes
Refer to page 20–2
for probable cause and
recommended action.
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Identifying Controller Faults
While a program is executing, a fault may occur within the operating system
or your program. When a fault occurs, you have various options to
determine what the fault is and how to correct it. This section describes how
to clear faults and provides a list of possible advisory messages with
recommended corrective actions.
Clearing Controller Faults
There are three ways you can clear a fault:
• manually, by viewing the fault display
• automatically, using the Fault Override bit (S1/8) or the Run Always bit
(S1/12) and cycling power
• implementing the user-fault routine and clearing bit S1/13 within it
Manually Clearing Faults
You can manually view and clear a fault by accessing the fault display.
Label
Fault Code (Hex)
F L T :
x x x x H
<
me s s a g e
>
Advisory Message
Follow these steps to manually clear a fault:
1. From any of the functional areas, access the fault display.
FAULT
PRE/LEN
F L T :
0 0 2 0 H
MI N OR E RR A T
E N D
If you press this key and a fault does not exist, the message NO MAJOR
FAULT is displayed. Press any key to return to the previous screen.
20–11
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
2. Clear the fault.
ALL
D EL
F L T :
0 0 2 0 H
C L E A R I N G. . . . .
After the fault is cleared, the HHP returns to the screen that was displayed
prior to accessing the fault display.
Automatically Clearing Faults
You can automatically clear a fault when cycling power to the controller by
setting either one or both of the following status bits in the status file:
• Fault Override at Powerup bit (S1/8)
• Run Always bit (S1/12)
!
ATTENTION: Clearing a fault using the Run Always bit
(S1/12) causes the controller to immediately enter the RRUN
mode. Make sure you fully understand the use of this bit before
incorporating it into your program. Refer to page B–4 for more
information. Also refer to chapter 5 for information pertaining to
retentive data.
Refer to appendix B for more information on status bits.
Important: You can declare your own application-specific major fault by
writing your own unique value to S6 and then setting bit S1/13
to prevent reusing system defined codes. The recommended
values for user defined faults is FF00 to FF0F.
Using the Fault Routine
The occurrence of recoverable or non-recoverable user faults causes file 3 to
be executed. If the fault is recoverable, the subroutine can be used to correct
the problem and clear the fault bit S1/13. The controller then continues in
the RRUN mode.
The subroutine does not execute for non-user faults. The user-fault routine is
discussed in chapter 7.
20–12
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Controller Fault Messages
This section contains controller fault messages that the MicroLogix 1000
HHP may display during operation. Refer to page B–9 for a listing of
recoverable and non-recoverable faults.
Fault Code
(Hex)
Advisory Message
Description
Recommended Action
0001
DEFAULT LOADED
The default program is loaded to
the controller memory. This
occurs:
on power up if the power down
occurred in the middle of a
program save or a memory
module load
if the user program is corrupt at
power up
1. Re-save or re-load the
program and enter the
RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN
mode.
2. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley representative
if the error persists.
0002
UNEXPECTED RESET
The controller was unexpectedly
reset due to a noisy environment
or internal hardware failure. If the
user program previously saved in
the controller or loaded from the
memory module is valid, the data
previously saved in the controller
or loaded from the memory module
with the program is used. The
Retentive Data Lost Bit (S5/8) is
set. If the user program is invalid,
the default program is loaded.
1. Refer to proper grounding
guidelines in chapter 2.
2. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley representative
if the error persists.
0003
PROG CORRUPTED
While power cycling to your
controller, a noise problem may
have occurred. The user program
is corrupt and the default program
is loaded.
1. Try cycling power again.
Your program may be valid,
but retentive data is lost.
2. Re-save or re-load your
program.
3. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley representative
if the error persists.
0004
PROGRAM CHANGED
While the controller was in the
RUN mode or any test mode, the
ROM or RAM became corrupt. If
the user program is valid, the
program and initial data previously
saved in the controller or loaded
from the memory module is used
and the Retentive Data Lost Bit
(S5/8) is set. If the user program is
invalid, error 0003 occurs.
1. Cycle power on your unit.
2. Re-save or re-load your
program and re-initialize any
necessary data.
3. Start up your system.
4. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley representative
if the error persists.
0005
RETENT DATA LOST
The data files (input, output, timer,
counter, integer, binary, control,
and status) are corrupt.
1. Cycle power on your unit.
2. Re-save or re-load your
program and re-initialize any
necessary data.
3. Start up your system.
4. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley representative
if the error persists.
20–13
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Fault Code
(Hex)
20–14
Advisory Message
Description
Recommended Action
0008
INTERNAL ERROR
The controller software has
detected an invalid condition within
the hardware or software after
completing power up processing
(after the first 2 seconds of
operation).
1. Cycle power on your unit.
2. Re-save or re-load your
program and re-initialize any
necessary data.
3. Start up your system.
4. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley representative
if the error persists.
0009
INTERNAL ERROR
The controller software has
detected an invalid condition within
the hardware during power up
processing (within the first 2
seconds of operation).
1. Cycle power on your unit.
2. Re-save or re-load your
program and re-initialize any
necessary data.
3. Start up your system.
4. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley representative
if the error persists.
0010
WRONG PROC REV
The program in the controller is not
configured for a micro controller.
If you want to use a micro
controller with the program,
reconfigure your controller
using programming software,
or clear the program in the
controller with the HHP.
0016
START AFTER P.F.
The system has powered up in the
RRUN mode. Bit S1/13 is set and
the user-fault routine is run before
beginning the first scan of the
program.
Either reset bit S1/9 if this is
consistent with your application
requirements, and change the
mode back to RRUN, or clear
S1/13, the major fault bit.
0018
INCOMPAT PROGRAM
An incompatible program is in the
controller. Either the program does
not have the correct number of
files or it does not have the correct
size data files. The default
program is loaded.
If you want to use a micro
controller with the program,
reconfigure your controller
using programming software,
or clear the program in the
controller with the HHP.
0020
MINOR ERR AT END
A minor fault bit (bits 0–7) in S5
was set at the end of scan.
Correct the condition that
caused the error, then clear the
fault using the FAULT - DEL
keys and enter the RRUN,
RCSN, or RSSN mode.
0022
WATCHDOG TIMEOUT
The program scan time exceeded
the watchdog timeout value.
Verify if the program is caught
in a loop and correct the
problem, or increase the
watchdog timeout value using
the program configuration
menu selection.
0024
INVALID STI TIME
An invalid STI interval exists (not
between 0 and 255).
Set the STI interval between
the values of 0 and 255 using
the program configuration
menu selection.
0025
TOO MANY JSR’S
There are more than 3 subroutines
nested in the STI subroutine
(file 5).
Correct the user program to
meet the requirements and
restrictions for the JSR
instruction, then re-enter
RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode.
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Fault Code
(Hex)
Advisory Message
Description
Recommended Action
0027
TOO MANY JSR’S
There are more than three
subroutines nested in the fault
routine (file 3).
Correct the user program to
meet the requirements and
restrictions for the JSR
instruction, then re-enter
RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode.
002A
INDEX TOO LARGE
The program is referencing
through indexed addressing an
element beyond a file boundary.
Correct the user program to not
index beyond file boundaries.
002B
TOO MANY JSR’S
There are more than three
subroutines nested in the
high-speed counter routine (file 4).
Correct the user program to
meet the requirements and
restrictions for the JSR
instruction, then re-enter
RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode.
0030
SUB NEST DEPTH
There are more than eight
subroutines nested in the main
program file (file 2).
Correct the user program to
meet the requirements and
restrictions for the main
program file, then re-enter
RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode.
0031
UNSUPPORTED INST
The program contains an
instruction(s) that is not supported
by the micro controller. For
example MSG, SVC, or PID.
Modify the program so that all
instructions are supported by
the controller, then reload the
program and enter the
RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode.
0032
INVALID SQx LEN
A sequencer instruction
length/position parameter points
past the end of a data file.
Correct the program to ensure
that the length and position
parameters do not point past
the data file. Then re-enter
RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN mode.
0033
INVALID BSx LEN
The length parameter of a BSL,
BSR, FFL, FFU, LFL, or LFU
instruction points past the end of a
data file.
Correct the program to ensure
that the length parameter does
not point past the data file.
Reload the program and enter
the RRUN, RCSN, or RSSN
mode.
0034
INVALID TIMER
A negative value was loaded to a
timer preset or accumulator.
If the program is moving values
to the accumulator or preset
word of a timer, make certain
these values are not negative.
Correct the program and
re-enter RRUN, RCSN, or
RSSN mode.
0035
INVALID FOR FILE
The program contains a Temporary
End (TND) instruction in file 3, 4, or
5 when it is being used as an
interrupt subroutine.
Correct the program and
re-enter RRUN, RCSN, or
RSSN mode.
0037
INVALID HSC PRE
Either a zero (0) or a negative high
preset was loaded to counter (C0)
when the HSC was an Up counter
or the high preset was lower than
or equal to the low preset when the
HSC was a Bidirectional counter.
1. Check to make sure the
presets are valid.
2. Correct the program and
re-enter RRUN, RCSN, or
RSSN mode.
20–15
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting Your System
Fault Code
(Hex)
Advisory Message
Description
Recommended Action
0038
RET IN FILE 2
A RET instruction is in the main
program file (file 2).
Remove the RET instruction
and re-enter RRUN, RCSN, or
RSSN mode.
0040
OUTPUT VERIFY WR
When outputs were written and
read back by the controller, the
read failed. This may have been
caused by noise.
1. Refer to proper grounding
guidelines in chapter 2.
2. Start up your system.
3. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley representative
if the error persists.
0041➀
EXTRA OUTPUT SET
An extra output bit was set when
the Extend I/O Configuration bit in
the program configuration menu
was reset. For 16-point controllers
this includes bits 6–15. For
32-point controllers this includes
bits 12–15.
1. Set the Extend I/O bit or
change your application to
prevent these bits from
being turned on.
2. Correct the program and
re-enter the RRUN, RCSN,
or RSSN mode.
➀
Recovering Your Work
Valid for Series A – C discrete only.
If the MicroLogix 1000 HHP is disconnected or power failure occurs, the
HHP retains any edits you made to the program before power was removed.
To recover your program with edits, reconnect the HHP to the controller you
were using when power was lost.
Important: If you connect the MicroLogix 1000 HHP to a controller other
than the one you were using while performing program edits,
you will lose your edits.
At the end of the power-up sequence the HHP displays the screen shown
below.
Program name
M I C R O
E D I T S
E X I S T
This screen indicates that edits have been made to the program but have not
yet been saved.
Important: If power is removed for more than three days, the retained
program edits may be lost.
Calling Allen-Bradley for
Assistance
20–16
If you need to contact Allen-Bradley or your local distributor for assistance,
it is helpful to obtain the following (prior to calling):
• controller type, series letter, firmware (FRN) number (see label on side of
controller)
• controller LED status
• controller error codes (found in S6 of status file)
• revision of programming device (on power sequence display of the HHP)
Appendix
A
Hardware Reference
This appendix lists the MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller and
MicroLogix 1000 HHP:
• specifications
• dimensions
• accessories and replacement parts
For AIC+ specifications, see the Advanced Interface Converter User Manual,
Publication 1761-6.4. For DNI specifications, see the DeviceNet Interface
User Manual, Publication 1761-6.5.
Controller Specifications
Controller Types
Catalog Number
Description
1761-L16AWA
10 pt. ac input, 6 pt. relay output, ac power supply controller
1761-L32AWA
20 pt. ac input, 12 pt. relay output, ac power supply controller
1761-L10BWA
12 pt. ac input, 4 pt. analog input, 8 pt. relay output, 1 pt. analog output, ac
power supply controller
6 pt. dc input, 4 pt. relay output, ac power supply controller
1761-L16BWA
10 pt. dc input, 6 pt. relay output, ac power supply controller
1761-L20AWA-5A
1761-L32BWA
12 pt. dc input, 4 pt. analog input, 8 pt. relay output, 1 pt. analog output, ac
power supply controller
20 pt. dc input, 12 pt. relay output, ac power supply controller
1761-L10BWB
6 pt. dc input, 4 pt. relay output, dc power supply controller
1761-L16BWB
10 pt. dc input, 6 pt. relay output, dc power supply controller
1761-L20BWA-5A
1761-L32BWB
12 pt. dc input, 4 pt. analog input, 8 pt. relay output, 1 pt. analog output, dc
power supply controller
20 pt. dc input, 12 pt. relay output, dc power supply controller
1761-L16BBB
10 pt. dc input, 4 pt. FET and 2 pt. relay outputs, dc power supply controller
1761-L32BBB
20 pt. dc input, 10 pt. FET and 2 pt. relay outputs, dc power supply controller
1761-L32AAA
20 pt. ac input, 10 pt. triac and 2 pt. relay outputs, ac power supply controller
1761-L20BWB-5A
A–1
Appendix A
Hardware Reference
General Specifications
Description:
cription:
Specification: 1761-L
16AWA
20AWA-5A
32AWA
10BWA
16BWA
20BWA-5A
Memory Size and
Type
1 K EEPROM (approximately 737 instruction words: 437 data words)
Power Supply
Voltage
85–264V ac, 47-63 Hz
Power
Supply
Usage
32BWA
32AAA
16BBB
10BWB
16BWB
20BWB-5A
32BWB
7W
32BBB
20.4–26.4V dc
Not Applicable
120V ac
15 VA
20 VA
19 VA
24 VA
26 VA
30 VA
29 VA
16 VA
240V ac
21 VA
27 VA
25 VA
32 VA
33 VA
38 VA
36 VA
22 VA
24V dc
Not Applicable
5W
10W
Power Supply
Maximum Inrush
➀
Current
30A for 8 ms
30A for 4 ms
50A for 4 ms 30A for 4 ms
24V dc Sensor
Power (V dc at mA)
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
200 mA
200 µF
Max Capacitive
Load (User 24V dc)
Power Cycles
50,000 minimum
Operating Temp.
Horizontal mounting: 0°C to +55°C (+32°F to +131°F) for horizontal mounting
➁
Vertical mounting : 0°C to +45°C (+32°F to +113°F) for discrete; 0°C to +40°C (+32°F to +113°F) for analog
Storage Temp.
–40°C to +85°C (–40°F to +185°F)
Operating Humidity
5 to 95% noncondensing
Vibration
Operating: 5 Hz to 2k Hz, 0.381 mm (0.015 in.) peak to peak/2.5g panel mounted, 1hr per axis
Non-operating: 5 Hz to 2k Hz, 0.762 mm (0.030 in.) peak to peak/5g, 1hr per axis
Shock
➂
➃
➄
Operating: 10g peak acceleration (7.5g DIN rail mounted) (11±1 ms duration) 3 times each direction, each axis
Non-operating: 20g peak acceleration (11±1 ms duration), 3 times each direction, each axis
Agency Certification
(when product or
packaging is
marked)
•C-UL Class I, Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D certified
•UL listed (Class I, Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D certified)
•CE marked for all applicable directives
Terminal Screw
Torque
0.9 N-m maximum (8.0 in.-lbs)
Electrostatic
Discharge
IEC801-2 @ 8K V Discrete I/O
Radiated
Susceptibility
IEC801-3 @ 10 V/m, 27 MHz – 1000 MHz except for
3V/m, 87 MHz – 108 MHz, 174 MHz – 230 MHz, and 470 MHz – 790 MHz
Fast Transient
IEC801-4 @ 2K V Power Supply, I/O; 1K V Comms
Isolation
1500V ac
4K V Contact, 8K V Air for Analog I/O
➀ Refer to page 1–11 for additional information on power supply inrush.
➁ DC input voltage derated linearly from 30°C (30V to 26.4V).
➂ DIN rail mounted controller is 1g.
➃ Refer to page 1–14 for vertical mounting specifications.
➄ Relays are derated an additional 2.5g on 32 pt. controllers.
A–2
Appendix A
Hardware Reference
Input Specifications
Description
cription
Specification
100-120V ac Controllers
24V dc Controllers
Voltage
Range
79 to132V ac
47 to 63 Hz
14 to 30V dc
On Voltage
79V ac min.
132V ac max.
14V dc min.
24V dc nominal
26.4V dc max. @ 55°C (131°F)
30.0V dc max. @ 30°C (86°F)
Off Voltage
20V ac
5V dc
On Current
5.0 mA min. @ 79V ac 47 Hz
12.0 mA nominal @ 120V ac 60 Hz
16.0 mA max. @ 132V ac 63 Hz
2.5 mA min. @ 14V dc
8.0 mA nominal @ 24V dc
12.0 mA max. @ 30V dc
Off Current
2.5 mA max.
1.5 mA max.
Nominal
Impedance
12K ohms @ 50 Hz
10K ohms @ 60 Hz
3K ohms
Inrush
Maximum
250 mA max.➀
Not Applicable
➀
To reduce the inrush maximum to 35 mA, apply a 6.8 Kohm, 5w resistor in series with the input.
The on-state voltage increases to 92V ac as a result.
dc Input Derating Graph
30
25
20
VDC
15
10
5
0
0
10
20
30
40
(32)
(50)
(68)
(86)
(104)
50
(122)
60
(140)
Temperature °C (°F)
A–3
Appendix A
Hardware Reference
General Output Specifications
Type
Relay
Voltage
See Wiring Diagrams, p. 2–6.
Maximum
Load
Current
Refer to the
Relay Contact
Rating Table.
1.0A per point @ 55°C (131°F)
1.5A per point @ 30°C (86°F)
0.5A per point @ 55°C (131°F)
1.0A per point @ 30°C (86°F)
Minimum
Load
Current
10.0 mA
1 mA
10.0 mA
Current
per
Controller
1440 VA
3A for L16BBB
6A for L32BBB
1440 VA
Current
per
Common
8.0A
3A for L16BBB
6A for L32BBB
Not Applicable
Maximum
Off State
Leakage
Current
0 mA
1 mA
2 mA @ 132V ac
4.5 mA @ 264V ac
10 ms max.
0.1 ms
8.8 ms @ 60 Hz
10.6 ms @ 50 Hz
10 ms max.
1 ms
11.0 ms
Not Applicable
4A for 10 ms➀
10A for 25 ms➀
Off to On
Response
On to Off
Response
Surge
Current
per Point
➀
MOSFET
Triac
Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 55°C (131°F).
Relay Contact Rating Table (applies to all Bulletin 1761 controllers)
Amperes
Maximum Volts
Volt
Make
A–4
Break
240V ac
7.5A
0.75A
120V ac
15A
1.5A
125V dc
24V dc
➀
Voltamperes
Amperes
Continuous
mp r Continuou
Make
2.5A
1800 VA
0.22A➀
1.0A
28 VA
1.2A➀
2.0A
28 VA
Break
180 VA
For dc voltage applications, the make/break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined
by dividing 28 VA by the applied dc voltage. For example, 28 VA ÷ 48V dc = 0.58A. For dc
voltage applications less than 48V, the make/break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A.
For dc voltage applications greater than 48V, the make/break ratings for relay contacts cannot
exceed 1A.
Appendix A
Hardware Reference
Analog Input Specifications
Description
Specification
Voltage Input Range
–10.5 to +10.5V dc – 1LSB
Current Input Range
–21 to +21 mA – 1LSB
Type of Data
16-bit signed integer
Input Coding –21 to +21 mA – 1LSB, –10.5 to +10.5V dc – 1LSB
–32,768 to +32,767
Voltage Input Impedance
210K W
Current Input Impedance
160W
Input Resolution➀
16 bit
Non-linearity
t0.002%
Overall Accuracy 0°C to +55°C
Overall Error at +25°C (+77°F) (max.)
±0.7% of full scale
±0.176%
±0.525%
Voltage Input Overvoltage Protection
24V dc
Current Input Overcurrent Protection
±50 mA
Overall Accuracy Drift 0°C to +55°C (max.)
Input to Output Isolation
Field Wiring to Logic Isolation
➀
30V rated
ra e working/500V
r i
00V test
es 60 Hz/1s
1s
The analog input resolution is a function of the input filter selection.
Analog Output Specifications
Description
Specification
Voltage Output Range
0 to 10V dc –1LSB
Current Output Range
4 to 20 mA – 1LSB
Type of Data
16-bit signed integer
Non-linearity
0.02%
Step Response
2.5 ms (at 95%)
Load Range – Voltage Output
1K W to 1W
Load Range – Current Output
0 to 500 W
Output Coding 4 to 20 mA – 1 LSB, 0 to 10Vdc – 1LSB
0 to 32,767
Voltage Output Miswiring
can withstand short circuit
Current Output Miswiring
can withstand short circuit
Output Resolution
15 bit
Analog Output Settling Time
3 msec (maximum)
Overall Accuracy 0°C to +55°C
Overall Accuracy Drift 0°C to +55°C (max.)
±1.0% of full scale
±0.28%
Overall Error at +25°C (+77°F) (max.)
0.2%
Field Wiring to Logic Isolation
30V rated working/500V isolation
A–5
Appendix A
Hardware Reference
Input Filter Response Times (Discrete)
The input filter response time is the time from when the external input
voltage reaches an on or off state to when the micro controller recognizes
that change of state. The higher you set the response time, the longer it takes
for the input state change to reach the micro controller. However, setting
higher response times also provides better filtering of high frequency noise.
You can apply a unique input filter setting to each of the three input groups:
• 0 and 1
• 2 and 3
• 4 to x; where x=9 for 16 I/O point controllers, and x=19 for 32 I/O point
controllers
The minimum and maximum response times associated with each input filter
setting can be found in the tables that follow.
Response Times for High-Speed dc Inputs 0 to 3 (applies to
1761-L10BWA, 1761-L16BWA, -L20BWA-5A, -L32BWA, -L10BWB,
-L16BWB, -L20BWB-5A, -L32BWB, -L16BBB, and -L32BBB
controllers)
Maximum High-Speed
Counter Frequency @ 50%
Duty Cycle (Khz)
Nominal Filter
Setting (ms)
Maximum ON
Delay (ms)
Maximum OFF
Delay (ms)
6.600
0.075
0.075
0.075
5.000
0.100
0.100
0.100
2.000
0.250
0.250
0.250
1.000
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.200
1.000
2.000
1.000
2.000
1.000
2.000
0.125
4.000
4.000
4.000
0.062
0.031
8.000➀
8.000
16.000
8.000
16.000
➀
16.000
This is the default setting.
Response Times for dc Inputs 4 and Above (applies to 1761-L10BWA,
1761-L16BWA, -L20BWA-5A, -L32BWA, -L10BWB, -L16BWB,
-L20BWB-5A, -L32BWB, -L16BBB, and -L32BBB controllers)
Nominal Filter
Setting (ms)
Maximum OFF
Delay (ms)
0.50
0.500
0.500
1.00
1.00
1.000
2.00
2.000
2.000
4.00
4.000
4.000
8.00➀
8.000
8.000
16.00
16.000
16.000
➀
A–6
Maximum ON
Delay (ms)
This is the default setting.
Appendix A
Hardware Reference
Response Times for ac Inputs (applies to 1761-L16AWA, -L20AWA-5A,
-L32AWA, and -L32AAA controllers)
Nominal Filter
Setting (ms)➀
8.0
➀
Controller Dimensions
Maximum ON
Delay (ms)
20.0
Maximum OFF
Delay (ms)
20.0
There is only one filter setting available for the ac inputs. If you make another selection, the
controller changes it to the ac setting and sets the input filter modified bit (S:5/13).
Refer to the following table for the controller dimensions.
Controller: 1761-
Length: mm (in.)
L10BWA
120 (4.72)
L16AWA
133 (5.24)
L16BWA
120 (4.72)
Depth: mm (in.)➀
Height: mm (in.)
L20AWA-5A
73 (2.87)
2 7
L20BWA-5A
L32AWA
200 (7.87)
7 7
L32BWA
31
800 (3.15)
L32AAA
L10BWB
L16BBB
120 (4.72)
72
L16BWB
400 (1.57)
1 7
L20BWB-5A
L32BBB
200 (7.87)
7 7
L32BWB
➀
Add approximately 13 mm (0.51 in.) when using the 1761-CBL-PM02 or 1761-CBL-HM02
communication cables.
Copy the template on the following page to help you install your controller.
A–7
Appendix A
Hardware Reference
80 mm
(3.15 in.)
1761–L16BWA 1761–L16BBB
102mm
(4.01 in.)
125 mm
(4.92 in.)
1761–L16BWB
1761–L10BWA 1761–L10BWB
120
mm
(4.72 in.)
1761–L16AWA
133 mm
(5.24 in.)
192 mm
(7.55 in.)
1761–L20AWA-5A 1761–L20BWA-5A 1761–L20BWB-5A
1761–L32AAA
1761–L32AWA 1761–L32BBB
1761–L32BWA 1761–L32BWB
200 mm
(7.87 in.)
72 mm
(2.83 in.)
A–8
Appendix A
Hardware Reference
Hand-Held Programmer
Specifications
The following tables summarize the specifications and dimensions for the
MicroLogix 1000 HHP.
General Specifications
Description
Specification: 1761-HHP-B30
Operating Power
2.0W
Operating Temperature
0°C to +50°C (+32°F to +122°F)
Storage Temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Operating Humidity
5 to 95% noncondensing
Vibration (Operating and
Non-operating)
10 to 500 Hz
0.762 mm (0.030 in.) peak to peak
1.5g maximum peak acceleration
1 hr in x, y, and z axis
Shock
Operating: 50g peak acceleration for 11±1 ms
duration 3 times in x, y, and z axis
Non-operating: 50g peak acceleration for 11±1 ms
duration 3 times in x, y, and z axis
Agency Certification
(when product or packaging is
marked)
• C-UL Class 1, Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D
certified
• UL listed (Class 1, Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D
certified)
• CE marked for all applicable directives
Display Type
LCD 16 character x 2 line display
Keypad
rubber/carbon colored coded
Input Specifications
Description
Type
Specification
24V dc
Dimensions
Terminal: 1761-
Width:
mm (in.)
Height:
mm (in.)
Depth:
mm (in.)
HHP
95 (3.74)
170 (6.69)
35 (1.37)
A–9
Appendix A
Hardware Reference
94.48 mm
(3.72 in.)
172.21 mm
(6.78 in.)
76.45 mm
(3.01 in.)
A–10
Appendix A
Hardware Reference
Controller and Hand-Held
Programmer Accessories and
Replacement Parts
This table provides a list of accessories and replacement parts and their
catalog numbers.
Description
Catalog Number
10 pt. ac input, 6 pt. relay output, ac power supply controller
12 pt. ac and 4 pt. analog inputs, 8 pt. relay and 1 pt. analog outputs, ac
power supply controller
20 pt. ac input, 12 pt. relay output, ac power supply controller
1761-L16AWA
6 pt. dc input, 4 pt. relay output, ac power supply controller
1761-L10BWA
10 pt. dc input, 6 pt. relay output, ac power supply controller
1761-L16BWA
12 pt. dc and 4 pt. analog inputs, 8 pt. relay and 1 pt. analog outputs, ac
power supply controller
20 pt. dc input, 12 pt. relay output, ac power supply controller
1761-L20AWA-5A
1761-L32AWA
1761-L20BWA-5A
1761-L32BWA
6 pt. dc input, 4 pt. relay output, dc power supply controller
1761-L10BWB
10 pt. dc input, 6 pt. relay output, dc power supply controller
1761-L16BWB
12 pt. dc and 4 pt. analog inputs, 8 pt. relay and 1 pt. analog outputs, dc
power supply controller
20 pt. dc input, 12 pt. relay output, dc power supply controller
1761-L20BWB-5A
1761-L32BWB
10 pt. dc input, 4 pt. FET and 2 pt. relay outputs, dc power supply controller 1761-L16BBB
20 pt. dc input, 10 pt. FET and 2 pt. relay outputs, dc power supply controller
1761-L32BBB
20 pt. ac input, 10 pt. triac and 2 pt. relay outputs, ac power supply controller
1761-L32AAA
Terminal doors for -L16AWA (2 doors per package)
1761-RPL-T16A
Terminal doors for -L16BWA (2 doors per package)
1761-RPL-T16B
Terminal doors for -L32AWA, -L32BWA, or -L32AAA (2 doors per
package)
Communications door (1 door per package)
1761-RPL-T32X
1761-RPL-COM
DIN rail latches (2 per package)
1761-RPL-DIN
2.00 m (6.56 ft) cable (DIN-to-DIN) for use with the MicroLogix 1000 HHP
1761-CBL-HM02
Hand-Held Programmer (includes 1761-CBL-HM02 communication
cable)
Memory module for 1761-HHP-B30 (stores 1 program)
1761-HHP-B30
1761-HHM-K08
Memory module for 1761-HHP-B30 (stores 8 programs)
1761-HHM-K64
Memory module door for 1761-HHP-B30 (1 door per package)
1761-RPL-TRM
A–11
Appendix
B
Programming Reference
This appendix lists the:
• controller status file
• function codes
• instruction execution times and instruction memory usage
Controller Status File
The status file lets you monitor how your operating system works and lets
you direct how you want it to work. This is done by using the status file to
set up control bits and monitor both hardware and software faults and other
status information.
Important: Do not write to reserved words in the status file. If you intend
writing to status file data, it is imperative that you first
understand the function fully.
The status file (S) contains the following words:
Word
Function
Page
S:0
Arithmetic Flags
B–2
S:1L (low byte)
Controller Mode Status/Control (low)
B–3
S:1H (high byte)
Controller Mode Status/Control (Hi)
B–3
S:2L (low byte)
Controller Alternate Mode Status/Control (low)
B–5
S:2H (high byte)
Controller Alternate Mode Status/Control (Hi)
B–5
S:3L (low byte)
Current Scan Time
B–6
S:3H (high byte)
Watchdog Scan Time
B–7
S:4
Timebase
B–7
S:5
Minor Error Bits
B–7
S:6
Major Error Code
B–8
S:7
Suspend Code
B–11
S:8 to S:12
Reserved
B–11
S:13, S:14
Math Register
B–11
S:15L (low byte)
DF1 Full or Half-Duplex Node Address
B–11
S:15H (high byte)
DF1 Full or Half-Duplex Baud Rate
B–11
S:16L (low byte)
DH-485 Node Address
B–11
S:16H (high byte)
DH-485 Baud Rate
B–12
S:17 to S:21
Reserved
B–12
S:22
Maximum Observed Scan Time
B–12
Continued on next page
B–1
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Word
Function
Page
S:23
Reserved
B–12
S:24
Index Register
B–12
S:25 to S:29
Reserved
S:30
STI Setpoint
B–12
S:31 and S:32
Reserved
B–12
B–12
Status File Descriptions
The following tables describe the status file functions, beginning at address
S0 and ending at address S32.
Each status bit is classified as one of the following:
• Status — Use these words, bytes, or bits to monitor controller operation
or controller status information. The information is seldom written to by
the user program or programming device (unless you want to reset or
clear a function such as a monitor bit).
• Dynamic Configuration — Use these words, bytes, or bits to select
controller options while online with the controller.
• Static Configuration — Use these words, bytes, or bits to select controller
options prior to saving the user program.
Address
B–2
Bit
Classification
Description
S0
Arithmetic and
Scan Status
Flags
The arithmetic flags are assessed by the controller following the
execution of certain math and data handling instructions. The
state of these bits remain in effect until certain math or data
handling instructions in the program are executed.
S0/0
Carry
Status
This bit is set by the controller if a mathematical carry or borrow is
generated. Otherwise the bit remains cleared. This bit is
assessed as if a function of unsigned math. When a STI,
high-speed counter, or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution
of your program, the original value of S:0/0 is restored when
execution resumes.
S0/1
Overflow
Status
This bit is set by the controller when the result of a mathematical
operation does not fit in its destination. Otherwise the bit remains
cleared. Whenever this bit is set, the overflow trap bit S:5/0 is
also set except for the ENC bit. Refer to S:5/0. When a STI,
high-speed counter, or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution
of your program, the original value of S:0/1 is restored when
execution resumes.
S0/2
Zero
Status
S0/3
Sign
Status
S0/4 to S0/7
Reserved
NA
This bit is set by the controller when the result of certain math or
data handling instructions is zero. Otherwise the bit remains
cleared. When a STI, high-speed counter, or Fault Routine
interrupts normal execution of your program, the original value of
S:0/2 is restored when execution resumes.
This bit is set by the controller when the result of certain math or
data handling instructions is negative. Otherwise the bit remains
cleared. When a STI, high-speed counter, or Fault Routine
interrupts normal execution of your program, the original value of
S:0/3 is restored when execution resumes.
NA
Address
Classification
Description
S0/8➀
Extend I/O
Configuration
Bit
Static Configuration
This bit must be set by the user when unused outputs are written
to. If reset and unused outputs are turned on the controller will
fault (41H).
S0/9
Reserved
NA
NA
S0/10
Primary Protocol
Static Configuration
S0/11
Active Protocol
Status
S0/12➁
Selected DF1
Protocol
Status
This bit defines the protocol that the controller initially uses when
attempting to establish communication, where:
0 = DF1 (default setting)
1 = DH-485
This bit is updated by the controller during a protocol switch. It
indicates which protocol is currently being used for
communication, where:
0 = DF1
1 = DH-485
This bit allows the user to determine which DF1 protocol is
configured, where:
0 = DF1 Full-Duplex (default setting)
1 = DF1 Half-Duplex Slave
S0/13 to S0/15
S1/0 to S1/4➂
Reserved
Controller Mode
Status/ Control
NA
Status
NA
Bits 0–4 function as follows:
0 0000 = (0) Remote Download in progress
0 0001 = (1)
1 Remote
Re e Program
Pr ra modee
0 0011 = (3) Suspend Idle (operation halted by
SUS instruction
i s r c i execution)
exec i
0 0110 = (6)
6 Remote
Re e Run
R modee
0 0111 = (7)
7 Remote
Re e Test
es continuous
c i
s modee
0 1000 = (8) Remote Test single scan mode
S1/5➂
Forces Enabled
Status
S1/6➂
Forces Installed
Status
S1/7➂
Comms Active
Status
This bit is set by the controller (1) to indicate that forces are
always enabled.
This bit is set by the controller to indicate that forces have been
set by the user.
This bit is set when the controller receives valid data from the
communication port. For DF1 protocols, the bit is reset if the
controller does not receive valid data from the programming port
for 10 seconds.
Reference
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Note: In DF1 half-duplex mode, simple polls by the DF1 master
or replies to received messages will not reset the timer. A poll
with a command is required to reset the timer.
For DH-485, the bit is reset as soon as the DH-485 link layer
determines that no other devices are active on the link.
Application Note: For DF1 half-duplex, you can use this bit to
enable a timer (via an XIO instruction) to sense whether the DF1
master is actively communicating to the slave. The preset of the
timer is determined by the total network timing.
S1/8➂
Fault Override at
Powerup
Static Configuration
When set, this bit causes the controller to clear the Major Error
Halted bit S:1/13 and Minor error bits S:5/0 to S:5/7 on power up
if the processor had previously been in the REM Run mode and
had faulted. The controller then attempts to enter the REM Run
mode. Set this bit offline only.
➀
Valid for Series A–C discrete only.
➁
This bit is set in the COMMS menu. It is not displayed in the status file of the HHP.
➂
Address is not shown in HHP data monitor.
B–3
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Address
S1/9➀
Bit
Startup Protection
Fault
Classification
Static Configuration
Description
When this bit is set and power is cycled when the controller
powers up in Run mode, the controller executes the user-fault
routine prior to the execution of the first scan of your program.
You have the option of clearing the Major Error Halted bit S:1/13
to resume operation in the REM Run mode. If the user-fault
routine does not reset bit S:1/13, the fault mode results.
Program the user-fault routine logic accordingly. When
executing the startup protection fault routine, S:6 (major error
fault code) contains the value 0016H.
S1/12➀
Reserved
Run Always
NA
Static Configuration
NA
When set, this bit causes the controller to clear S:1/13 before
attempting to enter RUN mode when power is applied or if an
unexpected reset occurs. If this bit is not set, the controller
powers up in the previous mode it was in before losing power,
unless the controller was in REM test mode. If the controller was
in REM test mode when power was removed, the controller
enters REM program mode when power is applied.
This bit overrides any faults existing at power down.
!
S1/13
Major Error Halted
Dynamic
Configuration
This bit is set by the controller any time a major error is
encountered. The controller enters a fault condition. Word S:6,
the Fault Code contains a code that can be used to diagnose the
fault condition. Any time bit S:1/13 is set, the controller:
•
•
➀
ATTENTION: Setting the Run Always bit causes
the controller to enter the REM RUN mode if an
unexpected reset occurs, regardless of the mode
that the controller was in before the reset occurred.
Unexpected resets may occur due to
electromagnetic noise, improper grounding, or an
internal controller hardware failure. Make sure your
application is designed to safely handle this
situation.
either places all outputs in a safe state (outputs are off) and
energizes the fault LED (blinking),
or enters the user-fault routine with outputs active (if in REM
Run mode), allowing the fault routine ladder logic to attempt
recovery from the fault condition. If the user-fault routine
determines that recovery is required, clear S:1/13 using
ladder logic prior to exiting the fault routine. If the fault
routine ladder logic does not understand the fault code, or if
the routine determines that it is not desirable to continue
operation, the controller exits the fault routine with bit S:1/13
set. The outputs are placed in a safe state and the FAULT
LED is blinking.
Address is not shown in HHP data monitor.
Continued on next page
B–4
Reference
S1/10 to S1/11
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Address
S1/13
Bit
Major Error
Halted
Classification
Dynamic
Configuration
S1/13
Major Error
Halted
Dynamic
Configuration
S1/14
11
OEM
M LLock
c
Static
a ic Configuration
fi ra i
Using this bit you can control access to a controller file.
To program this feature, select “Future Access Disallow” when
saving your program.
When this bit is cleared, it indicates that any compatible
programming device can access the ladder program (provided
that password conditions are satisfied).
S1/15
First Pass
Status
S2/0
STI Pending
Status
Use this bit to initialize your program as the application requires.
When this bit is set by the controller, it indicates that the first
scan of the user program is in progress (following power up in
the RUN mode or entry into a REM Run or REM Test mode).
The controller clears this bit following the first scan.
This bit is set during execution of the startup protection fault
routine. Refer to S:1/9 for more information.
When set, this bit indicates that the STI timer has timed out and
the STI routine is waiting to be executed. This bit is cleared
upon starting the STI routine, ladder program, exit of the REM
Run or Test mode, or execution of a true STS instruction.
S2/1
STI Enabled
Status and Static
Configuration
Description1
This bit may be set or reset using the STS, STE, or STD
instruction. If set, it allows execution of the STI if the STI
setpoint S:30 is non-zero. If clear, when an interrupt occurs, the
STI subroutine does not execute and the STI Pending bit is set.
The STI Timer continues to run when this bit is disabled. The
STD instruction clears this bit.
If this bit is set or reset editing the status file online, the STI is
not affected. If this bit is set, the bit allows execution of the STI.
If this bit is reset editing the status file offline, the bit disallows
execution of the STI.
When set, this bit indicates that the STI timer has timed out and
the STI subroutine is currently being executed. This bit is
cleared upon completion of the STI routine, ladder program, or
REM Run or Test mode.
S2/2
STI Executing
Status
S2/3 to S2/4
Reserved
NA
NA
S2/5➀
Incoming
Command
Pending Bit
Status
This bit is set when the processor determines that another node
on the network has requested information or supplied a
command to it. This bit can be set at any time. This bit is cleared
when the processor services the request (or command).
➀
Reference
When you clear bit S:1/13 using a programming device, the
controller mode changes from fault to Remote Program. You
can move a value to S:6, then set S:1/13 in your ladder program
to generate an application specific major error. All application
generated faults are recoverable regardless of the value used.
Note: Once a major fault state exists, you must correct the
condition causing the fault, and you must also clear this bit in
order for the controller to accept a mode change attempt (into
REM Run or REM Test). Also, clear S:6 to avoid the confusion
of having an error code but no fault condition.
Note: Do not re-use error codes that are defined later in this
appendix as application specific error codes. Instead, create your
own unique codes. This prevents you from confusing application
errors with system errors. We recommend using error codes
FFOO to FFOF to indicate application specific major errors.
Valid for Series C discrete only.
Continued on next page
B–5
Appendix B
Programming Reference
S2/6➀
Message Reply
Pending Bit
Status
S2/7➀
Outgoing
Message
Command
Pending Bit
Status
S2/8 to S2/13
S2/14
Reserved
Math Overflow
Selection
NA
Dynamic
Configuration
This bit is set when another node on the network has supplied
the information you requested in the MSG instruction of your
processor. This bit is cleared when the processor stores the
information and updates your MSG instruction.
This bit is set when one or more messages in your program
are enabled and waiting, but no message is being transmitted
at the time. As soon as transmission of a message begins, the
bit is cleared. After transmission, the bit is set again if there are
further messages waiting. It remains cleared if there are no
further messages waiting.
NA
Set this bit when you intend to use 32-bit addition and
subtraction. When S:2/14 is set, and the result of an ADD,
SUB, MUL, or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the
destination address (underflow or overflow):
•
•
•
the overflow bit S:0/1 is set,
the overflow trap bit S:5/0 is set,
and the destination address contains the
unsigned truncated least significant 16 bits of the result.
The default condition of S:2/14 is reset (0). When S:2/14 is
reset, and the result of an ADD, SUB, MUL, or DIV instruction
cannot be represented in the destination address (underflow or
overflow):
the overflow bit S:0/1 is set,
the overflow trap bit S:5/0 is set,
and the destination address contains
32767 if the result is positive or – 32768 if
the result is negative.
Note that the status of bit S:2/14 has no effect on the DDV
instruction. Also, it has no effect on the math register content
when using MUL and DIV instructions.
S2/15
S3L
Reserved
Current Scan
Time
NA
Status
To provide protection from inadvertent alteration of your
selection, program an unconditional OTL instruction at address
S:2/14 to ensure the new math overflow operation. Program
an unconditional OTU instruction at address S:2/14 to ensure
the original math overflow operation.
NA
The value of this byte tells you how much time elapses in a
program cycle. A program cycle includes:
•
•
•
•
scanning the ladder program,
housekeeping,
scanning the I/O,
servicing of the communication channel.
The byte value is zeroed by the controller each scan,
immediately preceding the execution of rung 0 of program file
2 (main program file). The byte is incremented every 10 ms
thereafter and indicates, in 10 ms increments, the amount of
time elapsed in each scan. If this value ever equals the value
in S:3H Watchdog, a user watchdog major error is declared
(code 0022).
The resolution of the scan time value is +0 to –10 ms.
Example: The value 9 indicates that 80–90 ms has elapsed since
the start of the program cycle.
➀ Valid for Series C discrete only.
B–6
Reference
•
•
•
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Bit
Classification
Description
Watchdog Scan
Time
Dynamic
Configuration
This byte value contains the number of 10 ms ticks allowed to
occur during a program cycle. The default value is 10 (100
ms), but you can increase this to 255 (2.55 seconds) or
decrease it to 1, as your application requires. If the program
scan S:3L value equals the watchdog value, a watchdog major
error is declared (code 0022).
S4
Timebase
Status
All 16 bits of this word are assessed by the controller. The
value of this word is zeroed upon power up in the REM Run
mode or entry into the REM Run or REM Test mode. It is
incremented every 10 ms thereafter.
Application note: You can write any value to S:4. It will begin
incrementing from this value.
You can use any individual bit of this word in your user
program as a 50% duty cycle clock bit. Clock rates for S:4/0 to
S:4/15 are:
20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5120, 10240, 20480,
40960, 81920, 163840, 327680, and 655360 ms.
The application using the bit must be evaluated at a rate more
than two times faster than the clock rate of the bit. In the
example below, bit S:4/3 toggles every 80 ms, producing a 160 ms
clock rate. To maintain accuracy of this bit in your application,
the instruction using bit S:4/3 (O:1/0 in this case) must be
evaluated at least once every 79.999 ms
160 ms
S5
Minor Error Bits
S5/0
Overflow Trap
Dynamic
Configuration
S:4
] [
3
O:1
( )
0
Both S:4/3 and
S:4/3 cycles in 160 ms Output O:1/0 toggle
every 80 ms. O:1/0
must be evaluated
at least once every
79.999 ms.
The bits of this word are set by the controller to indicate that a
minor error has occurred in your ladder program. Minor errors,
bits 0 to 7, revert to major error 0020H if any bit is detected as
being set at the end of the scan. These bits are automatically
cleared on a power cycle.
When this bit is set by the controller, it indicates that a
mathematical overflow has occurred in the ladder program.
See S:0/1 for more information.
If this bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND
instruction, major error (0020) is declared. To avoid this type of
major error from occurring, examine the state of this bit
following a math instruction (ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, DDV, NEG,
SCL, TOD, or FRD), take appropriate action, and then clear bit
S:5/0 using an OTU instruction with S:5/0.
S5/1
Reserved
NA
NA
S5/2
Control Register
Error
Dynamic
Configuration
The LFU, LFL, FFU, FFL, BSL, BSR, SQO, SQC, and SQL
instructions are capable of generating this error. When bit
S:5/2 is set, it indicates that the error bit of a control word used
by the instruction has been set.
➀
Address is not shown in HHP data monitor.
B–7
Reference
Address
S3H➀
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Address
Bit
Classification
Description
S5/2
Control Register
Error
Dynamic
Configuration
If this bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND
instruction, major error (0020) is declared. To avoid this type
of major error from occurring, examine the state of this bit
following a control register instruction, take appropriate
action, and then clear bit S:5/2 using an OTU instruction with
S:5/2.
S5/3
Major Error
Detected While
Executing
user-fault routine
Reserved
Dynamic
Configuration
When set, the major error code (S:6) represents the major
error that occurred while processing the fault routine due to
another major error.
NA
NA
S5/8
Retentive Data
Lost
Status
This bit is set whenever retentive data is lost. This bit
remains set until you clear it. While set, this bit causes the
controller to fault prior to the first true scan of the program.
S5/9
Reserved
NA
NA
S5/10
STI Lost
Status
This bit is set whenever the STI timer expires while the STI
routine is either executing or disabled and the pending bit
(s:2/0) is already set.
S5/11 to S5/12
Reserved
NA
NA
S5/13
Input Filter
Selection Modified
Status
This bit is set whenever the discrete input filter selection in
the controller is made compatible with the hardware. Refer
to page A–6 for more information.
S5/14 to S5/15
S6
Reserved
Major Error Code
NA
Status
NA
S5/4 to S5/7
A hexadecimal code is entered in this word by the controller
when a major error is declared. Refer to S:1/13. The code
defines the type of fault, as indicated on the following pages.
This word is not cleared by the controller.
Error codes are presented, stored, and displayed in a
hexadecimal format.
If you enter a fault code as a parameter in an instruction in
your ladder program, you must convert the code to decimal.
Application note: You can declare your own application
specific major fault by writing a unique value to S:6 and then
setting bit S:1/13.
Interrogate the value of S:6 in the user-fault routine to
determine the type of fault that occurred.
Fault Classifications: Faults are classified as Non-User,
Non-Recoverable, and Recoverable.
Error code descriptions and classifications are listed on the
following pages. Categories are:
•
•
•
•
NA = Not Applicable
B–8
power up errors
going-to-run errors
run errors
download errors
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Each fault is classified as one of the following:
• Non-User — A fault caused by various conditions that cease logic
program execution. The user-fault routine is not run when this fault
occurs.
• Non-Recoverable — A fault caused by the user that cannot be recovered
from. The user-fault routine is run when this fault occurs. However, the
fault cannot be cleared.
• Recoverable — A fault caused by the user that can be recovered from in
the user-fault routine by resetting major error halted bit (S1/13). The
user-fault routine is run when this fault occurs.
Refer to chapter 20 for more information regarding MicroLogix 1000 HHP
advisory messages.
Fault Classification
User
Error
Code
(Hex)
S6
0001
The default program was
loaded.
X
0002
Unexpected reset occurred.
X
0003
EEPROM memory is
corrupt.
X
0008
A fatal internal programming
device error occurred.
X
0009
A fatal internal hardware
error occurred.
X
Power up Errors
Non-User
NonRecoverable
Recoverable
Reference
Address
Fault Classification
User
Address
Error
Code
(Hex)
S6
0005
Retentive data is lost.
0010
The downloaded program is
not a controller program.
0016
Startup protection after
power loss, S:1/9 is set.
The user must check for a
retentive data lost condition
if the user-fault routine was
executed with startup
protection.
➀
Going-to-Run (GTR)
Errors➀
Non-User
NonRecoverable
Recoverable
X
X
X
Going-to-Run errors occur when the controller is going from any mode to REM Run mode or from any
non-Run mode (PRG, SUS) to Test mode.
B–9
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Fault Classification
User
Address
Error
Code
(Hex)
Run Errors
Non-User
S6
0004
A runtime memory integrity error occurred.
X
0020
A minor error at the end of the scan.
Refer to S:5.
0022
The watchdog timer expired. Refer to
S:3H.
X
0024
Invalid STI interrupt setpoint. Refer to
S:30.
X
0025
There are excessive JSRs in the STI
subroutine (file 5).
X
0027
There are excessive JSRs in the fault
subroutine (file 3).
X
002A
The indexed address is too large for the
file.
X
002B
There are excessive JSRs in the highspeed counter subroutine (file 4).
X
0030
The subroutine nesting exceeds a limit of
8 (file 2).
X
0031
An unsupported instruction was detected.
0032
An SQO/SQC instruction crossed data file
boundaries.
X
0033
The LFU, LFL, FFU, FFL, BSL, or BSR
instruction crossed data file boundaries.
X
0034
A negative value for a timer accumulator
or preset value was detected.
X
0035
An illegal instruction (TND) occurred in the
interrupt file.
0037
Invalid presets were loaded to the
high-speed counter.
0038
A RET instruction was detected in
program file 2.
0040
An output verify write occurred.
X
0041➀
Extra output bit(s) turned on.
X
NonRecoverable
Recoverable
X
X
X
X
X
➀ Valid for Series A–C discrete only.
Fault Classification
User
B–10
Address
Error
Code
(Hex)
S6
0018
Saving to Controller or Loading from
Memory Module Errors
Non-User
The user program is incompatible with the
operating system.
X
NonRecoverable
Recoverable
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Address
S7
Bit
Suspend Code
Classification
Status
S8 to S12
S13 and S14
Reserved
Math Register
NA
Status
Description
When a non-zero value appears in S:7, it indicates that the SUS
instruction identified by this value has been evaluated as true
and the Suspend Idle mode is in effect. This pinpoints the
conditions in the application that caused the Suspend Idle
mode. This value is not cleared by the controller.
Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting, or as
runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors.
NA
Use this double register to produce 32-bit signed divide and
multiply operations, precision divide or double divide
operations, and 5-digit BCD conversions.
S15L➀
DF1 Node
Address
Status
S15H➀
DF1 Baud Rate
Status
S16L➀
DH-485 Node
Address
Status
➀
This byte value contains the node address of your processor on
the DF1 link. It is used when executing Message (MSG)
instructions over the DF1 link. The default node address of a
processor is 1. Valid node addresses are 0–254. To change a
processor node address you must use a programming device.
This byte value contains a code used to select the baud rate of
the processor on the DF1 link.
The controller baud rate options are:
• 300
• 600
• 1200
• 2400
• 4800 (MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and
all MicroLogix 1000 analog only)
• 9600 (default)
• 19200
• 38400 (MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and
all MicroLogix 1000 analog only)
To change the baud rate from the default value you must use
a programming device.
This byte value contains the node address of your processor on
the DH-485 link. Each device on the DH-485 link must have a
unique address between the decimal values 1–31. To change a
processor node address, you must use a programming device.
Address is not shown in HHP data monitor.
B–11
Reference
These two words are used in conjunction with the MUL, DIV,
DDV, FRD, and TOD math instructions. The math register
value is assessed upon execution of the instruction and
remains valid until the next MUL, DIV, DDV, FRD, or TOD
instruction is executed in the user program.
An explanation of how the math register operates is included
with the instruction definitions.
If you store 32-bit signed data values, you must manage this
data type without the aid of an assigned 32-bit data type. For
example, combine B3:0 and B3:1 to create a 32-bit signed data
value. We recommend that you start all 32-bit values on an
even or odd word boundary for ease of application and viewing.
Also, we recommend that you design, document, and view the
contents of 32-bit signed data in either the hexadecimal or
binary radix.
When an STI, high-speed counter, or Fault Routine interrupts
normal execution of your program, the original value of the
math register is restored when execution resumes.
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Classification
Status
S17 to S21
S22
Reserved
Maximum
Observed
bser e Scan
ca
Time
i e
NA
Dynamic
Configuration
fi ra i
Description
This byte value contains the baud rate of the processor on the
DH-485 link.
The controller baud rate options are:
• 9600
• 19200 (default)
To change the baud rate from the default value, you must use a
programming device.
NA
This word indicates the maximum observed interval between
consecutive program cycles.
This value indicates, in 10 ms increments, the time elapsed in
the longest program cycle of the controller. Refer to S:3L for
more information regarding the program cycle. The controller
compares each last scan value to the value contained in S:22.
If the controller determines that the last scan value is larger
than the value stored at S:22, the last scan value is written to
S:22.
Resolution of the maximum observed scan time value is +0 to
−10 ms. For example, the value 9 indicates that 80–90 ms was
observed as the longest program cycle.
Interrogate this value if you need to determine or verify the
longest scan time of your program.
NA
S23
S24
Reserved
Index Register
NA
Status
S25 to S29
S30➀
Reserved
STI Setpoint
NA
Dynamic
Configuration
NA
S31 to S32
Reserved
NA
NA
➀
B–12
Bit
DH-485 Baud
Rate
Address is not shown in HHP data monitor.
This word indicates the element offset used in indexed
addressing.
When an STI, high-speed counter, or Fault Routine interrupts
normal execution of your program, the original value of this
register is restored when execution resumes.
You enter the timebase to be used in the selectable timed
interrupt (STI). The time can range from 10 to 2550 ms. (This is
in 10ms increments, so valid values are from 0–255.) Your STI
routine executes per the value you enter. Write a zero value to
disable the STI.
To provide protection from inadvertent alteration of your
selection, program an unconditional MOV instruction containing
the setpoint value of your STI to S:30, or program a CLR
instruction at S:30 to prevent STI operation.
If the STI is initiated while in the REM Run mode by loading the
status registers, the interrupt starts timing from the end of the
program scan in which the status registers were loaded.
Reference
Address
S16H➀
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Function Codes
The table below provides the function codes for each instruction. The
instructions are listed in alphabetical order.
HHP
Display
Function
Code
ADD
➀
80
Add
Math
ANB
➀
13
And Block
Basic
22
And
Basic
108
And
Data Handling
23
And Inverted
Basic
Mnemonic
AND (bit input)
AND (word output)
➀
ANI
Name
Instruction Type
BSL
➀
150
Bit Shift Left
Application Specific
BSR
➀
151
Bit Shift Right
Application Specific
CLR
➀
85
Clear
Math
COP
➀
104
File Copy
Data Handling
CTD
➀
6
Count Down
Basic
CTU
➀
5
Count Up
Basic
DCD
➀
102
Decode 4 to 1 of 16
Data Handling
DDV
➀
84
Double Divide
Math
DIV
➀
83
Divide
Math
ENC
➀
103
Encode 1 of 16 to 4
Data Handling
Equal
Comparison
EQU
AND EQU
EQU
51
LD EQU
EQU
50
OR EQU
EQU
52
FFL
➀
113
FIFO Load
Data Handling
FFU
➀
114
FIFO Unload
Data Handling
FLL
➀
105
Fill File
Data Handling
FRD
➀
101
Convert from BCD
Data Handling
Greater Than or Equal
Comparison
Greater Than
Comparison
GEQ
GRT
AND GEQ
GEQ
66
LD GEQ
GEQ
65
OR GEQ
GEQ
67
AND GRT
GRT
63
LD GRT
GRT
62
OR GRT
GRT
64
HSC
➀
170
High-Speed Counter
High-Speed Counter
HSD
➀
174
High-Speed Counter
Interrupt Disable
High-Speed Counter
HSE
➀
173
High-Speed Counter
Interrupt Enable
High-Speed Counter
➀ Multiple displays.
B–13
Appendix B
Programming Reference
HHP
Display
Function
Code
HSL
➀
171
High-Speed Counter
Load
High-Speed Counter
IIM
➀
138
Immediate Input with
Mask
Program Flow Control
INT
158
Interrupt Subroutine
Application Specific
IOM
➀
139
Immediate Output with
Mask
Program Flow Control
JMP
➀
130
Jump to Label
Program Flow Control
JSR
➀
132
Jump to Subroutine
Program Flow Control
LBL
131
Label
Program Flow Control
LD
20
Load
Basic
LDI
21
Load Inverted
Basic
LDT
26
Load True
Basic
AND LEQ
LEQ
60
LD LEQ
LEQ
59
Less Than or Equal
Comparison
OR LEQ
LEQ
61
AND LES
LES
57
LD LES
LES
56
Less Than
Comparison
OR LES
LES
58
LFL
➀
115
LIFO Load
Data Handling
LFU
➀
116
LIFO Unload
Data Handling
AND LIM
LIM
72
LD LIM
LIM
71
Limit Test
Comparison
OR LIM
LIM
73
➀
135
Master Control Reset
Program Flow Control
AND MEQ
MEQ
69
LD MEQ
MEQ
68
Masked
Mas
e Comparison
aris for
f r
Equal
Comparison
OR MEQ
MEQ
70
MOV
➀
106
Move
Data Handling
MPP
➀
12
Memory Pop
Basic
MPS
➀
10
Memory Push
Basic
MRD
➀
11
Memory Read
Basic
MSG
➀
200
Message
Communication
MUL
➀
82
Multiply
Math
MVM
➀
107
Masked Move
Data Handling
Mnemonic
INT
LBL
LD INT
LD LBL
LDT
LEQ
LES
LIM
MCR
MEQ
➀ Multiple displays.
B–14
Name
Instruction Type
Appendix B
Programming Reference
HHP
Display
Function
Code
➀
112
AND NEQ
NEQ
54
LD NEQ
NEQ
53
OR NEQ
NEQ
55
➀
Mnemonic
NEG
NEQ
NOT
OR (bit input)
Name
Instruction Type
Negate
Data Handling
Not Equal
Comparison
111
Not
Data Handling
24
Or
Basic
OR (word output)
➀
109
Or
Data Handling
ORB
➀
14
Or Block
Basic
25
Or Inverted
Basic
ORT
27
Or True
Basic
AND OSR
OSR
29
One-Shot
e
Rising
Risi
Basic
asic
LD OSR
OSR
28
( )
40
Output
Basic
OUT (high-speed counter)
➀
40
Update High-Speed
Counter Accumulator
High-Speed Counter
RAC
➀
172
High-Speed Counter
Reset Accumulator
High-Speed Counter
RES (timer/counter)
➀
7
Reset
Basic
RES (high-speed counter)
➀
7
High-Speed Counter
Reset
High-Speed Counter
RET
➀
134
Return from Subroutine
Program Flow Control
RST
(U)
42
Reset
Basic
RTO
➀
2
Retentive Timer
Basic
SBR
133
Subroutine
Program Flow Control
SCL
➀
87
Scale Data
Math
SET
(L)
41
Set
Basic
SQC
➀
153
Sequencer Compare
Application Specific
SQL
➀
154
Sequencer Load
Application Specific
SQO
➀
152
Sequencer Output
Application Specific
SQR
➀
86
Square Root
Math
STD
➀
155
Selectable Timer
Interrupt Disable
Application Specific
STE
➀
156
Selectable Timer
Interrupt Enable
Application Specific
STS
➀
157
Selectable Timer
Interrupt Start
Application Specific
ORI
ORT
OSR
R
OUT (basic instruction)
SBR
LD SBR
➀ Multiple displays.
B–15
Appendix B
Programming Reference
HHP
Display
Function
Code
SUB
➀
81
Subtract
Math
SUS
➀
137
Suspend
Program Flow Control
TND
➀
136
Temporary End
Program Flow Control
TOD
➀
100
Convert to BCD
Data Handling
TOF
➀
1
Timer Off-Delay
Basic
TON
➀
0
Timer On-Delay
Basic
XOR
➀
110
Exclusive Or
Data Handling
Mnemonic
Name
Instruction Type
➀ Multiple displays.
Instruction Execution Times
and Memory Usage
Mnemonic
ADD
The table below lists the execution times and memory usage for the
controller instructions. Any instruction that takes longer than 15 µs (true or
false execution time) to execute performs a poll for user interrupts.
False Execution Time
(approx. µseconds)
True Execution Time
(approx. µseconds)
Memory Usage
(user words)
6.78
33.09
1.50
Add
Math
0.25
And Block
Basic
ANB
0.40
Name
Instruction Type
AND (bit input)
2.12
1.94
1.00
And
Basic
AND (word output)
6.78
34.00
1.50
And
Data Handling
ANI
2.12
1.94
1.00
And Inverted
Basic
BSL
19.80
53.71 + 5.24 x position
value
2.00
Bit Shift Left
Application Specific
BSR
19.80
53.34 + 3.98 x position
value
2.00
Bit Shift Right
Application Specific
CLR
4.25
20.80
1.00
Clear
Math
COP
6.60
27.31 + 5.06/word
1.50
File Copy
Data Handling
CTD
27.22
32.19
1.00
Count Down
Basic
CTU
26.67
29.84
1.00
Count Up
Basic
DCD
6.78
27.67
1.50
Decode 4 to 1 of 16
Data Handling
DDV
6.78
157.06
1.00
Double Divide
Math
DIV
6.78
147.87
1.50
Divide
Math
ENC
6.78
54.80
1.50
Encode 1 of 16 to 4
Data Handling
AND EQU
7.00
21.92
1.75
LD EQU
6.60
21.52
1.50
Equal
Comparison
OR EQU
7.00
21.92
1.75
EQU
B–16
Appendix B
Programming Reference
False Execution Time
(approx. µseconds)
True Execution Time
(approx. µseconds)
Memory Usage
(user words)
FFL
33.67
61.13
1.50
FIFO Load
Data Handling
FFU
34.90
73.78 + 4.34 x position
value
1.50
FIFO Unload
Data Handling
FLL
6.60
26.86 + 3.62/word
1.50
Fill File
Data Handling
FRD
5.52
56.88
1.00
Convert from BCD
Data Handling
AND GEQ
7.00
24.00
1.75
LD GEQ
6.60
23.60
1.50
Greater Than or Equal
Comparison
OR GEQ
7.00
24.00
1.75
AND GRT
7.00
24.00
1.75
LD GRT
6.60
23.60
1.50
Greater Than
Comparison
OR GRT
7.00
24.00
1.75
HSC
21.00
21.00
1.00
High-Speed Counter
High-Speed Counter
HSD
7.00
8.00
1.25
High-Speed Counter
Interrupt Disable
High-Speed Counter
HSE
7.00
10.00
1.25
High-Speed Counter
Interrupt. Enable
High-Speed Counter
HSL
7.00
66.00
1.50
High-Speed Counter
Load
High-Speed Counter
IIM
6.78
35.72
1.50
Immediate Input with
Mask
Program Flow Control
0.99
1.45
0.50
Interrupt Subroutine
Application Specific
IOM
6.78
41.59
1.50
Immediate Output with
Mask
Program Flow Control
JMP
6.78
9.04
1.00
Jump to Label
Program Flow Control
JSR
4.25
22.24
1.00
Jump to Subroutine
Program Flow Control
0.99
1.45
0.50
Label
Program Flow Control
LD
1.72
1.54
0.75
Load
Basic
LDI
1.72
1.54
0.75
Load Inverted
Basic
LDT
n/a
1.54
0.75
Load True
Basic
AND LEQ
7.00
24.00
1.75
LD LEQ
6.60
23.60
1.50
Less Than or Equal
Comparison
OR LEQ
7.00
24.00
1.75
AND LES
7.00
24.00
1.75
LD LES
6.60
23.60
1.50
Less Than
Comparison
OR LES
7.00
24.00
1.75
LFL
33.67
61.13
1.50
LIFO Load
Data Handling
LFU
35.08
64.20
1.50
LIFO Unload
Data Handling
Mnemonic
GEQ
GRT
INT
LBL
LEQ
LES
LD INT
LD LBL
Name
Instruction Type
B–17
Appendix B
Programming Reference
False Execution Time
(approx. µseconds)
True Execution Time
(approx. µseconds)
Memory Usage
(user words)
AND LIM
8.09
37.33
1.75
LD LIM
7.69
36.93
1.50
OR LIM
8.09
37.33
1.75
4.07
3.98
0.50
AND MEQ
8.09
28.79
1.75
LD MEQ
7.69
28.39
1.50
OR MEQ
8.09
28.79
1.75
6.78
25.05
Mnemonic
LIM
MCR
MEQ
MOV
Name
Instruction Type
Limit Test
Comparison
Master Control Reset
Program Flow Control
Masked
Mas
e Comparison
aris for
f r
Equal
Comparison
1.50
Move
Data Handling
MPP
0.40
0.25
Memory Pop
Basic
MPS
0.40
0.25
Memory Push
Basic
MRD
0.40
0.25
Memory Read
Basic
MSG
26
180➀➁
34.75
Message
Communication
MUL
6.78
57.96
1.50
Multiply
Math
MVM
6.78
33.28
1.50
Masked Move
Data Handling
NEG
6.78
29.48
1.50
Negate
Data Handling
AND NEQ
7.00
21.92
1.75
LD NEQ
6.60
21.52
1.50
Not Equal
Comparison
OR NEQ
7.00
21.92
1.75
NOT
6.78
28.21
1.00
Not
Data Handling
OR (bit input)
2.12
1.94
1.00
Or
Basic
OR (word output)
6.78
33.68
1.50
Or
Data Handling
0.25
Or Block
Basic
NEQ
ORB
0.40
ORI
2.12
1.94
1.00
Or Inverted
Basic
ORT
n/a
1.94
1.00
Or True
Basic
AND OSR
11.88
13.42
1.25
One-Shot
e
Rising
Risi
Basic
asic
LD OSR
11.48
13.02
1.00
OUT (basic instruction)
4.43
4.43
0.75
Output
Basic
OUT (high-speed counter)
7.00
12.00
0.75
Update High-Speed
Counter Image
Accumulator
High-Speed Counter
RAC
6.00
56.00
1.00
High-Speed Counter
Reset Accumulator
High-Speed Counter
RES (timer/counter)
4.25
15.19
1.00
Reset
Basic
RES (high-speed counter)
6.00
51.00
1.00
High-Speed Counter
Reset
High-Speed Counter
OSR
R
➀ This only includes the amount of time needed to set up the operation requested. It does not include the time it takes to service the actual communication, as this time
varies with each network configuration. As an example, 144ms is the actual communication service time for the following configuration: 3 nodes on DH-485
(2=MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers and 1=PLC-500 A.I. Series programming software), running at 19.2K baud, with 2 words per transfer.
➁ Add 7.3 µseconds per word for MSG instructions that perform writes.
B–18
Appendix B
Programming Reference
False Execution Time
(approx. µseconds)
True Execution Time
(approx. µseconds)
Memory Usage
(user words)
RET
3.16
31.11
0.50
Return from Subroutine
Program Flow Control
RST
3.16
4.97
0.75
Reset
Basic
RTO
27.49
38.34
1.00
Retentive Timer
Basic
0.99
1.45
0.50
Subroutine
Program Flow Control
SCL
6.78
169.18
1.75
Scale Data
Math
SET
3.16
4.97
0.75
Set
Basic
SQC
27.40
60.52
2.00
Sequencer Compare
Application Specific
SQL
28.12
53.41
2.00
Sequencer Load
Application Specific
SQO
27.40
60.52
2.00
Sequencer Output
Application Specific
SQR
6.78
71.25
1.25
Square Root
Math
STD
3.16
6.69
0.50
Selectable Timer
Interrupt Disable
Application Specific
STE
3.16
10.13
0.50
Selectable Timer
Interrupt Enable
Application Specific
STS
6.78
24.59
1.25
Selectable Timer
Interrupt Start
Application Specific
SUB
6.78
33.52
1.50
Subtract
Math
SUS
7.87
10.85
1.50
Suspend
Program Flow Control
TND
3.16
7.78
0.50
Temporary End
Program Flow Control
TOD
6.78
49.64
1.00
Convert to BCD
Data Handling
TOF
31.65
39.42
1.00
Timer Off-Delay
Basic
TON
30.38
38.34
1.00
Timer On-Delay
Basic
XOR
6.92
33.64
1.50
Exclusive Or
Data Handling
Mnemonic
SBR
LD SBR
Name
Instruction Type
B–19
Appendix B
Programming Reference
User Interrupt Latency
The user interrupt latency is the maximum time from when an interrupt
condition occurs (e.g., STI expires or HSC preset is reached) to when the
user interrupt subroutine begins executing (assumes that there are no other
interrupt conditions present). The following table lists interrupt conditions
and the corresponding time to execute the interrupt subroutine:
User Interrupt Condition
Time to Execute
HSC preset is reached
183 µs
STI expires
74 µs
Comms link layer interrupt
644 µs
System overhead interrupt
20 µs
To calculate the user interupt latency when you are communicating with the
controller, add 664 µs to one or both of the following values:
• 183 µs
• 74 µs
For example, if you are communicating with the controller, the worst case
interrupt latency is 921 µs (644 µs + 257 µs).
To calculate the user interupt latency when you are not communicating with
the controller, add 20 µs to one or both of the following values:
• 183 µs
• 74 µs
For example, if you are not communicating with the controller, the worst
case interrupt latency is 277 µs (20 µs + 257 µs).
B–20
Appendix B
Programming Reference
Estimating Memory Usage for Your Control System
Use the following to calculate memory usage for your control system.
1. Determine the total instruction words used by the instructions in
your program and enter the result. Refer to the table on page B–16.
2. Multiply the total number of rungs by 0.75 and enter the result.
Do not count the Start of File or End of File screens in each file.
177
3. To account for controller overhead, use 177.
110
4. To account for application data, use 110.
Total Memory Usage:
5. Total steps 1 through 4. This is the estimated total memory usage of
your application system. Remember, this is an estimate, actual
compiled programs may differ by ±12%.
6. To determine the estimated amount of memory remaining in the
controller you have selected, do the following:
Total Memory Usage
(from above):
Total Memory
Remaining:
1024
Subtract the total memory usage from 1024.
-
The result of this calculation is the estimated total memory
remaining in your selected controller.
Important: The calculated memory usage may vary from the actual
compiled program by ±12%.
Execution Time Worksheet
Use this worksheet to calculate your execution time for logic program.
Procedure
1.
Input scan time, output scan time, housekeeping time, and forcing.
2.
Estimate your program scan time:
A.
B.
Count the number of program rungs in your logic program and multiply by 6.
4.
210
µs (discrete)
330
µs with forcing (analog)
250
µs without forcing (analog)
_________
________
Add up your program execution times when all instructions are true. Include interrupt routines in
this calculation.➀
3.
Maximum Scan Time
_________ µs
Estimate your controller scan time:
A.
Without communications, add sections 1 and 2
_________ µs
B.
With communications, add sections 1 and 2 and multiply by 1.05
_________ µs
To determine your maximum scan time in ms, divide your controller scan time by 1000.
_________ ms
➀ If a subroutine executes more than once per scan, include each subroutine execution scan time.
B–21
Appendix
C
Valid Addressing Modes and File Types
for Instruction Parameters
This appendix lists all of the available programming instructions along with
their parameters, valid addressing modes, and file types.
Available File Types
The following file types are available:
• O Output
• I Input
• S Status
• B Binary
• T Timer
• C Counter
• R Control
• N Integer
All file types are word addresses, unless otherwise specified.
C–1
Appendix C
Valid Addresssing Modes and File Types
for Instruction Parameters
Available Addressing Modes
The following addressing modes are available:
• immediate
• direct
• indexed direct
Immediate Addressing
Indicates that a constant is a valid file type.
Direct Addressing
The data stored in the specified address is used in the instruction. For
example:
N7:0
ST20:5
T4:8.ACC
Indexed Direct Addressing
You may specify an address as being indexed by placing the “#” character in
front of the address. When an address of this form is encountered in the
program, the processor takes the element number of the address and adds to
it the value contained in the Index Register S:24, then uses the result as the
actual address. For example:
#N7:10 where S:24 = 15
The actual address used by the instruction is N7:25.
C–2
Appendix C
Valid Addressing Modes and File Types
for Instruction Parameters
Description
Instruction
ADD
Add
Instruction
Parameters
Valid Addressing
Mode(s)
Valid File Types
Valid Value
Ranges
source A
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
source B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
AND
And (bit input)
source bit
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
(bit level)
Not Applicable
AND
And (word output)
source A
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
source B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
ANI
And Inverted
source bit
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
(bit level)
Not Applicable
BSL
Bit Shift Left
file
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, N
Not Applicable
control
direct
R (element level)
Not Applicable
bit address
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
(bit level)
Not Applicable
length
(contained in the
control register)
file
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, N
Not Applicable
control
direct
R (element level)
Not Applicable
bit address
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
(bit level)
Not Applicable
length
(contained in the
control register)
BSR
Bit Shift Right
0–2048
0–2048
CLR
Clear
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
COP
Copy File
source
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
destination
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
length
immediate
counter
direct
preset
(contained in the
counter register)
–32,768–32,767
accum
(contained in the
counter register)
–32,768–32,767
CTD
Count Down
1–128; 1–42
when destination
is T,C,R
C (element level)
Not Applicable
C–3
Appendix C
Valid Addresssing Modes and File Types
for Instruction Parameters
Instruction
CTU
DCD
DDV
DIV
ENC
EQU
FFL
FFU
Description
Count Up
Decode 4 to 1 of 16
Double Divide
Divide
Encode 1 of 16 to 4
Equal
FIFO Load
FIFO Unload
Instruction
Parameters
Valid Addressing
Mode(s)
Valid File Types
C (element level)
counter
direct
preset
(contained in the
counter register)
–32,768–32,767
accum
(contained in the
counter register)
–32,768–32,767
source
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source A
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
source B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source A
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
source
direct, indexed direct➀
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
FIFO array
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, N
Not Applicable
FIFO control
direct
R (element level)
Not Applicable
length
(contained in the
control register)
1–128
position
(contained in the
control register)
0–127
FIFO array
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, N
Not Applicable
destination
direct, indexed direct➀
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
FIFO control
direct
R (element level)
Not Applicable
length
(contained in the
control register)
1–128
position
(contained in the
control register)
0–127
➀ Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T, C, or R addresses.
C–4
Valid Value
Ranges
Not Applicable
Appendix C
Valid Addressing Modes and File Types
for Instruction Parameters
Instruction
FLL
FRD
GEQ
GRT
HSC
Description
Fill File
Convert from BCD
Greater Than or Equal
Greater Than
High-Speed Counter
Instruction
Parameters
Valid Addressing
Mode(s)
Valid File Types
Valid Value
Ranges
source
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
destination
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
(element level)
Not Applicable
length
immediate
source
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source A
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
source A
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
type
immediate
counter
direct
preset
(contained in the
counter register)
–32,768–32,767
accum
(contained in the
counter register)
–32,768–32,767
1–128; 1–42
when destination
is T,C,R
0–7, where:
0=up
1=up&reset/hold
2=pulse/direction
3=pule/direction
& reset/hold
4=up/down
5=up/down &
reset/hold
6=encoder
7=encoder &
reset/hold
C5:0. C5:1
(element level)
Not Applicable
HSD
HSC Interrupt Disable
counter
direct
C
Not Applicable
HSE
HSC Interrupt Enable
counter
direct
C
Not Applicable
HSL
HSC Load
counter
direct
C
Not Applicable
source
direct
B, N
Not Applicable
length
IIM
Immediate Input with
Mas
Mask
always 5
slot
direct
I
Not Applicable
mask
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
length
immediate
1–10
C–5
Appendix C
Valid Addresssing Modes and File Types
for Instruction Parameters
Instruction
Description
INT
Interrupt Subroutine
IOM
Immediate Output with
Mas
Mask
Instruction
Parameters
Valid Addressing
Mode(s)
Valid File Types
Not Applicable
slot
direct
O
Not Applicable
mask
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
length
immediate
1–32
JMP
Jump
label number
immediate
0–999
JSR
Jump to Subroutine
subroutine file
number
immediate
3–255
LBL
Label
label number
immediate
0–999
LD
Load
source bit
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
(bit level)
Not Applicable
LDI
Load Inverted
source bit
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
(bit level)
Not Applicable
LEQ
Less Than or Equal To
source A
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
source A
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
source
immediate, direct,
indexed direct➀
O, I, S, B, T, C, R,
N➀
–32,768–32,767
LIFO array
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, N
Not Applicable
LIFO control
direct
R (element level)
Not Applicable
length
(contained in the
control register)
1–128
position
(contained in the
control register)
0–127
LIFO array
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, N
Not Applicable
destination
direct, indexed direct➀
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
LIFO control
direct
R (element level)
Not Applicable
length
(contained in the
control register)
1–128
position
(contained in the
control register)
0–127
LES
LFL
LFU
Less Than
LIFO Load
LIFO Unload
➀ Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T, C, or R addresses.
C–6
Valid Value
Ranges
Appendix C
Valid Addressing Modes and File Types
for Instruction Parameters
Description
Instruction
LIM
Limit Test
MCR
Master Control Reset
MEQ
Mask Comparison for
Equal
a
MOV
MSG
Move
Message
Instruction
Parameter
Valid Addressing
Mode(s)
MVM
NEG
Multiply
Masked Move
Negate
Valid Value
Ranges
low limit
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
test
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
high limit
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
Not Applicable
source
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source mask
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
compare
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
source
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
read/write
immediate
0=read,1=write
target device
immediate
2=500CPU,
4=485CIF
control block
direct
control block
length
immediate
local address
direct
target node
(contained in the
control register)
target address
direct
message length
MUL
Valid File Types
N
Not Applicable
7
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
0–254 for DF1;
1–31 for DH-485
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
0–255
T, C, R
1–13
I, O, S, B, N
1–41
source A
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
source B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source mask
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
C–7
Appendix C
Valid Addresssing Modes and File Types
for Instruction Parameters
Instruction
NEQ
NOT
Not Equal
Logical NOT
Instruction
Parameter
Valid Addressing
Mode(s)
Valid File Types
Valid Value
Ranges
source A
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
source B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
source
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
OR
Or (bit input)
source bit
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
(bit level)
Not Applicable
OR
Or (word output)
source A
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
source B
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
ORI
Or Inverted
source bit
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
(bit level)
Not Applicable
OSR
One-Shot Rising
bit address
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
OUT
Output (or Output
Energize)
bit address
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
RAC
HSC Reset
Accumulator
counter
direct
C
Not Applicable
source
immediate, direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
RES
Reset (timer/counter)
structure
direct
T, C, R
(element level)
Not Applicable
RES
Reset (high-speed
counter)
structure
direct
T, C, R
(element level)
Not Applicable
RET
Return
RST
Reset (or Output
Unlatch)
bit address
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
RTO
Retentive Timer
timer
direct
T (element level)
Not Applicable
time base
immediate
0.01 or 1.00
preset
(contained in the
timer register)
0–32,767
accum
(contained in the
timer register)
0–32,767
SBR
C–8
Description
Subroutine
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Appendix C
Valid Addressing Modes and File Types
for Instruction Parameters
Instruction
SCL
Description
Scale Data
Instruction
Parameter
Valid Addressing
Mode(s)
Valid File Types
Valid Value
Ranges
source
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
rate
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
offset
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
SET
Set (or Output Latch)
bit address
direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
SQC
Sequencer Compare
file
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, N
Not Applicable
mask
immediate, direct,
indexed direct➀
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
source
direct, indexed direct➀
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
control
direct
R (element level)
Not Applicable
length
(contained in the
control register)
1–255
position
(contained in the
control register)
0–255
file
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, N
Not Applicable
source
direct, indexed direct➀
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
control
direct
R (element level)
Not Applicable
length
(contained in the
control register)
1–255
position
(contained in the
control register)
0–255
file
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, N
Not Applicable
mask
direct, indexed direct➀
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
destination
direct, indexed direct➀
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
control
direct
R (element level)
Not Applicable
SQL
SQO
SQR
Sequencer Load
Sequencer Output
Square Root
length
1–255
position
0–255
source
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
STD
Selectable Timed
Disable
Not Applicable
STE
Selectable Timed
Enable
Not Applicable
➀ Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T, C, or R addresses.
C–9
Appendix C
Valid Addresssing Modes and File Types
for Instruction Parameters
Instruction
STS
SUB
Selectable Timed Start
Subtract
SUS
Suspend
TND
Temporary End
TOD
Convert to BCD
TOF
TON
XOR
C–10
Description
Timer Off-Delay
Timer On-Delay
Exclusive OR
Instruction
Parameter
Valid Addressing
Mode(s)
Valid File Types
Valid Value
Ranges
file
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
always equal 5
time
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
0–255
source A
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,76
f-min–f-max
source B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
f-min–f-max
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
suspend ID
immediate,
–32,768–32,767
Not Applicable
source
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
destination
direct
O, I. S. B. T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
timer
direct
T (element level)
Not Applicable
time base
immediate
0.01 or 1.00
preset
(contained in the
timer register)
0–32,767
accum
(contained in the
timer register)
0–32,767
timer
direct
time base
immediate
0.01 or 1.00
preset
(contained in the
timer register)
0–32,767
accum
(contained in the
timer register)
0–32,767
address A
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
address B
immediate, direct,
indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
–32,768–32,767
destination
direct, indexed direct
O, I, S, B, T, C, R, N
Not Applicable
T (element level)
Not Applicable
Appendix
D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
Use the information in this appendix to understand the differences in
communication protocols. The following protocols are supported from the
RS-232 communication channel:
• DF1 Full-Duplex and DF1 Half-Duplex Slave
All MicroLogix 1000 controllers support the DF1 full-duplex protocol.
Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers also
support DF1 half-duplex slave protocol. Note that the MicroLogix 1000
HHP cannot be used to select or configure the DF1 half-duplex slave
protocol.
• DH-485
Series C or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers can
communicate on DH-485 networks using an AIC+ Advanced Interface
Converter.
For information about required network connecting equipment, see chapter 3,
Connecting the System.
RS-232 Communication
Interface
RS-232 is an Electronics Industries Association (EIA) standard that specifies
the electrical, mechanical, and functional characteristics for serial binary
communication. It provides you with a variety of system configuration
possibilities. (RS-232 is a definition of electrical characteristics; it is not a
protocol.)
One of the biggest benefits of the RS-232 interface is that it lets you integrate
telephone and radio modems into your control system (using the appropriate
DF1 protocol only: not DH-485 protocol). The distance over which you are
able to communicate with certain system devices is virtually limitless.
D–1
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol
DF1 Full-Duplex communication protocol combines data transparency
(ANSI — American National Standards Institute — specification
subcategory D1) and two-way simultaneous transmission with embedded
responses (subcategory F1).
The MicroLogix 1000 controllers support the DF1 Full-Duplex protocol via
RS-232 connection to external devices, such as computers, the Hand-Held
Programmer (catalog number 1761-HHP-B30), or other MicroLogix 1000
controllers. (For information on connecting to the Hand-Held Programmer,
see chapter 3, Connecting the System).
DF1 Full-Duplex Operation
DF1 Full-Duplex protocol (also referred to as DF1 point-to-point protocol) is
useful where RS-232 point-to-point communication is required. This type of
protocol supports simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both
directions. DF1 protocol controls message flow, detects and signals errors,
and retries if errors are detected.
DF1 Full-Duplex Configuration Parameters
When the system mode driver is DF1 Full-Duplex, the following parameters
can be changed:
Parameter
Baud Rate
Node Address
Parity
Stop Bits
Error Detection
DLE NAK
received
DLE ENQ
received
ACK Timeout
Duplicate Packet
Detection
Options
Toggles between the communication rate of 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800➀, 9600, 19200, and 38400➀.
Valid range is 0–254 decimal for MicroLogix 1000 Series C and later
discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog. Not configurable for
MicroLogix 1000 Series A and B discrete.
None
None
None
Default
9600➁
1
No Parity
1
CRC
None
N retries③
None
N retries③
None
1s
None
Enabled
Control Line
None
No
Handshaking
Embedded
Responses
None
Enabled
➀ Applicable only to MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers.
➁ If retentive communication data is lost, default is 1200 for MicroLogix 1000 Series A, B, or C discrete only. For
MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog, if retentive communication data is lost,
baud rate defaults to 9600.
③ N=255 for MicroLogix 1000 Series A and B discrete. N=6 for MicroLogix 1000 Series C and later discrete and all
MicroLogix 1000 analog.
D–2
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
Example: DF1 Full-Duplex Connections
For information about required network connecting equipment, see chapter 3,
Connecting the System.
Micro Controller
Optical Isolator➀
(recommended)
1761-CBL-PM02
Personal Computer
Modem
Cable
Personal Computer
Modem
Optical Isolator➀
(recommended)
Modem
Micro Controller
1761-CBL-PM02
➀ We recommend using an AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, as your optical isolator. See page 3–8 and
3–9 for specific AIC+ cabling information.
D–3
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
DF1 Half-Duplex Slave
Protocol
DF1 half-duplex slave protocol provides a multi-drop single master/multiple
slave network. In contrast to DF1 full-duplex, communication takes place in
one direction at a time. You can use the RS-232 port on the MicroLogix as
both a half-duplex programming port, as well as a half-duplex peer-to-peer
messaging port.
The master device initiates all communication by “polling” each slave
device. The slave device may only transmit message packets when it is
polled by the master. It is the master’s responsibility to poll each slave on a
regular and sequential basis to allow slaves to send message packets back to
the master. During a polling sequence, the master polls a slave either
repeatedly until the slave indicates that it has no more message packets to
transmit or just one time per polling sequence, depending on how the master
is configured.
An additional feature of the DF1 half-duplex protocol is that it is possible for
a slave device to enable a MSG instruction in its ladder program to send or
request data to/from another slave. When the initiating slave is polled, the
MSG instruction command packet is sent to the master. The master
recognizes that the command packet is not intended for it but for another
slave, so the master immediately rebroadcasts the command packet to the
intended slave. When the intended slave is polled, it sends a reply packet to
the master with the data the first slave requested. The master again
recognizes that the reply packet is intended for another slave, so the master
immediately rebroadcasts the reply packet to that slave. This slave-to-slave
transfer is a function of the master device and is also used by programming
software to upload and download programs to processors on the DF1
half-duplex link.
Several Allen-Bradley products support DF1 half-duplex master protocol.
They include the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04,and SLC 5/05, and enhanced
PLC-5® processors. Rockwell Software WINtelligent LINX and RSLinx
(version 2.x and higher) also support DF1 half-duplex master protocol.
Typically, the master maintains an active node table that indicates which
slaves are active (slaves that responded the last time they were polled) and
which slaves are inactive (slaves that did not respond the last time they were
polled). The active slaves are polled on a regular basis. The inactive slaves
are only polled occasionally to check if any have come back online.
DF1 half-duplex supports up to 255 devices (address 0 to 254) with address
255 reserved for master broadcasts. The MicroLogix supports broadcast
reception but cannot initiate a broadcast command. The MicroLogix
supports half-duplex modems using Request-To-Send/Clear-To-Send
(RTS/CTS) hardware handshaking.
D–4
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
DF1 Half-Duplex Slave Configuration Parameters
When the system mode driver is DF1 half-duplex slave the following
parameters can be viewed and changed only when the programming software
is online with the processor. The DF1 half-duplex slave parameters are not
stored as part of the controller downloadable image (with the exception of the
baud rate and node address). If a failed MicroLogix 1000 controller is
replaced and the backed-up controller image is downloaded to the
replacement controller, these parameters remain at default until manually
changed. Therefore, be sure to fully document any non-default settings to
the DF1 half-duplex slave configuration parameters.
Parameter
Node Address
Description
Toggles between the communication rate of 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19,200, and 38.4K.
Valid range is 0–254 decimal.
Control Line
Toggles between No Handshaking and Half-Duplex Modem.
Baud Rate
Duplicate
Packet
Detection
Error Detection
RTS Off Delay
RTS Send Delay
Poll Timeout
Pre-send Time
Delay
Message
Retries
EOT
Suppression
Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message. Duplicate
packets may be sent under “noisy” communication conditions when the
sender’s retries are not set to 0. Toggles between Enabled and
Disabled.
Toggles between CRC and BCC.
Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent
to the modem and when RTS is deactivated. Gives modem extra time
to transmit the last character of a packet. The valid range is 0–255 and
can be set in increments of 5 ms.
Specifies the time delay between setting RTS (request to send) until
checking for the CTS (clear to send) response. For use with modems
that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of
RTS. The valid range is 0–255 and can be set in increments of 5 ms.
Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG
instruction. It is the amount of time that the slave device waits for a poll
from the master device. If the slave device does not receive a poll
within the Poll Timeout, a MSG instruction error is generated and the
ladder program needs to requeue the MSG instruction. The valid range
is 0–65535 and can be set in increments of 20 ms. If you are using a
MSG instruction, it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero
not be used. Poll Timeout is disabled if set to zero.
Delay time before transmission. Required for 1761-NET-AIC physical
half-duplex networks. The 1761-NET-AIC needs delay time to change
from transmit to receive mode. The valid range is 0–255 and can be
set in increments of 5 ms.
Specifies the number of times a slave device attempts to resend a
message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the master
device. For use in noisy environments where message packets may
become corrupted in transmission. The valid range is 0–255.
Slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued. Saves
modem transmission power when there is no message to transmit.
Toggles between Yes and No.
Default
9600
1
No Handshaking
Enabled
CRC
0
0
3000 (60s)
0
3
No
D–5
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
RS-232
(DF1 Protocol)
Modem
Modem
MicroLogix 1000
Programmable
Controller (Series D)
SLC 5/03 Processor
Modular Controller
Rockwell Software WINtelligent LINX, RSLinx 2.0 (or higher),
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04 and SLC 5/05, or PLC-5 processors
configured for DF1 Half-Duplex Master
Modem
Modem
MicroLogix 1000
Programmable
Controller (Series D)
Modem
MicroLogix 1000
Programmable
Controller (Series D)
Modem
SLC 500
Fixed I/O Controller
with 1747-KE
Interface Module
Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave on a Multi-drop
Link
When communication is between either your programming software and a
MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller or between two MicroLogix
Programmable Controllers via a slave-to-slave connection on a larger
multi-drop link, the devices depend on a DF1 Master to give each of them
polling permission to transmit in a timely manner. As the number of slaves
increases on the link (up to 254), the time between when your programming
software or the MicroLogix Controller is polled also increases. This increase
in time may become larger if you are using low baud rates.
As these time periods grow, the following values may need to be changed to
avoid loss of communication:
• programming software - increase poll timeout and reply timeout values
• MicroLogix Programmable Controller - increase poll timeout
Ownership Timeout
When a program download sequence is started by a software package to
download a ladder logic program to a MicroLogix controller, the software
takes “file ownership” of the processor. File ownership prevents other
devices from reading from or writing to the processor while the download is
in process. If the controller were to respond to a device’s read commands
during the download, the processor could respond with incorrect information.
Similarly, if the controller were to accept information from other devices, the
information could be lost because the program download sequence could
immediately overwrite the information. Once the download is completed,
the programming software returns the file ownership to the controller, so
other devices can communicate with it again.
D–6
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
With the addition of DF1 half-duplex slave protocol, the controller clears the
file ownership if no supported commands are received from the owner within
the timeout period. If the file ownership were not cleared after a download
sequence interruption, the processor would not accept commands from any
other devices because it would assume another device still had file
ownership.
If a download sequence is interrupted due to noise caused by electromagnetic
interference, discontinue communications to the controller for the ownership
timeout period and restart the program download. The ownership timeout
period is set to 60 seconds as a default for all protocols. However, if you are
using DF1 half-duplex, and the poll timeout value is set to greater than 60
seconds, the poll timeout value is used instead of the ownership timeout.
After the timeout, you can re-establish communications with the processor
and try the program download again. The only other way to clear file
ownership is to cycle power on the processor.
Using Modems with MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers
The types of modems that you can use with MicroLogix 1000 controllers
include dial-up phone modems, leased-line modems, radio modems, and line
drivers. For point-to-point full-duplex modem connections that do not
require any modem handshaking signals to operate, use DF1 full-duplex
protocol. For point-to-multipoint modem connections or for point-to-point
modem connections that require Request-to-Send/Clear-To-Send (RTS/CTS)
handshaking, use DF1 half-duplex slave protocol. In this case, one (and only
one) of the other devices must be configured for DF1 half-duplex master
protocol. Do not attempt to use DH-485 protocol through modems under any
circumstance.
Important: Only Series D or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and
all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support RTS/CTS
modem handshaking and only when configured for DF1
half-duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to
“Half-Duplex Modem”. No other modem handshaking lines
(i.e. Data Set Ready, Carrier Detect and Data Terminal Ready)
are supported by any MicroLogix 1000 controllers.
Dial-Up Phone Modems
Dial-up phone line modems support point-to-point full-duplex
communications. Normally a MicroLogix 1000 controller, on the receiving
end of the dial-up connection, is configured for DF1 full-duplex protocol.
The modem connected to the MicroLogix 1000 controller must support
auto-answer and must not require any modem handshaking signals from the
MicroLogix 1000 (i.e., DTR or RTS) in order to operate. The MicroLogix
1000 has no means to cause its modem to initiate or disconnect a phone call,
so this must be done from the site of the remote modem.
D–7
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
Leased-Line Modems
Leased-line modems are used with dedicated phone lines that are typically
leased from the local phone company. The dedicated lines may be in a
point-to-point topology supporting full-duplex communications between two
modems or in a point-to-multipoint topology supporting half-duplex
communications between three or more modems. In the point-to-point
topology, configure the MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 full-duplex
protocol (as long as the modems used do not require DTR or RTS to be high
in order to operate). In the point-to-multipoint topology, configure the
MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 half-duplex slave protocol with the
control line parameter set to “Half-Duplex Modem”.
Radio Modems
Radio modems may be implemented in a point-to-point topology supporting
either half-duplex or full-duplex communications, or in a point-to-multipoint
topology supporting half-duplex communications between three or more
modems. In the point-to-point topology using full-duplex radio modems,
configure the MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 full-duplex protocol (as
long as the modems used do not require DTR or RTS to be high in order to
operate). In the point-to-point topology using half-duplex radio modems, or
point-to-multipoint topology using half-duplex radio modems, configure the
MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 half-duplex slave protocol. If these
radio modems require RTS/CTS handshaking, configure the control line
parameter to “Half-Duplex Modem”.
Line Drivers
Line drivers, also called short-haul “modems”, do not actually modulate the
serial data, but rather condition the electrical signals to operate reliably over
long transmission distances (up to several miles). Allen-Bradley’s AIC+
Advanced Interface Converter is a line driver that converts an RS-232
electrical signal into an RS-485 electrical signal, increasing the signal
transmission distance from 50 to 4000 feet. In a point-to-point line driver
topology, configure the MicroLogix 1000 controller for DF1 full-duplex
protocol (as long as the line drivers do not require DTR or RTS to be high in
order to operate). In a point-to-multipoint line driver topology, configure the
MicroLgoix 1000 controllers for DF1 half-duplex slave protocol. If these
line drivers require RTS/CTS handshaking, configure the control line
parameter to “Half-Duplex Modem”.
D–8
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
DH-485 Communication
Protocol
The information in this section describes the DH-485 network functions,
network architecture, and performance characteristics. It also helps you plan
and operate the MicroLogix 1000 on a DH-485 network.
Important: Only Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and
all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support the DH-485
network.
DH-485 Network Description
The DH-485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices
that co-exist on a single pair of wires. This protocol uses RS-485 half-duplex
as its physical interface. (RS-485 is a definition of electrical characteristics;
it is not a protocol.) RS-485 uses devices that are capable of co-existing on a
common data circuit, thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices.
The DH-485 network offers:
•
•
•
•
•
interconnection of 32 devices
multi-master capability
token passing access control
the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network
maximum network length of 1219 m (4000 ft)
The DH-485 protocol supports two classes of devices: initiators and
responders. All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message
transfers. To determine which initiator has the right to transmit, a token
passing algorithm is used.
The following section describes the protocol used to control message
transfers on the DH-485 network.
DH-485 Token Rotation
A node holding the token can send any valid packet onto the network. Each
node is allowed only one transmission (plus two retries) each time it receives
the token. After a node sends one message packet, it attempts to give the
token to its successor by sending a “token pass” packet to its successor.
If no network activity occurs, the initiator sends the token pass packet again.
After two retries (a total of three tries), the initiator attempts to find a new
successor.
The allowable range of the node address of an initiator is 0 to 31. The
allowable address range for all responders is 1 to 31. There must be at least
one initiator on the network.
D–9
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
DH-485 Configuration Parameters
When the system mode driver is DH-485 Master, the following parameters
can be changed:
Parameter
Baud Rate
Node Address
Max Node
Address
Token Hold
Factor
Description
Toggles between the communication rate of 9600 and 19200.
This is the node address of the processor on the DH-485 network. The
valid range is 1–31.
This is the maximum node address of an active processor. (fixed at 31)
Set the node addresses of the devices on the network to low, sequential
numbers for best network performance. Then, set the maximum node
address to the value of the last node.
Determines the number of transactions allowed to make each DH-485
token rotation. (fixed at 1)
Default
19200
1
31
1
DH-485 Network Initialization
Network initialization begins when a period of inactivity exceeding the time
of a link dead timeout is detected by an initiator on the network. When the
time for a link dead timeout is exceeded, usually the initiator with the lowest
address claims the token. When an initiator has the token, it begins to build
the network. The network requires at least one initiator to initialize it.
Building a network begins when the initiator that claimed the token tries to
pass the token to the successor node. If the attempt to pass the token fails, or
if the initiator has no established successor (for example, when it powers up),
it begins a linear search for a successor starting with the node above it in the
addressing.
When the initiator finds another active initiator, it passes the token to that
node, which repeats the process until the token is passed all the way around
the network to the first node. At this point, the network is in a state of
normal operation.
Devices that use the DH-485 Network
In addition to the Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and
all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers, the devices shown in the following
table also support the DH-485 network.
Important: You cannot connect the Hand-Held Programmer,
1761-HHP-B30, to the AIC+.
D–10
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
Description
1747-L511,
-L514,
-L524,
-L531, -L532
-L541,
-L542, -L543
-L551, -L552
-L553
SLC 500
Processors
BASIC Module
1746-BAS
DH+/DH-485
Gateway
1785-KA5
Installation
Requirement
Function
Publication
SLC Chassis
These processors support a variety of I/O
requirements and functionality.
1747-6.2
SLC Chassis
Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to
foreign devices. Program in BASIC to
interface the 3 channels (2 RS232 and 1
DH-485) to printers, modems, or the DH-485
network for data collection.
1746-6.1
1746-6.2
1746-6.3
(1771) PLC
Chassis
Provides communication between stations
on the PLC-5 (DH+) and SLC 500
(DH-485) networks. Enables communication
and data transfer from PLC to SLC 500 on
DH-485 network. Also enables programming
software programming or data acquisition
across DH+ to DH-485.
1785-6.5.5
1785-1.21
2760-ND001
2760-RB
Flexible Interface
Module
(1771) PLC
Chassis
Provides an interface for SLC 500 (using
protocol cartridge 2760-SFC3) to other A-B
PLCs and devices. Three configurable
channels are available to interface with Bar
Code, Vision, RF, Dataliner, and PLC
systems.
1784-KTX,
-KTXD
PC DH-485 IM
IBM XT/AT
Computer Bus
Provides DH-485 using RSLinx
1784-6.5.22
1784-PCMK
PCMCIA IM
PCMCIA slot in
computer and
Interchange
Provides DH-485 using RSLinx
1784-6.5.19
1747-PT1
Hand-Held
Terminal
NA
Provides hand-held programming,
monitoring, configuring, and troubleshooting
capabilities for SLC 500 processors.
1747-NP002
1747-DTAM,
2707-L8P1,
-L8P2, -L40P1,
-L40P2,
-V40P1,
-V40P2,
-V40P2N,
-M232P3, and
-M485P3
DTAM,
DTAM Plus, and
DTAM Micro
Operator
Interfaces
Panel Mount
Provides electronic operator interface for
SLC 500 processors.
1747-ND013
2707-800,
2707-803
2711-K5A2,
-B5A2, -K5A5,
-B5A5, -K5A1,
-B5A1, -K9A2,
-T9A2, -K9A5,
-T9A5, -K9A1,
and -T9A1
PanelView 550
and PanelView
900 Operator
Terminals
Panel Mount
Provides electronic operator interface for
SLC 500 processors.
2711-802,
2711-816
NA = Not Applicable
D–11
Reference
Catalog
Number
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
Important DH-485 Network Planning Considerations
Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any hardware.
Listed below are some of the factors that can affect system performance:
• amount of electrical noise, temperature, and humidity in the network
•
•
•
•
•
environment
number of devices on the network
connection and grounding quality in installation
amount of communication traffic on the network
type of process being controlled
network configuration
The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before installing
a network are discussed in the following sections.
Hardware Considerations
You need to decide the length of the communication cable, where you route
it, and how to protect it from the environment where it will be installed.
When the communication cable is installed, you need to know how many
devices are to be connected during installation and how many devices will be
added in the future. The following sections help you understand and plan the
network.
Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable
You must install an AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter, catalog number
1761-NET-AIC, for each node on the network. If you plan to add nodes
later, provide additional advanced interface converters during the initial
installation to avoid recabling after the network is in operation.
The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219 m (4000 ft). This is
the total cable distance from the first node to the last node on the network.
D–12
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
Planning Cable Routes
Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from
electrical interference:
• Keep the communication cable at least 1.52 m (5 ft) from any electric
motors, transformers, rectifiers, generators, arc welders, induction
furnaces, or sources of microwave radiation.
• If you must run the cable across power feed lines, run the cable at right
angles to the lines.
• If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or
conduit, keep the communication cable at least 0.15 m (6 in.) from ac
power lines of less than 20A, 0.30 m (1 ft) from lines greater than 20A,
but only up to 100k VA, and 0.60 m (2 ft) from lines of 100k VA or more.
• If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit,
keep the communication cable at least 0.08 m (3 in.) from ac power lines
of less than 20A, 0.15 m (6 in.) from lines greater than 20A, but only up
to 100k VA, and 0.30 m (1 ft) from lines of 100k VA or more.
Running the communication cable through conduit provides extra
protection from physical damage and electrical interference. If you route
the cable through conduit, follow these additional recommendations:
–
–
–
–
–
interference. You can use aluminum conduit in non-critical areas.
Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and ferromagnetic
conduit. Make an electrical connection around the plastic connector
(use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge wire or wire braid) to hold both
sections at the same potential.
Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the building
earth ground.
Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable.
Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit. The conduit should
contain only serial communication cables.
Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and
environmental specifications.
For more information on planning cable routes, see Industrial Automation
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Publication Number 1770-4.1.
Software Considerations
Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the
parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network. The
following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on
network performance:
• number of nodes on the network
• addresses of those nodes
• baud rate
The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to
select parameters for optimum network performance (speed). See your
programming software’s user manual for more information.
D–13
Reference
– Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
Number of Nodes
The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time
between nodes. Unnecessary nodes (such as a second programming terminal
that is not being used) slow the data transfer rate. The maximum number of
nodes on the network is 32.
Setting Node Addresses
The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in
sequential order. Initiators, such as personal computers, should be assigned
the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the
network. The valid range for the MicroLogix 1000 controllers is 1–31
(controllers cannot be node 0). The default setting is 1. The node address is
stored in the controller status file (S:16L).
Setting Controller Baud Rate
The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate, which is
19200. This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix 1000 device on the
DH-485 network. All devices must be at the same baud rate. This rate is
stored in the controller status file (S:16H).
The following network diagrams provide examples of how to connect Series
C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog
controllers to the DH-485 network using the AIC+. For more information on
the AIC+, see the Advanced Interface Converter and DeviceNet Interface
Installation Instructions, Publication 1761-5.11.
D–14
Reference
Example DH-485 Connections
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
DH-485 Network with a MicroLogix 1000 Controller
PC
MicroLogix 1000 (Series C or later discrete or all analog)
APS
1761-CBL-AM00
or
1761-CBLHM02
PC to port 1
or port 2
connection from
port 1 or port 2
to MicroLogix
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
1761-CBL-AP00
or
1761-CBL-PM02
1761-CBL-AP00
or
1761-CBL-PM02
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
24V dc
(user supply needed if not connected
to a MicroLogix 1000 controller)
24V dc
(user supplied)
MicroLogix DH-485 Network
1747-CP3
or
1761-CBL-AC00
Typical 3-Node Network
PanelView 550
MicroLogix 1000
(Series C or later discrete or all analog)
RJ45 port
1761-CBL-AS09
or
1761-CBL-AS03
1761-CBL-AM00
or
1761-CBLHM02
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
PC
APS
Selection Switch Up
3-Node Network
(not expandable)
24V dc
(Not needed in this
configuration since the
MicroLogix 1000 provides
power to the AIC+ via port 2.)
1747-CP3 or 1761-CBL-AC00
DB-9 RS-232 port
mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port
DH-485/DF1 port
D–15
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
Networked Operator Interface Device and MicroLogix Controller
PanelView 550
PC
APS
PC to port 1
or port 2
RS-232 port
NULL modem adapter
connection from NULL modem
adapter to port 1 or port 2
1761-CBL-AP00
or
1761-CBL-PM02
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
24V dc
(user supplied)
24V dc
(user supplied)
DH-485 Network
1747-CP3
or
1761-CBL-AC00
1747-AIC
AIC+
(1761-NET-AIC)
Selection
Switch Up
1761-CBL-AM00
or
1761-CBL-HM02
24V dc
(Not needed in this
configuration since the
MicroLogix 1000
provides power to the
AIC+ via port 2.)
MicroLogix 1000
(Series C or later discrete or all analog)
SLC 5/03 processor
DB-9 RS-232 port
mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port
DH-485/DF1 port
D–16
Reference
1761-CBL-AP00
or
1761-CBL-PM02
1747-CP3
or
1761-CBL-AC00
Appendix D
Understanding the Communication Protocols
MicroLogix Remote Packet Support
Series D MicroLogix discrete controllers and all MicroLogix analog
controllers can respond to communication packets (or commands) that do not
originate on the local DH-485 network. This is useful in installations where
communication is needed between the DH-485 and DH+ networks.
The example below shows how to send messages from a PLC device or a PC
on the DH+ network to a MicroLogix 1000 controller on the DH-485
network. This method uses an SLC 5/04 processor bridge connection.
When using this method:
• PLC-5 devices can send read and write commands to MicroLogix
controllers.
• MicroLogix 1000 controllers can respond to MSG instructions received.
The MicroLogix controllers cannot initiate MSG instructions to devices
on the DH+ network.
• PC can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers.
• PC can do remote programming of MicroLogix controllers.
PLC-5
PLC-5
DH+ Network
SLC 5/04
Modular I/O Controller
MicroLogix 1000
Programmable
Controller
DH-485 Network
SLC 5/03 System
MicroLogix 1000
Programmable
Controller
MicroLogix 1000
Programmable
Controller
D–17
Appendix
E
Application Example Programs
This appendix is designed to illustrate various instructions described
previously in this manual. Application example programs include:
• paper drilling machine using most of the software instructions
• time-driven sequencer using TON and SQO instructions
• event-driven sequencer using SQC and SQO instructions
• bottle line example using the HSC instruction (up/down counter)
• pick and place machine example using the HSC instruction (Quadrature
encoder with reset and hold)
• RPM calculation using HSC, RTO, timer, and math instructions
• on/off circuit using basic, program flow, and application specific
instructions
• spray booth using bit shift and FIFO instructions
• adjustable time delay example using timer instructions
Because of the variety of uses for this information, the user of and those
responsible for applying this information must satisfy themselves as to the
acceptability of each application and use of the program. In no event will
Allen-Bradley Company be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential
damages resulting from the use of application of this information.
The illustrations, charts, and examples shown in this appendix are intended
solely to illustrate the principles of the controller and some of the methods
used to apply them. Particularly because of the many requirements
associated with any particular installation, Allen-Bradley Company cannot
assume responsibility or liability for actual use based upon the illustrative
uses and applications.
E–1
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Paper Drilling Machine
Application Example
For a detailed explanation of:
• LD, LDI, OUT, RES, SET, RST, and OSR instructions, see chapter 8.
• EQU and GEQ instructions, see chapter 9.
• CLR, ADD, and SUB instructions, see chapter 10.
• MOV and FRD instructions, see chapter 11.
• JSR and RET instructions, see chapter 12.
• INT and SQO instructions, see chapter 13.
• HSC, HSL, and RAC instructions, see chapter 14.
This machine can drill three different hole patterns into bound manuals. The
program tracks drill wear and signals the operator that the bit needs
replacement. The machine shuts down if the signal is ignored by the
operator.
OPERATOR PANEL
Start I/6
Stop I/7
Thumbwheel for
Thickness in 1/4 in.
Change Drill Soon
O/4
Change Drill Now
O/6
5 Hole
Drill Change Reset
3 Hole
I/11–I/14
(Keyswitch)
I/8
Drill Home
I/5
Drilled
Holes
Drill Depth
I/4
Quadrature A–B Encoder and Drive
I/0 I/1
7 Hole
I/9–I/10
Drill On/Off O/1
Drill Retract O/2
Drill Forward O/3
Photo–Eye Reset I/2
Counter Hold I/3
Photo–Eye
Reflector
Conveyor Enable wired in series to the Drive O/5
Conveyor Drive Start/Stop wired in series to the Drive O/0
20226
Paper Drilling Machine Operation Overview
Undrilled books are placed onto a conveyor taking them to a single spindle
drill. Each book moves down the conveyor until it reaches the first drilling
position. The conveyor stops moving and the drill lowers and drills the first
hole. The drill then retracts and the conveyor moves the same book to the
second drilling position. The drilling process is repeated until there are the
desired holes per book.
E–2
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Drill Mechanism Operation
When the operator presses the start button, the drill motor turns on. After the
book is in the first drilling position, the conveyor subroutine sets a drill
sequence start bit and the drill moves toward the book. When the drill has
drilled through the book, the drill body hits a limit switch and causes the drill
to retract up out of the book. When the drill body is fully retracted, the drill
body hits another limit switch indicating that it is in the home position.
Hitting the second limit switch unlatches the drill sequence start bit and
causes the conveyor to move the book to the next drilling position.
Conveyor Operation
When the start button is pressed, the conveyor moves the books forward. As
the first book moves close to the drill, the book trips a photo-eye sensor.
This tells the machine where the leading edge of the book is. Based on the
position of the selector switch, the conveyor moves the book until it reaches
the first drilling position. The drill sequence start bit is set and the first hole
is drilled. The drill sequence start bit is now unlatched and the conveyor
moves the same book to the second drilling position. The drilling process is
repeated until there are the desired holes per book. The machine then looks
for another book to break the photo-eye beam and the process is repeated.
The operator can change the number of drilled holes by changing the selector
switch.
Drill Calculation and Warning
The program tracks the number of holes drilled and the number of inches of
material that have been drilled through using a thumbwheel. The
thumbwheel is set to the thickness of the book per 1/4 inch. (If the book is 1
1/2 inches thick, the operator would set the thumbwheel to 6.) When 25,000
inches have been drilled, the Change Drill Soon pilot light turns on. When
25,500 inches have been drilled, the Change Drill Soon pilot light flashes.
When 26,000 inches have been drilled, the Change Drill Now pilot light
turns on and the machine turns off. The operator changes drill bits and then
resets the internal drill wear counter by turning the Drill Change Reset
keyswitch.
E–3
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Paper Drilling Machine Ladder Program
Rung 2:0
Initializes the high-speed counter each time the RRUN mode is entered.
The high-speed counter data area (N7:5 – N7:9) corresponds with the
starting address (source address) of the HSL instruction. The HSC
instruction is disabled each entry into the RRUN mode until the first time
that it is executed as true. (The high preset was ”pegged” on
initialization to prevent a high preset interrupt from occurring during
the initialization process.)
| 1’st
Output Mask
|
| Pass
(only use bit 0
|
|
ie. O:0/0)
|
|
S:1
+MOV–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–+MOVE
+–+–|
|
15
| |Source
1| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:5| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| High Output Pattern | |
|
|
(turn off O:0/0)
| |
|
|
| |
|
| +MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MOVE
+–+ |
|
| |Source
0| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:6| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| High Preset Value
| |
|
| (counts to next hole)| |
|
| |
|
| +MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MOVE
+–+ |
|
| |Source
32767| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:7| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| Low output pattern | |
|
|
(turn on O:0/0
| |
|
|
each reset)
| |
|
| |
|
| +MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MOVE
+–+ |
|
| |Source
1| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:8| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| Low preset value
| |
|
| (cause low preset
| |
|
|
int at reset)
| |
|
| |
|
| +MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MOVE
+–+ |
|
| |Source
0| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:9| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| High Speed Counter | |
|
|
| |
|
| +HSL–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+ –+HSC LOAD
+–+ |
|
|Counter
C5:0|
|
|
|Source
N7:5|
|
|
|Length
5|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
E–4
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 2:1
This HSC instruction is not placed in the high-speed counter interrupt
subroutine. If this instruction were placed in the interrupt subroutine,
the high-speed counter could never be started or initialized (because an
interrupt must first occur in order to scan the high-speed counter
interrupt subroutine).
|
High Speed Counter
|
|
+HSC––––––––––––––––––––+
|
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HIGH SPEED COUNTER
+–(CU)–|
|
|Type Encoder (Res,Hld)+–(CD) |
|
|Counter
C5:0+–(DN) |
|
|High Preset
1250|
|
|
|Accum
1|
|
|
+–––––––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:2
Forces a high-speed counter low preset interrupt to occur each RRUN mode
entry. An interrupt can only occur on the transition of the high-speed
counter accum to a preset value (accum reset to 1, then 0). This is done
to allow the high-speed counter interrupt subroutine sequencers to
initialize. The order of high-speed counter initialization is: (1)load
high-speed counter parameters (2)execute HSL instruction (3)execute true
HSC instruction (4)(optional) force high-speed counter interrupt to
occur.
| 1’st
High Speed Counter
|
| Pass
|
|
S:1
+RAC––––––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–+RESET TO ACCUM VALUE +–+–|
|
15
| |Counter
C5:0| | |
|
| |Source
1| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| +–––––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
High Speed
| |
|
|
Counter
| |
|
|
C5:0
| |
|
+–––(RES)–––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 2:3
Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed. However,
another condition must also be met before we start the conveyor: the
drill bit must be in its fully retracted position (home). This rung also
stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed.
|
START
|Drill
STOP
|change
|
Machine
|
|
Button
|Home LS
Button
|drill bit |
RUN
|
|
|NOW
|
Latch
|
|
I:0
I:0
I:0
O:0
B3
|
|–+––––] [––––––––][–––––+––––]/[––––––––]/[––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
➀
0
|
| |
6
5
|
7
6
| | Machine
|
|
| |
RUN
|
|
| | Latch
|
|
| |
B3
|
|
| +––––] [––––––––––––––––+
|
|
0
|
Rung 2:4
Applies the above start logic to the conveyor and drill motor.
| Machine
Drill |Conveyor
|
|
RUN
Home LS
|Enable
|
| Latch
|
|
B3
I:0
O:0
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+––––] [––––––––( )–––––+–|
|
0
|
5
5
| |
|
|
Drill
| |
|
|
Motor ON
| |
|
|
O:0
| |
|
+–––––––––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
1
|
➀ This instruction accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this
instruction if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
E–5
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 2:5
Calls the drill sequence subroutine. This subroutine manages the
operation of a drilling sequence and restarts the conveyor upon completion
of the drilling sequence.
|
+JSR–––––––––––––––+ |
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+JUMP TO SUBROUTINE+–|
|
|SBR file number 6| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 2:6
Calls the subroutine that tracks the amount of wear on the current drill
bit.
|
+JSR–––––––––––––––+ |
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+JUMP TO SUBROUTINE+–|
|
|SBR file number 7| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 2:7
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
Rung 4:0
Resets the hole count sequencers each time that the low preset is reached.
The low preset has been set to zero to cause an interrupt to occur each
time that a reset occurs. The low preset is reached anytime that a reset
C5:0 or hardware reset occurs. This ensures that the first preset value
is loaded into the high–speed counter at each entry into the RRUN mode and
each time that the external reset signal is activated.
|
interrupt
3-hole
|
|
occurred
preset
|
|
due to
sequencer
|
|
low preset
|
|
reached
|
| +INT––––––––––––––––––––+
C5:0
R6:4
|
|–+INTERRUPT SUBROUTINE
+––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––+–––(RES)––––+–|
| +–––––––––––––––––––––––+
IL
|
| |
|
| 5-hole
| |
|
| peset
| |
|
| sequencer | |
|
|
R6:5
| |
|
+–––(RES)––––+ |
|
|
| |
|
| 7-hole
| |
|
| preset
| |
|
| sequencer | |
|
|
R6:6
| |
|
+–––(RES)––––+ |
|
|
E–6
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 4:1➀
Keeps track of the hole number that is being drilled and loads the correct
high-speed counter preset based on the hole count. This rung is only
active when the ”hole selector switch” is in the ”3-hole” position. The
sequencer uses step 0 as a null step upon reset. It uses the last step as
a ”go forever” in anticipation of the ”end-of-manual” hard-wired external
reset.
| hole
|hole
3-hole
|
| selector |selector
preset
|
| switch
|switch
sequencer
|
| bit 0
|bit 1
|
|
I:0
I:0
+SQO–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––]/[––––––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––+–+SEQUENCER OUTPUT +–(EN)–+–|
|
9
10
| |File
#N7:50+–(DN) | |
|
| |Mask
FFFF|
| |
|
| |Dest
N7:7|
| |
|
| |Control
R6:4|
| |
|
| |Length
5|
| |
|
| |Position
0|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
| |
|
| force the
| |
|
| sequencer
| |
|
| to increment
| |
|
| on next scan
| |
|
|
R6:4
| |
|
+––––(U)––––––––––––––––––––+ |
|
EN
|
Rung 4:2
Is identical to the previous rung except that it is only active when the
”hole selector switch” is in the ”5-hole” position.
| hole
|hole
5-hole
|
| selector |selector
preset
|
| switch
|switch
sequencer
|
| bit 0
|bit 1
|
|
I:0
I:0
+SQO–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [––––––––]/[–––––––––––––––––––––+–+SEQUENCER OUTPUT +–(EN)–+–|
➁
|
9
10
| |File
#N7:55+–(DN) | |
|
| |Mask
FFFF|
| |
|
| |Dest
N7:7|
| |
|
| |Control
R6:5|
| |
|
| |Length
7|
| |
|
| |Position
0|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
| force the
| |
|
| sequencer
| |
|
| to increment
| |
|
| on the next
| |
|
| scan
| |
|
|
R6:5
| |
|
+––––(U)––––––––––––––––––––+ |
|
EN
|
➀ This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung
if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
➁ This instruction accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this
instruction if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
E–7
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 4:3➀
Is identical to the two previous rungs except that it is only active when
the ”hole selector switch” is in the ”7-hole” position.
| hole
|hole
7-hole
|
| selector |selector
preset
|
| switch
|switch
sequencer
|
| bit 0
|bit 1
|
|
I:0
I:0
+SQO–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [––––––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––+–+SEQUENCER OUTPUT +–(EN)–+–|
|
9
10
| |File
#N7:62+–(DN) | |
|
| |Mask
FFFF|
| |
|
| |Dest
N7:7|
| |
|
| |Control
R6:6|
| |
|
| |Length
9|
| |
|
| |Position
0|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
| force the
| |
|
| sequencer
| |
|
| to increment
| |
|
| on the next
| |
|
| scan
| |
|
|
R6:6
| |
|
+––––(U)––––––––––––––––––––+ |
|
EN
|
Rung 4:4
Ensures that the high–speed counter preset value (N7:7) is immediately
applied to the HSC instruction.
|
High Speed Counter |
|
+HSL–––––––––––––––+ |
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HSC LOAD
+–|
|
|Counter
C5:0| |
|
|Source
N7:5| |
|
|Length
5| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 4:5
Interrupt occurred due to low preset reached.
| C5:0
+RET–––––––––––––––+–|
|––––][––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+RETURN
+ |
|
IL
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 4:6
Signals the main program (file 2) to initiate a drilling sequence. The
high-speed counter has already stopped the conveyor at the correct
position using its high preset output pattern data (clear O:0/0). This
occurred within microseconds of the high preset being reached (just prior
to entering this high-speed counter interrupt subroutine). The drill
sequence subroutine resets the drill sequence start bit and sets the
conveyor drive bit (O:0/0) upon completion of the drilling sequence.
| interrupt occurred
|
Drill Sequence Start |
| due to high preset reached |
|
|
C5:0
B3
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(L)–––––|
|
IH
32
|
Rung 4:7
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
➀ This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung
if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
E–8
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 6:0
This section of ladder logic controls the up/down motion of the drill for
the book drilling machine. When the conveyor positions the book under the
drill, the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is set. This rung uses that bit to
begin the drilling operation. Because the bit is set for the entire
drilling operation, the OSR is required to be able to turn off the forward
signal so the drill can retract.
| Drill
|Drill Subr|
Drill
|
| Sequence |
OSR
|
Forward
|
| Start
|
|
|
B3
B3
O:0
|
[–––] [––––––––[OSR]–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(L)––––––|
|
32
48
3
|
Rung 6:1
When the drill has drilled through the book, the body of the drill
actuates the DRILL DEPTH limit switch. When this happens, the DRILL
FORWARD signal is turned off and the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned on.
The drill is also retracted automatically on power up if it is not
actuating the DRILL HOME limit switch.
|
Drill
Drill
|
|
Depth LS
Forward
|
|
I:0
O:0
|
|–+––––] [––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+––––(U)–––––+–|
| |
4
|
|
3
| |
| | 1’st
|Drill
|
| Drill
| |
| | Pass
|Home LS
|
| Retract
| |
| |
S:1
I:0
|
|
O:0
| |
| +––––] [––––––––]/[–––––+
+––––(L)–––––+ |
|
15
5
2
|
Rung 6:2
When the drill is retracting (after drilling a hole), the body of the
drill actuates the DRILL HOME limit switch. When this happens the DRILL
RETRACT signal is turned off, the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is turned off
to indicate the drilling process is complete, and the conveyor is
restarted.
| Drill
|Drill
Drill
|
| Home LS
|Retract
Retract
|
|
I:0
O:0
O:0
|
|––––] [––––––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+––––(U)–––––+–|
|
5
2
|
2
| |
|
| Drill
| |
|
| Sequence
| |
|
| Start
| |
|
|
B3
| |
|
+––––(U)–––––+ |
|
|
32
| |
|
| Conveyor
| |
|
| Start/Stop | |
|
|
| |
|
|
O:0
| |
|
+––––(L)–––––+ |
|
0
|
Rung 6.3
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
E–9
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 7:0
Examines the number of 1/4 in. thousands that have accumulated over the
life of the current drill bit. If the bit has drilled between
100,000–101,999 1/4 in. increments of paper, the ”change drill” light
illuminates steadily. When the value is between 102,000–103,999, the
”change drill” light flashes at a 1.28 second rate. When the value
reaches 105,000, the ”change drill” light flashes and the ”change drill
now” light illuminates.
|
1/4 in.
100,000
|
|
Thousands
1/4 in.
|
|
increments
|
|
have
|
|
occurred
|
|
+GEQ–––––––––––––––+
B3
|
|–––+–+GRTR THAN OR EQUAL+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––+–|
|
| |Source A
N7:11|
16
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| |Source B
100|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
1/4 in.
102,000
| |
|
|
Thousands
1/4 in.
| |
|
|
increments | |
|
|
have
| |
|
|
occurred
| |
|
| +GEQ–––––––––––––––+
B3
| |
|
+–+GRTR THAN OR EQUAL+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
| |Source A
N7:11|
17
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| |Source B
102|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
1/4 in.
change
| |
|
|
Thousands
drill bit | |
|
|
NOW
| |
| ➀ | +GEQ–––––––––––––––+
O:0
| |
|
+–+GRTR THAN OR EQUAL+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
| |Source A
N7:11|
6
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| |Source B
105|
| |
|
| |
|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
100,000
|102,000
change
| |
|
|
1/4 in.
|1/4 in.
drill
| |
|
|
increments|increments
bit
| |
|
|
have
|have
soon
| |
|
|
occurred |occurred
| |
|
|
B3
B3
O:0
| |
|
+–+––––––––––––––––––––] [––––––––]/[––––––––––––––––+––( )–––––+ |
|
|
16
17
|
4
|
|
|
100,000
|102,000
|1.28
|
|
|
|
1/4 in.
|1/4 in.
|second
|
|
|
|
increments|increments|free
|
|
|
|
have
|have
|running
|
|
|
|
occurred |occurred |clock bit |
|
|
|
B3
B3
S:4
|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––––] [––––––––] [––––––––] [–––––+
|
|
16
17
7
|
➀ This branch accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this
branch if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
E–10
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 7:1
Resets the number of 1/4 in. increments and the 1/4 in. thousands when the
”drill change reset” keyswitch is energized. This should occur following
each drill bit change.
| drill change
1/4 in.
|
| reset keyswitch
Thousands
|
|
I:0
+CLR–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–+CLEAR
+–+–|
|
8
| |Dest
N7:11| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
1/4 in.
| |
|
|
increments
| |
|
|
| |
|
| +CLR–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+CLEAR
+–+ |
|
|Dest
N7:10|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 7:2➀
Moves the single digit BCD thumbwheel value into an internal integer
register. This is done to properly align the four BCD input signals prior
to executing the BCD to Integer instruction (FRD). The thumbwheel is used
to allow the operator to enter the thickness of the paper that is to be
drilled. The thickness is entered in 1/4 in. increments. This provides a
range of 1/4 in. to 2.25 in.
|
BCD bit 0 |FRD bit 0
|
|
I:0
N7:14
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+––––] [––––––––( )–––––+–|
|
|
11
0
| |
|
| BCD bit 1 |FRD bit 1 | |
|
|
I:0
N7:14
| |
|
+––––] [––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
|
12
1
| |
|
| BCD bit 2 |FRD bit 2 | |
|
|
I:0
N7:14
| |
|
+––––] [––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
|
13
2
| |
|
| BCD bit 3 |FRD bit 3 | |
|
|
I:0
N7:14
| |
|
+––––] [––––––––( )–––––+ |
|
14
3
|
➀ This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung
if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
E–11
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 7:3
Converts the BCD thumbwheel value from BCD to integer. This is done
because the controller operates upon integer values. This rung also
”debounces” the thumbwheel to ensure that the conversion only occurs on
valid BCD values. Note that invalid BCD values can occur while the
operator is changing the BCD thumbwheel. This is due to input filter
propagation delay differences between the 4 input circuits that provide
the BCD input value.
| 1’st
previous
debounced
|
| pass
scan’s
BCD value
|
| bit
BCD input
|
|
value
|
|
S:1
+EQU–––––––––––––––+
+FRD–––––––––––––––+
|
|–+––]/[–––––––+EQUAL
+–+–––––––+FROM BCD
+–+––+–|
| |
15
|Source A
N7:13| |
|Source
N7:14| | | |
| |
|
0| |
|
0000| | | |
| |
|Source B
N7:14| |
|Dest
N7:12| | | |
| |
|
0| |
|
0| | | |
| |
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
+––––––––––––––––––+ | | |
| |
| Math
Math
| | |
| |
| Overflow
Error
| | |
| |
| Bit
Bit
| | |
| |
|
S:0
S:5
| | |
| |
+––––] [–––––––––(U)–––––––––+ | |
| |
1
0
| |
| |
this
| |
| |
scan’s
| |
| |
BCD input
| |
| |
value
| |
| |
+MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
| +––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+MOVE
+–+ |
|
|Source
N7:14|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
|Dest
N7:13|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 7:4
Ensures that the operator cannot select a paper thickness of 0. If this
were allowed, the drill bit life calculation could be defeated resulting
in poor quality holes due to a dull drill bit. Therefore the minimum
paper thickness used to calculate drill bit wear is 1/4 in.
|
debounced
debounced
|
|
BCD
BCD
|
|
value
value
|
| +EQU–––––––––––––––+
+MOV–––––––––––––––+ |
|–+EQUAL
+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––+MOVE
+–|
| |Source A
N7:12|
|Source
1| |
| |
0|
|
| |
| |Source B
0|
|Dest
N7:12| |
| |
|
|
0| |
| +––––––––––––––––––+
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 7:5
Keeps a running total of how many inches of paper have been drilled with
the current drill bit. Every time a hole is drilled, adds the thickness
(in 1/4 ins) to the running total (kept in 1/4 ins). The OSR is necessary
because the ADD executes every time the rung is true, and the drill body
would actuate the DRILL DEPTH limit switch for more than 1 program scan.
Integer N7:12 is the integer-converted value of the BCD thumbwheel on
inputs I:0/11 – I:0/14.
| Drill
|Drill Wear
1/4 in.
|
| Depth LS | OSR 1
increments
|
|
|
|
I:0
B3
+ADD–––––––––––––––+ |
|––––] [–––––––[OSR]–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+ADD
+–|
|
4
24
|Source A
N7:12| |
|
|
0| |
|
|Source B
N7:10| |
|
|
0| |
|
|Dest
N7:10| |
|
|
0| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
E–12
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 7:6
When the number of 1/4 in. increments surpasses 1000, finds out now many
increments are past 1000 and stores in N7:20. Adds 1 to the total of
’1000 1/4 in.’ increments and re-initializes the 1/4 in. increments
accumulator to how many increments were beyond 1000.
|
1/4 in.
|
|
increments
|
|
|
| +GEQ–––––––––––––––+
+SUB–––––––––––––––+
|
|–+GRTR THAN OR EQUAL+–––––––––––––––––––––––+–+SUBTRACT
+–+–|
| |Source A
N7:10|
| |Source A
N7:10| | |
| |
0|
| |
0| | |
| |Source B
1000|
| |Source B
1000| | |
| |
|
| |
| | |
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |Dest
N7:20| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
1/4 in.
| |
|
|
Thousands
| |
|
| +ADD–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+ADD
+–+ |
|
| |Source A
1| | |
|
| |
| | |
|
| |Source B
N7:11| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:11| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
1/4 in.
| |
|
|
increments
| |
|
|
| |
|
| +MOV–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MOVE
+–+ |
|
|Source
N7:20|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
|Dest
N7:10|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 7:7
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
E–13
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Paper Drilling Machine Instruction List Program
File
2,
Rung 0
Initializes the high-speed counter each time the RRUN mode is entered.
The high-speed counter data area (N7:5 – N7:9) corresponds with the
starting address (source address) of the HSL instruction. The HSC
instruction is disabled each entry into the RRUN mode until the first time
that it is executed as true. (The high preset was ”pegged” on
initialization to prevent a high preset interrupt from occurring during
the initialization process.)
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
1’st Pass
S1/15
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
0
106
MOV
SRC
1
Output Mask (only use bit 0 ie. O:0/0)
DEST N5
0000H
106
MOV
SRC
0
High Output Pattern (turn off O:0/0)
DEST N6
0000H
106
MOV
SRC
High Preset Value
DEST N7
106
MOV
SRC
1
Low output pattern (turn on
DEST N8
0000H
106
MOV
171
HSL
SRC
Low preset value
DEST N9
32767
(counts to next hole)
0000H
O:0/0 each reset)
0
(cause low preset intat reset)
0000H
High Speed Counter
CNTR C0
Output Mask (only use bit 0 ie. O:0/0)
SRC N5
LEN
5
File
2,
Rung 1
This HSC instruction is not placed in the high-speed counter interrupt
subroutine. If this instruction were placed in the interrupt subroutine,
the high-speed counter could never be started or initialized (because an
interrupt must first occur in order to scan the high-speed counter
interrupt subroutine).
FUN
CODE
––––
170
E–14
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
HSC
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
TYPE
High Speed Counter
CNTR C0
PRE
ACC
VALUE
FORCES
–––––
––––––
Encoder (Res,Hld)
1250
0000H
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
2,
Rung 2
Forces a high-speed counter low preset interrupt to occur each RRUN mode
entry. An interrupt can only occur on the transition of the high-speed
counter accum to a preset value (accum reset to 1, then 0). This is done
to allow the high-speed counter interrupt subroutine sequencers to
initialize. The order of high-speed counter initialization is: (1)load
high-speed counter parameters (2)execute HSL instruction (3)execute true
HSC instruction (4)(optional) force high-speed counter interrupt to
occur.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
1’st Pass
S1/15
132
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
0
RAC
High Speed Counter
CNTR C0
SRC
1
7
RES
High Speed Counter
C0
File
2,
Rung 3
Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed. However,
another condition must also be met before we start the conveyor: the
drill bit must be in its fully retracted position (home). This rung also
stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
22
24
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
–] [–
|_] [_|
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
START Button
I/6
0
Drill Home LS
I/5
0
FORCES
––––––
AND
OR
Machine
RUN Latch
B/0
0
23
–]/[–
ANI
STOP Button
I/7
23➀
–]/[–
0
ANI
change drill bit NOW
O/6
0
40
–( )–
OUT
Machine
RUN Latch
B/0
0
➀ This instruction accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this
instruction if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
E–15
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
2,
Rung 4
Applies the above start logic to the conveyor and drill motor.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
10
22
40
File
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
Machine RUN Latch
B/0
0
Drill Home LS
I/5
0
Conveyor Enable
O/5
0
Drill Motor ON
O/1
0
FORCES
––––––
MPS
–] [–
–( )–
12
40
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
AND
OUT
MPP
–( )–
2,
OUT
Rung 5
Calls the drill sequence subroutine. This subroutine manages the
operation of a drilling sequence and restarts the conveyor upon completion
of the drilling sequence.
FUN
CODE
––––
132
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
File
2,
MNEMONIC
––––––––
JSR
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SBR#
VALUE
–––––
6
FORCES
––––––
Rung 6
Calls the subroutine that tracks the amount of wear on the current drill
bit.
FUN
CODE
––––
132
E–16
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
JSR
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SBR#
VALUE
–––––
7
FORCES
––––––
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
4,
Rung 0
Resets the hole count sequencers each time that the low preset is reached.
The low preset has been set to zero to cause an interrupt to occur each
time that a reset occurs. The low preset is reached anytime that a reset
C5:0 or hardware reset occurs. This ensures that the first preset value
is loaded into the high-speed counter at each entry into the RRUN mode and
each time that the external reset signal is activated.
FUN
CODE
––––
158
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–INT–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–INT
22
–] [–
AND
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
interrupt occurred due to low preset reached
C0/IL
0
7
RES
3 hole preset sequencer
R4
7
RES
5 hole preset sequencer
R5
7
RES
7 hole
preset sequencer
R6
File
4,
Rung 1➀
Keeps track of the hole number that is being drilled and loads the correct
high-speed counter preset based on the hole count. This rung is only
active when the ”hole selector switch” is in the ”3-hole” position. The
sequencer uses step 0 as a null step upon reset. It uses the last step as
a ”go forever” in anticipation of the ”end-of-manual” hard-wired external
reset.
FUN
CODE
––––
21
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–]/[–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LDI
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
hole selector switch bit 0
I/9
0
22
–] [–
AND
hole
152
SQO
selector switch bit 1
I/10
0
FILE #N50
MASK
FFFFH
High Preset Value
(counts to next hole)
DEST N7
3 hole preset sequencer
CTRL R4
LEN
5
POS
0000H
42
–(U)–
RST
force the sequencer to increment on next scan
R4/EN
1
➀ This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung
if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
E–17
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
4,
Rung 2
Is identical to the previous rung except that it is only active when the
”hole selector switch” is in the ”5-hole” position.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
hole selector switch bit 0
I/9
0
23
–]/[–
ANI➀
hole
152
SQO
selector switch bit 1
I/10
0
FILE #N55
MASK
FFFFH
High Preset Value
(counts to next hole)
DEST N7
5-hole preset sequencer
CTRL R5
LEN
7
POS
0000H
42
–(U)–
RST
force the sequencer to increment on the next scan
R5/EN
1
File
4,
Rung 3➁
Is identical to the two previous rungs except that it is only active when
the ”hole selector switch” is in the ”7-hole” position.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
hole selector switch bit 0
I/9
0
22
–] [–
AND
hole
152
SQO
selector switch bit 1
I/10
0
FILE #N62
MASK
FFFFH
High Preset Value
(counts to next hole)
DEST N7
7-hole preset sequencer
CTRL R6
LEN
9
POS
0000H
42
–(U)–
RST
force the sequencer to increment on the next scan
R6/EN
1
➀ This instruction accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this
instruction if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
➁ This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung
if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
E–18
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
4,
Rung 4
Ensures that the high-speed counter preset value (N7:7) is immediately
applied to the HSC instruction.
FUN
CODE
––––
171
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
HSL
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
High Speed Counter
CNTR C0
Output Mask (only use bit 0 ie. O:0/0)
SRC N5
LEN
5
File
4,
Rung 5
Interrupt occurred due to low preset reached.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
interrupt occurred due to low preset reached
C0/IL
0
134
File
RET
4,
Rung 6
Signals the main program (file 2) to initiate a drilling sequence. The
high-speed counter has already stopped the conveyor at the correct
position using its high preset output pattern data (clear O:0/0). This
occurred within microseconds of the high preset being reached (just prior
to entering this high-speed counter interrupt subroutine). The drill
sequence subroutine resets the drill sequence start bit and sets the
conveyor drive bit (O:0/0) upon completion of the drilling sequence.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
interrupt occurred due to hi preset reached
C0/IH
0
41
–(L)–
SET
Drill Sequence Start
B/32
0
File
6,
Rung 0
This section of ladder logic controls the up/down motion of the drill for
the book drilling machine. When the conveyor positions the book under the
drill, the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is set. This rung uses that bit to
begin the drilling operation. Because the bit is set for the entire
drilling operation, the OSR is required to be able to turn off the forward
signal so the drill can retract.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Drill Sequence Start
B/32
0
29
–OSR–
AND–OSR
Drill Subr
B/48
41
–(L)–
OSR
0
SET
Drill Forward
O/3
0
E–19
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
6,
Rung 1
When the drill has drilled through the book, the body of the drill
actuates the DRILL DEPTH limit switch. When this happens, the DRILL
FORWARD signal is turned off and the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned on.
The drill is also retracted automatically on power up if it is not
actuating the DRILL HOME limit switch.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
Drill Depth LS
I/4
0
1’st Pass
S1/15
23
–]/[–
14
42
41
File
FORCES
––––––
0
ANI
Drill Home LS
I/5
0
Drill Forward
O/3
0
Drill Retract
O/2
0
ORB
–(U)–
–(L)–
6,
RST
SET
Rung 2
When the drill is retracting (after drilling a hole), the body of the
drill actuates the DRILL HOME limit switch. When this happens the DRILL
RETRACT signal is turned off, the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is turned off
to indicate the drilling process is complete, and the conveyor is
restarted.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
22
42
42
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
–] [–
–(U)–
–(U)–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
Drill Home LS
I/5
0
Drill Retract
O/2
0
Drill Retract
O/2
0
AND
RST
RST
Drill Sequence Start
B/32
0
41
–(L)–
SET
Conveyor Start/Stop
O/0
0
E–20
FORCES
––––––
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
7,
Rung 0
Examines the number of 1/4 in. thousands that have accumulated over the
life of the current drill bit. If the bit has drilled between
100,000–101,999 1/4 in. increments of paper, the ”change drill” light
illuminates steadily. When the value is between 102,000–103,999, the
”change drill” light flashes at a 1.28 second rate. When the value
reaches 105,000, the ”change drill” light flashes and the ”change drill
now” light illuminates.
FUN
CODE
––––
10
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
66
–GEQ–
40
–( )–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
MPS
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
1/4 in. Thousands
SRCA N11
SRCB
0000H
100
FORCES
––––––
AND–GEQ
OUT
100,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/16
0
11
66
MRD
–GEQ–
AND–GEQ
1/4 in. Thousands
SRCA N11
SRCB
40
–( )–
0000H
102
OUT
102,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/17
0
11
66➀
MRD
–GEQ–
AND–GEQ
1/4 in. Thousands
SRCA N11
SRCB
40
–( )–
0000H
105
OUT
change drill bit NOW
O/6
0
12
20
MPP
|–] [–
LD
100,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/16
0
23
–]/[–
ANI
102,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/17
0
20
|–] [–
LD
100,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/16
0
22
–] [–
AND
102,000 1/4 in. increments have occurred
B/17
0
22
–] [–
AND
1.28 second free running clock bit
S4/7
0
14
ORB
13
ANB
40
–( )–
OUT
change drill bit soon
O/4
0
➀ This branch accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this
branch if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
E–21
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
7,
Rung 1
Resets the number of 1/4 in. increments and the 1/4 in. thousands when the
”drill change reset” keyswitch is energized. This should occur following
each drill bit change.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
drill change reset keyswitch
I/8
0
85
CLR
1/4 in. Thousands
DEST N11
85
0000H
CLR
1/4 in. increments
DEST N10
0000H
File
7,
Rung 2➀
Moves the single-digit BCD thumbwheel value into an internal integer
register. This is done to properly align the four BCD input signals prior
to executing the BCD to Integer instruction (FRD). The thumbwheel is used
to allow the operator to enter the thickness of the paper that is to be
drilled. The thickness is entered in 1/4 in. increments. This provides a
range of 1/4 in. to 2.25 in.
FUN
CODE
––––
10
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
22
–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
MPS
AND
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
–( )–
OUT
22
–] [–
AND
BCD bit 1
–( )–
OUT
11
–] [–
AND
BCD bit 2
–( )–
OUT
12
0
MPP
–] [–
AND
BCD bit 3
I/14
40
0
FRD bit 2
N14/2
22
0
MRD
I/13
40
0
FRD bit 1
N14/1
22
0
MRD
I/12
40
0
FRD bit 0
N14/0
11
FORCES
––––––
BCD bit 0
I/11
40
VALUE
–––––
–( )–
OUT
0
FRD bit 3
N14/3
0
➀ This rung accesses I/O only available with 32 I/O controllers. Therefore, do not include this rung
if you are using a 16 I/O controller.
E–22
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
7,
Rung 3
Converts the BCD thumbwheel value from BCD to integer. This is done
because the controller operates upon integer values. This rung also
”debounces” the thumbwheel to ensure that the conversion only occurs on
valid BCD values. Note that invalid BCD values can occur while the
operator is changing the BCD thumbwheel. This is due to input filter
propagation delay differences between the 4 input circuits that provide
the BCD input value.
FUN
CODE
––––
10
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
23
–]/[–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
MPS
ANI
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
1’st pass bit
S1/15
51
–EQU–
AND–EQU
0
previous scan’s BCD input value
SRCA N13
SRCB N14
101
FRD
0000H
0000H
debounced BCD value
SRC N14
DEST N12
22
42
–] [–
–(U)–
0000H
0000H
AND
Math Overflow Bit
S0/1
0
Math Error Bit
S5/0
0
RST
12
MPP
106
MOV
this scan’s BCD input value
SRC N14
DEST N13
File
7,
FORCES
––––––
0000H
0000H
Rung 4
Ensures that the operator cannot select a paper thickness of 0. If this
were allowed, the drill bit life calculation could be defeated resulting
in poor quality holes due to a dull drill bit. Therefore, the minimum
paper thickness used to calculate drill bit wear is 1/4 in.
FUN
CODE
––––
50
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–EQU–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–EQU
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
VALUE
–––– –––––––
–––––
debounced BCD value
SRCA N12
SRCB
106
MOV
FORCES
––––––
0000H
0
debounced BCD value
SRC
DEST N12
1
0000H
E–23
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
7,
Rung 5
Keeps a running total of how many inches of paper have been drilled with
the current drill bit. Every time a hole is drilled, adds the thickness
(in 1/4 ins) to the running total (kept in 1/4 ins). The OSR is necessary
because the ADD executes every time the rung is true, and the drill body
would actuate the DRILL DEPTH limit switch for more than 1 program scan.
Integer N7:12 is the integer-converted value of the BCD thumbwheel on
inputs I:0/11 – I:0/14.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
29
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
–OSR–
80
File
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
VALUE
–––––
Drill Depth LS
I/4
0
Tool Wear
B/24
0
FORCES
––––––
AND–OSR
ADD
7,
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
OSR 1
SRCA N12
0000H
1/4 in. increments
SRCB N10
0000H
1/4 in. increments
DEST N10
0000H
Rung 6
When the number of 1/4 in. increments surpasses 1000, finds out now many
increments are past 1000 and stores in N7:20. Adds 1 to the total of
’1000 1/4 in.’ increments, and re-initializes the 1/4 in. increments
accumulator to how many increments were beyond 1000.
FUN
CODE
––––
65
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–GEQ–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–GEQ
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
1/4 in. increments
SRCA N10
0000H
SRCB
1000
81
SUB
1/4 in. increments
SRCA N10
0000H
SRCB
1000
DEST N20
0000H
80
106
E–24
ADD
MOV
SRCA
1/4 in. Thousands
SRCB N11
1/4 in. Thousands
DEST N11
1
0000H
0000H
SRC N20
0000H
1/4 in. increments
DEST N10
0000H
FORCES
––––––
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Time-Driven Sequencer
Application Example
The following application example illustrates the use of the TON and SQO
instructions in a traffic signal at an intersection. The timing requirements
are:
• Red light – 30 seconds
• Yellow light – 15 seconds
• Green light – 60 seconds
The timer, when it reaches its preset, steps the sequencer that in turn controls
which traffic signal is illuminated. For a detailed explanation of:
• LD, LDI, and TON instructions, see chapter 8.
• SQO and SQC instructions, see chapter 13.
Time Driven Sequencer Ladder Program
Rung 2:0
The function of this rung
timer reaches its preset,
this rung to become FALSE
following scan, when this
timing.
is called a regenerative timer. Every time the
the DONE bit is set for one scan––this causes
for one scan and resets the timer. On the
rung becomes TRUE again, the timer begins
| Timer
Timer
|
| Enable
|
| T4:0
+TON–––––––––––––––+
|
|–––]/[–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+TIMER ON DELAY
+–(EN)–|
|
DN
|Timer
T4:0+–(DN) |
|
|Time Base
0.01|
|
|
|Preset
1|
|
|
|Accum
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:1
Controls the RED, GREEN, and YELLOW lights wired to outputs O:0/0 – O:0/2
and controls how long the regenerative timer times between each step.
When this rung goes from false-to-true (by the timer reaching its preset),
the first sequencer changes which traffic light is illuminated and the
second sequencer changes the preset of the timer to determine how long
this next light is illuminated.
|
RED, GREEN, and
|
|
YELLOW lights
|
| T4:0
+SQO–––––––––––––––+
|
|––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–+SEQUENCER OUTPUT +–(EN)–+–|
|
DN
| |File
#N7:0+–(DN) | |
|
| |Mask
0007+
| |
|
| |Dest
O:0.0|
| |
|
| |Control
R6:0|
| |
|
| |Length
3|
| |
|
| |Position
0|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
Timer Presets
| |
|
|
for each lights
| |
|
| +SQO–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
+–+SEQUENCER OUTPUT +–(EN)–+ |
|
|File
#N7:5+–(DN)
|
|
|Mask
FFFF|
|
|
|Dest
T4:0.PRE|
|
|
|Control
R6:1|
|
|
|Length
3|
|
|
|Position
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2.2
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
E–25
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Data Files
Address
N7:0
N7:1
N7:2
N7:3
15
0000
0000
0000
0000
Data
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0
0000
0100
0010
0001
Address
Data
(Radix=Decimal)
N7:0
0
2
Data Table
4
1
0
0
6000
1500
3000
Time Driven Sequencer Instruction List Program
File
2,
Rung 0
The function of this rung
timer reaches its preset,
this rung to become FALSE
following scan, when this
timing.
FUN
CODE
––––
21
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–]/[–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LDI
is called a regenerative timer. Every time the
the DONE bit is set for one scan––this causes
for one scan and resets the timer. On the
rung becomes TRUE again, the timer begins
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
Timer Enable
T0/DN
0
File
TON
2,
Timer
TIMR T0
BASE
PRE
ACC
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
0
0.01
0001H
0000H
Rung 1
Controls the RED, GREEN, and YELLOW lights wired to outputs O:0/0 – O:0/2
and controls how long the regenerative timer times between each step.
When this rung goes from false-to-true (by the timer reaching its preset),
the first sequencer changes which traffic light is illuminated and the
second sequencer changes the preset of the timer to determine how long
this next light is illuminated.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
Step SQO
T0/DN
152
SQO
SQO
0007H
0003H
0000H
Timer presets for each light
FILE #N5
MASK
DEST T0.PRE
CTRL R1
LEN
POS
E–26
0
RED, GREEN and YELLOW lights
FILE #N0
MASK
DEST O0
CTRL R0
LEN
POS
152
VALUE
–––––
FFFFH
0003H
0000H
FORCES
––––––
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Event-Driven Sequencer
Application Example
The following application example illustrates how the FD (found) bit on an
SQC instruction can be used to advance an SQO to the next step (position).
This application program is used when a specific order of events is required
to occur repeatedly. By using this combination, you can eliminate using the
XIO, XIC, and other instructions. For a detailed explanation of:
• LD, LDI, and RES instructions, see chapter 8.
• SQO and SQC instructions, see chapter 13.
Event Driven Sequencer Ladder Program
Rung 2:0
Ensures that the SQO always resets to step (position) 1 each RRUN mode
entry. (This rung actually resets the control register’s position and EN
enable bit to 0. Due to this, the following rung sees a false to true
transition and asserts step (position) 1 on the first scan.)
Eliminate this rung for retentive operation.
| S:1
R6:0
|
|––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(RES)––––|
|
15
|
|
|
Rung 2:1
The SQC instruction and SQO instruction share the same Control Register.
This is acceptable due to the careful planning of the rung state
condition. You could cascade (branch) many more SQO instructions below the
SQO if you desired, all using the same Control Register (R6:0 in this
case). Notice that we are only comparing Inputs 0–3 and are only
asserting Outputs 0–3 (per our Mask value).
| R6:0
+SQC–––––––––––––––+
|
|––]/[––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––+SEQUENCER COMPARE +–(EN)–+–|
|
FD
|
|File
#N7:0+–(DN) | |
|
|
|Mask
000F+–(FD) | |
|
|
|Source
I:0.0|
| |
|
|
|Control
R6:0|
| |
|
|
|Length
9|
| |
|
|
|Position
2|
| |
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
| R6:0 +SQO–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
+––]/[––+SEQUENCER OUTPUT +–(EN)–+ |
|
FD |File
#N7:10+–(DN)
|
|
|Mask
000F|
|
|
|Dest
O:0.0|
|
|
|Control
R6:0|
|
|
|Length
9|
|
|
|Position
2|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2.2
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
The following displays the FILE DATA for both sequencers. The SQC compare
data starts at N7:0 and ends at N7:9. While the SQO output data starts at
N7:10 and ends at N7:19. Please note that step 0 of the SQO is never
active. The reset rung combined with the rung logic of sequencers
guarantees that the sequencers always start at step 1. Both sequencers
also ”roll over” to step 1. ”Roll Over” to step 1 is integral to all
sequencer instructions.
SQC Compare Data
Addresses
N7:0
0
N7:10
0
Data
1
2
0
1
(Radix=Decimal)
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
8
E–27
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Event Driven Sequencer Instruction List Program
File
2,
Rung 0
Ensures that the SQO always resets to step (position) 1 each RRUN mode
entry. (This rung actually resets the control register’s position and EN
enable bit to 0. Due to this the following rung sees a false to true
transition and asserts step (position) 1 on the first scan.)
Eliminate this rung for retentive operation.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
7
File
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
RES
2,
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
S1/15
VALUE
–––––
0
FORCES
––––––
R0
Rung 1
The SQC instruction and SQO instruction share the same Control Register.
This is acceptable due to the careful planning of the rung state
condition. You could cascade (branch) many more SQO instructions below the
SQO if you desired, all using the same Control Register (R6:0 in this
case). Notice that we are only comparing Inputs 0–3 and are only
asserting Outputs 0–3 (per our Mask value).
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–]/[–
153
23
152
E–28
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LDI
SQC
–]/[–
ANI
SQO
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
R0/FD
FILE #N0
MASK
SRC I0
CTRL R0
LEN
POS
R0/FD
FILE #N10
MASK
DEST O0
CTRL R0
LEN
POS
VALUE
–––––
0
000FH
9
0000H
0
000FH
9
0000H
FORCES
––––––
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Bottle Line Example
The following application example illustrates how the controller high-speed
counter is configured for an up/down counter. For a detailed explanation of:
• LD, SET, RST, and OUT instructions, see chapter 8.
• GRT, LES, and GEQ instruction, see chapter 9.
• HSC and HSL instructions, see chapter 14.
Sensor OUT I:0/1
Sensor IN I:0/0
Conveyor
Bottle Fill and Cap
Machine
Conveyor
Holding Area
Conveyor
Packing Machine
Slow Pack O:0/2
Stop Fill O:0/0
Slow Fill O:0/1
This section is controlled separately from the two machines.
Bottle Line Operation Overview
The controller on the conveyor, within the specified area above, regulates the
speeds of the bottle fill and packing machines. Each machine is connected to
a separate controller that communicates with the conveyor controller. The
following ladder program is for the conveyor controller.
A conveyor feeds filled bottles past a proximity sensor (IN) to a holding area.
The proximity sensor is wired to the I/0 terminal (up count) of the conveyor
controller. The bottles are then sent on another conveyor past a proximity
switch (OUT) to the packing machine. This proximity switch is wired to the
I/1 terminal (down count) on the same controller.
Bottle Line Ladder Program
Rung 2:0
Loads the high-speed counter with the following parameters:
N7:0 – 0001h Output Mask – Effect only O:0/0
N7:1 – 0001h Output Pattern for High Preset – Energize O:0/0 upon high preset
N7:2 – 350d High Preset – Maximum numbers of bottles for the holding area
N7:3 – 0000h Output Pattern for Low Preset – not used
N7:4 – 0d Low Preset – not used
| First Pass
|
|
Bit
|
|
S:1
+HSL–––––––––––––––+ |
|––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HSC LOAD
+–|
|
15
|Counter
C5:0| |
|
|Source
N7:0| |
|
|Length
5| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
E–29
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 2:1
Starts up the high-speed counter with the above parameters. Each time the
rung is evaluated, the hardware accumulator is written to C5:0.ACC.
|
+HSC–––––––––––––––+
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HIGH SPEED COUNTER+–(CU)–|
|
|Type
Up/Down+–(CD) |
|
|Counter
C5:0+–(DN) |
|
|Preset
350|
|
|
|Accum
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:2
Packing machine running too fast for the filling machine. Slow down the
packing machine to allow the filler to catch up.
|
Slow Pack |
| +LES–––––––––––––––+
O:0
|
|–+LESS THAN
+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(L)–––––|
| |Source A C5:0.ACC|
2
|
| |
0|
|
| |Source B
100|
|
| |
|
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:3
If the packer was slowed down to allow the filler to catch up, wait until
the holding area is approximately 2/3 full before allowing the packer to
run at full speed again.
|
Slow Pack |
Slow Pack |
| +GRT–––––––––––––––+
O:0
O:0
|
|–+GREATER THAN
+––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(U)–––––|
| |Source A C5:0.ACC|
2
2
|
| |
0|
|
| |Source B
200|
|
| |
|
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:4
Filling machine running too fast for the packing machine. Slow down the
filling machine to allow the packer to catch up.
|
Slow Fill |
| +GRT–––––––––––––––+
O:0
|
|–+GREATER THAN
+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(L)–––––|
| |Source A C5:0.ACC|
1
|
| |
0|
|
| |Source B
250|
|
| |
|
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:5
If the filler was slowed down to allow the packer to catch up, wait until
the holding area is approximately 1/3 full before allowing the filler to
run at full speed again.
|
Slow Fill |
Slow Fill |
| +LES–––––––––––––––+
O:0
O:0
|
|–+LESS THAN
+––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(U)–––––|
| |Source A C5:0.ACC|
1
1
|
| |
0|
|
| |Source B
150|
|
| |
|
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
|
E–30
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 2:6
If the high-speed counter reached its high preset of 350 (indicates that
the holding area reached maximum capacity), it would energize O:0/0,
shutting down the filling operation. Before re-starting the filler, allow
the packer to empty the holding area until it is about 1/3 full.
| HSC Interr
Fill Stop
|
| due to
|
| High Preset
|
|
|
|
C5:0
+LES–––––––––––––––+
O:0
|
|––––] [–––––+LESS THAN
+––––––––––––––––––––––+––––(U)–––––+–|
|
IH
|Source A C5:0.ACC|
|
0
| |
|
|
0|
|
| |
|
|Source B
150|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
| |
|
| HSC Interr | |
|
| due to
| |
|
| High Prest | |
|
|
| |
|
|
C5:0
| |
|
+––––(U)–––––+ |
|
IH
|
Rung 2:7
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
Data Table
Addresses
N7:0
Data
(Radix=Decimal)
1
1
350 0
0
E–31
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Bottle Line Instruction List Program
File
2,
Rung 0
Loads the high-speed counter with the following parameters:
N7:0 – 0001h Output Mask – Effect only O:0/0
N7:1 – 0001h Output Pattern for High Preset – Energize O:0/0 upon high preset
N7:2 – 350d High Preset – Maximum numbers of bottles for the holding area
N7:3 – 0000h Output Pattern for Low Preset – not used
N7:4 – 0d Low Preset – not used
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
171
File
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
HSL
2,
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
First Pass
S1/15
0
FORCES
––––––
CNTR C0
SRC N0
LEN
Bit
5
Rung 1
Starts up the high-speed counter with the above parameters. Each time the
rung is evaluated, the hardware accumulator is written to C5:0.ACC.
FUN
CODE
––––
170
File
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
2,
MNEMONIC
––––––––
HSC
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
TYPE
CNTR C0
PRE
ACC
VALUE
–––––
Up/Down
015EH
0000H
Rung 2
Packing machine running too fast for the filling machine.
packing machine to allow the filler to catch up.
FUN
CODE
––––
56
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–LES–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–LES
41
–(L)–
SET
File
2,
FORCES
––––––
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SRCA C0.ACC
SRCB
VALUE
–––––
0000H
100
Slow Pack
O/2
0
Slow down the
FORCES
––––––
Rung 3
If the packer was slowed down to allow the filler to catch up, wait until
the holding area is approximately 2/3 full before allowing the packer to
run at full speed again.
FUN
CODE
––––
62
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–GRT–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–GRT
22
–] [–
AND
42
E–32
–(U)–
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SRCA C0.ACC
SRCB
VALUE
–––––
0000H
200
Slow Pack
O/2
0
Slow Pack
O/2
0
RST
FORCES
––––––
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
2,
Rung 4
Filling machine running too fast for the packing machine.
filling machine to allow the packer to catch up.
FUN
CODE
––––
62
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–GRT–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–GRT
41
–(L)–
SET
File
2,
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SRCA C0.ACC
SRCB
VALUE
–––––
0000H
250
Slow Fill
O/1
0
Slow down the
FORCES
––––––
Rung 5
If the filler was slowed down to allow the packer to catch up, wait until
the holding area is approximately 1/3 full before allowing the filler to
run at full speed again.
FUN
CODE
––––
56
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–LES–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–LES
22
–] [–
AND
42
File
–(U)–
2,
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SRCA C0.ACC
SRCB
VALUE
–––––
0000H
150
Slow Fill
O/1
0
Slow Fill
O/1
0
FORCES
––––––
RST
Rung 6
If the high–speed counter reached its high preset of 350 (indicates that
the holding area reached maximum capacity), it would energize O:0/0,
shutting down the filling operation. Before re–starting the filler, allow
the packer to empty the holding area until it is about 1/3 full.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
HSC Interr due to High Prest
C0/IH
0
57
–LES–
AND–LES
42
–(U)–
RST
SRCA C0.ACC
SRCB
Fill Stop
O/0
42
–(U)–
0000H
150
0
RST
HSC Interr due to High Prest
C0/IH
0
E–33
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Pick and Place Machine
Example
The following application example illustrates how the controller high-speed
counter is configured for the up and down counter using an encoder with
reset and hold. For a detailed explanation of:
• LD, LDI, OUT, RES, SET, RST, and TON instructions, see chapter 8.
• GRT and NEQ instructions, see chapter 9.
• MOV instruction, see chapter 11.
• HSC and HSL instructions, see chapter 14.
Storage Bins
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
Conveyor
Gripper O:0/0
Rail
Home Position
Encoder
A – I:0/0
B – I:0/1
C – I:0/2
Master PLC Outputs
Wired to Inputs:
I:0/5
I:0/6
I:0/7
Pick and Place Machine Operation Overview
A pick and place machine takes parts from a conveyor and drops them into
the appropriate bins. When the pick and place head is positioned over the
conveyor with a gripped part, the master PLC communicates to the controller
controlling the gripper which bin to drop the part into. This information is
communicated by energizing three outputs that are wired to the controller’s
inputs.
Once the controller has this information, it grabs the part and moves down
the rail. When the gripper reaches the appropriate bin, it opens and the part
falls into the bin. The gripper then returns to the conveyor to retrieve another
part.
The position of the pick and place head is read by the controller via a 1000
line quadrature encoder wired to the controller’s high-speed counter inputs.
When the gripper is in the home position, the Z pulse from the encoder resets
the high-speed counter. The number of pulses the head needs to travel to
reach each bin location is stored in a data table starting at address N10 and
ending at N17. The controller uses indexed addressing to locate the correct
encoder count from the data table and to load the information into the high
preset of the high-speed counter.
E–34
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Pick and Place Machine Ladder Program
Rung 2:0
The following three rungs take information from the other programmable
controller and load it into the INDEX REGISTER. This is used to select
the proper bin location from the table starting at N7:10.
| Output
|
|
| from
|
|
| barcode
|
Index Reg |
|
I:0
S:24
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
|
5
0
|
Rung 2:1
| Output
|
|
| from
|
|
| barcode
|
Index Reg |
|
I:0
S:24
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
|
6
1
|
Rung 2:2
| Output
|
|
| from
|
|
| barcode
|
Index Reg |
|
I:0
S:24
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
|
7
2
|
Rung 2:3
Indexes into the table of bin locations and places the correct number of
encoder counts into the high preset of the high-speed counter.
|
+MOV–––––––––––––––+ |
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+MOVE
+–|
|
|Source
#N7:10| |
|
|
100| |
|
|Dest
N7:2| |
|
|
100| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 2:4
Loads the high-speed counter with the following parameters:
N7:0 – 0001h – Output Mask – high-speed counter control only O:0/0
(gripper)
N7:1 – 0000h – Output Pattern for High Preset – turn OFF gripper (release
part)
N7:2 – 100d – High Preset – loaded from table in the rung above
N7:3 – 0001h – Output Pattern for Low Preset – turn ON gripper (grab part)
N7:4 –
0d – Low Preset – home position when encoder triggers Z-reset
|
Home
|
|
Position
|
|
Reached
|
|
C5:0
+HSL–––––––––––––––+ |
|–+––––] [–––––+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HSC LOAD
+–|
| |
LP
|
|Counter
C5:0| |
| |
|
|Source
N7:0| |
| |
|
|Length
5| |
| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
| | First Pass |
|
| |
Bit
|
|
| |
S:1
|
|
| +––––] [–––––+
|
|
15
|
Rung 2:5
Starts up the high-speed counter with the above parameters. Each time
this rung is evaluated, the hardware accumulator is written to C5:0.ACC.
|
+HSC––––––––––––––––––––+
|
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HIGH SPEED COUNTER
+–(CU)–|
|
|Type Encoder (Res,Hld)+–(CD) |
|
|Counter
C5:0+–(DN) |
|
|Preset
100|
|
|
|Accum
–2|
|
|
+–––––––––––––––––––––––+
|
E–35
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 2:6
When the pick-and-place head reaches either its home position to pick up a
part or its destination bin to drop off a part, start up a dwell timer.
The purpose of this is to keep the head stationary long enough for the
gripper to either grab or release the part.
|
Bin
|
|
Location
Dwell Timer
|
|
Reached
|
|
C5:0
+TON–––––––––––––––+
|
|–+––––] [–––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+TIMER ON DELAY
+–(EN)–|
| |
HP
|
|Timer
T4:0+–(DN) |
| |
|
|Time Base
0.01|
|
| |
|
|Preset
100|
|
| |
|
|Accum
100|
|
| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
| | Home
|
|
| | Position
|
|
| | Reached
|
|
| |
C5:0
|
|
| +––––] [–––––+
|
|
LP
|
Rung 2:7
When the pick-and-place head is positioned over the proper bin, turn off
the forward motor. At the same time, the high-speed counter tells the
gripper to release the part and start the dwell timer. After the dwell
time has expired, start up the reverse motor to send the head back to its
home position to pick up another part.
| Bin
Motor
|
| Location
FORWARD
|
| Reached
|
|
C5:0
O:0
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––––––(U)–––––+–|
|
HP
|
1
| |
|
| Dwell
|Motor
| |
|
| Done
|REVERSE
| |
|
|
T4:0
O:0
| |
|
+––––] [––––––––(L)–––––+ |
|
DN
2
|
Rung 2:8
When the pick-and-place head is positioned at its home position, turn off
the reverse motor. At the same time, the high-speed counter tells the
gripper to grab the next part and start the dwell timer. After the dwell
time has expired, start up the forward motor to send the head out to its
drop off bin.
| Home
Motor
|
| Position
REVERSE
|
| Reached
|
|
C5:0
O:0
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––––––(U)–––––+–|
|
LP
|
2
| |
|
| Dwell
|Motor
| |
|
| Done
|FORWARD
| |
|
|
T4:0
O:0
| |
|
+––––] [––––––––(L)–––––+ |
|
DN
1
|
Rung 2:9
|
|
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
Data Table
Addresses Data
(Radix=Decimal)
N7:0
1
0
100 1
0
0
0
0
0
N7:10
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 0
E–36
0
0
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Pick and Place Machine Instruction List Program
File
2,
Rung 0
The following three rungs take information from the other programmable
controller and load it into the INDEX REGISTER. This is used to select
the proper bin location from the table starting at N7:10.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Output from barcode
I/5
0
40
–( )–
OUT
Index Reg
S24/0
File
2,
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
0
Rung 1
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Output from barcode
I/6
0
40
–( )–
OUT
Index Reg
S24/1
File
2,
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
0
Rung 2
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Output from barcode
I/7
0
40
–( )–
OUT
Index Reg
S24/2
File
2,
0
Rung 3
Indexes into the table of bin locations and places the correct number of
encoder counts into the high preset of the high-speed counter.
FUN
CODE
––––
106
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
MOV
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SRC #N10
DEST N2
VALUE
–––––
100
100
FORCES
––––––
E–37
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
2,
Rung 4
Loads the high-speed counter with the following parameters:
N7:0 – 0001h – Output Mask – high-speed counter control only O:0/0
(gripper)
N7:1 – 0000h – Output Pattern for High Preset – turn OFF gripper (release
part)
N7:2 – 100d – High Preset – loaded from table in the rung above
N7:3 – 0001h – Output Pattern for Low Preset – turn ON gripper (grab part)
N7:4 –
0d – Low Preset – home position when encoder triggers Z-reset
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Home Position Reached
C0/LP
0
24
|_] [_|
OR
First Pass
S1/15
171
File
HSL
2,
CNTR C0
SRC N0
LEN
Bit
0
5
Rung 5
Starts up the high-speed counter with the above parameters. Each time
this rung is evaluated the hardware accumulator is written to C5:0.ACC.
FUN
CODE
––––
170
File
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
2,
MNEMONIC
––––––––
HSC
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
TYPE
CNTR C0
PRE
ACC
VALUE
FORCES
–––––
––––––
Encoder (Res,Hld)
100
–2
Rung 6
When the pick-and-place head reaches either its home position to pick up a
part or its destination bin to drop off a part, start up a dwell timer.
The purpose of this is to keep the head stationary long enough for the
gripper to either grab or release the part.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
Bin Location Reached
C0/HP
0
24
|_] [_|
OR
Home Position Reached
C0/LP
0
0
TON
Dwell Timr
TIMR T0
BASE
PRE
ACC
E–38
0.01
100
100
FORCES
––––––
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
2,
Rung 7
When the pick-and-place head is positioned over the proper bin, turn off
the forward motor. At the same time, the high-speed counter tells the
gripper to release the part and start the dwell timer. After the dwell
time has expired, start up the reverse motor to send the head back to its
home position to pick up another part.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Bin Location Reached
C0/HP
0
42
22
41
File
–(U)–
–] [–
–(L)–
2,
RST
Motor FORWARD
O/1
0
Dwell Done
T0/DN
0
Motor REVERSE
O/2
0
AND
SET
Rung 8
When the pick-and-place head is positioned at its home position, turn off
the reverse motor. At the same time, the high-speed counter tells the
gripper to grab the next part and start the dwell timer. After the dwell
time has expired, start up the forward motor to send the head out to its
drop off bin.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Home Position Reached
C0/LP
0
42
22
41
–(U)–
–] [–
–(L)–
RST
Motor REVERSE
O/2
0
Dwell Done
T0/DN
0
Motor FORWARD
O/1
0
AND
SET
E–39
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
RPM Calculation Application
Example
The following application example illustrates how to calculate the frequency
and RPM of a device (such as an encoder) connected to a high-speed counter.
The calculated values are only valid when counting up. For a detailed
explanation of:
• LD, LDI, CTU and TON instructions, see chapter 8.
• LES instruction, see chapter 9.
• CLR, MUL, DIV, DDV, ADD, and SUB instructions, see chapter 10.
• MOV instruction, see chapter 11.
RPM Calculation Operation Overview
This is done by manipulating the number of counts that have occurred in the
high-speed counter accumulator (C0.ACC) over time. To determine this you
must provide the following application specific information:
• N2 – Counts per Revolution. (i.e., the number of encoder pulses per
revolution i.e., the number of pulses until reset). This value is entered in
whole counts. For example, you would enter the value 1000 into N2 for a
1000 count A/B/Z encoder.
• T0.PRE– The Rate Measurement Period (i.e., the amount of time in
which to sample the accumulation of counts). This value is entered in .01
second intervals. For example, enter the value 10 into T0.PRE for a .1
second rate measurement period . For an accurate frequency and RPM
calculation to occur, the value entered must divide evenly into 100. For
example valid=20,10,5,4,2,1 and invalid=11,9,8,7,6,3.
Once you have entered these two values the following information is
provided:
• N1 – Counts per last Rate Measurement Period. This value is updated
each end of Rate Measurement Period with the number of counts that
have elapsed. Use this value if your application requires high-speed
calculations such as velocity.
• N4 – Frequency. This value is updated once per second with the number
of pulses that occurred in the last second. This value (frequency) is
calculated:
Frequency (Hz) =
# pulses
1 second
• N5 – RPM. This value is calculated once per second using the frequency
value N4 together with the counts per revolution value N2. For example,
if N4 contained the value 2000 (indicates 2000 Hz) and you had specified
a 1000 count encoder in N2, the RPM calculation for N5 would be 120.
This equates to 2 encoder revolutions per second. Refer to the calculation
below:
RPM =
120 RPM =
E–40
1 revolution
x
# pulses
60 seconds
1 minute
1 revolution
2000 pulses
x
x
1 second
1000 pulses
60 seconds
1 minute
# pulses
1 second
x
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
To maintain validity, you must ensure that you cannot accumulate more
pulses per rate period than counts per revolution. For example, if you have
selected a 1000 pulse encoder, you cannot have more than 999 counts occur
in any 1 rate measurement period. If you determine that you exceed this rule,
simply lower your Rate Measurement Period T0.PRE.
RPM Calculation Ladder Program
Rung 2:0
Ensures that the measurement value is initialized each RRUN mode entry.
| Shift
Last timeout
|
| Limit
value storage
|
| Switch
register
|
|
S:1
+MOV–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–+MOVE
+–+–|
|
15
| |Source
C5:0.ACC| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:0| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
Frequency
| |
|
|
determination
| |
|
|
counter
| |
|
|
C5:0
| |
|
+–––––(RES)––––––––––––+ |
|
|
| |
|
|
Counts last rate
| |
|
|
measurement
| |
|
|
period
| |
|
| +CLR–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+CLEAR
+–+–|
|
| |Dest
N7:1| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
Frequency in
| |
|
|
Hertz period
| |
|
| +CLR–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+CLEAR
+–+–|
|
| |Dest
N7:4| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
RPM based on
| |
|
|
counts per turn
| |
|
|
register N7:2
| |
|
| +CLR–––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+CLEAR
+–+–|
|
|Dest
N7:5|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:1
Sets the rate measurement period. In this case, we are calculating a new
rate value once every 100ms. Value N7:1 is updated once every 100ms with
the number of counts that have occurred in the last 100ms period. Note
that the preset value must divide evenly into 100 in order to accurately
determine frequency and RPM (determined later in this program).
| Rate Period |
Counts last
|
| Expiration |
rate measurement
|
| Bit
|
period
|
|
T4:0
+TON–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––]/[––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+TIMER ON DELAY
+–(EN)–|
|
DN
|Timer
T4:0+–(DN) |
|
|Time Base
0.01|
|
|
|Preset
10|
|
|
|Accum
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
E–41
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 2:2
Calculates and stores the number of counts that have occurred since the
last time that it was executed as true in N7:1 (last time=last rate
measurement timer (T4:0) expiration). The LES instruction allows for 10
counts of backlash to occur (you can adjust as needed). The add
instruction is configured for a 1000 count encoder using N7:2. (Change
this register to match the number of counts generated each Z reset.)
| Rate Period
Counts last rate
|
| Expiration Bit
measurement period
|
|
|
| T4:0
+SUB–––––––––––––––+
|
|––] [––––+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+SUBTRACT
+––––––+–|
|
DN |
|Source A C5:0.ACC|
| |
|
|
|
0|
| |
|
|
|Source B
N7:0|
| |
|
|
|
0|
| |
|
|
|Dest
N7:1|
| |
|
|
|
0|
| |
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
| If
Counts last rate
Counts last rate
| |
|
| negative
measurement period
measurement period
| |
|
| math flag
| |
|
| S:0
+LES–––––––––––––––+ +ADD–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
+––] [––––––+LESS THAN
+––+ADD
+––––––+ |
|
|
3
|Source A
N7:1| |Source A
N7:2|
| |
|
|
|
0| |
1000|
| |
|
|
|Source B
–10| |Source B
N7:1|
| |
|
|
|
| |
0|
| |
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |Dest
N7:1|
| |
|
|
|
0|
| |
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
Last timeout value
| |
|
|
storage register
| |
|
|
+MOV–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+MOVE
+––––––+ |
|
|
|Source
C5:0.ACC|
| |
|
|
|
0|
| |
|
|
|Dest
N7:0|
| |
|
|
|
0|
| |
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
Determine 1 second
| |
|
|
count. ie: # of
| |
|
|
rate periods
| |
|
|
+DIV–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+DIVIDE
+––––––+ |
|
|
|Source A
100|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|Source B T4:0.PRE|
| |
|
|
|
10|
| |
|
|
|Dest
C5:1.PRE|
| |
|
|
|
10|
| |
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
Frequency
| |
|
|
determination
| |
|
|
counter
| |
|
|
+CTU–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+COUNT UP
+–(CU)–+ |
|
|
|Counter
C5:1+–(DN) | |
|
|
|Preset
10|
| |
|
|
|Accum
0|
| |
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
Frequency
| |
|
|
calculation
| |
|
|
register
| |
|
|
+ADD–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+ADD
+––––––+ |
|
|
|Source A
N7:1|
| |
|
|
|
0|
| |
|
|
|Source B
N7:3|
| |
|
|
|
0|
| |
|
|
|Dest
N7:3|
| |
|
|
|
0|
| |
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
| |
E–42
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1 second
Frequency
|
| has now
in Hertz
|
| elapsed
|
| C5:1
+MOV–––––––––––––––+
|
+–––] [–––+––+MOVE
+–+–––––––––––––––––––––––––+
DN | |Source
N7:3| |
| |
0| |
| |Dest
N7:4| |
| |
0| |
| +––––––––––––––––––+ |
| Frequency
|
| calculation
|
| register
|
| +CLR–––––––––––––––+ |
+––+CLEAR
+–+
| |Dest
N7:3| |
| |
0| |
| +––––––––––––––––––+ |
| Frequency
|
| determination
|
| counter
|
|
C5:1
|
+–––––––––(RES)–––––––––+
| Temporary reg.
|
| (math reg is real
|
| destination
|
| +MUL–––––––––––––––+ |
+––+MULTIPLY
+–+
| |Source A
N7:4| |
| |
0| |
| |Source B
60| |
| |
| |
| |Dest
N7:6| |
| |
0| |
| +––––––––––––––––––+ |
| RPM based on
|
| counts per turn
|
| register N7:2
|
| +DDV–––––––––––––––+ |
+––+DOUBLE DIVIDE
+–+
| |Source
N7:2| |
| |
1000| |
| |Dest
N7:5| |
| |
0| |
| +––––––––––––––––––+ |
|
Math overflow
|
|
error bit
|
|
S:5
|
+–––––––––(U)–––––––––––+
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rung 2:3
|
+HSC–––––––––––––––+
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+HIGH SPEED COUNTER+–(CU)–|
|
|Type
Up (Res,Hld)+–(CD)|
|
|Counter
C5:0+–(DN) |
|
|High Preset
1000|
|
|
|Accum
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:4
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
E–43
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
RPM Calculation Instruction List Program
File
2,
Rung 0
Ensures that the measurement value is initialized each RRUN mode entry.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
106
MOV
7
RES
85
CLR
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
1’st pass
S1/15
0
FORCES
––––––
SRC C0.ACC
0000H
last timeout value storage register
DEST N0
0000H
C0
Counts last rate measurement period
DEST N1
0000H
85
CLR
Frequency in Hertz
DEST N4
0000H
85
CLR
RPM based on counts per turn register N7:2
DEST N5
0000H
File
2,
Rung 1
Sets the rate measurement period. In this case, we are calculating a new
rate value once every 100ms. Value N7:1 is updated once every 100ms with
the number of counts that have occurred in the last 100ms period. Note
that the preset value must divide evenly into 100 in order to accurately
determine frequency and RPM (determined later in this program).
FUN
CODE
––––
21
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–]/[–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LDI
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
Rate
0
TON
VALUE
–––––
Period Expiration Bit
T0/DN
0
Counts last rate measurement period
Rate Period Expiration Bit
TIMR T0
BASE
0.01
PRE
10
ACC
0000H
E–44
FORCES
––––––
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
2,
Rung 2
Calculates and stores the number of counts that have occurred since the
last time that it was executed as true in N7:1 (last time=last rate
measurement timer (T4:0) expiration). The LES instruction allows for 10
counts of backlash to occur (you can adjust as needed). The add
instruction is configured for a 1000 count encoder using N7:2. (Change
this register to match the number of counts generated each Z reset.)
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
Rate
10
MPS
81
SUB
11
MRD
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Period Expiration Bit
T0/DN
0
SRCA C0.ACC
0000H
last timeout value storage register
SRCB N0
0000H
Counts last rate measurement period
DEST N1
0000H
22
–] [–
AND
If Negative Math Flag
S0/3
0
57
–LES–
AND–LES
Counts last rate measurement period
SRCA N1
0000H
SRCB
–10
80
ADD
SRCA N2
1000
Counts last rate measurement period
SRCB N1
0000H
Counts last rate measurement period
DEST N1
0000H
11
MRD
106
MOV
11
MRD
83
DIV
11
MRD
5
CTU
SRC C0.ACC
0000H
last timeout value storage register
DEST N0
0000H
SRCA
SRCB T0.PRE
Determine 1 second
DEST C1.PRE
100
10
count. ie.# of rate periods
10
Frequency determination counter
CNTR C1
PRE
10
ACC
0000H
11
MRD
80
ADD
Counts last rate measurement period
SRCA N1
0000H
Frequency calculation register
SRCB N3
0000H
Frequency calculation register
DEST N3
0000H
12
22
MPP
–] [–
AND
1 second has now elapsed
C1/DN
0
E–45
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
FUN
CODE
––––
106
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
MOV
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Frequency calculation register
SRC N3
0000H
Frequency in Hertz
DEST N4
0000H
85
CLR
Frequency calculation register
DEST N3
0000H
7
RES
Frequency determination counter
C1
82
MUL
Frequency in Hertz
SRCA N4
0000H
SRCB
60
Temporary reg. (math reg is real destination)
DEST N6
0000H
84
42
DDV
–(U)–
SRC N2
1000
RPM based on counts per turn register N7:2
DEST N5
0000H
RST
Math overflow error bit
S5/0
0
E–46
File
2,
Rung 3
FUN
CODE
––––
170
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
HSC
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
TYPE
CNTR C0
PRE
ACC
VALUE
–––––
Up (Res,Hld)
1000
0000H
FORCES
––––––
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
On/Off Circuit Application
Example
The following application example illustrates how to use an input to toggle
an output either on or off. For a detailed explanation of:
• LD, LDI, OUT, SET, RST, and OSR instructions, see chapter 8.
• JMP and LBL instructions, see chapter 12.
If the output is off when the input is energized, the output is turned on. If the
output is on when the input is energized, the output is turned off.
On/Off Circuit Ladder Program
Rung 2:0
Does a one-shot from the input push button to an internal bit – the
internal bit is true for only one scan. This prevents toggling of the
physical output in case the push button is held ”ON” for more than one
scan (always the case).
| push button|OSR #1
|
push button |
|
Input |
|
false-to|
|
|
true
|
|
I:0
B3
B3
|
|––––] [–––––––[OSR]––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
|
0
1
0
|
Rung 2:1
If the push button input has gone
presently OFF, turn the output ON
rest of the programs. If the JMP
rung would be true and would turn
from false–to–true and the output is
and jump over the following rung to the
instruction was missing, the following
the output back OFF.
|push button|Toggling
Toggling
|
| false-to- |Output
Output
|
| true
|
|
|
B3
O:0
O:0
|
|––––] [––––––––]/[––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+––––(L)–––––+–|
|
0
0
|
0
| |
|
| Go to rest | |
|
| of program | |
|
|
| |
|
|
1
| |
|
+–––(JMP)––––+ |
|
|
Rung 2:2
If the push button input has gone from false-to-true and the output is
presently ON, turns the output OFF.
|push button|Toggling |
Toggling
|
| false-to- |Output
|
Output
|
| true
|
|
|
B3
O:0
O:0
|
|––––] [––––––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––(U)–––––|
|
0
0
0
|
Rung 2:3
Contains the label corresponding to the jump instruction in rung 1.
remainder of your actual program is placed below this rung.
The
| Go to rest|
Dummy Bit |
| of program|
|
|
|
|
|
1
B3
|
|–––[LBL]–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
|
2
|
Rung 2:4
|
|
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
E–47
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
On/Off Circuit Instruction List Program
File
2,
Rung 0
Does a one-shot from the input push button to an internal bit – the
internal bit is true for only one scan. This prevent toggling of the
physical output in case the push button is held ”ON” for more than one
scan (always the case).
FUN
CODE
––––
20
29
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
–OSR–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
Pushbutton
I/0
0
FORCES
––––––
Input
AND–OSR
OSR #1
B/1
40
–( )–
0
OUT
Pushbutton false-to-true
B/0
0
File
2,
Rung 1
If the push button input has gone
presently OFF, turn the output ON
rest of the programs. If the JMP
rung would be true and would turn
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
from false-to-true and the output is
and jump over the following rung to the
instruction was missing, the following
the output back OFF.
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Pushbutton false-to-true
B/0
0
23
41
–]/[–
–(L)–
130
ANI
Toggling Output
O/0
0
Toggling Output
O/0
0
SET
JMP
Go to rest of program
LBL#
1
File
2,
Rung 2
If the push button input has gone from false-to-true and the output is
presently ON, turns the output OFF.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
Pushbutton false-to-true
B/0
0
22
42
E–48
–] [–
–(U)–
AND
Toggling Output
O/0
0
Toggling Output
O/0
0
RST
FORCES
––––––
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
File
2,
Rung 3
Contains the label corresponding to the jump instruction in rung 1.
remainder of your actual program is placed below this rung.
FUN
CODE
––––
131
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–LBL–
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–LBL
VALUE
–––––
The
FORCES
––––––
Go to rest of program
LBL#
1
40
–( )–
OUT
Dummy Bit
B/2
Spray Booth Application
Example
0
The following application example illustrates the use of bit shift and FIFO
instructions in an automated paint spraying operation. For a detailed
explanation of:
• LD and OUT instructions, see chapter 8.
• EQU and LIM instructions, see chapter 9.
• FFU and FFL instructions, see chapter 11.
• BSL instruction, see chapter 12.
Paint Spray Booth
Position
2
3
1
Bar Code Reader I:0/2,3,4
Bit Shift
N7:3
FIFO
Blue
4
Input
Proximity
Switch I:0/1
B3/0
B3/1
B3/2
B3/3
0
1
0
1
N7:2
N7:1
N7:0
Red
Blue
Blue
Paint Sprayer Signals
Spray Enable
O:0/3
Blue Paint Gun
O:0/0
Yellow Paint Gun
O:0/1
Red Paint Gun
O:0/2
E–49
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Spray Booth Operation Overview
An overhead conveyor with part carriers (hooks) carries parts from a
previous operation to the spray booth. Before the part enters the spray booth,
two items are checked on the conveyor. The first check is for part presence
and the second check is for the needed color. This information is stored and
accessed later when the part carrier is in the paint spraying area. A proximity
switch is used to check for the presence of a part on the carrier and a barcode
reader is used to determine color choice. When the part carrier reaches the
spraying area, the previously stored information is accessed. If there is a part
on the carrier, it is painted according to its bar code and if the carrier is free,
paint is not dispensed.
The bit shift and FIFO instructions store the part presence and color
information before each carrier enters the spray booth. Both of these
instructions place data into their data structures every time a part carrier
actuates the shift limit switch.
If the proximity switch senses a part on the carrier, a 1 is shifted into the shift
register. If the carrier is free as it passes the shift limit switch, a 0 is shifted
into the shift register. The shift register tracks the part carriers approaching
the spraying area.
The FIFO does the same type of shifting, except rather than shifting one bit
at a time, the FIFO shifts an entire word at a time. Just before the part carrier
actuates the SHIFT limit switch, the barcode reader reads the barcode on the
part to determine what color the part should be painted. The barcode reader
has three outputs that it sets according to what color the part should be.
These outputs are:
• wired to the controller as inputs I/2, I/3, and I/4
• combined together to form an integer which is decoded later in the
program
This integer is then shifted into the FIFO when the carrier actuates the
SHIFT limit switch.
Once the presence and color data is loaded into the shift register and FIFO,
they are shifted to new memory locations each time another part carrier
actuates the SHIFT limit switch. After three additional shifts, the first part
carrier is in front of the spray guns, ready for its part to be painted. At this
point the part presence data has been shifted into B/3 and the color data has
been shifted into N0. The program now checks B/3 – if there is a “1” in this
location, then there is a part hanging on the part carrier and the SPRAY
ENABLE output is energized. The program also checks N0 to determine
which color to paint the part. As the program is checking the shift register
for the presence of a part at the spray guns, it is also decoding the color
information at N0 and energizing the appropriate spray guns. Since we are
only using three colors, the only valid color codes are 1, 2, and 3. If any
other number is in N0 when a part is ready to be painted, the color defaults to
BLUE.
Since our program accesses the data while it is still in the two data structures,
after the part has been painted, the presence and color information for that
part is shifted out of the data structures and lost.
E–50
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Spray Booth Ladder Program
Rung 2:0
These three rungs read the color information coming from the barcode
decoder outputs and load this into integer N7:4. This color is loaded
into the FIFO when the part carrier actuates the SHIFT LIMIT SWITCH.
| Low Bit
|
Color
|
| from Bar
|
Select
|
| Code
|
Word
|
| Decoder
|
|
|
I:0
N7:4
|
|––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )––––––|
|
2
0
|
Rung 2:1
| Middle Bit |
Color
|
| from Bar
|
Select
|
| Code
|
Word
|
| Decoder
|
|
|
I:0
N7:4
|
|––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )––––––|
|
3
1
|
Rung 2:2
| High Bit
|
Color
|
| from Bar
|
Select
|
| Code
|
Word
|
| Decoder
|
|
|
I:0
N7:4
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
|
4
2
|
Rung 2:3
When the part carrier actuates the SHIFT LIMIT SWITCH, three things happen
in this rung: (1) the color of the previously painted part is unloaded
from the FIFO to make room for the color of the new part, (2) the color of
the new part is loaded into the FIFO, (3) the presence or absence of a
part on the part carrier is shifted into the Shift Register.
| Shift
Unload color
|
| Limit
of previously
|
| Switch
painted part
|
|
|
|
I:0
+FFU–––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–+FIFO UNLOAD
+–(EU)–+–|
|
0
| |FIFO
#N7:0+–(DN) | |
|
| |Dest
N7:10+–(EM) | |
|
| |Control
R6:0|
| |
|
| |Length
4|
| |
|
| |Position
4|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
Load color of
| |
|
|
new part
| |
|
| +FFL–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
+–+FIFO LOAD
+–(EU)–+ |
|
| |Source
N7:4+–(DN) | |
|
| |FIFO
#N7:0+–(EM) | |
|
| |Control
R6:0|
| |
|
| |Length
4|
| |
|
| |Position
4|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
Load the presence
| |
|
|
of the new part
| |
|
|
| |
|
| +BSL–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
+–+BIT SHIFT LEFT
+–(EU)–+ |
|
|File
#B3:0+–(DN)
|
|
|Control
R6:1|
|
|
|Bit Address I:0/1|
|
|
|Length
4|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
E–51
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Rung 2:4
If there is a part on the part carrier now entering the spraying area,
energize the paint sprayer. If there is not a part on the part carrier,
do not energize the sprayer.
| BSL
Spray
|
| position 4
Enable
|
|
|
|
B3
O:0
|
|–––[ ]–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––––|
|
3
3
|
Rung 2:5
Decodes color select word. If N7:0=1, then energize the blue paint gun.
Or if N7:0= an invalid color selection, default the color of the part to
blue and energize the blue paint gun.
|
Blue Gun
|
|
+EQU–––––––––––––––+
O:0
|
|–+–+EQUAL
+–+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
| | |Source A
N7:0| |
0
|
| | |
0| |
|
| | |Source B
1| |
|
| | |
| |
|
| | +––––––––––––––––––+ |
|
| |
|
|
| | +LIM–––––––––––––––+ |
|
| +–+LIMIT TEST
+–+
|
|
|Low Limit
4|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|Test
N7:0|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
|High Lim
1|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:6
Decodes color select word.
If N7:0=2, then energize the yellow paint gun.
|
Yellow Gun
|
| +EQU–––––––––––––––+
O:0
|
|–+EQUAL
+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
| |Source A
N7:0|
1
|
| |
0|
|
| |Source B
2|
|
| |
|
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:7
Decodes color select word.
If N7:0=3, then energize the red paint gun.
|
Red Gun
|
| +EQU–––––––––––––––+
O:0
|
|–+EQUAL
+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––( )–––––|
| |Source A
N7:0|
2
|
| |
0|
|
| |Source B
3|
|
| |
|
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:8
|
|
|––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
|
|
E–52
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Spray Booth Instruction List Program
File
2,
Rung 0
These three rungs read the color information coming from the barcode
decoder outputs and load this into integer N7:4. This color is loaded
into the FIFO when the part carrier actuates the SHIFT LIMIT SWITCH.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Low Bit from Bar Code Decoder
I/2
0
40
–( )–
File
2,
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
OUT
Color Select Word
N4/0
0
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
Rung 1
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
FORCES
––––––
Middle Bit from Bar Code Decoder
I/3
0
40
–( )–
OUT
Color
File
2,
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
Select Word
N4/1
0
Rung 2
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Low Bit from Bar Code Decoder
I/4
0
40
–( )–
OUT
Color
File
2,
Select Word
N4/2
0
Rung 3
When the part carrier actuates the SHIFT LIMIT SWITCH, three things happen
in this rung: (1) the color of the previously painted part is unloaded
from the FIFO to make room for the color of the new part, (2) the color of
the new part is loaded into the FIFO, (3) the presence or absence of a
part on the part carrier is shifted into the Shift Register.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
VALUE
–––––
FORCES
––––––
Shift Limit Switch
I/0
0
114
FFU
Unload color of
FIFO #N0
DEST N10
CTRL R0
LEN
POS
previously painted part
113
FFL
Load color of new
SRC N4
FIFO #N0
CTRL R0
LEN
POS
4
4
part
4
4
E–53
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
FUN
CODE
––––
150
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
MNEMONIC
––––––––
BSL
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
VALUE
–––– –––––––
–––––
Load the presence of the new part
FILE #B0
CTRL R1
BIT I/1
LEN
File
2,
FORCES
––––––
4
Rung 4
If there is a part on the part carrier now entering the spraying area,
energize the paint sprayer. If there is not a part on the part carrier,
do not energize the sprayer.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
BSL Position 4
B/3
40
–( )–
2,
FORCES
––––––
0
OUT
Spray Enable
O/3
File
VALUE
–––––
0
Rung 5
Decodes color select word. If N7:0=1, then energize the blue paint gun.
Or if N7:0= an invalid color selection, default the color of the part to
blue and energize the blue paint gun.
FUN
CODE
––––
50
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–EQU–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–EQU
73
|_LIM_|
OR–LIM
40
–( )–
OUT
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SRCA N0
SRCB
LOW
TEST N0
HIGH
Blue Gun
O/0
File
2,
FUN
CODE
––––
50
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–EQU–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–EQU
40
–( )–
OUT
2,
4
0000H
1
0
If N7:0=2, then energize the yellow paint gun.
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SRCA N0
SRCB
VALUE
–––––
0000H
2
Yellow Gun
O/1
0
FORCES
––––––
Rung 7
Decodes color select word.
E–54
FORCES
––––––
Rung 6
Decodes color select word.
File
VALUE
–––––
0000H
1
FUN
CODE
––––
50
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–EQU–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD–EQU
40
–( )–
OUT
If N7:0=3, then energize the red paint gun.
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
–––– –––––––
SRCA N0
SRCB
VALUE
–––––
0000H
3
Red Gun
O/2
0
FORCES
––––––
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Adjustable Timer Application
Example
The following application example illustrates the use of timers to adjust the
drill dwell time at the end of the machines downstroke. For a detailed
explanation of:
• LD, TON, and OSR instructions, see chapter 8.
• LES and GRT instructions, see chapter 9.
• ADD and SUB instructions, see chapter 10.
Valid dwell times are 5.0 seconds to 120.0 seconds. Adjustments are made in
2.5 second intervals.
Each time I/8 or I/9 is depressed, the timer preset or delay is adjusted up or
down accordingly. By altering the value of N0 the amount of change can be
increased or decreased. The constants in the LES and GRT instructions, and
in the source and destination of the ADD and SUB instructions, could be
changed easily to integers for even greater flexibility.
Adjustable Timer Ladder Program
Rung 2:0
Adds 2.5 seconds to Timer delay each time the increment push button is
depressed. Do not exceed 120.0 seconds delay. Note that N7:0=250.
| Increment
|
| Timer preset
|
| I:0
+LES–––––––––––––––+
B3
+ADD–––––––––––––––+
|
|––] [––––––+LESS THAN
+––––––[OSR]–––+ADD
+––––|
|
8
|Source A T4:0.PRE|
0 |Source A T4:0.PRE|
|
|
|
500|
|
500|
|
|
|Source B
11750|
|Source B
N7:0|
|
|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|Dest
T4:0.PRE|
|
|
|
500|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:1
Subtracts 2.5 seconds from Timer delay each time the decrement push button
is depressed. Do not go below 5.0 seconds delay.
| Decrement
|
| Timer preset
|
| I:0
+GRT–––––––––––––––+
B3
+SUB–––––––––––––––+
|
|––] [––––––+GREATER THAN
+––––––[OSR]–––+SUBTRACT
+––––|
|
9
|Source A T4:0.PRE|
1 |Source A T4:0.PRE|
|
|
|
500|
|
500|
|
|
|Source B
750|
|Source B
N7:0|
|
|
|
|
|
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|Dest
T4:0.PRE|
|
|
|
500|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
Rung 2:2
|
|
|
|
|
+TON–––––––––––––––+
|
|––] [–––Input conditions to allow––––––––––––+TIMER ON DELAY
+––––|
|
dwell time on the drill.
|Timer
T4:0|
|
|
|Timebase
0.01|
|
|
|Preset
500|
|
|
|Accum
0|
|
|
+––––––––––––––––––+
|
E–55
Appendix E
Application Example Programs
Adjustable Timer Instruction List Program
File
2,
Rung 0
Adds 2.5 to Timer delay each time the increment push button is depressed.
Do not exceed 120.0 seconds delay. Note that N7:0=250.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
VALUE
–––– –––––––
–––––
Increment Timer preset
I/8
57
–LES–
AND–LES
29
–OSR–
AND–OSR
80
File
ADD
2,
SRCA T0.PRE
SRCB
B/0
SRCA T0.PRE
SRCB N0
DEST T0.PRE
FORCES
––––––
0
500
11750
0
500
0000H
500
Rung 1
Subtracts 2.5 seconds from Timer delay each time the decrement push button
is depressed. Do not go below 5.0 seconds delay.
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
MNEMONIC
––––––––
LD
PARAMETER
NAME ADDRESS
VALUE
–––– –––––––
–––––
Decrement Timer preset
I/9
63
–GRT–
AND–GRT
29
–OSR–
AND–OSR
81
File
2,
FUN
CODE
––––
20
GRAPHIC
SYMBOL
–––––––
|–] [–
0
E–56
SUB
SRCA T0.PRE
SRCB
B/1
SRCA T0.PRE
SRCB N0
DEST T0.PRE
FORCES
––––––
0
500
750
0
500
0000H
500
Rung 2
PARAMETER
MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS
VALUE
FORCES
–––––––– –––– –––––––
–––––
––––––
LD
Input conditions to allow dwell time on the drill.
TON
TIMR T0
BASE
PRE
ACC
0.01
500
0000H
Appendix
F
Optional Analog Input Software Calibration
This appendix helps you calibrate an analog input channel using software
offsets to increase the expected accuracy of an analog input circuit.
Examples of equations and a ladder diagram are provided for your reference.
Software calibration reduces the error at a given temperature by scaling the
values read at calibration time.
Calibrating an Analog Input
Channel
The following procedure can be adapted to all analog inputs; current or
voltage. For this example, the 1761-L20BWA-5A with a 4 mA to 20 mA
input is used. The overall error for the MicroLogix 1000 is guaranteed to be
not more than ± 0.525 at 25 C.
The overall error of ± 0.525% at 20 mA equates to ± 164 LSB of error, or a
code range of 31043 to 31371. Any value in this range is returned by an
analog input channel at 20 mA. The expected nominal value at 20 mA is
31207. After performing a software calibration, the overall error is reduced
to 5 LSB (0.018%), or a code range of 31202 to 31212.
The graph shown below shows the linear relationship between the input
value and the resulting scaled value. The values in this graph are from the
example program.
Figure A.1
20 mA = 31207
(scale Hi)
Scaled
Value
4 mA = 6241
(scale low)
6292
Low Value from card
31352
Hi Value from card
Input Value
Scaled Value vs. Input Value
F–1
Appendix F
Optional Analog Input Software Calibration
Calculating the Software Calibration
Use the following equation to perform the software calibration:
Scaled Value = (input value x slope) + offset
Slope = (scaled max. – scaled min.) / (input max. – input min.)
Offset = Scaled min. – (input min. x slope)
Calibration Procedure
1. Heat up / cool down your MicroLogix 1000 system to the temperature in
which it will normally be operating.
2. Determine the scaled high and low values you wish to use in your
application. In this example, scaled high value (which corresponds to 20
mA) is 31207 and scaled low value (which corresponds to 4 mA) is 6241.
3. Using an analog calibration source connected to the analog input channel
or your system’s input device placed at the 4 mA position, capture the low
value by setting and then resetting the CAL_LO_ENABLE bit. Ensure
that your low value lies within the conversion range of your analog input.
4. Using an analog calibration source connected to the analog input channel
or your system’s input device placed at the 20 mA position, capture the
high value by setting and then resetting the CAL_HI_ENABLE bit.
Ensure that your high value lies within the conversion range of your
analog input.
5. Set and then reset the CALIBRATE bit. This causes the MicroLogix to
calculate the slope and offset values used to perform the error correction
to the analog input.
The analog channel is now calibrated to ± 5 LSB at the calibration
temperature.
The recommended calibration period is once every 6 months. If an
application has a wide range of operating temperatures, a software
calibration should be performed every 3 to 4 months.
Example Ladder Diagram
The following ladder diagram uses three internal bits to perform the
calibration procedure. CAL_LO_ENABLE causes the ladder to capture the
4 mA calibration value and CAL_HI_ENABLE causes the ladder to capture
the 20 mA calibration value. CALIBRATE causes the ladder diagram to
scale the high and low values to the nominal values, which provides the slope
and offset values used to calibrate the analog input channel.
F–2
Appendix F
Optional Analog Input Software Calibration
Once the calibration procedure is complete, set the CONVERSION
ENABLE bit to 1. The calibration numbers are then used to scale the raw
analog data. The corrected analog input data is placed in memory location
ANALOG_SCALED.
The following symbols are used in this example:
CAL_LO_ENABLE
= B3/500
CAL_HI_ENABLE
= B3/501
CALIBRATE
= B3/502
CONVERSION ENABLE
= B3/503
ANALOG_IN
= I:0.4
LO_CAL_VALUE
= N7:90
HI_CAL_VALUE
= N7:91
CAL_SPAN
= N7:92
SCALE_HI
= N7:93
SCALE_LOW
= N7:94
SCALE_SPAN
= N7:95
SLOPE_X10K
= N7:97
OFFSET
= N7:100
ANALOG_SCALED
= N7:101
F–3
Appendix F
Optional Analog Input Software Calibration
Rung 2:0
| CAL_LO_ENABLE
|
|
B3/504
+MOV–––––––––––––––+ |
|––––] [––––––[OSR]–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+MOVE
+–|
|
|Source
ANALOG_IN| |
|
|
?| |
|
|Dest LO_CAL_VALUE| |
|
|
?| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 2:1
| CAL_HI_ENABLE
|
|
B3/505
+MOV–––––––––––––––+ |
|––––] [––––––[OSR]–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+MOVE
+–|
|
|Source
ANALOG_IN| |
|
|
?| |
|
|Dest HI_CAL_VALUE| |
|
|
?| |
|
+––––––––––––––––––+ |
Rung 2:2
| CALIBRATE
|
|
B3/506
+SUB––––––––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [––––––[OSR]––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–+SUBTRACT
+–+–|
|
| |Source A
HI_CAL_VALUE| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| |Source B
LO_CAL_VALUE| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| |Dest
CAL_SPAN| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +–––––––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| +SUB–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
+–+SUBTRACT
+––––––+ |
|
| |Source A SCALE_HI|
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| |Source B SCALE_LO|
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| |Dest
SCALE_SPAN|
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
| +MUL––––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MULTIPLY
+–+ |
|
| |Source A
SCALE_SPAN| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| |Source B
10000| | |
|
| |
10000| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:96| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +–––––––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| +DDV–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
+–+DOUBLE DIVIDE
+––––––+ |
|
| |Source
CAL_SPAN|
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| |Dest
SLOPE_X10K|
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
Ladder logic continued on the next page.
F–4
Appendix F
Optional Analog Input Software Calibration
|
| +MUL––––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
+–+MULTIPLY
+–+ |
|
| |Source A
LO_CAL_VALUE| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| |Source B
SLOPE_X10K| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| |Dest
N7:98| | |
|
| |
0| | |
|
| +–––––––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
| +DDV–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
+–+DOUBLE DIVIDE
+––––––+ |
|
| |Source
10000|
| |
|
| |
10000|
| |
|
| |Dest
N7:99|
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
| +SUB–––––––––––––––+
| |
|
+–+SUBTRACT
+––––––+ |
|
| |Source A SCALE_LOW|
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| |Source B
N7:99|
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| |Dest
OFFSET|
| |
|
| |
0|
| |
|
| +––––––––––––––––––+
| |
|
|
Overflow| |
|
|
Trap
| |
|
|
S2:5/0 | |
|
+–––––––––––––––––––(U)–––––+ |
|
|
Rung 2:3
|
|
|
|
| CONVERSION_ENABLE
+SCL––––––––––––––––––––+
|
|––––] [–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–+SCALE
+–+–|
|
| |Source A
ANALOG_IN| | |
|
| |
?| | |
|
| |Rate[/10000] SLOPE_X10K| | |
|
| |
?| | |
|
| |Offset
OFFSET| | |
|
| |
?| | |
|
| |Dest
ANALOG_SCALED| | |
|
| +–––––––––––––––––––––––+ | |
|
|
|–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+END+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––|
F–5
Glossary
Glossary
The following terms are used throughout this manual. Refer to the
Allen–Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary, Publication Number AG–7.1,
for a complete guide to Allen–Bradley technical terms.
address: A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location. For
example, I1/0 is the memory address for the data located in the Input file
location word1, bit 0.
application: 1) A machine or process monitored and controlled by a
controller. 2) The use of computer– or processor–based routines for specific
purposes.
backup data: Data saved to the controller with the program.
baud rate: The speed of communication between devices on a network. All
devices must communicate at the same baud rate.
bit: The smallest storage location in memory that contains either a 1 (ON) or
a 0 (OFF).
block diagrams: A schematic drawing.
Boolean operators: Logical operators such as AND, OR, NEG, NOT, and
XOR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements
or circuits. Can have an output response be true or false.
branch: A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program.
comment: Text included with a program to explain what the program is
doing. Comments do not affect the operation of the program in any way.
communication scan: A part of the controller’s operating cycle.
Communication with other devices, such as programming software on a
personal computer, takes place.
controller: A device, such as a programmable controller, used to monitor
input devices and control output devices.
controller overhead: An internal portion of the operating cycle used for
housekeeping and setup purposes.
control profile: The means by which a controller determines which outputs
turn on under what conditions.
G–1
Glossary
counter: 1) An electro–mechanical relay–type device that counts the
occurrence of some event. May be pulses developed from operations such as
switch closures, interruptions of light beams, or other discrete events.
2) In controllers a software counter eliminates the need for hardware
counters. The software counter can be given a preset count value to count up
or down whenever the counted event occurs.
CPU (Central Processing Unit): The decision–making and data storage
section of a programmable controller.
data table: The part of the controller memory that contains I/O values and
files where data is monitored, manipulated, and changed for control
purposes.
DIN rail: Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus
(DIN) standards, a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting
of your controller.
DOS: Disk Operating System. The operating system used to operate a
personal computer.
DTE (Data Terminal Equipment): Equipment that is attached to a network
to send or receive data, or both.
edit: To create or modify a ladder or instruction list program.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
encoder: 1) A rotary device that transmits position information. 2) A device
that transmits a fixed number of pulses for each revolution.
false: The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical
path on a ladder rung.
FIFO (First–In–First–Out): The order that data is entered into and
retrieved from a file.
file: A collection of information organized into one group.
floppy disk: A thin flexible disk, coated with magnetic oxide and used to
store data.
full–duplex: A bidirectional mode of communication where data may be
transmitted and received simultaneously (contrast with half–duplex).
half–duplex: A communication link in which data transmission is limited to
one direction at a time.
HHP (Hand–Held Programmer): A device used to monitor and develop
control logic programs for the micro controller.
high byte: Bits 8–15 of a word.
input device: A device, such as a push button or a switch, that supplies
signals through input circuits to the controller.
G–2
Glossary
inrush current: The temporary surge current produced when a device or
circuit is initially energized.
instruction: A mnemonic and data address defining an operation to be
performed by the controller. A rung in a program consists of a set of input
and output instructions. The input instructions are evaluated by the
controller as being true or false. In turn, the controller sets the output
instructions to true or false.
Instruction List program: A program written in a list format using
mnemonics. The program is used by a programmable controller to control
devices.
instruction set: The set of general purpose instructions available with a
given controller.
I/O (Inputs and Outputs): Consists of input and output devices that
provide and/or receive data from the controller.
jump: Change in normal sequence of program execution, by executing an
instruction that alters the program counter (sometimes called a branch). In
ladder programs a JUMP (JMP) instruction causes execution to jump to a
labeled rung.
ladder logic: A program written in a format resembling a ladder–like
diagram. The program is used by a programmable controller to control
devices.
LED (Light Emitting Diode): Used as status indicator for controller
functions and inputs and outputs.
LIFO (Last–In–First–Out): The order that data is entered into and
retrieved from a file.
low byte: Bits 0–7 of a word.
logic: A process of solving complex problems through the repeated use of
simple functions that can be either true or false. General term for digital
circuits and programmed instructions to perform required decision making
and computational functions.
Master Control Relay (MCR): A mandatory hardwired relay that can be
de–energized by any series–connected emergency stop switch. Whenever the
MCR is de–energized, its contacts open to de–energize all application I/O
devices.
mnemonic: A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a
complex or lengthy set of information.
modes: Selected methods of operation. Example: RRUN, RCSN, RSSN, or
RPRG.
G–3
Glossary
negative logic: The use of binary logic in such a way that “0” represents the
voltage level normally associated with logic 1 (for example, 0 = +5V, 1 =
0V). Positive is more conventional (for example, 1 = +5V, 0 = 0V).
network: A series of stations (nodes) connected by some type of
communication medium. A network may be made up of a single link or
multiple links.
nominal input current: The current at nominal input voltage.
normally closed: Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the
relay is de–energized or the switch is de–activated; they are open when the
relay is energized or the switch is activated. In Instruction List
programming, a symbol that allows logic continuity (flow) if the referenced
input is logic “0” when evaluated.
normally open: Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay
is de–energized or the switch is de–activated. (They are closed when the
relay is energized or the switch is activated.) In Instruction List
programming, a symbol that allows logic continuity (flow) if the referenced
input is logic “1” when evaluated.
one–shot: A programming technique that sets a bit for only one program
scan.
online: Describes devices under direct communication. For example, when
programming software is monitoring the program file in a controller.
operating voltage: For inputs, the voltage range needed for the input to be
in the On state. For outputs, the allowable range of user–supplied voltage.
output device: A device, such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil, that
receives data from the controller.
processor: A Central Processing Unit. (See CPU.)
program: The set of program and data files used by the controller to control
output devices. Only one program may be stored in the controller at a time.
program data: Provides data locations for output, input, status, bit, timer,
counter, control, and integer files.
program file: The area within a program that contains controller
information, the main program, interrupt subroutines, and any subroutine
programs.
program listing: A report containing a range of program files or a range of
rungs.
program mode: When the controller is not executing the program and all
outputs are de–energized.
program scan: A part of the controller’s operating cycle. During the scan
the ladder program is executed and the Output data file is updated based on
the program and the Input data file.
G–4
Glossary
protocol: The packaging of information that is transmitted across a network.
read: To acquire data from a storage place. For example, the controller
READs information from the input data file to solve the program.
relay: An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical
circuits.
relay logic: A representation of the program or other logic in a form
normally used for relays.
restore: To download (transfer) a program from a personal computer to a
controller.
reserved bit: A status file location that the user should not read or write to.
retentive data: Information associated with data files (timers, counters,
inputs, and outputs) in a program that is preserved through power cycles.
Program files 2–15 are not effected by retentive data.
RRUN mode: remote mode during which the controller scans or executes
the logic program, monitors input devices, energizes output devices, and acts
on enabled I/O forces.
RS–232: An EIA standard that specifies electrical, mechanical, and
functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits. A
single–ended serial communication interface.
run mode: When the program in the controller is being executed, inputs are
read, the program is scanned, and outputs are energized and de–energized.
rung: Ladder logic is comprised of a set of rungs. A rung contains input
and output instructions. During Run mode, the inputs on a rung are
evaluated to be true or false. If a path of true logic exists, the outputs are
made true. If all paths are false, the outputs are made false.
scan time: The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in
the program. The scan time may vary depending on the instructions and each
instruction’s status during the scan.
sinking: A term used to describe current flow between an I/O device and
controller I/O circuit — typically, a sinking device or circuit provides a path
to ground, low, or negative side of power supply.
software: Executable programming package used to develop ladder
diagrams.
sourcing: A term used to describe current flow between an I/O device and
controller I/O circuit — typically, a sourcing device or circuit provides a path
to the source, high, or positive side of power supply.
status: The condition of a circuit or system, represented as logic 0 (OFF) or
1 (ON).
G–5
Glossary
terminal: A point on an I/O module that external I/O devices, such as a
push button or pilot light, are wired to.
throughput: The time between when an input turns on and the
corresponding output turns on.
true: The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on
a ladder rung.
upload: Data is transferred to a programming or storage device from
another device.
user interrupt poll: While executing the user program, the controller
firmware checks for user interrupts that need servicing.
watchdog timer: A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at
the conclusion of each cycle. If the watchdog runs past its programmed time
period, it will cause a fault.
workspace: The main storage available for programs and data and allocated
for working storage.
write: To copy data to a storage device. For example, the controller
WRITEs the information from the output data file to the output devices.
G–6
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
Numbers
1761-HHP-B30, features, 4–2
1761-L10BWA
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–8
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–8
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–8
1761-L10BWB
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–11
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–11
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–11
1761-L16AWA
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–6
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–6
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–6
1761-L16BBB
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–15
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–15
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–15
1761-L16BWA
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–9
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–9
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–9
1761-L16BWB
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–12
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–12
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–12
1761-L20AWA-5A
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–17
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–17
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–17
1761-L20BWA-5A
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–18
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–18
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–18
1761-L20BWB-5A
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–19
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–19
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
I–7
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–19
1761-L32AAA
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–14
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–14
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–14
1761-L32AWA
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–7
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–7
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–7
1761-L32BBB
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–16
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–16
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–16
1761-L32BWA
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–10
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–10
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–10
I–8
1761-L32BWB
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
input voltage range, 2–13
mounting, 1–12
output voltage range, 2–13
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
spacing, 1–12
troubleshooting, 20–1
type, 1–2
wiring, 2–3
wiring diagram, 2–13
32-bit addition and subtraction, 10–6
example, 10–6
instruction list program, 10–7
ladder representation, 10–7
math overflow selection bit S2/14, 10–6
A
accepting your program edits, 18–21
accessing additional characters, HHP
keypad, 4–5
accessing the program
normal operation, 6–6
power up, 6–7
accessories and replacement parts, A–11
Add (ADD), 10–4
entering the instruction, 10–4
execution times, 10–4
function code, 10–4
instruction parameters, C–3
ladder representation, 10–4
updates to arithmetic status bits, 10–4
valid addressing modes, C–3
valid file types, C–3
ADD, Add, 10–4
addresses, searching for, 17–8
addressing
compared to programming software’s
addressing, 6–8
data files, 6–7
indexed, 6–9
logical addresses, specifying, 6–8
using mnemonics, 6–8
addressing modes, C–2
direct addressing, C–2
immediate addressing, C–2
indexed addressing, C–2
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
AIC+
applying power to, 3–11
attaching to the network, 3–12
connecting, 3–6
modem, 3–7
network, 3–7
point-to-point, 3–7
installing, 3–12
recommended user supplied components,
3–10
selecting cable, 3–8
And Inverted (ANI), 8–4
entering the instruction, 8–5
execution times, 8–4
instruction parameters, C–3
ladder representation, 8–4
using, 8–5
valid addressing modes, C–3
valid file types, C–3
Allen-Bradley, contacting for assistance, P–6,
20–16
ANI, And Inverted, 8–4
analog controller, types, 20 discrete I/O and 5
analog I/O, 1–2
analog controllers
converting analog data, 7–4
grounding your analog cable, 2–20
I/O configuration, 7–2
I/O image, 7–1
input channel filtering, 7–3
input software calibration, F–1
minimizing electrical noise, 2–20
voltage and current input and output
ranges, 2–22
wiring your analog channels, 2–21
ANB, And Block, 8–12
And (AND)
bit input instruction, 8–3
entering the instruction, 8–4
execution times, 8–3
instruction parameters, C–3
ladder representation, 8–3
using, 8–4
valid addressing modes, C–3
valid file types, C–3
valid addressing modes, C–3
word output instruction, 11–18
entering the instruction, 11–18
execution times, 11–18
function code, 11–18
instruction parameters, C–3
ladder representation, 11–18
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–18
valid addressing modes, C–3
valid file types, C–3
And Block (ANB), 8–12
entering the instruction, 8–12
execution times, 8–12
function code, 8–12, 8–13
ladder representation, 8–12
using, 8–12
AND, And
bit input instruction, 8–3
word output instruction, 11–18
append mode, 17–3
inserting a rung, 17–4
inserting an instruction, 17–3
application example programs
adjustable timer, E–55
instruction list program, E–56
ladder program, E–55
operation overview, E–55
bottle line, E–29
instruction list program, E–32
ladder program, E–29
operation overview, E–29
conveyor line, E–34
instruction list program, E–37
ladder program, E–35
operation overview, E–34
event driven sequencer, E–27
instruction list program, E–28
ladder program, E–27
operation overview, E–27
on/off circuit, E–47
instruction list program, E–48
ladder program, E–47
operation overview, E–47
paper drilling machine, E–2
instruction list program, E–14
ladder program, E–4
operation overview, E–2
RPM calculation, E–40
instruction list program, E–44
ladder program, E–41
operation overview, E–40
spray booth, E–49
instruction list program, E–53
ladder program, E–51
operation overview, E–50
time driven sequencer, E–25
instruction list program, E–26
ladder program, E–25
operation overview, E–25
I–9
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
using the MSG instruction, 15–12
application specific instructions
about, 13–1
bit shift instructions, overview, 13–2
Bit Shift Left (BSL), 13–3
Bit Shift Right (BSR), 13–4
in the paper drilling machine application
example, 13–20
Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) function,
overview, 13–15
sequencer instructions, overview, 13–6
applying logic to your schematics, 6–11
B
basic instructions
about, 8–2
bit instructions, overview, 8–3
branch instructions, overview, 8–9
counter instructions, overview, 8–21
in the paper drilling machine application
example, 8–28
timer instructions, overview, 8–14
baud rate
changing, 19–6, 19–7
limitations for autoswitching, 3–13
bidirectional counter
operation, 14–9
overview, 14–5
bidirectional counter with quadrature encoder
operation, 14–13
overview, 14–5
bidirectional counter with reset and hold
operation, 14–9
overview, 14–5
bidirectional counter with reset and hold with
quadrature encoder
operation, 14–13
overview, 14–5
Or Block (ORB), 8–12
Or Inverted (ORI), 8–4
Or True (ORT), 8–6
Output (OUT), 8–8
overview, 8–3
Reset (RST), 8–8
Set (SET), 8–8
bit shift instructions, overview, 13–2
effects on index register S24, 13–3
entering parameters, 13–2
entering the instructions, 13–2
Bit Shift Left (BSL), 13–3
effects on index register, 13–3
entering parameters, 13–2
entering the instruction, 13–3
execution times, 13–3
function code, 13–3
instruction parameters, C–3
ladder representation, 13–3
operation, 13–4
valid file types, C–3
Bit Shift Right (BSR), 13–4
effects on index register, 13–3
entering parameters, 13–2
entering the instruction, 13–4
execution times, 13–4
function code, 13–5
instruction parameters, C–3
ladder representation, 13–4
operation, 13–5
valid addressing modes, C–3
valid file types, C–3
branch instructions, overview, 8–9
branching
input, 6–13
nested, 6–14
output, 6–13
BSL, Bit Shift Left, 13–3
BSR, Bit Shift Right, 13–4
bit file (B), 6–4
bit instructions
And (AND), 8–3
And Block (ANB), 8–12
And Inverted (ANI), 8–4
Load (LD), 8–3
Load Inverted (LDI), 8–4
Load True (LDT), 8–6
Memory Pop (MPP), 8–10
Memory Push (MPS), 8–10
Memory Read (MRD), 8–10
One-Shot Rising (OSR), 8–7
Or (OR), 8–3
I–10
C
cables
planning routes for DH-485 connections,
D–13
selection guide for the AIC+, 3–8
selection guide for the DeviceNet network,
3–14
Calculating the Software Calibration, F–2
calibrating an analog input channel, F–1
CE mark, 1–1
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
changing
editing modes, 17–3
radix, 18–30
remote controller modes, 18–21, 18–23
the baud rate, 19–6, 19–7
the HHP’s defaults, 4–17
the language, 4–17
the LCD display contrast, 4–18
the program defaults, 18–1
controller version, 18–18
extended I/O configuration bit, 18–8
fault override bit, 18–7
input filters, 18–12, 18–14, 18–15,
18–16
lock program function, 18–17
program name, 18–2
run always bit, 18–5
start-up protection bit, 18–6
STI enabled bit, 18–10
STI setpoint, 18–9
user and master passwords, 18–2
watchdog scan, 18–11
channel configuration
DF1 full–duplex, D–2
DF1 half-duplex slave, D–5
Clear (CLR), 10–11
entering the instruction, 10–11
execution times, 10–11
function code, 10–11
instruction parameters, C–3
ladder representative, 10–11
updates to arithmetic status bits, 10–11
valid addressing modes, C–3
valid file types, C–3
clearing a program
from a memory module, 19–5
from the controller, 5–2, 19–6
clearing faults, 20–12
CLR, Clear, 10–11
common procedures, 19–1
communication
DeviceNet, 3–13
establishing with controller, 3–12, 3–13,
19–7
types of, 15–1
communication protocols
DF1 full-duplex, D–2
DF1 half-duplex slave, D–4
DH-485, D–9
comparison instructions, 9–1
about, 9–2
Equal (EQU), 9–3
Greater Than (GRT), 9–7
Greater Than or Equal (GEQ), 9–8
Less Than (LES), 9–5
Less Than or Equal (LEQ), 9–6
Limit Test (LIM), 9–10
Masked Comparison for Equal (MEQ), 9–9
Not Equal (NEQ), 9–4
overview, 9–2
entering the instruction, 9–2
function codes, 9–3
using indexed word addresses, 9–3
configuring your program, 18–1
controller version, 18–18
extended I/O configuration, 18–8
fault override bit, 18–7
input filter settings, 18–12, 18–14, 18–15,
18–16
lock program function, 18–17
program name, 18–2
run always bit, 18–5
start-up protection, 18–6
STI enabled bit, 18–10
STI setpoint, 18–9
user and master passwords, 18–2
watchdog scan, 18–11
connecting blocks of logic
using ANB, 6–14, 8–12, 16–2
using ORB, 6–14, 8–12, 16–3
connecting the system
AIC+, 3–6
DeviceNet network, 3–13
DH-485 network, 3–3
HHP, 3–1
contact protection methods, 1–7
contacting Allen-Bradley for assistance, P–6
contactors (bulletin 100), surge suppressors
for, 1–9
contents of manual, P–2
continuous scan (CSN) mode, 18–22
control file (R), 6–4
controller
accessories and replacement parts, A–11
changing modes, 18–21
changing the baud rate, 19–6, 19–7
determining faults, 20–1
dimensions, A–7
fault messages, 20–13
features, 1–2
grounding, 2–1
installation, 1–1
mounting, 1–12
I–11
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
mounting template, A–7
operating cycle, 6–2
spacing, 1–12
specifications, A–1
status file, B–1
troubleshooting, 20–1
types, 1–2, A–1
16 I/O, 1–2
20 discrete I/O and 5 analog I/O, 1–2
32 I/O, 1–2
wiring
for high-speed counter applications,
2–23
recommendations, 2–3
wire type, 2–3
controller faults, 20–1
controller modes
changing remote modes, 18–23
modes of operation, 18–22
tasks you can perform, 18–24
types of modes, 18–22
remote program mode, 18–22
remote run mode, 18–22
remote test mode, 18–22
controller operation, normal, 20–1
controller version, changing the version the
HHP supports, 18–18
Convert from BCD (FRD), 11–3
entering the instruction, 11–3
example 1, 11–4
instruction list program, 11–5
ladder representation, 11–4
example 2, 11–5
instruction list program, 11–6
ladder representation, 11–6
execution times, 11–3
function code, 11–4
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 11–3
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–3
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
Convert to BCD (TOD), 11–2
changes to the math register, 11–3
entering the instruction, 11–2
execution times, 11–2
function code, 11–3
instruction parameters, C–10
ladder representation, 11–2
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–2
valid addressing modes, C–10
valid file types, C–10
Converting Analog Input Data, 7–4
I–12
Converting Analog Output Data, 7–5
COP, Copy File, 11–10
Copy File (COP), 11–10
entering parameters, 11–10
entering the instruction, 11–11
execution times, 11–10
function code, 11–11
instruction parameters, C–3
ladder representation, 11–10
using, 11–10
valid addressing modes, C–3
valid file types, C–3
Count Down (CTD), 8–25
entering the instruction, 8–26
execution times, 8–25
function code, 8–26
instruction parameters, C–3
ladder representation, 8–25
using status bits, 8–26
valid addressing modes, C–3
valid file types, C–3
Count Up (CTU), 8–24
entering the instruction, 8–25
execution times, 8–24
function code, 8–25
instruction parameters, C–4
ladder representation, 8–24
using status bits, 8–24
valid addressing modes, C–4
valid file types, C–4
counter file (C), 6–4
counter instructions
Count Down (CTD), 8–25
Count Up (CTU), 8–24
in the paper drilling machine application
example, 9–12
overview, 8–21
addressing structure, 8–23
entering parameters, 8–22
entering the instructions, 8–22
how counters work, 8–24
Reset (RES), 8–27
CTD, Count Down, 8–25
CTU, Count Up, 8–24
D
data files
addressing, 6–7
organization, 6–4
types, 6–7
file indicator (#), 6–10
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
data handling instructions
about, 11–2
Convert from BCD (FRD), 11–3
Convert to BCD (TOD), 11–2
Copy File (COP), 11–10
Decode 4 to 1 of 16 (DCD), 11–7
Encode 1 of 16 to 4 (ENC), 11–8
FIFO and LIFO instructions, overview,
11–23
Fill File (FLL), 11–10
in the paper drilling machine application
example, 11–31
move and logical instructions, overview,
11–13
data monitor
description, 4–13
entering, 18–26
how to complete tasks, 4–14
screen definition, 4–13
data table status file displays, 18–28
bit, 18–29
control, 18–29
counter, 18–29
input, 18–28
integer, 18–30
output, 18–28
status, 18–28
timer, 18–29
DF1 full-duplex protocol
configuration parameters, D–2
description, D–2
example system configuration, D–3
using a modem, D–7
DF1 half-duplex slave protocol, D–4
configuration parameters, D–5
using a modem, D–7
DH–485 communication protocol,
configuration parameters, D–10
DH-485 network
connecting, 3–3
description, D–9
devices that use the network, D–10
example system configuration, D–14
initialization, D–10
installation, 3–3
planning considerations, D–12
protocol, D–9
software considerations, D–13
token rotation, D–9
diagnostic/troubleshooting keys, identifying,
4–4
dimensions
controller, A–7
HHP, A–9
DCD, Decode 4 to 1 of 16, 11–7
DIN rail, 1–13
mounting dimensions, 1–13
DDV, Double Divide, 10–10
diode, 1N4004, 1–8
Decode 4 to 1 of 16 (DCD), 11–7
entering parameters, 11–7
entering the instruction, 11–7
execution times, 11–7
function code, 11–8
instruction parameters, C–4
ladder representative, 11–7
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–7
valid addressing modes, C–4
valid file types, C–4
direct addressing, C–2
default settings, HHP’s, 4–17
deleting
a range of rungs, 17–7
a single rung, 17–6
an instruction, 17–6
multi-point addresses, 18–34
determining controller faults, 20–2
developing your logic program–a model, 6–17
DeviceNet network
connecting, 3–13
selecting cable, 3–14
displaying values, 6–10
DIV, Divide, 10–9
Divide (DIV), 10–9
changes to the math register, 10–9
entering the instruction, 10–9
execution times, 10–9
function code, 10–9
instruction parameters, C–4
ladder representation, 10–9
updates to arithmetic status bits, 10–9
valid addressing modes, C–4
valid file types, C–4
Double Divide (DDV), 10–10
changes to the math register, 10–10
entering the instruction, 10–10
execution times, 10–10
function code, 10–10
instruction parameters, C–4
ladder representative, 10–10
updates to arithmetic status bits, 10–10
I–13
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
valid addressing modes, C–4
valid file types, C–4
E
editing
accepting edits, 18–21
modes, 17–3
append, 17–3
overwrite, 17–4
searching for specific addresses, 17–8
your program, 17–1
editing considerations, 17–3
Electronics Industries Association (EIA), D–1
EMC Directive, 1–1
emergency-stop switches, 1–4
ENC, Encode 1 of 16 to 4, 11–8
Encode 1 of 16 to 4 (ENC), 11–8
entering parameters, 11–8
entering the instruction, 11–9
execution times, 11–8
function code, 11–9
instruction parameters, C–4
ladder representation, 11–8
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–9
valid addressing modes, C–4
valid file types, C–4
End of File screen, 17–2
entering
and running a program, 5–4
changing to run mode, 5–7
entering the new program, 5–4
data monitor, 18–26
numeric constants, 6–10
program monitor, 17–1, 18–25
the # character, 6–9
EQU, Equal, 9–3
Equal (EQU), 9–3
AND EQU
entering the instruction, 9–3
execution times, 9–3
function code, 9–3
instruction parameters, C–4
ladder representation, 9–3
valid addressing modes, C–4
valid file types, C–4
LD EQU
entering the instruction, 9–3
execution times, 9–3
function code, 9–3
instruction parameters, C–4
I–14
ladder representation, 9–3
valid addressing modes, C–4
valid file types, C–4
OR EQU
entering the instruction, 9–3
execution times, 9–3
function code, 9–3
instruction parameters, C–4
ladder representation, 9–3
valid addressing modes, C–4
valid file types, C–4
error recovery model, 20–10
errors
download, B–10
going-to-run, B–9
hardware, 20–2
HHP
communication, 20–4
hardware, 20–3
identifying, 20–3
miscellaneous, 20–5
program verification, 20–5
identifying, 20–11
MSG instruction, 15–11
powerup, B–9
run, B–10
establishing communication, 3–12, 19–7
European Union Directive compliance, 1–1
example programs
adjustable timer, E–55
bottle line, E–29
event driven sequencer, E–27
on/off circuit, E–47
paper drilling machine, E–2
pick and place machine, E–34
RPM calculation, E–40
spray booth, E–49
time driven sequencer, E–25
using the MSG instruction, 15–12
Exclusive Or (XOR), 11–20
entering the instruction, 11–20
execution times, 11–20
function code, 11–20
instruction parameters, C–10
ladder representation, 11–20
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–20
valid addressing modes, C–10
valid file types, C–10
executing the ladder program, changing to
Run mode, 5–7
execution times
listing, B–16
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
worksheet, B–21
extended I/O configuration bit, setting, 18–8
F
fault messages, 20–13
fault override bit, setting, 18–7
fault recovery procedure, 20–11, 20–12
fault routine, 20–12
FFL, FIFO Load, 11–25
FFU, FIFO Unload, 11–25
FIFO and LIFO instructions
FIFO Load (FFL), 11–25
FIFO Unload (FFU), 11–25
LIFO Load (LFL), 11–28
LIFO Unload (LFU), 11–28
overview, 11–23
effects on index register S24, 11–24
entering parameters, 11–23
entering the instructions, 11–24
FIFO Load (FFL), 11–25
entering the instruction, 11–25
execution times, 11–25
function code, 11–25
instruction parameters, C–4
ladder representation, 11–25, 11–28
operation, 11–26
valid addressing modes, C–4
valid file types, C–4
FIFO Unload (FFU), 11–25
entering the instruction, 11–26
execution times, 11–25
function code, 11–26
instruction parameters, C–4
ladder representation, 11–25, 11–28
operation, 11–26
valid addressing modes, C–4
valid file types, C–4
file indicator (#), 6–10
file organization
compared to the programming software’s
file organization, 6–3
data files, 6–4
program, 6–3
program files, 6–4
file types, C–1, F–1
Fill File (FLL), 11–10
entering parameters, 11–12
entering the instruction, 11–12
execution times, 11–10
function code, 11–13
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 11–10
using, 11–12
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
First Instruction on Rung screen, 17–2
FLL, Fill File, 11–10
forcing inputs and outputs, 18–35
forcing external input data file bits, 18–35
guide to forcing, 18–37
forcing external output circuits, 18–38
guide to forcing, 18–39
FRD, Convert from BCD, 11–3
function codes, listing, B–13
functional areas, HHP, 4–7
data monitor, 4–13
home, 4–7
menu, 4–8
mode, 4–10
multi-point function, 4–15
program monitor, 4–11
G
general editing keys, identifying, 4–4
general specifications, A–2
controller, A–2
HHP, A–9
GEQ, Greater Than or Equal, 9–8
getting started, 5–1
entering and running the program, 5–4
monitoring operation, 5–9
preparing to enter a new program, 5–2
what to do first, 5–1
what to do next, 5–12
Greater Than (GRT), 9–7
AND GRT
entering the instruction, 9–7
execution times, 9–7
function code, 9–7
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 9–7
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
LD GRT
entering the instruction, 9–7
execution times, 9–7
function code, 9–7
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 9–7
valid addressing modes, C–5
I–15
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
valid file types, C–5
OR GRT
entering the instruction, 9–7
execution times, 9–7
function code, 9–7
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 9–7
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
Greater Than or Equal (GEQ), 9–8
AND GEQ
entering the instruction, 9–8
execution times, 9–8
function code, 9–8
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 9–8
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
LD GEQ
entering the instruction, 9–8
execution times, 9–8
function code, 9–8
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 9–8
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
OR GEQ
entering the instruction, 9–8
execution times, 9–8
function code, 9–8
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 9–8
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
grounding the controller, 2–1
grounding your analog cable, 2–20
GRT, Greater Than, 9–7
guide to forcing
external input data file bits, 18–37
external output circuits, 18–39
H
hardware, features, 1–2
heat protection, 1–12
HHP
about, 4–1
accessories and replacement parts, A–11
changing defaults, 4–17
language, 4–17
LCD display contrast, 4–18
connecting, 3–1
I–16
dimensions, A–9
features, 4–2
functional areas, 4–7
identifying errors, 20–3
keys you use, 4–4
accessing additional characters, 4–5
context sensitivity, 4–4
power-up sequence, 4–6
programming examples, 16–1
specifications, A–9
High-Speed Counter (HSC), 14–4
entering parameters, 14–4
entering the instruction, 14–6
execution times, 14–4
function code, 14–6
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 14–4
types of, 14–5
bidirectional counter, 14–9
bidirectional counter with reset and hold,
14–9
bidirectional counter with reset and hold
with a quadrature encoder, 14–12
up counter, 14–7
up counter with reset and hold, 14–7
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
what happens when going to RRUN,
14–23
high-speed counter instructions
about, 14–1
High-Speed Counter (HSC), 14–4
High-Speed Counter Interrupt Disable
(HSD), 14–21
High-Speed Counter Interrupt Enable
(HSE), 14–21
High-Speed Counter Load (HSL), 14–15
High-Speed Counter Reset (RES), 14–19
High-Speed Counter Reset Accumulator
(RAC), 14–20
in the paper drilling machine application
example, 14–28
overview, 14–2
counter data file elements, 14–2
using status bits, 14–2
Update High-Speed Counter Image
Accumulator (OUT), 14–23
High-Speed Counter Interrupt Disable (HSD),
14–21
execution times, 14–21
function code, 14–22
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 14–21
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
using HSD, 14–22
entering the instruction, 14–22
operation, 14–22
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
High-Speed Counter Interrupt Enable (HSE),
14–21
execution times, 14–21
function code, 14–21
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 14–21
using HSE, 14–21
entering the instruction, 14–21
operation, 14–22
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
High-Speed Counter Load (HSL), 14–15
entering parameters, 14–15
entering the instruction, 14–15
execution times, 14–15
function code, 14–16
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 14–15
operation, 14–16
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
High-Speed Counter Reset (RES), 14–19
entering the instruction, 14–19
execution times, 14–19
function code, 14–19
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 14–19
operation, 14–19
valid file types, C–8
High-Speed Counter Reset Accumulator
(RAC), 14–20
ladder representation, 14–20
entering parameters, 14–20
entering the instruction, 14–20
execution times, 14–20
function code, 14–20
instruction parameters, C–8
operation, 14–21
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
high-speed counter, wiring, 14–5
high-speed counter applications, wire the
controller for, 2–23
home
description, 4–7
how to complete tasks, 4–8
screen definition, 4–7
HSC, High-Speed Counter, 14–4
HSD, High-Speed Counter Interrupt Disable,
14–21
HSE, High-Speed Counter Interrupt Enable,
14–21
HSL, High-Speed Counter Load, 14–15
I
identifying controller faults, 20–11
IIM, Immediate Input with Mask, 12–8
Immediate Input with Mask (IIM), 12–8
entering parameters, 12–8
entering the instruction, 12–8
execution times, 12–8
function code, 12–8
instruction parameters, C–5
ladder representation, 12–8
valid addressing modes, C–5
valid file types, C–5
Immediate Output with Mask (IOM), 12–9
entering parameters, 12–9
entering the instruction, 12–9
execution times, 12–9
function code, 12–9
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 12–9
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
indexed addressing, 6–9, C–2
entering the # character, 6–9
example of, 6–9
specifying, 6–9
input branching, 6–13
Input Channel Filtering, 7–3
Input Channel Filters and Update Times, 7–2
input file (I), 6–4
input filter response time, setting, 18–12,
18–14, 18–15, 18–16
input specifications
controller, A–3
HHP, A–9
Input States on Power Down, 1–11
input voltage ranges
1761-L10BWA, 2–8
1761-L10BWB, 2–11
1761-L16AWA, 2–6
1761-L16BBB, 2–15
1761-L16BWA, 2–9
1761-L16BWB, 2–12
1761-L20AWA-5A, 2–17
I–17
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
1761-L20BWA-5A, 2–18
1761-L20BWB-5A, 2–19
1761-L32AAA, 2–14
1761-L32AWA, 2–7
1761-L32BBB, 2–16
1761-L32BWA, 2–10
1761-L32BWB, 2–13
analog controllers, 2–22
entering the instruction, 12–2
execution times, 12–2
function code, 12–2
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 12–2
using, 12–2
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
installing
the memory module, 4–3
the micro controller, 1–1
Jump to Subroutine (JSR), 12–3
entering the instruction, 12–4
execution times, 12–3
function code, 12–4
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 12–3
nesting subroutine files, 12–4
using, 12–4
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
instruction execution times
listing, B–16
worksheet, B–21
instruction function codes, listing, B–13
instruction keys, identifying, 4–4
instruction list programming
applying to schematics, 6–16
description, 6–15
examples, 16–1
input rungs, 16–1
output rungs, 16–4
optimized instruction list, 16–1
programming considerations, 16–8
instruction memory usage
listing, B–16
worksheet, B–21
INT, Interrupt Subroutine, 13–19
integer file (N), 6–4
interrupt latency, B–20
STI, 13–15
user, B–20
K
keys
accessing additional characters, 4–5
context sensitivity, 4–4
diagnostic/troubleshooting keys, 4–4
general editing keys, 4–4
instruction keys, 4–4
navigation keys, 4–4
short-cut keys
for monitoring data table files, 18–27
for monitoring program files, 18–26
for selecting the language, 4–18
keys you use, HHP, 4–4
interrupt priorities, 13–16
Interrupt Subroutine (INT), 13–19
entering the instruction, 13–19
execution times, 13–19
function code, 13–19
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 13–19
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
IOM, Immediate Output with Mask, 12–9
isolated link coupler, installing, 3–3
L
Label (LBL), 12–2
entering parameters, 12–2
entering the instruction, 12–3
execution times, 12–2
function code, 12–3
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 12–2
using, 12–2
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
LBL, Label, 12–2
J
I–18
LCD display, changing the contrast, 4–18
JMP, Jump, 12–2
LD, Load, 8–3
JSR, Jump to Subroutine, 12–3
LDI, Load Inverted, 8–4
Jump (JMP), 12–2
entering parameters, 12–2
LDT, Load True, 8–6
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
LEDs, 20–1
error with controller, 20–2
normal controller operation, 20–1
LFL, LIFO Load, 11–28
LEQ, Less Than or Equal, 9–6
LFU, LIFO Unload, 11–28
LES, Less Than, 9–5
LIFO Load (LFL), 11–28
entering the instruction, 11–28
execution times, 11–28
function code, 11–28
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 11–29
operation, 11–29
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
Less Than (LES), 9–5
AND LES
entering the instruction, 9–5
execution times, 9–5
function code, 9–5
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 9–5
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
LD LES
entering the instruction, 9–5
execution times, 9–5
function code, 9–5
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 9–5
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
OR LES
entering the instruction, 9–5
execution times, 9–5
function code, 9–5
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 9–5
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
Less Than or Equal (LEQ), 9–6
AND LEQ
entering the instruction, 9–6
execution times, 9–6
function code, 9–6
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 9–6
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
LD LEQ
entering the instruction, 9–6
execution times, 9–6
function code, 9–6
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 9–6
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
OR LEQ
entering the instruction, 9–6
execution times, 9–6
function code, 9–6
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 9–6
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
LIFO Unload (LFU), 11–28
entering the instruction, 11–28
execution times, 11–28
function code, 11–29
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 11–29
operation, 11–29
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
LIM, Limit Test, 9–10
Limit Test (LIM), 9–10
AND LIM
entering parameters, 9–10
entering the instruction, 9–10
execution times, 9–10
function code, 9–10
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 9–10
valid addressing modes, C–7
valid file types, C–7
LD LIM
entering parameters, 9–10
entering the instruction, 9–10
execution times, 9–10
function code, 9–10
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 9–10
valid addressing modes, C–7
valid file types, C–7
OR LIM
entering parameters, 9–10
entering the instruction, 9–10
execution times, 9–10
function code, 9–10
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 9–10
valid addressing modes, C–7
valid file types, C–7
I–19
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
Load (LD), 8–3
entering the instruction, 8–3
execution times, 8–3
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 8–3
using, 8–3
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
Load Inverted (LDI), 8–4
entering the instruction, 8–5
execution times, 8–4
instruction parameters, C–6
ladder representation, 8–4
using, 8–5
valid addressing modes, C–6
valid file types, C–6
Load True (LDT), 8–6
entering the instruction, 8–6
execution times, 8–6
function code, 8–6
ladder representation, 8–6
using, 8–6
loading programs from a memory module,
19–2
lock program function, 18–17
setting, 18–17
logical addresses, using mnemonics to
specify, 6–8
Low Voltage Directive, 1–1
valid file types, C–7
OR MEQ
entering parameters, 9–9
entering the instruction, 9–9
execution times, 9–9
function code, 9–9
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 9–9
valid addressing modes, C–7
valid file types, C–7
Masked Move (MVM), 11–16
entering parameters, 11–16
entering the instruction, 11–16
execution times, 11–16
function code, 11–16
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 11–16
operation, 11–17
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–16
valid addressing modes, C–7
valid file types, C–7
Master Control Relay, 1–3
Master Control Reset (MCR), 12–6
entering the instruction, 12–6
execution times, 12–6
function code, 12–6
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 12–6
valid addressing modes, C–7
valid file types, C–7
master password, 18–2
M
machine control, principles of, 6–1
manuals, related, P–5
Masked Comparison for Equal (MEQ), 9–9
AND MEQ
entering parameters, 9–9
entering the instruction, 9–9
execution times, 9–9
function code, 9–9
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 9–9
valid addressing modes, C–7
valid file types, C–7
LD MEQ
entering parameters, 9–9
entering the instruction, 9–9
execution times, 9–9
function code, 9–9
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 9–9
valid addressing modes, C–7
I–20
master/sender communication, 15–1
math instructions
32-bit addition and subtraction, 10–6
about, 10–1
Add (ADD), 10–4
Clear (CLR), 10–11
Divide (DIV), 10–9
Double Divide (DDV), 10–10
in the paper drilling machine application
example, 10–15
Multiply (MUL), 10–8
overview, 10–2
changes to the math register, S13 and
S14, 10–3
entering the instructions, 10–2
overflow trap bit, S5/0, 10–2
updates to arithmetic status bits, 10–2
using indexed word addresses, 10–2
Scale Data (SCL), 10–12
Square Root (SQR), 10–11
Subtract (SUB), 10–5
using arithmetic status bits, 11–9
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
MCR, Master Control Reset, 12–6
memory module
clearing programs, 19–5
installation, 4–3
loading programs, 19–2
storing programs, 19–3
using, 19–1
Memory Pop (MPP), 8–10
entering the instruction, 8–12
execution times, 8–10
function code, 8–12
ladder representation, 8–10
using, 8–11
Memory Push (MPS), 8–10
entering the instruction, 8–10
execution times, 8–10
function code, 8–10
ladder representation, 8–10
using, 8–10
Memory Read (MRD), 8–10
entering the instruction, 8–11
execution times, 8–10
function code, 8–11
ladder representation, 8–10
using, 8–11
memory usage
listing, B–16
worksheet, B–21
menu
description, 4–8
how to complete tasks, 4–9
screen definition, 4–9
MEQ, Masked Comparison for Equal, 9–9
Message (MSG), 15–1
application examples, 15–12
control block layout, 15–3
entering parameters, 15–2
entering the instruction, 15–6
error codes, 15–11
execution times, 15–2
function code, 15–7
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 15–2
timing diagram, 15–9
using status bits, 15–4
valid addressing modes, C–7
valid file types, C–7
mnemonics, using
in instruction list programming, 6–15
in logical addresses, 6–8
mode
changing editing modes, 17–3
changing remote controller modes, 18–23
description, 4–10
how to complete tasks, 4–11
screen definition, 4–10
model for developing a logic program, 6–17
modems
dial-up phone , D–7
leased-line, D–8
line drivers, D–8
radio, D–8
using with MicroLogix controllers, D–7
modes of operation, 18–22
monitoring
data table files, 18–26
changing the radix, 18–30
operation, 5–9
fault recovery procedure, 20–11
of the controller, 18–25
of the data, 5–10
of the program, 5–9
program files, 18–25
motor starters (bulletin 509), surge
suppressors, 1–9
motor starters (bulletin 709), surge
suppressors, 1–9
mounting template, controller, A–7
mounting the controller
using a DIN rail, 1–13
using mounting screws, 1–14
MOV, Move, 11–15
Move (MOV), 11–15
entering parameters, 11–15
entering the instruction, 11–15
execution times, 11–15
function code, 11–15
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 11–15
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–15
valid addressing modes, C–7
valid file types, C–7
move and logical instructions
And (AND), 11–18
Exclusive Or (XOR), 11–20
Masked Move (MVM), 11–16
Move (MOV), 11–15
Negate (NEG), 11–22
Not (NOT), 11–21
Or (OR), 11–19
overview, 11–13
changes to the math register, S13 and
S14, 11–14
I–21
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
entering parameters, 11–13
entering the instructions, 11–13
overflow trap bit, S5/0, 11–14
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–14
using indexed word addresses, 11–14
MPP, Memory Pop, 8–10
MPS, Memory Push, 8–10
MRD, Memory Read, 8–10
MSG, Message, 15–1
MUL, Multiply, 10–8
multi-point function
description, 4–15
how to complete tasks, 4–16
screen definition, 4–15
using, 18–31
automatically entering addresses, 18–32
changing multi-point addresses, 18–33
manually entering addresses, 18–31
removing multi-point addresses, 18–34
Multiply (MUL), 10–8
changes to the math register, 10–8
entering the instruction, 10–8
execution times, 10–8
function code, 10–8
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 10–8
updates to arithmetic status bits, 10–8
valid addressing modes, C–7
valid file types, C–7
MVM, Masked Move, 11–16
execution times, 11–21
function code, 11–21
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 11–21
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–21
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
Not Equal (NEQ), 9–4
AND NEQ
entering the instruction, 9–4
execution times, 9–4
function code, 9–4
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 9–4
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
LD NEQ
entering the instruction, 9–4
execution times, 9–4
function code, 9–4
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 9–4
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
OR NEQ
entering the instruction, 9–4
execution times, 9–4
function code, 9–4
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 9–4
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
NOT, Not, 11–21
N
navigation keys, identifying, 4–4
number systems, 6–10
radixes used, 6–10
numeric constants, 6–10
NEG, Negate, 11–22
Negate (NEG), 11–22
entering the instruction, 11–22
execution times, 11–22
function code, 11–22
instruction parameters, C–7
ladder representation, 11–22
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–22
valid addressing modes, C–7
valid file types, C–7
NEQ, Not Equal, 9–4
nested branching, 6–14
new rung, starting, 17–2
node address (S:15L), B–11
Not (NOT), 11–21
entering the instruction, 11–21
I–22
O
One-Shot Rising (OSR), 8–7
AND OSR
entering parameters, 8–7
entering the instruction, 8–7
execution times, 8–7
function code, 8–7
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 8–7
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
ladder representation, 8–7
LD OSR
entering parameters, 8–7
entering the instruction, 8–7
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
execution times, 8–7
function code, 8–7
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 8–7
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
operating cycle, controller’s, 6–2
Or (OR)
bit input instruction, 8–3
entering the instruction, 8–4
execution times, 8–3
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 8–3
using, 8–4
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
word output instruction, 11–19
entering the instruction, 11–19
execution times, 11–19
function code, 11–19
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 11–19
updates to arithmetic status bits, 11–19
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
Or Block (ORB), 8–12
entering the instruction, 8–13
execution times, 8–12
ladder representation, 8–12
using, 8–13
Or Inverted (ORI), 8–4
entering the instruction, 8–5
execution times, 8–4
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 8–4
using, 8–5
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
Or True (ORT), 8–6
entering the instruction, 8–6
execution times, 8–6
function code, 8–6
ladder representation, 8–6
using, 8–6
OR, Or
bit input instruction, 8–3
word output instruction, 11–19
ORB, Or Block, 8–12
ORI, Or Inverted, 8–4
OSR, One-Shot Rising, 8–7
OUT, Output, 8–8
OUT, Update High-Speed Counter Image
Accumulator, 14–23
Output (OUT), 8–8
entering the instruction, 8–8
execution times, 8–8
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 8–8
update high-speed counter image
accumulator, 14–23
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
output branching, 6–13
output contact protection, selecting, 1–7
output file (O), 6–4
output specifications, controller, A–4
output voltage ranges
1761-L10BWA, 2–8
1761-L10BWB, 2–11
1761-L16AWA, 2–6
1761-L16BBB, 2–15
1761-L16BWA, 2–9
1761-L16BWB, 2–12
1761-L20AWA-5A, 2–17
1761-L20BWA-5A, 2–18
1761-L20BWB-5A, 2–19
1761-L32AAA, 2–14
1761-L32AWA, 2–7
1761-L32BBB, 2–16
1761-L32BWA, 2–10
1761-L32BWB, 2–13
analog controllers, 2–22
overflow trap bit, S5/0, 10–2
overview
bit instructions, 8–3
branch instructions, 8–9
comparison instructions, 9–2
counter instructions, 8–21
FIFO and LIFO instructions, 11–23
high-speed counter instructions, 14–2
math instructions, 10–2
move and logical instructions, 11–13
Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) function,
13–15
timer instructions, 8–14
overwrite mode, 17–4
overwriting an instruction, 17–5
ORT, Or True, 8–6
I–23
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
overwriting an instruction’s parameters,
17–4
ownership timeout, D–6
P
parallel logic (OR), 6–12
parts, replacement, A–11
password
master password, 18–2
password override, 18–3
user password, 18–2
placing the controller in program mode, 5–2
planning considerations for a network, D–12
Power Considerations
Input States on Power Down, 1–11
Isolation Transformers, 1–10
Loss of Power Source, 1–11
other line conditions, 1–11
overview, 1–10
Power Distribution, 1–10
power-up sequence, 4–6
preparing to enter a new program, 5–2
clearing the current program, 5–2
placing the controller in program mode,
5–2
preventing excessive heat, 1–12
principles of machine control, 6–1
program
changing the configuration defaults, 18–1
clearing
from a memory module, 19–5
from the micro controller, 5–2, 19–6
organization of, 6–3
data files, 6–4
program files, 6–4
preparing to enter a new program, 5–2
retrieving from a memory module, 19–2
storing and accessing
normal operation, 6–6
power down, 6–6
power up, 6–7
saving, 6–5
storing to a memory module, 19–3
program files, organization, 6–4
program flow control instructions
about, 12–1
Immediate Input with Mask (IIM), 12–8
Immediate Output with Mask (IOM), 12–9
in the paper drilling machine application
example, 12–10
Jump (JMP), 12–2
Jump to Subroutine (JSR), 12–3
Label (LBL), 12–2
Master Control Reset (MCR), 12–6
Return (RET), 12–3
Subroutine (SBR), 12–3
Suspend (SUS), 12–7
Temporary End (TND), 12–7
program logic
applying to your schematics, 6–11
instruction list programming, 6–16
ladder logic, 6–16
developing your logic program, 6–17
instruction list, 6–15
ladder logic basics
connecting blocks of logic, 6–14
input branching, 6–13
nested branching, 6–14
output branching, 6–13
parallel connections, 6–12
series connections, 6–12
program mode, changing to, 5–2
program monitor
description, 4–11
entering, 17–1
how to complete tasks, 4–12
screen definitions, 17–1
End of File screen, 17–2
First Instruction on Rung screen, 17–2
Start of File screen, 17–1
Start of Rung screen, 17–2
typical bit instruction screen, 4–11
program name, entering, 18–2
programming, considerations, 16–8
programming device, features, 4–2
programming overview, 6–1
protection methods for contacts, 1–7
publications, related, P–5
program constants, 6–10
program defaults, 18–1
program development model, 6–17
program faults, determining, 20–1, 20–5
I–24
Q
quadrature encoder input, 14–12
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
R
RAC, High-Speed Counter Reset
Accumulator, 14–20
radix, changing, 18–30
RC network, example, 1–8
recovering your work, 20–16
related publications, P–5
relay contact rating table, A–4
relays, surge suppressors for, 1–9
Retentive Timer (RTO), 8–20
entering the instruction, 8–20
execution times, 8–20
function code, 8–20
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 8–20
using status bits, 8–20
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
retrieving programs from a memory module,
19–2
RES, High-Speed Counter Reset, 14–19
Return (RET), 12–3
entering the instruction, 12–5
execution times, 12–3
function code, 12–5
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 12–3
nesting subroutine files, 12–4
using, 12–5
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
RES, Reset, 8–27
RS-232 communication interface, D–1
Reset (RES)
high-speed counter reset, 14–19
entering the instruction, 14–19
execution times, 14–19
function code, 14–19
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 14–19
operation, 14–19
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
timer/counter reset, 8–27
entering the instruction, 8–27
execution times, 8–27
function code, 8–27
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 8–27
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
RST, Reset, 8–8
remote modes
program mode, 18–22
run mode, 18–22
test mode, 18–22
remote packet support, D–17
removing a program from a memory module,
19–5
replacement parts and accessories, A–11
Reset (RST), 8–8
entering the instruction, 8–9
execution times, 8–8
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 8–8
using, 8–9
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
resetting the high-speed counter accumulator,
14–19
response times, A–6
RET, Return, 12–3
RTO, Retentive Timer, 8–20
run always bit, setting, 18–5
S
Safety Considerations
Disconnecting Main Power, 1–9
overview, 1–9
Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay
Circuit, 1–10
Power Distribution, 1–10
Safety Circuits, 1–10
SBR, Subroutine, 12–3
Scale Data (SCL), 10–12
application example, 10–14
entering parameters, 10–12
entering the instruction, 10–13
execution times, 10–12
function code, 10–13
instruction parameters, C–9
ladder representative, 10–12, 10–14
updates to arithmetic status bits, 10–13
valid addressing modes, C–9
valid file types, C–9
SCL, Scale Data, 10–12
screen definitions
data monitor, 4–13
End of File, 17–2
I–25
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
First Instruction on Rung, 17–2
home, 4–7
menu, 4–9
mode, 4–10
multi-point function, 4–15
program monitor, 4–11
Start of File, 17–1
Start of Rung, 17–2
searching for specific addresses, 17–8
addresses that are displayed, 17–8
addresses you enter, 17–8
bit versus word addresses, 17–9
Selectable Timed Disable (STD), 13–17
entering the instruction, 13–17
example, 13–17
execution times, 13–17
function code, 13–17
instruction parameters, C–9
ladder representation, 13–17
using, 13–17
valid addressing modes, C–9
valid file types, C–9
Selectable Timed Enable (STE), 13–17
entering the instruction, 13–17
example, 13–17
execution times, 13–17
function code, 13–17
instruction parameters, C–9
ladder representation, 13–17
using, 13–17
valid addressing modes, C–9
valid file types, C–9
Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) function
basic programming procedure, 13–15
Interrupt Subroutine (INT), 13–19
operation, 13–15
interrupt latency and interrupt
occurrences, 13–16
interrupt priorities, 13–16
status file data saved, 13–16
subroutine content, 13–15
overview, 13–15
Selectable Timed Disable (STD), 13–17
Selectable Timed Enable (STE), 13–17
Selectable Timed Start (STS), 13–18
STD/STE zone example, 13–17
Selectable Timed Start (STS), 13–18
entering the instruction, 13–19
execution times, 13–18
function code, 13–19
instruction parameters, C–10
ladder representative, 13–18
valid addressing modes, C–10
I–26
valid file types, C–10
Selecting Surge Suppressors, 1–7
selecting the language
using short-cut keys, 4–18
using the menu option, 4–17
Sequencer Compare (SQC), 13–6
entering parameters, 13–6
entering the instruction, 13–10
execution times, 13–6
function code, 13–10
instruction parameters, C–9
ladder representation, 13–6
operation, 13–11
using, 13–10
valid addressing modes, C–9
valid file types, C–9
sequencer instructions
overview, 13–6
effects on index register S:24, 13–6
entering the instructions, 13–6
Sequencer Compare (SQC), 13–6
Sequencer Load (SQL), 13–12
Sequencer Output (SQO), 13–6
Sequencer Load (SQL), 13–12
entering parameters, 13–12
entering the instruction, 13–13
execution times, 13–12
function code, 13–13
instruction parameters, C–9
ladder representation, 13–12
operation, 13–14
valid addressing modes, C–9
valid file types, C–9
Sequencer Output (SQO), 13–6
entering parameters, 13–6
entering the instruction, 13–8
execution times, 13–6
function code, 13–8
instruction parameters, C–9
ladder representation, 13–6
operation, 13–9
using, 13–7
valid addressing modes, C–9
valid file types, C–9
series logic (AND), 6–12
Set (SET), 8–8
entering the instruction, 8–9
execution times, 8–8
instruction parameters, C–9
ladder representation, 8–8
using, 8–9
valid addressing modes, C–9
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
valid file types, C–9
to a memory module, 19–3
SET, Set, 8–8
STS, Selectable Timed Start, 13–18
short-cut keys
for monitoring data table files, 18–27
for monitoring program files, 18–26
for selecting the language, 4–18
SUB, Subtract, 10–5
single scan (SSN) mode, 18–22
sinking and sourcing circuits, overview, 2–2
slave/receiver communication, 15–2
spacing the controller, 1–12
specifications
general, A–2
controller, A–2
HHP, A–9
input
controller, A–3
HHP, A–9
output, controller, A–4
response times, A–6
SQC, Sequencer Compare, 13–6
SQL, Sequencer Load, 13–12
SQO, Sequencer Output, 13–6
SQR, Square Root, 10–11
Square Root (SQR), 10–11
entering the instruction, 10–12
execution times, 10–11
function code, 10–12
instruction parameters, C–9
ladder representative, 10–11
updates to arithmetic status bits, 10–11
valid addressing modes, C–9
valid file types, C–9
Start of File screen, 17–1
Start of Rung (SOR) symbol, 17–2
Start of Rung screen, 17–2
start-up protection, setting, 18–6
status file
descriptions, B–2
overview, B–1
status file (S), 6–4
Subroutine (SBR), 12–3
entering the instruction, 12–5
execution times, 12–3
function code, 12–5
instruction parameters, C–8
ladder representation, 12–3
nesting subroutine files, 12–4
using, 12–5
valid addressing modes, C–8
valid file types, C–8
Subtract (SUB), 10–5
entering the instruction, 10–5
execution times, 10–5
function code, 10–5
instruction parameters, C–10
ladder representation, 10–5
updates to arithmetic status bits, 10–5
valid addressing modes, C–10
valid file types, C–10
surge suppressors, 1–7
example, 1–8
for contactor, 1–9
for motor starters, 1–9
for relays, 1–9
recommended, 1–9
SUS, Suspend, 12–7
Suspend (SUS), 12–7
entering parameters, 12–7
entering the instruction, 12–7
execution times, 12–7
function code, 12–7
instruction parameters, C–10
ladder representation, 12–7
valid addressing modes, C–10
valid file types, C–10
system configuration, DH-485 connection
examples, D–14
system connection, 3–1
system considerations, 16–8
STD, Selectable Timed Disable, 13–17
STE, Selectable Timed Enable, 13–17
STI enabled bit, setting, 18–10
STI setpoint, setting, 18–9
storing programs
power down, 6–6
power up, 6–7
saving, 6–5
T
Temporary End (TND), 12–7
entering the instruction, 12–7
execution times, 12–7
function code, 12–7
instruction parameters, C–10
ladder representation, 12–7
I–27
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
valid addressing modes, C–10
valid file types, C–10
test modes, 18–22
continuous scan (CSN), 18–22
single scan (SSN), 18–22
power failure, 20–16
recovering your work, 20–16
understanding the controller LED status,
20–1
using the fault routine, 20–12
timer file (T), 6–4
timer instructions
overview
addressing structure, 8–15
entering parameters, 8–14
entering the instructions, 8–15
Retentive Timer (RTO), 8–20
Timer Off-Delay (TOF), 8–18
Timer On-Delay (TON), 8–16
Timer Off-Delay (TOF), 8–18
entering the instruction, 8–18
execution times, 8–18
function code, 8–18
instruction parameters, C–10
ladder representation, 8–18
using status bits, 8–18
valid addressing modes, C–10
valid file types, C–10
Timer On-Delay (TON), 8–16
entering the instruction, 8–16
execution times, 8–16
function code, 8–16
instruction parameters, C–10
ladder representation, 8–16
using status bits, 8–16
valid addressing modes, C–10
valid file types, C–10
timing diagram, message instruction, 15–9
U
understanding
addressing, 6–7
file organization, 6–3
how programs are stored and accessed,
6–5
ladder logic programs, 6–11
the HHP keys’ context sensitivity, 4–4
up counter
operation, 14–7
overview, 14–5
up counter with reset and hold
operation, 14–7
overview, 14–5
Update High-Speed Counter Image
Accumulator (OUT), 14–23
entering the instruction, 14–23
execution times, 14–23
ladder representation, 14–23
operation, 14–23
updating the high-speed counter accumulator,
14–23
user interrupt latency, B–20
user password, 18–2
using the trace feature, 20–8
TND, Temporary End, 12–7
TOD, Convert to BCD, 11–2
TOF, Timer Off-Delay, 8–18
valid addressing modes, C–2
TON, Timer On-Delay, 8–16
varistors
example, 1–8
recommended, 1–8
trace feature, using, 20–8
tracing specific addresses
addresses that are displayed, 20–9
addresses that you enter, 20–9
bit versus word addresses, 20–9
troubleshooting
automatically clearing faults, 20–12
contacting Allen-Bradley for assistance,
P–6, 20–16
controller error recovery model, 20–10
determining controller faults, 20–1
identifying controller faults, 20–11
keys you use, 4–4
manually clearing faults, 20–11
I–28
V
viewing data table files, 18–28
W
watchdog scan, setting, 18–11
what to do first, 5–1
wire types, 2–3
wiring
analog controllers, 2–17
your controller for high-speed counter
applications, 2–23
Index
MicroLogix 1000 with Hand-Held Programmer
(HHP) User Manual
wiring analog channels, 2–21
wiring diagrams
1761-L10BWA, 2–8
1761-L10BWB, 2–11
1761-L16AWA, 2–6
1761-L16BBB, 2–15
1761-L16BWA, 2–9
1761-L16BWB, 2–12
1761-L20AWA-5A, 2–17
1761-L20BWA-5A, 2–18
1761-L20BWB-5A, 2–19
1761-L32AAA, 2–14
1761-L32AWA, 2–7
1761-L32BBB, 2–16
1761-L32BWA, 2–10
1761-L32BWB, 2–13
wiring recommendations, 2–3
X
XOR, Exclusive Or, 11–20
I–29
Allen-Bradley, a Rockwell Automation Business, has been helping its customers improve
productivity and quality for more than 90 years. We design, manufacture and support a broad
range of automation products worldwide. They include logic processors, power and motion
control devices, operator interfaces, sensors and a variety of software. Rockwell is one of the
world’s leading technology companies.
Worldwide representation.
Argentina • Australia • Austria • Bahrain • Belgium • Brazil • Bulgaria • Canada • Chile • China, PRC • Colombia • Costa Rica • Croatia • Cyprus • Czech Republic • Denmark •
Ecuador • Egypt • El Salvador • Finland • France • Germany • Greece • Guatemala • Honduras • Hong Kong • Hungary • Iceland • India • Indonesia • Ireland • Israel • Italy •
Jamaica • Japan • Jordan • Korea • Kuwait • Lebanon • Malaysia • Mexico • Netherlands • New Zealand • Norway • Pakistan • Peru • Philippines • Poland • Portugal • Puerto
Rico • Qatar • Romania • Russia–CIS • Saudi Arabia • Singapore • Slovakia • Slovenia • South Africa, Republic • Spain • Sweden • Switzerland • Taiwan • Thailand • Turkey •
United Arab Emirates • United Kingdom • United States • Uruguay • Venezuela • Yugoslavia
Allen-Bradley Headquarters, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204 USA, Tel: (1) 414 382-2000 Fax: (1) 414 382-4444
Publication 1761-6.2 – May 1998
Supersedes Publication 1761-6.2 – October 1997
PN40072-003-01(E)
Copyright 1998 Publication
Rockwell International
Corporation
Printed
1761-6.2
– May
1998in USA
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement